CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers: Program Guide

CENTERLINE 2100 Motor
Control Centers
Bulletin 2100
Ejemplo garantia extendida Quote: 25400221, 2100 - CHILE - CCM LV Escondida LTST
Program Guide
About This Publication
The CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Center Program Guide is intended to be a guideline for configuration. All
configurations must be confirmed in PowerControl Builder™ tool.
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation.
Resource Description
CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Selection Provides general information about CENTELINE
Guide, publication 2100-SG003 2100 Motor Control Centers.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Provides general guidelines for installing a
Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1 Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Product Certifications website, rok.auto/ Provides declarations of conformity, certificates,
certifications. and other certification details.
You can view or download publications at rok.auto/literature.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020 2

Table of Contents
Chapter 1
General Information What is New in this Publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Publication Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Footnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Other Resource Publications for CENTERLINE 2100
Motor Control Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CENTERLINE 2100 MCC Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Service and Storage Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
UL/C-UL/CSA Marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
ISO 9001 Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
NEMA Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
NEMA Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
NEMA Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
NEMA/IEC Enclosure Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
NEMA Enclosure Type Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Delivery Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Discount Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Seismic Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Intelligent Motor Control Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Type 2 Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Standard Efficiency, High Efficiency, and Special
Motor Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs with IntelliCENTER Technology Support. . 19
General Terms and Conditions of Sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Serial Number and Series Letter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Series Identification for Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Section Nameplate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Unit Label Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Series Identification for Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Series Lettering—Units and Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Circuit Breaker Suffix Letter Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Chapter 2
Vertical Sections and Basic Sections and Structure Features/Modifications
IntelliCENTER Technology (SC-II and PE-II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Basic Sections and Structure Features/Modifications
(SC-II and PE-II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Basic Sections and Structure Features/Modifications
(SC-II and PE-II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center with
IntelliCENTER Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
IntelliCENTER Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Table of Contents
Chapter 3
Safety Technology ArcShield Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
SecureConnect Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Chapter 4
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Chapter 5
Contactor and Starter Units Bulletin 2102L and 2103L Combination Full-Voltage
Lighting Contactor Units (FVLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Bulletin 2106 and 2107 Combination Full Voltage Reversing
Starter Units (FVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Bulletin 2106 and 2107 Space Saving NEMA
Combination Full Voltage Reversing Starter Units (FVR) . . . . . . . . . . 57
Bulletin 2112, 2112 Vacuum, and 2113, 2113 Vacuum
Combination Full Voltage Non-reversing Starter Units (FVNR). . . . 59
Bulletin 2112 and 2113 Space Saving NEMA Combination
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Units (FVNR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Bulletin 2122E, 2123E, 2122F and 2123F
Combination 2-speed Starter Units (TS2W and TS1W) . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Chapter 6
Metering Units Bulletin 2190 - Metering Compartments (METER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Chapter 7
Main and Feeder Units Bulletin 2191F and 2191M Outgoing Feeder Lug Compartment
(FLUG) and Incoming Main Lug Compartment (MLUG) . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Bulletin 2192F and 2192M Feeder and Main Fusible
Disconnect Switch Units (FDS, MFDS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Bulletin 2193F and 2193M Feeder and Main Circuit Breaker
Units (FCB, MCB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Chapter 8
Lighting and Power Panel Bulletin 2193LE Lighting Panel (LPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Units Bulletin 2193PP Panel Board with Main Circuit
Breaker (PPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Chapter 9
Transformer Units Bulletin 2195, 2196, 2197 Control and Lighting
Transformers (XFMR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
4 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020

Table of Contents
Chapter 10
Miscellaneous Units Catalog Number Explanation - Full Section Mounting Plates . . . . . 129
Full Section Blank Mounting Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Tables for Configuring Bulletin 2100D and 2100M Unit
Catalog Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Chapter 11
Factory-Installed Options, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Modifications, Accessories
for Contactors and Starters,
Metering, Mains and Feeders,
Lighting and Power Panels,
Transformer, and
Miscellaneous Units
Chapter 12
for Space Saving NEMA
Starter Units
Chapter 13
Combination Soft Starter Bulletin 2154H and 2155H Soft Starter (SMC) Units - SMC-3. . . . . . . 171
(SMC) Units Bulletin 2154J and 2155J Soft Starter (SMC) Units - SMC Flex. . . . . 176
Chapter 14
for Combination Soft Starter
(SMC) Units
Chapter 15
Variable Frequency AC Motor Bulletin 2162Q and 2163Q with PowerFlex 70 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Drive Units Bulletin 2162R and 2163R with PowerFlex 700 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Bulletin 2162U and 2163U PowerFlex 753 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Bulletin 2162V and 2163V PowerFlex 755 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Bulletin 2162W and 2163W PowerFlex 525 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Bulletin 2162X and 2163X PowerFlex 523 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Table of Contents
Chapter 16
Factory-Installed Options, Space Factor Adders for Line or Load Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
for Combination Variable
Frequency AC Motor Drive
Units
Chapter 17
Programmable Controller Bulletin 2180L, 2182L, 2183L with Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix
Units Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Chapter 18
Factory-Installed Options, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
for Programmable
Controllers
Chapter 19
Configuration Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Chapter 20
Hardware and Kits Section Hardware and Kits for Field Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Bus Kits, Splices, and Bus Isolation Hardware for Field
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Lugs for Field Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Unit Hardware and Kits for Field Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Unit Hardware and Kits for Field Installation, continued. . . . . . . . . 314
Network Hardware and Kits for Field Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Appendix A
Appendix Approximate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Motor Control Center Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Approximate Weights of CENTERLINE Motor Control
Center Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
MCC Finish. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Cross Reference Chart - NEMA/UL to IEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Full-load Currents - Horsepower Rated Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Full-load Currents - kW Rated Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Inverse Time Thermal Magnetic Trip or Electronic Trip
Circuit Breaker Short Circuit Current Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
3-Pole Inverse Time Circuit Breaker Characteristics for
Bulletin 2193F and 2193M Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
UL/C-UL/CSA Short Circuit Ratings for Combination Fusible
Disconnect Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Table of Contents
UL/C-UL/CSA Short Circuit Ratings for Combination Soft

Starter Units (SMCs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
UL/C-UL/CSA Short Circuit Ratings for Combination Variable
Frequency AC Motor Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
UL/C-UL/CSA Short Circuit Ratings for Programmable
Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
kW to Catalog HP Code Conversion for
Bulletins 2106, 2107, 2112, 2113, 2122, and 2123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Recommended Capacitor Sizes 480V and 600V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Horsepower Ratings for Bulletin 2192F, Fusible Disconnect
Feeder Switch (FDS) Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Conductor Size Conversion Chart—
Metric Conductor Size to American Wire Gauge
Conductor Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Metric Conversion Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Fans and Ventilation in Bulletins 2154H, 2154J, 2155H,
and 2155J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Fans and Ventilation in Bulletins 2162Q, 2162R, 2163Q,
2163R, 2162U, 2163U, 2162V, and 2163V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Fans and Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Control Circuit Transformer Rating Chart for Bulletins
2182E, 2182L, 2183E and 2183L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Cable Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Power System Configuration Application Information . . . . . . . . . 346
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Table of Contents
Notes:

Chapter 1
General Information
CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center
with IntelliCENTER Technology
What is New in this Publication

• Expansion of PowerFlex® 750 Series Drives to include Frame size 1
• Redesign of units for use with Bulletin 1494U 30 A disconnects
• Introduction of 140G Maintenance Mode Circuit Breakers for N-frame and R-frame mains
Publication Overview
This publication is a commercial program guide for the configuration of CENTERLINE® 2100 Low Voltage Motor Control Centers
(MCC).

Chapter 1 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers
Footnotes
IMPORTANT While using this publication, please read all footnotes throughout the publication. Footnotes contain necessary information
about the configuration and limitations of sections, units, and options being offered.
Other Resource Publications for CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers

Table 1 - Additional Resources
Publication Title
2100-TD018 Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension
2100-TD019 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers with
DeviceNet® Network
2100-TD031 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers with
EtherNet/IP™ Network
2100-TD032 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
2100-SR003 CENTERLINE 2100 MCC Specification Checklist
2100-SR007 CENTERLINE 2100 MCC Specification Guide, CSI
Format
2100-SR008 DeviceNet® Specification Guide
2100-IN012 CENTERLINE 2100 User Manual
2100-PP022 CENTERLINE 2100 SecureConnect Product Profile
2100-AT003 Power System Configuration Considerations for
Selection of CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs
MCC-UM002 IntelliCENTER Software User Manual
MCC-RM001 IntelliCENTER EtherNet/IP Motor Control Centers
Reference Manual
Contact your Allen-Bradley distributor, Rockwell Automation sales representative, or

visit http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/overview.page.
CENTERLINE 2100 MCC Applications

CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs are suitable for use on 3-phase, 3-wire or 4-wire, wye connected power systems, rated 600V or less, 50
Hz or 60 Hz, which have a solidly grounded neutral. CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs can also be used on other power system
configurations, however, some units and options are not available. See Appendix page 346 for additional information.

CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Chapter 1
Service and Storage Conditions

CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs conform to NEMA standard ICS 1-1993 for service and storage conditions. All MCCs have an ambient
operating temperature range between 0…40 °C (32…104 °F) with up to 95% noncondensing humidity. If the equipment is stored,
the ambient temperature range is -30…+65 °C (-22…+149 °F). In addition, MCCs have an altitude class of 2 km (6600 ft). The
altitude class of 2 km designates equipment for installation where the altitude does not exceed 2000 meters (6600 ft). For
installation above 2000 meters, contact your Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative for derating
requirements.
IMPORTANT MCCs that contain variable-frequency drives units have an altitude class of 1 km (3300 ft). For installation above 1000
meters (3300 ft), contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative for derating
requirements.

UL/C-UL/CSA Marking
CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (file number E49289) as complying with Standard Safety UL
845 (UL) and either listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or certified by Canadian Standards Association (CSA) as complying
with standard C22-2, No. 254-05 (c-UL or CSA). CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs also meet the requirements in Mexican standard for
MCCs, NMX-J-353-ANCE. The MCC product, sections, and units, therefore, carry the respective marking unless otherwise
indicated in the footnotes on the various pages in this publication.
ISO 9001 Certification

The facilities that manufacture CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs are in Richland Center, Wisconsin; Monterrey, Mexico; and Tecate,
Mexico. All facilities have been certified to be in conformance to the requirements of Quality Management System ISO 9001. These
facilities presently are certified by Det Norske Veritas to ISO 9001: 2015, certificate number
CERT-09379-2004-AQ-USA-ANAB, effective May 17, 2019.
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS)

CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs have fulfilled the requirements and are approved by the American Bureau of Shipping (certificate 99-
SB55875-X). CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs do meet ABS shipping requirements, but due to required customization, ABS maritime
shipping is available only on the Engineered program.
NEMA Defined
NEMA—National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
NEMA Class
The following is a description of Class I, as paraphrased from NEMA standard ICS 18-2001: Class I motor control centers shall
consist of mechanical groupings of combination motor control units, feeder tap units, other units, and electrical devices
arranged in a convenient assembly. They include connections from the common horizontal power bus to the units. They do not
include interwiring or interlocking between units or to remotely mounted devices, nor do they include control system
engineering. Only diagrams of the individual units are supplied.
NEMA Class II interwiring offers the addition of interlocking and wiring between units as specifically described in overall control
system diagrams supplied by the purchaser. Contact your Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative
for pricing and availability.

NEMA Type
Class I motor control centers can be provided in NEMA Type A or B construction:
• Type A—User’s power and control connections are made directly to the device within the unit.
• Type B—Terminal blocks are supplied for user’s control termination within unit insert. On NEMA size 1…3 starter units and
30…100 A contactors units, terminal blocks are also supplied for user’s load terminations (NEMA Type BT). NEMA Space
Saving units do not include power terminal blocks (NEMA Type BD).
NEMA/IEC Enclosure Comparison

The following table is a comparison of Allen-Bradley CENTERLINE 2100 MCC NEMA enclosure type numbers to IEC Standard
60529, Classification of Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures. The comparison is based on data from tests that are
conducted on the CENTERLINE 2100 MCC enclosures and the NEMA enclosure type test requirements, which meet or exceed the
IEC enclosure classification designation test requirements.
Table 2 - Degree of Protection Comparison

NEMA Type IEC
Type
NEMA Type 1 vented (with or without gasketed doors) IP20
NEMA Type 1 vented with filters (with or without gasketed doors) IP30
NEMA Type 1 non-vented (without gasketed doors) IP40
NEMA Type 1 with drip hood = NEMA Type 2 (with or without gasketed IP41
doors)
NEMA Type 3R IP44
NEMA Type 12 without bottom plates IP53
NEMA Type 12 with bottom plates IP54
NEMA Type 4 IP65
NEMA Enclosure Type Descriptions

• NEMA Type 1:
Type 1 units and sections are intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection against contact with the
enclosed equipment in locations where unusual service conditions do not exist. The enclosures are designed to meet the
rod entry and rust resistance design tests. The enclosure is sheet steel, treated to resist corrosion.
• NEMA Type 1 with gasketed doors (sometimes referred to as 1G):
Type 1 with gasketed unit doors are completely gasketed around the perimeter of the unit doors. All gasketing is closed
cell neoprene.
• NEMA Type 3R:
Non-walk-in front mounted only. Door-within-a-door construction. Type 3R units and sections are intended for outdoor
use, primarily to provide a degree of protection against falling rain and to avoid damage from the formation of ice on the
enclosure. They are designed to meet rod entry, rain, external icing, and rust resistance design tests. They are not
intended to provide protection against conditions such as dust, internal condensation, or internal icing.

• NEMA Type 4:
Non-walk-in front mounted only. Door-within-a-door construction. Type 4 units and sections are designed for indoor and
outdoor use, primarily to provide protection against windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water.
They are also designed to remain undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure. They are designed to meet
hosedown, external icing, and rod entry design tests. The enclosures are not designed to protect against internal
condensation or internal icing.
• NEMA Type 12:
Type 12 enclosures are intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt and
noncorrosive dripping liquids. They are designed to meet drip, dust, and rust resistance tests. They are not intended to
provide protection against conditions such as internal condensation.
– This publication refers to standard NEMA Type 12 design (standard sheet steel). For stainless steel NEMA Type 12
enclosures, contact your Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.
Delivery Programs
CENTERLINE 2100 MCC products are available on several quick delivery programs and limited to equipment described in this
publication.
• SC and PE:
Products indicating SC or PE delivery provide SC-I and PE-I delivery. When options are added or specified for a section, the
longest lead time determines the time of delivery.
– SC-I:
This program offers stock-supported, individual plug-in units. This program applies to all plug-in units unless they are
labeled SC-II. The SC-I program provides the quickest delivery.
– SC-II:
This program offers stock-supported vertical sections, with factory-installed units for a completely assembled MCC.
Units that are specifically labeled SC-II must be factory-installed and are not for plug-in installation in the field.
– PE-I and PE-II:
Shading indicates equipment that is offered on the PE-I or PE-II program. These programs offer a broad range of pre-
engineered units and sections and a slightly longer lead time than our SC programs. While PE-I units are available for
plug-in installation in the field, units specifically labeled PE-II must be factory-installed.
• Engineered:
Equipment or modifications not available on these delivery programs can be available on the Engineered program. This
program offers the complete line of assembled motor control equipment, custom wired for the customer’s needs.
Additionally, a wide range of special control and bus options are offered, which makes this program our most versatile
delivery program. Contact your Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative for more
information.
Delivery Time is based on the equipment with the longest lead time. Quicker delivery is possible when equipment is separated
and ordered according to the delivery category. For example, if an order has one engineered plug-in unit and the remaining units
and sections are SC-II - order the engineered unit as a separate item. The SC-II units and sections ship on the SC-II delivery
program and only the engineered unit has a longer delivery time.

Delivery Program Indications

Delivery programs are indicated in the right column of the tables. Shaded cells indicate the ENG delivery program.
Table 3 - Delivery Program

Catalog Number Wiring Type B—Class 1 Delivery
NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket Program
2112B-FA_-__ SC
2112BB-GA_-__ PE-II
Discount Schedule
The CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs are on Discount Schedule A6.
Seismic Applications
Actual CENTERLINE 2100 MCC units have been seismically qualified by dynamic (triaxial multi-frequency testing) seismic tests
using ICC–ES AC156 acceptance criterion that covers general equipment and supports the seismic certification of electrical
systems such as MCCs. The testing was conducted in accordance with ICC–ES AC156 criteria and supports data for the following
qualification requirements:
Compliance Documents Compliance Level

2010 American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7-10 SDS = 1.63 g
2012 and 2015 International Building Code (IBC)
2013 California Building Code (CBC)
2012 ICC-ES AC156
Throughout the seismic testing, the MCC units were under power and operated before, during, and after the seismic tests.

To obtain an IBC or UBC seismic withstandability, each individual CENTERLINE 2100 MCC line-up (including those line-ups in
double front applications) must be mounted on an adequate seismic foundation. Installation must be conducted per the
anchoring requirements as indicated in this instruction manual. All columns in the MCC line-up must also be bolted together per
instructions in CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections, publication 2100-IN010.
In the CENTERLINE 2100 MCC line-up, mounting channels are incorporated in the standard design. As an alternative to bolt down
anchoring, these mounting channels can be welded to an adequate seismic foundation. For seismic weld down applications, see
Seismic Requirements in publication 2100-IN012.
Intelligent Motor Control Products

Throughout this publication, you can find units and options that are network ready to use in CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs with
IntelliCENTER® technology. The components that are used in these units are network compatible and ODVA certified. Also, the
installation conforms to the rules and guidelines set by ODVA.
IntelliCENTER technology includes items such as, a power supply unit, built-in network cabling system, and unit cables.
IntelliCENTER technology is UL and c-UL listed and meets the requirements of a Class 1 power limited circuit (in Canada, Class 1
extra-low-voltage power circuit). Per NEC, this circuit is supplied from a source that has a rated output of not more than 30V and
1000VA. The power supply unit has an 8 A, 24V output. The network cabling is rated 8 A, 600V.
See NEC Article 725 for more detailed information.
Type 2 Protection
Short circuit coordination is defined in IEC 60947-4-1.
Type 2 protection (also referred to as Type 2 coordination) is obtainable when the fuses are specified and sized accordingly. Only
Type 1 coordination is available, other than on specified fuses and circuit breaker units.
Standard Efficiency, High Efficiency, and Special Motor Applications

Rockwell Automation makes engineering evaluations for the protective device (circuit breaker or fuse) selection, sizing, and
setting range that is based on the protection rules, requirements, and motor criteria as stipulated in NEC, NEMA, and UL
standards (for example, motor full load currents [FLCs], X/R ratios, lock rotor currents, and nominal utilization voltages). If the
motor application has criteria that deviate from those criteria stated in the previously mentioned standards, higher FLC and/or
motor inrush currents (greater than 1300% of the nominal FLC) can be experienced (for example, special motors, non-standard
NEMA motors, energy-efficient motors, Design E motors, and IEC Type N motors).
To address these cases, consult publication 2100-TD032 (for circuit breaker applications), publication 2100-TD003 (for power
fuse applications), and the NEC for selection guidance. For further assistance or information, contact your local Allen-Bradley
distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.

Documentation
Rockwell Automation offers various low voltage motor control center documentation packages to meet diverse requirements.
This documentation is available in different formats: electronic (through email), CD, and paper. The documentation serves
different needs: product approval, drawings for information, final drawings, and service manuals.
The electrical schematics, equipment list, and other supporting documentation are also included in hard copy with the MCC for
installation. The equipment list includes the motor control center layouts, nameplate data, floor plans, and splicing data. Major
components, such as drives and SMCs, installed in the MCC have hard copy publications that are shipped in the motor control
center.
For assembled motor control centers, the following documentation is supplied:

• Motor control center layout (elevation) and specification (one-line diagrams and schematics)
• NEMA CENTERLINE 2100 Low Voltage Motor Control Center Units and Sections Product Information, publication 2100-
PC001
• Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor Control Centers, publication 2100-IN040
This document is attached to the outside packaging of each shipping split.
• Unit wiring diagram and installation instructions for individual units
Field termination and torquing requirements for units are included on the unit wiring diagrams. This documentation is in a
centralized wiring diagram holder or other location depending on configuration.
Manuals and quick start guides for products such as SMC units, AC drive units, and PLC units can be found online at
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature.

Documentation Packages
The following table describes the optional documentation packages available for low voltage motor control centers. Additional
custom documentation packages can be created to meet most requirements.
Documentation delivered electronically (email or CD) comes as one PDF document that is organized and bookmarked for ease-of-
use. This format is provided regardless of the documentation type.
Documentation is supplied on a per order basis.
Order and Documentation Cycle

This chart indicates typical documentation available upon request. The different documents serve various purposes and are
available at different points in the order cycle. The order cycle follows these steps:
Figure 1 - Order and Documentation Cycle

Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4
Order Entry Approval Release to Order Shipment
Manufacturing
Table 4 - Documentation Available

Package Order Documentation Included Media Catalog
Cycle Number
Step Elevation One Schematic Component Recommended Startup Manuals Quality
Drawings Lines s Data Spare Parts Documentation Certificate
Sheets List (4)
(3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (5)
No-Charge Any •   Email
Email
Standard Step    CD 2100-APP-CD
Approval 2
Documentation Paper 2100-APP-P-
(1) (2) 3
,
Full Submittal Step        CD 2100-SUB-
Documentation 2 CD
for Approval (1),
(2) Paper 2100-SUB-P-
3
As Built/Final (1) Step    CD 2100-FIN-CD
4
Paper 2100-FIN-P-3
Standard Step         CD 2100-OM-CD
Service Manuals 4
/ Operation and Paper 2100-OM-P-3
Maintenance (1)
(1) Item is quantity one. If more are required, change the quantity of the line item in the quote / order.
(2) Includes the cost of two submittal cycles; the initial submittal and one followup resubmittal.
(3) Not included as standard, but can be added by special request at no charge.
(4) Not priced or linked.
(5) Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.
IMPORTANT As Builts/Final Drawings are included in Standard Service Manuals/Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs Support

Email: [email protected]
Phone: 1-440-646-3434
Select Option 3, then enter code 901 for CENTERLINE 2100 MCC support.
CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs with IntelliCENTER Technology Support

Email: [email protected]
Phone: 1-440-646-3434
Select Option 3, then enter code 903 IntelliCENTER Technology support.
General Terms and Conditions of Sale

A copy of the general terms and conditions of sale for CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers can be obtained at
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/legal-notices/terms-of-sale.page?.

Serial Number and Series Letter Information

• From 1980 to 1996, only numbers 600000 to 999999 were used.
• See Series Identification for Sections for the implementation date of series letters on sections and units.
• The serial numbers of sections are on the serial plate on the wireway door, for special width sections, the nameplate is on
the section door. On special width sections, the nameplate is on the section door.
• The serial numbers of units are on the nameplate on the bottom of the units.
• SC-I sections or units have a series letter after the unit or section catalog number.
• In late 1995, some SC, SC-II, and PE orders were entered on PASSPORT.
Table 5 - Serial Number and Series Letter

Year CENTERLINE 2100 Bulletin 2400
Series Units(4)
Factory Order No. Serial Numbers Series
Start End Start End Section Unit
1971 704403 807499 959060 971209 A A None
1972 807500 121409 971210 983266 A A None
1973 121500 346999 983267 996532 A A None
1974 347000 539999 996535 999946 A A None
A128502 A483339
1975 540000 719199 A483344 B677442 A A None
1976 719200 933199 B677452 C933199 A-B A-B None
1977 933200 268699 D933200 D268699 B B None
1978 268700 526199 E268700 E526199 B B None
1979 526200 748699 F526200 F748699 B-C B-C None
1980 748700 898049 G748700 G898049 C C None
1981 898050 661299 H898050 H661299 C-D C-D-E None
1982 661300 804249 J661300 (3) J804249 (3) D-E D-E-F-G None
1983 804250 948440 K804250 K948440 E-F F-G None
1984 948441 693587 L948441 L693587 F F-G-H-J None
1985 693588 849069 M693588 M849069 G H-J None
1986 849070 612263 N849070 N612263 G-H-J H-J-K None
1987 612264 791331 P612264 (3) P791331 (3) J K None
1988 791332 991197 R791332 (3) R991197 (3) J K None
(3) (3)
1989 991198 834534 T991198 T834534 J K None
1990 834535 704948 W834535 (3) W704948 (3) J-K K-M None
1991 704949 995816 X704949 X995816 K M A
1992 995817 732348 Y995817 Y732348 K M A-B-C
1993 732349 773410 Z932349 Z773410 K N A-C
1994 773411 795559 A773411 A795559 K N-P A-C
1995 795560 818971 B795560 B818971 K N-P A-C
1996 818972 824311 C818972 C824311 K-L P-Q A-C
NPR624 QBH320 CNPR624 CQBH320 D
1997 824312 — D824312 — L Q D
QBH321 RPH250 DQBH321 DRPH250
1998 RPH251 TDQ341 ERPH251 ETDQ341 L R D
1999 TDQ342 VZM602 FTDQ342 FVZM602 L R D

Table 5 - Serial Number and Series Letter (continued)

Year CENTERLINE 2100 Bulletin 2400
Series Units(4)
Factory Order No. Serial Numbers Series
Start End Start End Section Unit
2000 VZM603 XWY931 GVZM603 GXWY931 L T D
2001 XWY932 BDPW81 HXWY932 HBDPW81 M U D
2002 BDPW82 CBJD56 JBDPW82 JCBJD56 M U-V D
2003 CBJD57 CYMV52 KCBJD57 KCYMV52 M U-V D
2004 CYNR34 DXSK68 LCYNR34 LDXSK68 M U-V D
2005 DXSK69 FYFW68 MDXSK69 MFYFW68 M X D
2006 FYFW69 GYTT25 NFYFW69 NGYTT25 M X-Y D
2007 GYTT26 JDKT40 PGYTT26 PJDKT40 M X-Y D
2008 JDKT41 KFMV97 RJDKT41 RKFMV97 M X-Y D
2009…Present(1) (2)
(1) Change in Factory Order Number and Serial Number.

(2) For sections and units, Series must be determined from the nameplate.
(3) Prefix letters I, O, Q, S, U, and V are not used.
(4) Bulletin 2400 series units were discontinued.

Series Identification for Sections

Table 6 gives a brief explanation of the series letter changes that have taken place since the original design of the CENTERLINE
2100 Motor Control Center.
Table 6 - Series Identification for Sections

Sections
Series Letter Scope Description of Change Date Implemented in U.S.
(1)
A — Original design February 1971
B (1) All Changed terminal blocks November 1976
C (1) All Elimination of external mounting channels June 1979
(1)
D All Reverse fed 2192 and 2193 April 1981
(1)
E All Redesign gasketing October 1982
F (1) All Modified top horizontal wireway pan to accept units with handle interlock in topmost October 1983
space factor
G (1) 42K 42K bracing—incorporates new bus support and cover January 1985
(1)
G 65K 65K bracing—incorporates new bus support and cover July 1985
(1)
H All New hinge design January 1986
J(1) All Changed handle, operating mechanism, and circuit breaker to Cutler-Hammer Series C, October 1986
150 A, 250 A and 400 A frame
K(1) All Changed to new unit grounding system May 1990
L All Changed to new 600…1200 A circuit breaker operating mechanism May 1996
M All Changed to serpentine DeviceNet cabling system May 2001
N All New design for 100,000 A bus bracing and begin use of Right-hand side sheet with May 2009
integral mounting flanges
P All SecureConnect™ units September 2011
(1) Replacement and renewal parts are no longer supported. Consult MCC Technical Support.
Complete new series units with comparable features and options can be retrofitted into any series of structures as shown in the
table on page 26.

Section Nameplate Data

When communicating with Rockwell Automation about a particular Allen-Bradley motor control center, the catalog number or
serial number and series letter are required to identify the equipment properly. See the CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers User
Manual, publication 2100-IN012, for more information.
Each vertical section has a nameplate that is on the vertical wireway door. On special width sections, the nameplate is on the
section door. Information on the section nameplate includes:)
• Catalog number (serial number)
• Series letter of the section
• Maximum busbar voltage and current rating
• Section location number
Unit Label Data

When communicating with Rockwell Automation about a particular Allen-Bradley motor control center, the catalog number or
serial number and series letter are required to identify the equipment properly. See the CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers User
Manual, publication 2100-IN012, for more information.
Each unit has a unit label that is inside the unit on the bottom plate. Information on the unit nameplate includes:
• Serial number
• Series letter
• Factory order number
• Catalog string number
• Unit location
• System voltage
Unit Label Data for units that are shipped on the SC or PE Delivery Programs
TIP CAT number for units that are supplied on the Engineered Delivery Program have a unique catalog number that is based on
the factory order number. For example, YULDBCN99/1AF (assembled MCCs) or 2100U-LDBCN99/1 (individually ordered units).

Series Identification for Units

This table gives a brief explanation of the series letter changes that have taken place since the original design of the
CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center.
Table 7 - Unit Series

Units
(1)
A — Original design February 1971
B (1) All sizes Changed terminal blocks November 1976
C (1) All sizes Changed handle mechanism to Cutler-Hammer MCPs June 1979
(1)
D Size 5 Changed from ITE to Allen-Bradley 400 A disconnect April 1981
(1)
E All sizes Changed from Bulletin 709 series K starters to Bulletin 500 line starters April 1981
F (1) All sizes Redesign of gasketing, wraparound, and unit support pan for Bulletin 700 line October 1982
G (1) All sizes Redesign of gasketing, wraparound, and unit support pan for Bulletin 500 line October 1982
(1)
H All sizes Changed to new door, CB mechanism, and control station April 1984
(1)
J Size 5 Changed to Bulletin 500 series L October 1984
Size 3 Changed to new PCP 100 A disconnect December 1988
Size 6 Changed to Bulletin 500 series B starters October 1988
(1)
K Size 1…5 CB units and Changed handle, operating mechanism, and circuit breaker to Cutler-Hammer Series October 1986
size 1…2 disc units C, 150 A, 250 A, and 400 A frame
L(1) 21 A through 54 A Changed to Bulletin 100 line contactors in 21 A, 30 A, and 45 A SMC units and original November 1989
design 24 A, 35 A, and 54 A SMC units
M(1) All sizes Changed to new unit grounding system and 600 A, 800 A, and 1200 A bolted pressure May 1990
switch
N(1) All sizes Changed to PCP 200 A and 400 A disconnect, rerated vacuum Bulletin 2112 and 2113 January 1993
and new pilot device offerings
P(1) 0.5 SF CB units 2103L, External auxiliary on circuit breakers April 1994
2113, 2193
Q All sizes and ratings New disconnect external auxiliary contacts and new 600…1200 A circuit breaker May 1996
operating mechanism
R SMC units Redesign and upgrade of ratings for 24…500 A SMC-2 and SMC-PLUS units. Original August 1997
design of SMC Dialog Plus units.
1200 A 2193 Redesign of 1200 A, 2193F and 2193M units November 1997
800 A 2193 Changed circuit breakers to MDL Frame November 1998
225 A 2193F Changed circuit breakers from J Frame to F Frame October 1999
T 2000 A 2193 Changed to Flange Mounted Operating Handle November 2000
All sizes Changed the Bulletin 800MR and Bulletin 800T-PS pilot devices to Bulletin 800Es
All 1.5 space factor units Changed unit bottom plate
U All except 2100-SD1 Changed to new Bulletin 1497 control circuit transformer July 2001
2100-SD1 Changed smoke detector head and base components November 2001

Table 7 - Unit Series (continued)

Units
V 2162Q, 2163Q, 2164Q, Redesign of 240…480V PowerFlex 70 and release of 600V PowerFlex 70 April 2002
2165Q
2162R, 2163R, 2164R, Original release of PowerFlex 700 Beginning July 2002
2165R
2154H, 2155H Original release of SMC-3 Beginning November
2002
2154J, 2155J Original release of SMC Flex Beginning April 2004
2112, sizes 3, 4 and 5 Redesign to reduced space factor with Class J fuse clip April 2004
2162T, 2163T Original release of PowerFlex 40 September 2004
2107, 2113, size 3 Reduced space factor April 2005
X 2162Q, 2163Q Reduced space factor, changed CCT with integral fuses April 2005
All sizes 800F Pilot Devices August 2005
Y 2154J, 2155J, 108 A and Redesign to change units from frame mounted to plug-in design March 2006
135 A
2100-SP Redesign to change from control concepts
IslaGuard to Allen-Bradley Bulletin 4983-DS with 80 KA surge rating
2164Q, 2164R, 2165Q, Redesign for change from SMP overload relay to E1 Plus August 2006
2165R (Drive with manual
bypass)
2107, 2113, NEMA Space Redesign due to starter component series letter change December 2009
Saving Size 2 & 3 units
2162U, 2163U Original release of PowerFlex 753 drives February 2011
2162V, 2163V Original release of PowerFlex 755 drives August 2013
Z 2103L Redesign of units for use with Bulletin 140G circuit breakers February 2014
2107, 2113, 2123 Redesign of units for use with Bulletin 140G and 140MG circuit breakers
2155H, 2155J Redesign of units for use with Bulletin 140G circuit breakers
2163Q, 2163R, 2163T, Redesign of units for use with Bulletin 140G circuit breakers
2163U, 2163V
2183 Redesign of units for use with Bulletin 140G circuit breakers
2193F, 2193M Redesign of units for use with Bulletin 140G circuit breakers
2162W, 2163W Original release of PowerFlex 525 drives September 2014
2162X, 2163X Original release of PowerFlex 523 drives
All starters Original release of E300 overload relay
2193M Introduction of 140G Maintenance Mode Circuit Breakers for N-frame and R-frame November 2017
mains
2162U, 2162V, 2163U, Expansion of PowerFlex 750 Series Drives to include Frame size 1 January 2018
2163V
2102L, 2106, 2112, 2122, Redesign of units for use with Bulletin 1494U 30 A disconnects
2154, 2162, 2182, 2190,
2192F
Complete new series units with comparable features and options can be retrofitted for any series of structures as shown in the
table on page 26.

Series Lettering—Units and Sections

When using sections with units of different series letters, consult the MCC Modifications for Unit and Structure Compatibility
Table 8.
In 1982, modifications were made to improve the integrity of the gasketing between the unit door and structure of NEMA Type 1
with gasket and Type 12 sections. This improvement has been accomplished by gasketing the structure instead of the unit door.
The change applies to all CENTERLINE 2100 units with series letter F and later and all sections series letter E and later. Also, when
series H and later units are installed in a series A through E section in the topmost unit location, a new top horizontal wireway pan
is required.
Table 8 - MCC Modifications for Unit and Structure Compatibility

If Mounted in Plug-in Units No Requires Requires Requires Style Requires Requires Requires Requires
this Type of Additional Style 1 Unit Style 3 Unit 3 Unit Support Alternate Top Door Retrofit Ground
Section (1),(2) Parts Support Pan Support Pan Horizontal Gasketing Kit (7) Bus Kit (8)
Required Pan w/ Bushing Wireway Pan Kit
Space Series — 2100H-UAJ1 2100H-UA1 2100H-USPA1 2100H-NA4A1 2100-GJ10 2100H-R1 2100H-GS1
Factor See page 313 2100H-UJ1 2100H-USPJ1 2100H-NA4J1 See page 2100H-R2 See page
See page See page 313 2100H-NA4A2 308 See page 309
313 2100H-NA4J2 314
See page 307
NEMA Type 1 1.0 or larger A-E (3)  — — — — — — —
Series A…D (3)
F-L (3) —  — —  (6) — — —
M or —  — —  (6) — — 
later (5)
NEMA Type 1 0.5 (2) N or — — —  — —  —
Series E…J later
(3) (4)
,
1.0 or larger A-E (3) — —  — — — — (8)
F-L (3)  — — — — — — —
M or — — — — — — — 
later (5)
NEMA Type 1 0.5 (2) N or  — — — — — — —
Series K or later
later
1.0 or larger A-L (3) — —  — — — — (8)
M or  — — — — — — —
later
NEMA Type 1 1.0 or larger A-E (3)  — — — — — — —
w/ (3)
gasket or F-L —  — —  (6)  — —
Type 12 M or —  — —  (6)  — 
Series A…D
later
NEMA Type 1 0.5 (2) N or — — —  — —  
w/ later
gasket or
Type 12 1.0 or larger A-E (3) — —  — — — — (8)
Series E…J (4) (3)

F-L  — — — — — — —
M or — — — — — — — 
later
NEMA Type 1 0.5 (2) N or  — — — — — —
w/ later
gasket or
Type 12 1.0 or larger A-L (3) — —  — — — — (8)
Series K or
M or  — — — — — — —
later later
(1) When installing the unit in the topmost location in a vertical section, care must be taken to comply with the National Electrical Code 6’ 7” (2.0 m) unit handle-to-floor height limitation. A
unit operating handle extender (2100H-NE1)available, which provides 3” (76.2 mm),available which provides 3” (76.2 mm) added height flexibility. See page 308 for catalog number.
(2) When CENTERLINE 2100, 0.5 space factor or Space Saving NEMA Starter plug-in units are ordered unassembled or ordered for existing sections, order a centralized wiring diagram holder
kit (2100H-WDH). See page 309.
(4) Series E-J sections cannot accommodate 0.5 space factor or Space Saving NEMA Starter plug-in units in bottom-most unit location.
(5) Consult MCC Technical Support for assistance with possible door hinge requirements.
(Footnotes continue on the next page.)

(6) Required only if series F or later 1.0 space factor or larger CENTERLINE 2100 unit is installed in topmost location of series A through E vertical sections.
(7) Permits installation of 0.5 space factor or Space Saving NEMA Starter plug-in units in existing series E through J CENTERLINE 2100 vertical sections. See page 314 for information.
(8) A ground strap can be used to ground units rather than installing a ground bus. See publication 2100-IN014.
Circuit Breaker Suffix Letter Designation

Table 9 - Circuit Breaker Suffix Letter Designation
Type of Circuit Breaker Trip Type Catalog Number Circuit Breaker Frame Type
Designation
Old New 125 A 125 A 250 A 400 A(1) 800 A(1) 1200 A(2) 3000 A(2)
High I.C. Instantaneous Trip Only MCP CA T_A TGA THA TJA TKA TMA — —
High I.C. Instantaneous Trip with MCP CC — — — — — — — —
Current Limiter
Standard I.C. Inverse Time Thermal CT — — — — — — — —
Magnetic or
Electronic
Medium I.C. Inverse Time Thermal CB — — — — — — — —
Magnetic or
Electronic
High I.C. Inverse Time Thermal CM — TGM THM TJM — — — —
Magnetic
High I.C. Inverse Time Electronic CM T_M — — — TKM TMM TNMG —
Inverse Time with Current Thermal CD — — — — — — — —
Limiter Magnetic
Extra High I.C. Inverse Time Thermal CX — — THX TJX — — — —
Magnetic
Extra High I.C. Inverse Time Electronic CX T_X — — — TKX TMX TNXG
Ultra High I.C. Inverse Time Thermal — — — — TJU — — — —
Magnetic
Ultra High I.C. Inverse Time Electronic — T_U — — — TKU — — TRUG
(1) 300…800 A are electronic trip only as LSI or LSIG.

(2) 1200…3000 A are electronic trip with maintenance mode only as LSIG-MM. Maintenance mode provides a means to comply with NEC 240.87.

Notes:

Chapter 2
Vertical Sections and IntelliCENTER Technology
Figure 2 - Parts Illustration Typical 15” Deep Section Construction
Lift angle
Top horizontal wireway baffles
Top horizontal wireway pan

Removable top plate
Top horizontal wireway

cover
Left hand top end closing plate
(Two on 20” deep sections)
Right hand unit support

Horizontal and vertical bus support assembly (vertical wireway)
Bus splice access cover

Vertical power bus
Horizontal power bus
Section nameplate
Left hand center end closing plate
Vertical to horizontal bus

connection access cover
Vertical bus covers
Vertical plug-in steel ground bus (Three piece assembly)
Vertical wireway door
Unit support pan
Left hand side plate assembly
Vertical wireway sealing strap

(top and bottom)
Horizontal ground bus Bottom support angle
(top or bottom)
Bottom horizontal wireway cover
Left hand bottom end
closing plate
(Two on 20” deep sections)

Basic Sections and Structure Features/Modifications (SC-II and PE-II)

Table 10 - Basic Sections and Structure Features/Modifications (SC-II and PE-II)
Basic Sections Delivery
Program
Basic 20” Includes standard features that are indicated in these tables and on following pages. Maximum three 20” wide sections per SC-II
Wide Section shipping split.
25”, 30”, 35” These sections do not have a vertical wireway. These sections require individual shipping splits.
Wide Section
25” Wide Section width is 25.” Section has a 9” wireway. Maximum of two 25” wide sections with 9” wireway per shipping split. Maximum of
Section with one 25” wide section with 9” wireway per shipping split with export packing, or NEMA Type 3R or NEMA Type 4 enclosure.
9” Wireway
Back-to-Back There is no additional charge for assembling 15” or 20” deep sections back-to-back. Back-to-back construction consists of two
Section separate sections that are mounted together, each with separate bus. Front and rear sections must be equal in width. Six 20” wide
sections per shipping split is the maximum. A front-to-rear horizontal bus link is provided only when an incoming line lug
compartment, main breaker, or main disconnect is selected. This splice link is at the opposite end of the MCC from the incoming
line section.
Corner Inside corner configuration is either 15” deep by 25.125” wide or 20” deep by 30.125” wide and is designed to contain power bus
Section rated 600…2000 A only. There is no available space for the installation of units. Section does not have vertical wireway. See page
140 to select.
Corner sections can be selected with an incoming line lug provision (see Bul. 2191M or 2191F, page 79), but are not available in either
NEMA Type 3R, Type 4, or back-to-back construction.
10” Wide This section must be selected as part of a 2-section shipping split, shipped attached to a 20,” 25” or 30” wide section. It cannot PE-II
Incoming Lug be selected as freestanding or attached to a section with 9” vertical wireway, any 35” wide drive unit, full-section programmable
Compartment controller, 1600 A and 2000 A 2192M, or 2000 A 2193M, and is not available in NEMA Type 3R, Type 4, or back-to-back construction.
For selection information, see page 79.
71” High This 70.48” high × 15” or 20” deep section accommodates standard plug-in units up to and including 4.5 space factors. Standard ENG
Section height bus (45” center point) and lower height bus (25.5” center point) are available.
Please note the following restrictions for 71” high sections:
– If top incoming (unless a full section incoming main lug is used) or top frame-mounted device is required, select lower height
bus.
– If bottom incoming (unless full section incoming main lug is used) or bottom frame-mounted device is required, select
standard bus height.
– If frame-mounted transformer is required, select standard bus height.
– If frame-mounted transformer with top incoming main lug is required, select standard height bus and use a full section
incoming main lug.
– Two frame-mounted units cannot be used in a section.
– Top frame-mounted units and bottom frame-mounted units cannot be mixed in the same line up (for example, Bulletin 2191,
2192, 2193, 2195, 2196, and 2197 units).
– Only the following incoming main lug compartments are available pre-engineered:
300 A and 600 A in 1.0 space factors, 800 A in 1.5 space factors, 1200 A in 2.0 space factors,
600…2000 A full section 4.5 space factors.
– 6.0 space factor, frame-mounted units are not available.
See publication 2100-TD024 for more information.
71” High Back- There is no additional charge for assembling 15” or 20” deep sections back-to-back. Back-to-back construction consists of two
to-Back separate sections that are mounted together, each with separate bus. Front and rear sections must be equal in width. Six 20” wide
Section sections per shipping split is the maximum. A front-to-rear horizontal bus link is provided only when an incoming line lug
compartment, main breaker, or main disconnect is selected. This splice link is at the opposite end of the MCC from the incoming
line section.

Table 11 - Cabinet Depth and Enclosure Type

Section Features/Modifications Delivery
Program
Cabinet Depth 15” deep SC-II
20” deep
Enclosure NEMA Type 1
Type
NEMA Type 1 with gasket (gasketed unit door areas)
NEMA Type 12 (totally gasketed enclosure with bottom closing plates)
NEMA Type 3R (non-walk-in) front mounted only. Available for internal sections, 30” wide maximum. The external dimension of PE-II
each NEMA Type 3R cabinet is 5” wider than its internal section and 30” deep (with 20” deep internal section). Not available in back-
to-back construction. See publication 2100-TD025. Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales
representative for solid-state equipment (for example, variable-frequency drives, SMCs, and PLCs).
NEMA Type 4 (non-walk-in) stainless steel, front mounted only. Available for internal sections, 30” wide maximum. The external
dimension of each NEMA Type 4 section is 5” wider than its internal section and 30” deep (with 20” deep internal section). Not
available in back-to-back construction. See publication 2100-TD026. Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell
Automation sales representative for solid-state equipment (for example, variable-frequency drives, SMCs, and PLCs).
Bottom For NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket. Bottom closing plates are standard on NEMA Type 12. SC-II
Closing Plates
For corner section NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket. Bottom closing plates are standard on NEMA Type 12.
Drip Hood Drip hood for NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with gasket, and Type 12 only. (Not required for NEMA Type 3R or Type 4.) Drip hood is
an overhang on top of a section, providing protection from limited amounts of liquid or dirt dripping and/or running down the front
of a section. Select one drip hood per section. Not available for corner sections.
Table 12 - Power Bus Rating - Material Seccion de barras principales

Section Features/Modifications, continued Delivery
Program
Power Bus Rating Aluminum with tin plating (1) 0.125” × 4” 600 A SC-II
and Material(1)
0.188” × 4” 800 A
(For 3-phase, Copper with tin plating 0.125” × 3” 600 A
3-wire systems)
0.125” × 4” 800 A
0.250” × 4” 1200 A
0.500” × 4” 1600 A
0.625” × 4” 2000 A
0.75” x 4” 2500 A (3)
(2) (3)
0.75” x 4” 3000 A
Copper with silver plating 0.125” × 3” 600 A ENG
0.125” × 4” 800 A
0.250” × 4” 1200 A
0.500” × 4” 1600 A
0.625” × 4” 2000 A
0.75” x 4” 2500 A
0.75” x 4” 3000 A(2)
(1) Vertical bus is supplied as tin-plated copper.

(2) Requires 20 in. deep MCC.
(3) PE-II for 2193M, ENG for 2191M, 2192M, and add to existing MCC.

Table 13 - Power Bus Rating - Material w/ Neutral Bus

Section Features/Modifications, continued Half-rated Full-rated Main Power Delivery
Neutral Neutral Bus Rating Program
Power Bus Rating and Aluminum with tin plating (2) 0.125” x 4” 0.125” × 4” 600 A PE-II
Material with Neutral Bus
(1) 0.125” x 4” 0.188” × 4” 800 A
(For 3-phase, Copper with tin plating 0.125” × 3” 0.125” × 3” 600 A

4-wire systems) 0.125” × 3” 0.125” × 4” 800 A
Neutral bus mounts above 0.125” x 4” 0.250” × 4” 1200 A
or below main power bus.
0.188” x 4” 0.500” × 4” 1600 A
0.250” x 4” 0.625” × 4” 2000 A
(4)
0.250” x 4” 0.750" x 4" 2500 A
0.500” x 4” 0.750" x 4"(3) 3000 A (4)
Copper with silver plating 0.125” × 3” 0.125” × 3” 600 A ENG

0.125” × 3” 0.125” × 4” 800 A
0.125” x 4” 0.250” × 4” 1200 A
0.188” x 4” 0.500” × 4” 1600 A
0.250” x 4” 0.625” × 4” 2000 A
0.250” x 4” 0.750" x 4" 2500 A
(3)
0.500” x 4” 0.750" x 4" 3000 A
(1) When used with main incoming line (Bulletin 2191M), Main Switch (Bulletin 2192M), and Main Circuit Breaker (Bulletin 2193M) requires the selection of incoming
neutral option (88HN or 88FN). See Appendix, page 346, for neutral bus configuration information. See page 153 for incoming neutral option selection.
(2) Vertical bus is supplied as tin-plated copper.
(3) Requires 20 in. deep MCC.
(4) PE-II for 2193M, ENG for 2191M, 2192M, and add to existing MCC.

Table 14 - Vertical Bus and Neutral Connection Plate

Section Features, continued Delivery
Program
Vertical Bus Rating (1) 300 A tin-plated copper vertical bus—0.75” O.D., 0.625” I.D. tube SC-II
600 A tin-plated copper vertical bus—0.75” O.D. rod
300 A silver plated vertical bus—0.75” O.D., 0.625” I.D. tube PE-II
600 A silver plated vertical bus—0.75” O.D. rod
Vertical Neutral Bus (2) Tin-plated copper bus. Mounted in and insulated from 9” vertical Rated 200 A (0.1875” × 0.75”). For connection of
wireway. Mechanically connected to horizontal neutral bus. control power neutral.
Requires 25” wide section Isolated from the rest of vertical wireway with barriers. To be used
with 9” wireway for connecting neutral loads, or can be used for control voltages Rated 300 A (0.25” × 1”). For connection of
that require a connection to the neutral. neutral loads.
Rated 600 A (0.25” × 1” qty. 2). For connection
of neutral loads.
Neutral Connection Plate (3) 0.25” × 2” × 12” copper tin-plated bus plate with #6-250 kcmil lug (280 A capacity). Insulated from and mounted to SC-II
either top or bottom horizontal wireway.
0.25” × 2” × 12” copper tin-plated bus plate with #6-250 kcmil lug (280 A capacity). Insulated from and mounted to ENG
either top or bottom horizontal wireway. Cable connection that is provided to horizontal neutral bus. (2)
0.25” x 2” x 12” copper silver-plated bus plate with #6-250 kcmil lug (280 A capacity). Insulated from and mounted to
either top or bottom horizontal wireway.
0.25” x 2” x 12” copper silver-plated bus plate with #6-250 kcmil lug (280 A capacity). Insulated from and mounted to
either top or bottom horizontal wireway. Cable connection that is provided to horizontal neutral bus. (2)
(1) Plating of horizontal bus and vertical bus must be the same.
(2) Requires horizontal neutral bus. See Power Bus Rating and Material with Neutral Bus in table above.
(3) A neutral connection plate can be used only in sections with a vertical wireway. Not available in sections with 6.0 space factor frame mounted units.
Not available in top of section with frame mounted unit mounted at top of section.
Not available in bottom of section with frame mounted unit mounted at bottom of section.

Table 15 - Bracing, Vertical, and Horizontal Bus

Program
Bracing (1) 42 kA (rms symmetrical) SC-II
65 kA (rms symmetrical)
100 kA series coordinated. Provides 65 kA (rms symmetrical) bracing in each section. Must be used in coordination with
600…2000 A horizontal bus and one of the following main incoming devices:
100, 200, 400, or 600 A, 2192M with Class R or J fusing
600, 800, 1200, 1600, or 2000 A, 2192M with Class L fusing
THX or THXL 125 A Frame 2193M, 480V or less
TJX or TJXL 250 A Frame 2193M, 480V or less
TKX 400 A Frame 2193M, 480V or less
TMX 800 A Frame 2193M, 480V or less
TNX 1200 A Frame 2193M, 480V or less
TKU 400 A Frame 2193M, 600V
All starters and feeder units must have a short-circuit current rating capable of interrupting the available fault current to
the MCC.
100 kA fully braced ENG
Ground Bus 0.25” × 1” horizontal ground bus SC-II
Unplated copper(2)
0.25” × 2” horizontal ground bus
Two 0.25” × 1” horizontal ground bus top and bottom (cable interconnected)
Ground Bus 0.25” × 1” horizontal ground bus
Tin-plated copper(2)
0.25” × 2” horizontal ground bus
Vertical Ground Bus 0.188” × 0.75” vertical plug-in steel ground bus Steel
0.188” × 0.75” vertical plug-in ground bus Unplated copper
0.188” × 0.75” vertical ground bus for grounding unit load(3)
0.188” × 0.75” vertical plug-in ground bus Tin-plated copper
0.188” × 0.75” vertical ground bus for grounding unit load(4)
Horizontal Splice bars, hardware, and installation instructions for 3-phase splicing. One kit is Aluminum tin- 600 A
Power Bus required per shipping split on front mounted lineups. Two kits are required per plated bus 800 A
Splice Kit shipping split for back-to-back construction.
Copper tin-plated 600 A
bus 800 A
1200 A
1600 A
2000 A
Horizontal Splice bars, hardware, and installation instructions for 3-phase splicing. One kit is Copper tin-plated 2500 A ENG
Power Bus required per shipping split on front mounted lineups. Two kits are required per bus 3000 A
Splice Kit shipping split for back-to-back construction.
Copper silver- 600 A
plated bus 800 A
1200 A
1600 A
2000 A
2500 A
3000 A
(1) Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative when specifying 100 kA series coordinated bracing for ’Add to existing’ sections.
(2) Standard ground bus lugs provided for horizontal ground bus options are: no main = no lug, 2191M = 1 lug, 2192M or 2193M = 2 lugs. Lugs accept one, #6AWG-250 kcmil cable.
(3) Requires tin plating on plug-in unit ground stab.
(4) Requires tin plating on unit load ground connector.


Table 16 - Horizontal Neutral Bus Splice Kit
Structure Features/Modifications, continued Main Power Bus (Phase A, B, C) Rating Delivery
and Material Program
Horizontal Neutral Bus Splice Splice bar hardware (installation instructions included in power bus splice 600 A Aluminum with Tin Plating PE-II
Kit kit). One kit is required per shipping split on front mounted lineups. Two
800 A Aluminum with Tin Plating
kits are required per shipping split for back-to-back construction.
600 A Copper with Tin Plating
2500 A Copper with Tin Plating ENG
600 A Copper with Silver Plating


Table 17 - Section Features/Modifications
Program
Horizontal Ground Bus Splice Kit One —0.25” × 1” (unplated copper) For applications utilizing ground SC-II
bus mounted on both top and
bottom or from back-to-back line
Two —0.25” × 1” (unplated copper) ups, two ground bus splice kits are
required for joining each shipping
One —0.25” × 1” (tin-plated copper) split.
Two —0.25” × 1” (tin-plated copper)
NO-OX-ID NO-OX-ID compound on vertical bus for section plug-in units

Pullbox (1) 12” high × 15” deep or 20” deep (except corner sections)
Shutters For isolation of plug-in stab openings—automatic
For isolation of plug-in stab openings—manual
Protective Caps For unused plug-in stab openings
Unit Isolating Barriers For closing the wire opening between unit and vertical wireway
DeviceNet Connector Covers For covering the unused DeviceNet connectors in the vertical wireway of a DeviceNet MCC
Wireway Tie Bars Five cable tie bars in vertical wireway
Outgoing Equipment Ground Lug One #6-250 kcmil lug mounted on horizontal ground bus in addition to lug provided
T-Handle T-handle latch on vertical wireway door
Master Nameplates Located on top horizontal wireway cover of the second vertical section in lineup, 2”× 6”
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws Stainless steel nameplate screws for master nameplate (2 per nameplate)
External Mounting Channel (2) Two 1.5” × 3” mounting channels
IMPORTANT: Adding an external mounting channel adds 1.5” to height of section
NEMA Type 3R Lifting Angle Optional lifting angle for NEMA Type 3R cabinets only. This angle is not removable. PE-II
IMPORTANT: Adding the lifting angle adds 3.63” to the height of the section
Space Heaters and Thermostat Space heater with thermostat in each section 200 watt, 120 volt strip heater. SC-II
(Requires user supplied source of Thermostat set at 25 °C (77 °F).
power)
For two-section shipping split, one space heater is supplied in each
section with a single thermostat control located in right-hand
section
For three-section shipping split, one space heater is supplied in
each section with a single thermostat control located in center
section
Space heater with thermostat in each section 200 watt, 240 volt strip heater.
Thermostat set at 25 °C (77 °F).
For two-section shipping split, one space heater is supplied in each

section with a single thermostat control located in right-hand
section
For three-section shipping split, one space heater is supplied in
each section with a single thermostat control located in center
section
Export Packing Below Deck for Maximum 3-section shipping split. Shipping split is skid mounted and packaged in clear plastic. Packing SC-II (3)
Sections is not watertight or waterproof. Skid is 2” × 8” construction according to shipping split size. Top is 2” × 4”
frame with 0.438” orientated strand board (OSB). Ends and sides covered with 0.438” orientated strand
board (OSB) with 2” × 4” cross members. Two steel bands around outside of container. Extended storage
can require space heaters and other considerations.
(1) Available on NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with gasket and Type 12 sections only.
(2) External mounting channel is shipped attached to MCC sections.
(3) Additional time required for export packing of SC-II and PE-II sections.

CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center with IntelliCENTER Technology
Embedded Systems
CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Center with IntelliCENTER® Technology provides CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs with sections having
an Embedded System. The Embedded System can either be EtherNet/IP™ network or DeviceNet® network.
• EtherNet/IP - The EtherNet/IP network consists of Ethernet cabling, Stratix® switches, and a 24V DC Network. Cabling is
routed through the sections and into individual units as described below.
– For IntelliCENTER MCCs with EtherNet/IP network, the industrial Ethernet switches are mounted in either the top or
bottom horizontal wireway or in a top or bottom unit. Depending on the number of intelligent devices, a switch group
(the number of vertical sections connected to a single switch unit or wireway switch) can contain up to nine sections.
– For wireway mounted industrial Ethernet switches, industrial Ethernet cables are routed from each unit to Ethernet
adapters in the vertical wireway, or optionally, directly to the switch (homerun(1)). For top or bottom unit mounted
Ethernet switches, Ethernet cables are routed from each unit directly to the Ethernet switch (homerun), or optionally,
to adapters(2) in the vertical wireway of each section containing intelligent devices.
– Ethernet cables that connect between Ethernet switches are included when an MCC has multiple Ethernet switches.
– In either switch mounting configuration, 24V DC cables are routed from each unit to the 24V DC ports in the vertical
wireway of each vertical section.
– The Ethernet cable is both 600V AWM and Power Limited Tray Cable (PLTC) rated, along with being UL/cUL listed. The
24V DC Network consists of multiple 4-ampere networks designed to supply power to the switches and other
EtherNet/IP components in the MCC. When specified, up to eight Ethernet adapters are built into the back of the
vertical wireway of each standard section to provide a convenient method for the MCC units to connect to the
EtherNet/IP network. Two pairs of 24V DC adapters, providing up to 8 device connections (4 device connections per
pair) are always built into the back of the vertical wireway of each standard section to provide a convenient method for
the MCC units to connect to the 24V DC power supply.
• DeviceNet - The DeviceNet cabling, consisting of trunk line and drop lines, is routed through the sections and into the
individual units, allowing the devices to communicate via DeviceNet. A complete DeviceNet system includes cabling,
power supply, scanner module and the necessary DeviceNet components in the MCC units.
– The DeviceNet trunk line is built in to the sections and routed behind barriers. The drop lines are routed from each unit
to the DeviceNet connectors in the vertical wireway of each vertical section. The DeviceNet cable is rated 8 A, 600V for
use with a Class 1 power limited circuit. Six DeviceNet connectors built into the back of the vertical wireway of each
standard section provide a convenient method for the MCC units to connect to the trunk line.
(1) Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative for wireway mounted switch designs.
(2) Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative for unit mounted switch designs.

Intelligent Motor Control

• CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs with IntelliCENTER Technology offers Intelligent Motor Control components which provide vital
information from the MCC via the Embedded System.
• MCCs that are configured with EtherNet/IP technology verify that the firmware of all end devices is updated to the latest
available version and remain consistent across a given MCC. End devices can also have custom parameters that are
assigned to them, which are configurable upon order entry.
• IMC components consist of, but are not limited to:
– E1 Plus™ electronic overload relays
– E300™ electronic overload relays
– SMC™ Flex soft starters
– PowerFlex® variable frequency drives
– PowerMonitor™ energy meters
Software
• CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs with IntelliCENTER Technology offer remote visibility to the information from the IMC
components via the Embedded System in the IntelliCENTER software.
• IntelliCENTER software provides real-time information as to the status of the IMC components as well as valuable
documentation related to the MCC.
For more information on Ethernet, refer to Converged Plantwide Ethernet (CPwE) Design and Implementation Guide, publication
ENET-TD001, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers with IntelliCENTER using an EtherNet/IP Network Information, publication MCC-
RM001, and CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers with EtherNet/IP Network, publication 2100-TD031.
For more information on DeviceNet, refer to DeviceNet Media Design and Installation Manual, publication
DNET-UM072, and DeviceNet Motor Control Centers, publication 2100-TD019.
The CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center with IntelliCENTER technology can consist of integrated hardware, software, and
communication in one centralized package. IntelliCENTER technology on EtherNet/IP allows for the flexibility to pre-configure
smart devices in the MCC with parameters and normalized firmware revisions across like devices. The available IntelliCENTER
software provides pre-configured screens which provide real-time data, trending, component history, wiring diagrams, user
manuals, and spare parts. See page 41 for selection.

Table 18 - Available Networks

Section Network Description Delivery
Features Program
IntelliCENTER EtherNet/ • Includes industrial Ethernet cables from each unit either directly to the industrial Ethernet switch (homerun configuration) or to PE-II
Technology IP the ports in the vertical wireway (adapter configuration).
• Includes industrial Ethernet cables to connect between Ethernet switches when multiple Ethernet switches are provided.
• Includes 24V DC cables from each unit to the ports in vertical wireway.
• Includes EtherNet/IP addressing per customer specified information. A single MCC is allowed to be configured to contain up to
ten independent networks.
• IntelliCENTER software and documentation dataset available, see description in Table 20.
• Available only for sections that contain horizontal power bus.
DeviceNet • Includes DeviceNet trunk line, drop cable from each unit to DeviceNet port in vertical wireway and plug-in terminating resistor SC-II
kit. Includes DeviceNet node addressing per factory standards or per customer specified information. A single MCC is allowed to
be configured to contain up to five independent networks. Maximum of 17 sections per network for MCCs on the SC or PE
delivery program.
• IntelliCENTER software and documentation dataset available, see description in Table 20.
• Available only for sections which contain horizontal power bus.
Table 19 - IntelliCENTER Technology Communication Card Information

EtherNet/IP Embedded EtherNet/IP Card Option EtherNet/IP Description
IMC Device EtherNet/ Required for Card Option
IP Communication
PowerMonitor 5000 Yes Yes -86W54 Embedded Port is used to connect to Display when EtherNet/IP Card is
not selected. Must select EtherNet/IP option to ensure ability to connect
to Ethernet Switch supplied in the Ethernet IntelliCENTER MCC.
E1 Plus No Yes -ENET Option provides 193-ENT E1 Plus Side Car.
E300 Yes No -7FE3E E300 provided with EtherNet/IP Communication Module, 193-ECM-ETR.
SMC Flex No Yes -13GE Option provides 20-COMM-E communication card.
PowerFlex 523 No Yes -14GER Option provides 25-COMM-E2P communication card.
PowerFlex 525 Yes No -14GER EtherNet/IP port embedded. Option provides 25-COMM-E2P
communication card.
PowerFlex 70 No Yes -14GE Option provides 20-COMM-E communication card.
PowerFlex 700 No Yes -14GE Option provides 20-COMM-E communication card.
PowerFlex 753 No Yes -14GER Option provides 20-750-ENETR communication card.
PowerFlex 755 Yes No -14GER EtherNet/IP port embedded. Option provides 20-750-ENETR
communication card.

IntelliCENTER Software
IMPORTANT All IntelliCENTER software is copyright protected and for installation on one personal computer only.
Table 20 - Available Software

Description Delivery
Program
IntelliCENTER(1) The IntelliCENTER software replicates the MCC lineup on a computer screen, complete with nameplates and indicators on SC
Catalog Number: each door to show status (on, off, warning, fault, communication failure). Graphical views of individual MCC units display
2101A-INTLCNTR device data allowing users to quickly view critical amperes, time-to-trip, trip cause, ground fault amperes, and on/off status.
Each screen is pre-configured to show the parameters typically of greatest interest, and users can easily customize
parameters. Many screens feature trending graphs and analog dials. The software also provides spare parts information,
AutoCAD documentation, and event logging. Requires Documentation CD; see below.
The IntelliCENTER software also contains ActiveX controls. These controls allow key views of the software to be displayed
inside
Human Machine Interfaces (HMIs) such as RSView® software.
Pre-Integration The Pre-Integration Dataset is the second component of the IntelliCENTER software. The information 2101A- SC
Dataset(1) (2) arrives as a digital download and contains data files specific to a particular MCC. This information is sent PREINTLDOC A
upon order submission and specifically aids in Logix integration via Integration Assistant. This
information includes unit nameplates and other unit details (no documentation or drawings, manuals, or
spare parts).
Standard Dataset (1) (3) The Standard Dataset is the second component of the IntelliCENTER software. The information arrives as Per MCC lineup SC
a digital download and contains data files specific to a particular MCC. This information includes unit Catalog Number:
nameplates, unit details, wiring diagrams, user manuals, spare parts, and other details. 2101A-INTLDOC-
EN
Per unit SC
Catalog Number:
2101A-INTLDOC-
UN
Digital component SC
only (2)
Catalog Number:
2101A -
PSTINTLDOC A
Energy Dataset(1)(3)(4) The Energy Dataset includes all of the components of the Standard Dataset. Additionally, it includes the 1 SC
Catalog Number: ability to use the features of IntelliCENTER Energy (version 4.0 and later) as well as the additional
10
2101A-INTLNRGDOC-__ installation software needed.
25
50
75
100
150
200
250
350
500
(1) Must be ordered separately from MCC.
(2) Applies to IntelliCENTER MCCs with EtherNet/IP network only.
(3) Applies to either IntelliCENTER MCCs with DeviceNet or EtherNet/IP network.
(4) Catalog number is incomplete. Complete the catalog string with the number of metering devices in the MCC. (for example, if 8 metering devices are in the MCC, then use 10 and the
catalog string is 2101A-INTLNRGDOC-10.

System and Equipment Requirements for Running IntelliCENTER Software

IntelliCENTER software is compatible with these operating systems: Windows 7 64-bit, Windows 8.1 64-bit,
Windows 10 64-bit.
These minimum system requirements provide optimal operation of the IntelliCENTER software.
Table 21 - Hardware Requirements

Characteristic Minimum Recommended
Processor Intel Core i3 Intel Core i5(2)
Speed(1) 2.4 GHz 2.9 GHz
RAM memory 4 GB 8 GB
Hard disk space 10 GB 15 GB
Video resolution 1024 x 768 with True Color (24 bit or better) Use the recommended setting for your
computer
DVD-ROM drive 4X 16X
(1) The IntelliCENTER software is a monitoring/communication software package that requires a large amount of processor speed to function
efficiently and quickly. The processor speeds listed allow the software to function correctly. However, for speed and efficiency, we
recommend that the processor used is the fastest processor available to you.
(2) The use of touch screen computers or the use of virtualization can have a negative impact on the performance of IntelliCENTER software. In
these cases, we suggest going above the recommended requirements to maintain optimal operation.
Equipment Necessary for Connection of a Computer via Ethernet, DeviceNet, or

ControlNet:
Ethernet
• Laptop or desktop computer: consult local computer support personnel for Ethernet interface requirements
DeviceNet
• Laptop computer: 1784-U2DN USB to DeviceNet cable or 1784-PCD DeviceNet personal computer interface card and 1784-
PCD1 cable
• Desktop computer: 1784-U2DN USB to DeviceNet cable or 1784-PCID DeviceNet personal computer interface card
• RS-232 interface (reduced performance): 1770-KFD DeviceNet interface module
TIP 2100H-ICPC120 patch cable is necessary for connecting interface (laptop, desktop, RS-232) to IntelliCENTER
MCC wireway.
ControlNet
• Laptop computer: 1784-PCC ControlNet PC interface card and 1784-C1 cable
• Desktop computer: 1784-PCIC ControlNet PC interface card and 1786-TPR ControlNet tap
TIP Consult the ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide, publication CNET-IN002, for configuration
and installation of ControlNet cable.
Recommended Additional Software

• RSNetWorx™ for DeviceNet—used for configuring DeviceNet nodes, saving parameters, and communicating to all types of
DeviceNet components (sensors, non-Allen-Bradley products and other products not found in MCCs)
• RSNetWorx for ControlNet—used for configuring ControlNet devices including ControlNet to DeviceNet bridge

Notes:

Chapter 3
Safety Technology
ArcShield Technology
ArcShield™ is an optional Safety Technology feature that helps to provide a safer working environment by controlling and diverting
the incident energy during an arc flash event. The CENTERLINE 2100 MCC with ArcShield has been tested in accordance with the
IEEE C37.20.7 standard for Type 2 accessibility. Type 2 accessibility allows personnel to be protected while in front, at the side, or in
the rear of the enclosure in the event of an arcing fault.
ArcShield helps contain arc faults by two methods:

• Specific devices that help limit the amount of available arc fault current distributed through the MCC (Device Limited).
The devices used in device-limited motor control centers include:
– UL Listed Devices:
Class L - A4BQ ≤ 1200 A
Class R - Any fuse ≤ 600 A
Class J - Any fuse ≤ 600 A
– UL Listed Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
Allen-Bradley - Bulletin 140G
• Structures and features of the MCC are tested to contain and withstand an arc fault in a specified time duration (100 ms). The
100 ms time duration is the maximum allotted time for an overcurrent and/or short-circuit protective device to clear a fault.
The time duration allows the MCC to maintain the arc resistant rating that is described in IEEE C37.20.7 with Type 2
accessibility.
Table 22 - ArcShield Availability

Structure Device Limited (1) (2) (6) 100 ms Duration Rated (1) (2) (4) (5) (6)
Enclosure
NEMA 1 Yes Yes(7)
NEMA 1G Yes Yes (7)
NEMA 3R Yes No
NEMA 12 Yes Yes (7)
Section Depth 15 in. or 20 in. 20 in.
Section Width 20…35 in. 20…35 in.
Section Height 71 in. or 90 in. 90 in.
Back-to-Back Yes Yes
Door Mounted Devices Yes Yes
Table continued on the next page.

Table 22 - ArcShield Availability (continued)

Structure Device Limited (1) (2) (6) 100 ms Duration Rated (1) (2) (4) (5) (6)
Vented Units Yes(3) No
1/2 Space Factor Units Yes No
Top-Plate Pressure Relief No Yes
Vertical Wireway Baffle Not Required Required
Arc Containment Latches 2 Latches / Door All Latches
Unit Support Pans Bolted Bolted
Electrical
Bus Voltage Up to 600V Up to 480V
Available Fault Current Up to 65 kA Up to 65 kA
Horizontal Bus Current Up to 1200 A Up to 3000 A
Rating
Horizontal Ground Bus Top or Bottom or Both Top and Bottom
Vertical Bus Shutters Automatic / Manual Automatic / Manual
Vertical Plug-in Ground Bus Copper or Copper/Tin Copper or Copper/Tin
Vertical Load Ground Bus Optional Copper or Copper/Tin
(1) For unit configurations, see option -112A and -112B.

(2) Refer to Commercial Engineering for application notes.
(3) Arc-resistent baffles are required. Note that baffles are not available on blank doors or empty units.
(4) 20" deep only.
(5) Duration Rated is available as PE delivery program (without baffles).
(6) 100% rated circuit breakers mains not available due to venting requirements.
(7) No units with door mounted filters.
Table 23 - Units Available with ArcShield Unidades disponibles con ArcShield

Availablility with These Units Device Limited(1), (2),(3) 100ms Duration Rated(1), (2), (3)
SecureConnect Yes Yes
IntelliCENTER Technology Yes Yes(5)
Drives Yes Yes(6)
SMCs Yes Yes(6)
Starters Yes All
Mains and Feeders Yes (4) Yes
Dual Units Yes Yes
(1) Duration Rated is available as PE delivery program (without baffles).

(2) For unit configurations, see option -112A and -112B.
(3) Refer to Commercial Engineering for application notes.
(4) Not available with R-Frame or ACBs.
(5) Only available with unit-mounted Ethernet Switch.
(6) Not available on NEMA 1 if the NEMA 12 version requires venting. Not available on NEMA 12 if venting is required.

SecureConnect Technology
SecureConnect™ is an optional Safety Technology feature for plug-in units which allows the unit to be electrically isolated from
the vertical power bus before the enclosure door is opened.
SecureConnect technology features include the follow:

• Multi-point validation system with both electrical and mechanical indications.
• Integrated shutters for improved isolation while the unit is still installed.
• Snap-action power stab disconnect limits arcing during disconnect.
• Standard ¼" hex wrench operation. No special tools required.
• Lock-Out-Tag-Out mechanism to prevent re-connection and increase safety.
Application features:
• Not available on 0.5 space factor units.
• Auto shutters are required.
Table 24 - SecureConnect Technology Availability

Bulletin Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5
2106/2107     --
2112/2113     --
2122/2123     --
2154/2155     --
2162/2163    --(1) --
30 A 60 A 100 A 200 A 400 A

2192     -- (1)
G-Frame / H-Frame J-Frame K-Frame

(2)
2193   --
(1) SecureConnect technology is not applicable to frame-mount units.

(2) Not available with 3 A and 7 A MCP circuit breakers.

Notes:

Chapter 4
Units
Please read this important information for ordering units

• Configure sections separately from units
Units having network options, ordered separately from vertical sections, are supplied with a 48” patch cable for connecting
the device to a port in the vertical wireway of the existing CENTERLINE® 2100 MCC with IntelliCENTER technology.
• Wiring Type
Units are available with either Type A or Type B wiring. Catalog numbers are for Type B wiring. To order Type A wired units,
substitute the letter B in the catalog number with the letter A.
• Unit configurations include door, unit support pan, hinges, and hinge pins
• Overload Relays
Starter units include E1+ electronic overload relays, that are RoHS compliant, as standard. See Options section for electronic
overload relays.
• Power Fuses
Factory installed power fuses are available for most fusible units. See pages 300…301 for selection.
• Delivery Programs
Delivery programs are listed in tables under the column marked ‘Delivery Program’. See page 14 for more delivery program
information.
• 71” High Sections
71” high sections accommodate 4.5 space factor (maximum) units. For 71” high section restrictions, see page 30.

Figure 3 - Bulletin 2112, Size 1, FVNR with Transformer Shown
Captive Latch
Starter or Contactor Diagram Pocket
Unit Stab Assembly
Control Circuit Unit Handle Interlock

Fuses and
Circuit Breaker or Fusible
Fuse Block
Disconnect (shown)
Auxiliary
Contacts
Overload Disconnect Handle
Control Circuit
Transformer (not shown)
Control Transformer Defeater Mechanism
Fusing and Fuse Block
Power and Control
Terminal Blocks Short Circuit Rating Label
Unit Identification Nameplate Captive

UL Label
Control Station
Unit Nameplate
Handle Cutout
Unit Door
Reset Button
Pilot Devices
Plastic Retaining Pin
Unit Support Pan

Figure 4 - SecureConnect Unit
Status Port
Lockout Lever
Indicator
Shaft Port
Shaft-port Cover
Open Closed
Rotating Power Stabs

Notes:

Chapter 5
Contactor and Starter Units
Bulletin 2102L and 2103L Combination Full-Voltage Lighting Contactor Units

(FVLC)
These combination lighting contactor units are supplied with an Allen-Bradley® Bulletin 500L AC contactor and either a fusible
disconnect or circuit breaker. They are rated 30…300 A. Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class I, Type B-T unit with terminals
mounted in the unit for connection to remote devices.
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2102L and 2103L Full Voltage Lighting Contactors
(FVLC)
• Allen-Bradley Bulletin 500L AC contactor with a fusible disconnect or circuit breaker
• Rated 30…300 A
• NEMA Class I, Type B with terminals mounted on the unit
Table 25 - Catalog Number Explanation- Bulletin 2102L and 2103L

2102L B - B K B - 24J - 6P
2103L B - B K B - 30THM - 6P
Bulletin Number Wiring Type Rating Amperes NEMA Enclosure Control Voltage Fuse Clip Ratings and Class or Trip Option
Type Type Current and Circuit Breaker Type
Code Rating Amperes Code Option

Code Control Voltage Type
Code Type Z 30 A (0.5 Space Factor) See Options section
See Table on Page 297 beginning on Page 141.
2102L Full Voltage Lighting B 30 A
Contactor (FVLC) with C 60 A
Fusible Disconnect
D 100 A
2103L Full Voltage Lighting
Contactor (FVLC) with E 200 A Code Fuse Clip Ratings and Class or
Circuit Breaker F 300 A Trip Current Circuit Breaker
Type
2102L - ’24J’ Fuse Clip Rating and Class. See
Table on page 301
Code NEMA Enclosure Type 2103L - ’30THM’ Trip Current and Circuit Breaker
Code Wiring Type K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with Type.
gasket See Table on page 303 and table
A Type A on page 304.
B Type B J NEMA Type 12

Bulletin 2102L Full Voltage Lighting Contactor Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (FVLC)
• See page 51 for product description.
• For unit sizing, select unit rating based on 125% of actual load amperes.
• Basic configuration includes three power poles and one hold-in contact.
IMPORTANT To address the heating effects from loads containing a high degree of harmonic content, it may be necessary to oversize
the field conductors (especially neutrals), use k-factor lighting transformers and oversize the lighting contactor units
(increase by 50%); for high harmonic load applications, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation
sales representative.
Table 26 - Bulletin 2102L Full Voltage Lighting Contactor Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (FVLC)
Contactor Unit Rating Transformer Primary Switching kVA(4) Fuse Clip (See Space Catalog Number (5) Delivery
Rating (Amperes) Appendix for short Factor Wiring Type B-Class I Program
(1)
(Amperes) circuit withstand
(1) 208V 240V 380V…415V 480V 600V NEMA Type 1 NEMA
ratings.)
and Type 1 Type 12
1Ø 3Ø 1Ø 3Ø 1Ø 3Ø 1Ø 3Ø 1Ø 3Ø Rating Class w/ gasket
(Amperes)
30(2) 30(2) 1.2 3.6 2.4 4.3 2.8 7.1 4.9 8.5 6.2 11 30 CC, J 0.5 2102LB-ZK_- 2102LB-ZJ_- SC
30 30 1.2 3.6 2.4 4.3 2.8 7.1 4.9 8.5 6.2 11 30 CC, J, 1.0 2102LB-BK_- 2102LB-BJ_-
R, H
60 30(3) 2.1 6.3 4.1 7.2 6.8 11.8 8.3 14 10 18 30 J, R, 1.0 2102LB-CK_- 2102LB-CJ_-
(3)
H
60 2.1 6.3 4.1 7.2 6.8 11.8 8.3 14 10 18 60
100 60(3) 4.1 12 8.1 14 13.3 23.3 16 28 20 35 60 2.5 2102LB-DK_- 2102LB-DJ_-
(3)
100 4.1 12 8.1 14 13.3 23.3 16 28 20 35 100
200 200 6.8 20 14 23 22.5 39 27 47 34 59 100 3.0 2102LB-EK_- 2102LB-EJ_- PE
200
300 300 14 41 27 47 45 78.3 54 94 68 117 200 4.0 2102LB-FK_- 2102LB-FJ_-
400
(1) Ampere ratings apply to non-motor loads such as fluorescent ballasts, mercury vapor lamps and resistive heating. Tungsten lamp current ratings are limited to applications 480V line-to-line
(277V line-to-neutral) maximum.
(2) Separate or transformer control only, except 208V (where separate control only). These units have horizontal handles, Bulletin 194R fused disconnect switch, up to four Bulletin 800F pilot
devices and one 10-pt. pull-apart control terminal block with #16 AWG control wire only. One 3-pole power terminal block is supplied as standard.
(3) Unit rating is based on fuse clip rating.
(4) Ratings are based on the contactor being used to switch transformers having an inrush of not more than 20 times their rated full load current, regardless of the nature of the secondary load.
Ratings do not apply to transformers used in resistance welder service.
(5) The catalog numbers listed are not complete:
Select control voltage type from table on page 297 (for example, 2102LB-BKBD).
Select fuse clip rating, class, and designator from the table on page 301 for configuration.
To select optional power fuse, select from table on page 301 (for example, 2102LB-BKBD-24J-607G).
For fuse rating, based on disconnect rating see publication 2100-TD003.

Bulletin 2103L Full Voltage Lighting Contactor Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVLC)
• For unit sizing, select unit rating based on 125% of actual load amperes.
• Basic configuration includes three power poles and one hold-in contact.
• Includes line terminal guards for circuit breakers on all units.
IMPORTANT To address the heating effects from loads containing a high degree of harmonic content, you can oversize the field
conductors (especially neutrals), use k-factor lighting transformers, and oversize the lighting contactor units (increase by
50%).
Table 27 - Bulletin 2103L Full Voltage Lighting Contactor Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVLC)
Rating Transformer Primary Switching kVA (5) Space Catalog Number (6) Delivery
(Amperes) Factor Wiring Type B—Class I Program
(1) 208V 240V 380V–415V 480V 600V
1∅ 3∅ 1∅ 3∅ 1∅ 3∅ 1∅ 3∅ 1∅ 3∅ NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
30 (2) 1.2 3.6 2.4 4.3 2.8 7.1 4.9 8.5 6.2 11 0.5 2103LB-ZK_-__ 2103LB-ZJ_-__ SC
30 1.2 3.6 2.4 4.3 2.8 7.1 4.9 8.5 6.2 11 1.0 2103LB-BK_-__ 2103LB-BJ_-__
DUAL 1.2 3.6 2.4 4.3 2.8 7.1 4.9 8.5 6.2 11 1.5 2103LB-BK_-__(7) 2103LB-BJ_-__ (7)
30 (3)
60 2.1 6.3 4.1 7.2 6.8 11.8 8.3 14 10 18 1.0 2103LB-CK_-__ 2103LB-CJ_-__
(4)
100 4.1 12 8.1 14 13.3 23.3 16 28 20 35 1.5 2103LB-DK_-__ 2103LB-DJ_-__
200 6.8 20 14 23 22.5 39 27 47 34 59 2.5 2103LB-EK_-__ 2103LB-EJ_-__ PE
300 14 41 27 47 45 78.3 54 94 68 117 3.5 2103LB-FK_-__ 2103LB-FJ_-__
(1) Ampere ratings apply to non-motor loads such as fluorescent ballasts, mercury vapor lamps and resistive heating. Tungsten lamp current ratings are limited to applications 480 volts
line-to-line (277 volts line-to-neutral) maximum.
(2) Separate or transformer control only, except 208V (where separate control only). These units have horizontal handles, up to four Bulletin 800F pilot devices and one 10-pt. pull-apart
control terminal block with #16 AWG control wire only. One 3-pole power terminal block is supplied as standard.
(3) Dual mounted unit supplied without power terminal blocks.
(4) 100 A unit with transformer control (option -6P or -6XP) increases space factor from 1.5 to 2.0.
(5) Ratings are based on the contactor being used to switch transformers having an inrush of not more than 20 times their rated full load current, regardless of the nature of the secondary
load. Ratings do not apply to transformers used in resistance welder service.
• Select control voltage type from table on page 297 (for example, 2103LB-BKBD).
• Select trip current from table on page 303 (for example, 2103LB-BKBD-30).
• Select circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 304 (for example, 2103LB-BKBD-30THM).
(7) To dual mount combination lighting contactors in one unit:
• Select two trip current numbers from table on page 303 (for example, 2103LB-BKBD-3032).
• Then select circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 303 (for example, 2103LB-BKBD-3032THM).

Bulletin 2106 and 2107 Combination Full Voltage Reversing Starter Units (FVR)
These combination full voltage reversing starter units are supplied with an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 505 reversing starter and either
a fusible disconnect or a circuit breaker. The Bulletin 2106 and 2107 starters are rated for NEMA sizes 1 through 5 and are
mechanically and electrically interlocked to avoid both contactors being closed simultaneously. Each unit is provided as a NEMA
Class I, Type B-T unit with terminals mounted in the unit for connection to remote devices. Full voltage reversing starter units are
available with an electronic overload relay.
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2106 and 2107 Full Voltage Reversing Starters (FVR)
• Allen-Bradley Bulletin 505 reversing starter with a fusible disconnect or circuit breaker
• NEMA Sizes 1…5
• NEMA Class I, Type B wiring with terminals mounted in the unit
• Available with E1 Plus™ or E300™ Electronic Overload Relays
Table 28 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2106 and 2107 Full Voltage Reversing Starters (FVR)
2106 B - B A B - 41-24J - 6P
2107 B - B A B - 41TGA - 6P
Bulletin Number Wiring Type NEMA Size NEMA Enclosure Control Voltage Horsepower and Disconnecting Options
Type Type Means
Code Type Code NEMA Size Code Control Voltage Type Code Options
2106 Full Voltage Reversing B 1 See Table on Page 297 See Options section
(FVR) with Fusible C 2 beginning on Page 141.
Disconnect D 3
2107 Full Voltage Reversing E 4
(FVR)) with Circuit Code Fuse Clip Ratings and Class or Trip Current
Breaker F 5
Circuit Breaker Type
2106 - ’41-24J’ ’41’ Horsepower Code. See Horsepower Table
on Page 298.
’24J’ Fuse Clip Rating and Class
See Fuse Clip Designator table on page 300
Code Wiring Type 2107 - ’41TGA’ ’41_’ Horsepower Code. See Horsepower Table
A Type A on page 298
B Type B ’_TGA’ Circuit Breaker Type. See Table on
Circuit Breaker Type Table on page 304.
Code NEMA Enclosure Type

A NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with
gasket with external reset
button
K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with
gasket without external reset
button
D NEMA Type 12 with external
reset button
J NEMA Type 12 without external
reset button

Bulletin 2106 Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (FVR)
See page 54 for product description.
Table 29 - Bulletin 2106 Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (FVR)
NEMA Horsepower Fuse Clip Space Catalog Number (4) Delivery
Size (See Appendix for short Factor Wiring Type B—Class I Program
circuit current ratings.)
208V 240V 380V… 480V/ Rating Class NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 12
415V 600V (Amperes) Type 1 w/
gasket
1 0.125…7.5 0.12…7.5 0.125…10 0.125…10 30 CC, J, R, H 1.5 2106B-BA_-__ 2106B-BD_-__ SC
60 J, R, H
2 10 10…15 15…25 15…25 30 (1) J, R, H 1.5 2106B-CA_-__ 2106B-CD_-__
60 J, R, H
100 J
100 R, H 2.0 (2)
3 15…25 20…30 30…50 30…50 60 (1) J, R, H 3.0 2106B-DA_-__ 2106B-DD_-__
100 J, R, H
200 J, R, H
4 30…40 40…50 60…75 60…100 100 (1) J, R, H 4.5 2106B-EA_-__ 2106B-ED_-__
200 J, R, H
400 J
5 50…75 60…100 100…150 125…200 200 (1) J, R, H 6.0 (3), 2106B-FA_-__ 2106B-FD_-__ PE-II
400 J, R, H 20”W
600 J
(1) Available on 480V and 600V applications only.

(2) For 208V and 240V applications with Class R or H fuses, unit only requires 1.5 space factors.
(3) Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway.
• Select control voltage type from table on page 297 (for example, 2106B-BABD).
• Select horsepower from table on page 298 (for example, 2106B-BABD-31).
• If power fuse is NOT selected, select fuse clip from Table 29. Then select clip designator from table on page 300 (for example, 2106B-BABD-31-24J).
• If power fuse is selected, first select clip designator from table on page 300 (for example, 2106B-BABD-31__-20J).
Then, select power fuse from table on page 300 (for example, 2106B-BABD-31GT-20J).
• For fuse rating based on load horsepower, see publication 2100-TD003.
IMPORTANT The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the overload relay. To order catalog numbers without the
external reset button, replace the letter ’A’ with the letter ’K’ (for example, 2106B-BK_-__) or replace the letter ’D’ with the
letter ’J’ (for example, 2106B-BJ_-___).

Bulletin 2107 Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVR)
Includes line terminal guards for circuit breakers on all unit.
Table 30 - Bulletin 2107 Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVR)
NEMA Size Horsepower Space Catalog Number (4) Delivery
Factor Wiring Type B—Class I Program
208V 240V 380…415V 480V/600V NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 NEMA Type 12
w/ gasket
1 0.125…7.5 0.125…7.5 0.125…10 0.125…10 1.5 2107B-BA_-__ 2107B-BD_-__ SC
2 10 10…15 15…25(1) 15…25 1.5 2107B-CA_-__ 2107B-CD_-__
3 15…25 20…30 30…50(2) 30…50 2.5 2107B-DA_-__ 2107B-DD_-__
4 30…40 40…50 60…75 60…100 4.0 2107B-EA_-__ 2107B-ED_-__
5 50…75 60…100 100…150 125…200 6.0 (3), 2107B-FA_-__ 2107B-FD_-__ PE-II
20”W
(1) 25 hp at these voltage ratings are not UL listed. Per US NEC, if unit will be installed in the USA it must utilize a Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic or Electronic) breaker; MCP breaker
are non-compliant with US NEC for these units.
(2) 50hp at these voltage ratings are not UL listed. Per US NEC, if unit will be installed in the USA it must utilize a Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic or Electronic) breaker; MCP breaker
are non-compliant with US NEC for these units.
• Select control voltage type from table on page 297 (for example, 2107B-BABD).
• Select horsepower from table on page 298 (for example, 2107B-BABD-30).
• Select circuit breaker type from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 304 (for example, 2107B-BABD-30TGA).
• For circuit breaker size based on load horsepower, refer to publication 2100-TD032.
external reset button, substitute the letter ’A’ with the letter ’K’ (for example, 2107B-BK_-__) or replace the letter ’D’ with the
letter ’J’ (for example, 2107B-BJ_-___).

Bulletin 2106 and 2107 Space Saving NEMA

Combination Full Voltage Reversing Starter Units (FVR)
These combination full voltage reversing starter units offer a space saving alternative while utilizing an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 300
reversing starter and either a fused disconnect or a circuit breaker. The Bulletin 2106 Space Saving NEMA reversing starters are
rated for NEMA Size 1 applications and the Bulletin 2107 Space Saving NEMA reversing starters are rated for NEMA Size 1…3
applications. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked to avoid both contactors being closed simultaneously.
Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class I, Type B-D unit with terminals mounted in the unit for connections to remote devices.
These full voltage reversing units are available with electronic overload relays.
Catalog Number Explanation - Space Saving NEMA Bulletin 2106 and 2107
Full Voltage Reversing Starters (FVR)
• Allen-Bradley Bulletin 300 starter with fused disconnect or circuit breaker
• NEMA Class 1, Type B-D unit with terminals mounted in unit
• Available with electronic overload relays
• Space saving alternative to traditional NEMA starter units
Table 31 - Catalog Number Explanation - Space Saving NEMA Bulletin 2106 and 2107 Full Voltage Reversing Starters (FVR)
2106 B - 3B A B - 38-24J - **
2107 B - 3B A B - 38TGA - **
Bulletin Number Wiring Type NEMA Size NEMA Enclosure Control Voltage Horsepower and Disconnecting Option
Type Type Means
Code NEMA Size Code Control Voltage Type Code Option

Code Type 3B 1 See Options section
See Table on page 297.
2106 Full Voltage Reversing beginning on page 163.
3C 2
(FVR) with Fused
Disconnect 3D 3
2107 Full Voltage Reversing
(FVR) with Circuit Code Horsepower Code and Disconnecting
Breaker Means
2106 - ’38-24J’ ’38’ Horsepower Code. See Table on
Code NEMA Enclosure Type page 298.
A NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with gasket ’24J’ Fuse Clip Rating and Class. See
with external reset button Table on page 300.
Code Wiring Type K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with gasket 2107 - ’38TGA’ ’38_’ Horsepower Code. See Table on
B Type B-D without external reset button page 298.
’_TGA’ Circuit Breaker Type. See Table
D NEMA Type 12 with external reset on page 304.
button
J NEMA Type 12 without external reset
button

Bulletin 2106 Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Fused
Disconnect Switch (FVR)
• Units are cULus listed, unless otherwise indicated.
Table 32 - Bulletin 2106 Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Fused Disconnect Switch (FVR)
NEMA Size Horsepower Fuse Clip Space Catalog Number (2) Delivery
(See Appendix for short circuit Factor Wiring Type B—Class I Program
current ratings.)
480V 600V Rating Class NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 NEMA Type 12
(Amperes) w/ gasket
1 0.5…10 0.75…10 30 CC, J 0.5(1) 2106B-3BA_-__ 2106B-3BD_-__ SC
(1) These units have horizontal operating handles, Bulletin 194R fused disconnect, up to four Bulletin 800F pilot devices, #16 AWG control wire and one 10-point control terminal block
(Type B-D only in Type B units). See page 26 or information on installation into series E-J sections.
• Select control voltage type from table on page 297 (for example, 2106B-3BABD).
• Select horsepower from table on page 298 (for example, 2106B-3BABD-38).
• Select fuse class. Then select clip designator from table on page 300 (for example, 2106B-3BABD-38-24J).
external reset button, substitute the letter ‘A’ with the letter ‘K’ (for example, 2106B-3BK_-__) or replace the letter ’D’ with the
letter ‘J’ (for example, 2106B-3BJ_-__)
Bulletin 2107 Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker
(FVR)
• Units are cULus listed, unless otherwise indicated.
Table 33 - Bulletin 2107 Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVR)
480V 600V NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ NEMA Type 12
gasket
1 0.5…10 0.75…10 0.5(1) 2107B-3BA_-__ 2107B-3BD_-__ SC
(2)
2 15…25 15…25 1.0 2107B-3CA_-__ 2107B-3CD_-__
3 30…50 30…50 1.5(2) 2107B-3DA_-__ 2107B-3DD_-__
(1) These units have horizontal operating handles, up to four Bulletin 800F pilot devices, #16 AWG control wire and one 10-point control terminal block (Type B-D only in Type B
units). See page 26 for information on installation into series E-J sections.
(2) These units have horizontal operating handles, up to six Bulletin 800F pilot devices, #16 AWG control wire and one 10-point control terminal block (Type B-D only in Type B
• Select control voltage type from table on page 297 (for example,, 2107B-3BABD).
• Select circuit breaker type from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 304 (for example, 2107B-3BABD-38TGA).
external reset button, substitute the letter ‘A’ with the letter ‘K’ (for example, 2107B-3BK_-__) or replace the letter ’D’ with the
letter ‘J’ (for example, 2107B-3BJ_-__).

Bulletin 2112, 2112 Vacuum, and 2113, 2113 Vacuum Combination Full Voltage
Non-reversing Starter Units (FVNR)
These combination full voltage non-reversing starter units are supplied with an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 509 starter (starter units
with vacuum contactors use Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1102C contactors) and either a fusible disconnect or a circuit breaker. The full
voltage non-reversing starters are rated for NEMA sizes 1…6 (starter units with vacuum contactors are rated 200 A, 400 A, or
600 A). Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class I, Type B-T unit, with terminals mounted in the unit for connection to remote
devices. Full voltage non-reversing starter units are available with an electronic overload relay.
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2112, 2112 Vacuum, and 2113, 2113 Vacuum
Combination Full Voltage Non-reversing Starter Units (FVNR)
• Allen-Bradley Bulletin 509 starter with a fusible disconnect or circuit breaker
(Bulletin 2112 and 2113 Vacuum use Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1102C vacuum contactors)
• NEMA Class I, Type B unit with terminals mounted in the unit
• Available with electronic overload relays.
Table 34 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2112, 2112 Vacuum, and 2113, 2113 Vacuum Combination Full Voltage Non-
reversing Starter Units (FVNR)
2112 B - B A B - 41-24J - 6P
2113 B - B A B - 41TGA - 6P
Bulletin Number Wiring Type NEMA Size NEMA Enclosure Control Voltage Horsepower and Disconnecting Options
Type Type Means
Code Type Code NEMA Size Code Control Voltage Type Code Options
2112 Full Voltage Non- Z 1 (0.5 Space Factor) See table on Page 297 See Options section
reversing (FVNR) with beginning on Page 141.
B 1
Fusible Disconnect C 2
2113 Full Voltage Non- D 3
reversing (FVNR)) with Code Fuse Clip Ratings and Class or Trip
Circuit Breaker E 4
Current Circuit Breaker Type
F 5
2112 - ’41-24J’ ’41’ Horsepower Code. See table on Page
G 6 298
’24J’ Fuse Clip Rating and Class. See Fuse
Clip Designator table on page 300
2113 - ’41TGA’ Horsepower Code. See table on page 298
’_TGA’ Circuit Breaker Type. See Circuit
Breaker Type table on page 304.
Code Wiring Type
A Type A
B Type B

A NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with
gasket with external reset
button
button
reset button
reset button

Bulletin 2112 Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Units with Fusible Disconnect Switch
(FVNR)
Table 35 - Bulletin 2112 Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Units with Fusible Disconnect Switch
Size (See Appendix for short Factor Wiring Type B—Class Program
208V 240V 380… 480V/ Rating Class NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 12
415V 600V (Amperes) Type 1 w/ gasket
1 (1) 0.125…5 0.125…5 0.125…10 0.125…10 30 CC, J 0.5 2112B-ZA_-__ 2112B-ZD_-__ SC
1 0.125…7.5 0.125…7.5 0.125…10 0.125…10 30 CC, J, R, H 1.0 2112B-BA_-__ 2112B-BD_-__
60 J, R, H
2 10 10…15 15…25 15…25 30 (3) J, R, H 1.0 2112B-CA_-__ 2112B-CD_-__
60 J, R, H
100 J
100 R, H 1.5
3 15…25 20…30 30…50 30…50 60 (3) J 2.0 2112B-DA_-__ 2112B-DD_-__
100 J
200 J
60 (3) R, H 2.5
100 R, H
200 R, H
4 30…40 40…50 60…75 60…100 100 (3) J 3.0 2112B-EA_-__ 2112B-ED_-__
200 J
400 J
100 (3) R, H 3.0
200 R, H
5 50…75 60…100 100…150 125…200 200 (3) J 3.5 2112B-FA_-__ 2112B-FD_-__
400 J
600 J
200 (3) R, H 4.0
400 R, H
6 (2) 100…150 125…200 200…300 250…400 400 (3) R, H 6.0 (4) 2112BB-GA_-__ 2112BB-GD_-__ PE-II
600 J, R 25” W
800 L
400 (3) R, H 2112BT-GA_-__ 2112BT-GD_-__
600 J, R
800 L
(1) Separate or transformer control only, except 208V (where separate control only). These units have horizontal operating handles, Bulletin 194R fused disconnect switch, up to
four Bulletin 800F pilot devices and one 10-pt. pull-apart control terminal block (Type B-D only in Type B units), with #16 AWG control wire only. See page 26 for information on
installation into series E-J sections.
(2) For NEMA size 6, select either top cable entry (2112BT-) or bottom cable entry (2112BB-).
• Select control voltage type from the table on page 297 (for example, 2112B-BABD).
• Select horsepower from the table on page 298 (for example, 2112B-BABD-31).
• If power fuse is NOT selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from the table on page 300 (for example, 2112B-BABD-31-24J).
• If power fuse is selected, first select clip designator from the table on page 300 (for example, 2112B-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from the table on page 300 (for
example, 2112B-BABD-31GT-20J).
external reset button, replace the letter ‘A’ with the letter ‘K’ (for example, 2112B-BK_-__) or replace the letter ’D’ with the
letter ‘J’ (for example, 2112B-BJ_-___).

Bulletin 2112 Vacuum Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Vacuum Contactor and
Fusible Disconnect Switch (FVNR)
Starters are supplied with one normally open and one normally closed auxiliary contacts as standard.
IMPORTANT Option code 91 is required to indicate the normally closed contact is being supplied.
Additional auxiliary contacts (two normally open and two normally closed) can be added (option code 90011)
With optional auxiliary contacts, the complete option code (including the standard normally closed contact) is 900111.
Refer to Options section on page 147.
Table 36 - Bulletin 2112 Vacuum Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Vacuum Contactor and Fusible Disconnect
Switch (FVNR)
Rating Horsepower Space Disconnect Fuse Clip Catalog Number (3) Delivery
(Amperes) Factor Switch (See Appendix for short Wiring Type B—Class Program
Rating circuit current ratings.)
(Amperes)
208V 240V 380… 480V 600V Rating Fuse Class NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 12
415V (Amperes) Type 1 w/
gasket
200 40… 40… 60… 60…1 60…1 3.5 200 100(2) J, R, H 2112B-VBA_-__ 2112B-VBD_-__ ENG
50 60 100 25 50
200 J, R, H
400 J
(2)
60 75 - 150 200 4 400 200 J, R, H
400 J
(2)
400 75 100 125…1 200 250 4.5 400 200 J, R, H 2112B-VCA_-__ 2112B-VCD_-__
50
400 J, R, H
600 J
100… 125… 200… 250 … 300… 6.0 600 400 J, R, H ENG
125 150 250 300 400 20”W(1)
600 J
600 150 - 300 350 - 6.0 600 400 J, R, H 2112B-VDA_-__ 2112B-VDD_-__
20”W(1)
600 J
(2) Available on 480 and 600 Volt applications only.
• Select the control voltage type from table on page 297 (for example, 2112B-VBABD).
• Select the horsepower from table on page 298 (for example, 2112B-VBABD-51).
• If power fuse is NOT selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 300 (for example, 2112B-VBABD-51-26J).
• If power fuse is selected, first select clip designator from table on page 300 (for example, 2112B-VBABD-51__-20J).
Then select power fuse from table on page 300 (for example, 2112B-VBABD-51GT-20J).
external reset button, replace the letter ‘A’ with the letter ‘K’ (for example, 2112B-VBK_-__) or replace the letter ‘D’ with the
letter ‘J’ (for example, 2112B-VBJ_-_).

Bulletin 2113 Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVNR)
Tabla de equivalencias
FVNR tamaños NEMA
Table 37 - Bulletin 2113 Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker
208V 240V 380…415V 480V/600V NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
1 (1) 0.125…3(5) 0.125…5(5) 0.125…7.5(5) 0.125…10 0.5 2113B-ZA_-__ 2113B-ZD_-__ SC
1 0.125…7.5(5) 0.125…7.5(5) 0.125…10(5) 0.125…10 1.0 2113B-BA_-__ 2113B-BD_-__
1(2) 0.125…7.5 0.125…7.5 0.125…10 0.125…10 1.5 2113B-BA_- 2113B-BD_-
(3) 2113B-BA_-__ (11) 2113B-BD_-__ (11)
DUAL 1 0.125…7.5 0.125…7.5 0.125…10 0.125…10 1.5
2 10(5) 10…15(5) 15…25(5),(7) 15…25 1.0 2113B-CA_-__ 2113B-CD_-__
2(2) 10 10…15 15…25(7) 15…25 1.5 2113B-CA_- 2113B-CD_-__
3 15…25(6) 20…30(6) 30…50(6) --- 2.0 2113B-DA_-__ 2113B-DD_-__
--- --- --- 30…50 1.5
4 30…40 40…50 60…75 --- 2.5 2113B-EA_-__ 2113B-ED_-__
--- --- --- 60…100 2.5
5 50…75 60…100 100…150 125…200 3.5 2113B-FA_-__ 2113B-FD_-__
(4)
6 100…150 125…200 200…300(8) 250…400 6.0 (9) 2113BT-GA_-__ 2113BT-GD_-__ PE-II
25″ W
2113BB-GA_-__ 2113BB-GD_-__
(1) Separate or transformer control only, except 208V (where separate control only). These units have horizontal operating handles, up to four Bulletin 800F pilot devices and
one 10-pt. pull-apart control terminal block (Type BD only in Type B units), with #16 AWG control wire only. See page 26 for information on installation into series E-J
sections.
(2) Only available with E300 Electronic Overloads (-7FE3___)
(3) Dual mounted units supplied without power terminal blocks.
(4) For 200 HP at 240V or 400 HP at 480V, suffix letter identifying circuit breaker must be TMM only. For NEMA size 6, select either top cable entry (2113BT-) or bottom entry
(2113BB-) of motor load cables.
(5) Not compatible with E300 Electronic Overloads (-7FE3___)
(6) 25 HP at these voltage ratings are not UL listed. Per US NEC, if unit is installed in the USA it must use an Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic or Electronic) breaker; MCP
breaker are non-compliant with US NEC for these units.
• Select the control voltage type from table on page 297 (for example, 2113B-BABD).
• Select horsepower from table on page 298 (for example,2113B-BABD-30).
• Select circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 304 (for example, 2113B-BABD-30TGA).
(11) Dual mounting of combination starters in one unit. Add two numbers from table on page 298 to identify the horsepower and add the suffix letter from table on page 304 to
identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2113B-BABD-3941TGA).
external reset button, replace the letter ‘A’ with the letter ‘K’ (for example, 2113B-BK_-__) or replace the letter ‘D’ with the
letter ‘J’ (for example, 2113B-BJ_-___).

Bulletin 2113 Vacuum Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Vacuum Contactor and
Circuit Breaker (FVNR)
• Starters are supplied with one normally open and one normally closed auxiliary contacts as standard.
IMPORTANT Option code 91 is required to indicate the normally closed contact is being supplied.
Additional auxiliary contacts (two normally open and two normally closed) can be added (option code 90011)
With optional auxiliary contacts, the complete option code (including the standard normally closed contact) is 900111.
Refer to Options section on page 147.
Important:
Table 38 - Bulletin 2113 Vacuum Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Vacuum Contactor and Circuit Breaker (FVNR)
Rating Horsepower Space Circuit Catalog Number (2) Delivery
(Amperes) Factor Breaker Wiring Type B—Class Program
Frame
208V 240V 380V 480V 600V (Amperes) NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 12
and Type 1 w/
gasket
200 40 40…50 60…75 60…100 60…100 3.5 250AF 2113B-VBA_-__ 2113B-VBD_-__ ENG
50 60 - 125 125…150 3.5 400AF 2113B-VBA_-__ 2113B-VBD_-__
400 60…75 75…100 100…150 125…200 200 3.5 400AF 2113B-VCA_-__ 2113B-VCD_-__
- - - - 250 4 800AF 2113B-VCA_-__ 2113B-VCD_-__
100…125 125…150 200 250…300 300…400 6.0, 800AF 2113B-VCA_-__ 2113B-VCD_-__
20”W(1)
600 150 - 250 350 - 6.0, 800AF 2113B-VDA_-_ 2113B-VDD_-_
20”W(1)
• Select the control voltage type from table on page 297 (for example, 2113B-VBABD).
• Select the horsepower from table on page 298 (for example, 2113B-VBABD-52).
• Select the circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 304 (for example, 2113B-VBABD-52TJM).
external reset button, replace the letter ‘A’ with the letter ‘K’ (for example, 2113B-VBK_-__) or replace the letter ‘D’ with the
letter ‘J’ (for example, 2113B-VBJ_-___).

Bulletin 2112 and 2113 Space Saving NEMA Combination Full Voltage Non-
Reversing Starter Units (FVNR)
These combination full voltage non-reversing starter units offer a space saving alternative while utilizing an Allen-Bradley
Bulletin 300 starter and either a fused disconnect or a circuit breaker. The Bulletin 2112 Space Saving NEMA non-reversing starter
units are rated for NEMA Size 1 applications and the Bulletin 2113 Space Saving NEMA non-reversing starter units are rated for
NEMA Size 1…4 applications. Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class I, Type B-D unit with terminals mounted in the unit for
connections to remote devices. These full voltage non-reversing units are available with electronic overload relays.
Catalog Number Explanation - Space Saving NEMA Bulletin 2112 and 2113
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starters (FVNR)
• Allen-Bradley Bulletin 300 starter with fused disconnect or circuit breaker
• NEMA Class 1, Type B unit with terminals mounted in unit
• Available with electronic overload relay
• Space saving alternative to traditional NEMA starter units
Table 39 - Catalog Number Explanation - Space Saving NEMA Bulletin 2112 and 2113 Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starters (FVNR)
2112 B - 3B A B - 38-24J - **
2113 B - 3B A B - 38TGA - **
Bulletin Number Wiring Type NEMA Size NEMA Enclosure Control Voltage Horsepower and Disconnecting Option
Type Type Means

Code Type 3B 1 See Table on page 297. See Options section
3C 2 beginning on page 163.
2112 Full Voltage Non-
Reversing (FVNR) with 3D 3
Fused Disconnect 3E 4
2113 Full Voltage Non- Code Horsepower Code and Disconnecting
Reversing (FVNR) with Means
Circuit Breaker 2112 - ’38-24J’ ‘38’ Horsepower Code. See table on page
298.
Code NEMA Enclosure Type ‘24J’ Fuse Clip Rating and Class. See table on
A NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with gasket page 300.
with external reset button 2113 - ’38TGA’ ‘38_’ Horsepower Code. See table on page
K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with gasket 298.
Code Wiring Type without external reset button ‘_TGA’ Circuit Breaker Type. See table on
B Type B-D page 304.
D NEMA Type 12 with external reset
button
J NEMA Type 12 without external reset
button

Bulletin 2112 Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Fused
Disconnect Switch (FVNR)
• Units are cULus listed unless otherwise indicated.
Table 40 - Bulletin 2112 Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Fused Disconnect Switch (FVNR)
Size (See Appendix for short Factor Wiring Type B—Class I Program
480V 600V Rating Class NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 NEMA Type 12
(Amperes) w/ gasket
1 0.5…10 0.75…10 30 CC, J 0.5(1) 2112B-3BA_-__ 2112B-3BD_-__ SC
(1) These units have horizontal operating handles, Bulletin 194R fused disconnect, up to four Bulletin 800F pilot devices, #16 AWG control wire and one 10-point control terminal
block (Type B-D only in Type B units). See page 26 for information on installation into series E-J sections.
• Select fuse class from above. Then select clip designator from table on page 300 (for example, 2112B-3BABD-38-24J).
external reset button, substitute the letter ‘A’ with the letter ‘K’ (for example, 2112B-3BK_-_) or replace the letter ‘D’ with the
letter ‘J’ (for example, 2112B-3BJ_-_).
Bulletin 2113 Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit
Breaker (FVNR)
• Units are cULus listed unless otherwise indicated.
Table 41 - Bulletin 2113 Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVNR)
480V 600V NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ NEMA Type 12
gasket
1 0.5…10 0.75…10 0.5(1) 2113B-3BA_-__ 2113B-3BD_-__ SC
(1)
2 15…25 15…25 0.5 2113B-3CA_-__ 2113B-3CD_-__
(1)
3 30…50 30…50 1.0 2113B-3DA_-__ 2113B-3DD_-__
(1)
4 60…100 60…100 1.0 2113B-3EA_-__ 2113B-3ED_-__
(1) These units have horizontal operating handles, up to four Bulletin 800F pilot devices, #16AWG control wire and one 10-point control terminal block (Type B-D only in Type B
• Select circuit breaker type from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 304 (for example, 2113B-3BABD-38TGA).
external reset button, substitute the letter ‘A’ with the letter ‘K’ (for example, 2113B-3BK_-_) or replace the letter ‘D’ with the
letter ‘J’ (for example, 2113B-3BJ_-_).

Bulletin 2122E, 2123E, 2122F and 2123F

Combination 2-speed Starter Units (TS2W and TS1W)
These combination 2-speed starter units are supplied with an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 520 starter and either a fusible disconnect or
a circuit breaker. The 2122 and 2123 starter units are designed for use with motors having separate windings or consequent pole
windings. The 2122E, 2123E, 2122F, and 2123F are rated for NEMA sizes 1…3. Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class I, Type B-T unit,
with terminals mounted in the unit for connection of remote devices. The 2-speed starter units are available with an E1 Plus
overload relay.
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2122E, 2123E, 2122F and 2123F

Combination 2-speed Starter Units (TS2W and TS1W)
• Allen-Bradley Bulletin 520 starter with a fusible disconnect or circuit breaker
• Designed with separate windings or consequent pole windings
• 2-speed units available with E1 Plus overload relays
• NEMA Sizes 1…3
Table 42 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2122E, 2123E, 2122F and 2123F Combination 2-speed Starter Units (TS2W and TS1W)
2122E B - B A B - 41-24J - 6P
2123F B - B A B - 41TGA - 6P
Bulletin Number Wiring Type NEMA Size NEMA Enclosure Control Voltage Horsepower and Option
Type Type Disconnecting Means

Code Type B 1 See table on Page 297. See Options section
2122E 2-speed, 2-Winding C 2 beginning on Page 141.
Starter (TS2W) with
Fusible Disconnect D 3
2123E 2-speed, 2-Winding
(TS2W) with Circuit Code Fuse Clip Ratings and Class or Trip
Breaker Current Circuit Breaker Type
2122F 2-speed, 1-winding 2122 - ’41-24J’ ‘41’ Horsepower Code. See table on Page
Starter (TS1W) with 298
Fusible Disconnect ‘24J’ Fuse Clip Rating and Class. See Fuse
2123F 2-speed, 1-winding Code NEMA Enclosure Type Clip Designator table on page 300
(TS1W) with Circuit A NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with 2123 - ’41TGA’ Horsepower Code. See table on page 298
Breaker gasket with external reset ‘_TGA’ Circuit Breaker Type. See Circuit
button Breaker Type table on page 304.
button
reset button
reset button
Code Wiring Type
A Type A
B Type B

Bulletin 2122E 2-speed, 2-winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TS2W)
• Basic configuration includes one set of 3-pole fuse clips.
IMPORTANT A 2-speed, 2-winding motor (TS2W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of two 3-pole contactors.
A 2-speed, 1-winding motor (TS1W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of 3-pole and 5-pole
contactors. Consult your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative for application
assistance.
Table 43 - Bulletin 2122E 2-speed, 2-winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TS2W)
NEMA Constant or Variable Torque Fuse Clip Space Catalog Number (2) Delivery
Size Horsepower (See Appendix for short Factor Wiring Type B—Class I Program
208V 240V 380…415V 480V/ Rating Class NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 12
600V (Amperes) Type 1 w/ gasket
1 0.125…7.5 0.125… 7.5 0.125…10 0.125…10 30 CC, J, R, H 2.0 2122EB-BA_-__ 2122EB-BD_-__ ENG
60 J, R, H
2 10 10…15 15…25 15…25 30 (1) J, R, H 2.0 2122EB-CA_-__ 2122EB-CD_-__
60 J, R, H
100 J, R, H
3 15-25 20…30 30…50 30…50 60 (1) J, R, H 3.0 2122EB-DA_-__ 2122EB-DD_-__
100 J, R, H
200 J, R, H

• Select the control voltage type from table on page 297 (for example, 2122EB-BABD).
• Select horsepower from table on page 298 (for example, 2122EB-BABD-31).
• If power fuse is NOT selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 300 (for example, 2122EB-BABD-31-24J).
• If power fuse is selected, first select clip designator from table on page 300 (for example, 2122EB-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 300 (for
example, 2122EB-BABD-31GT-20J).
external reset button, replace the letter ‘A’ with the letter ‘K’ (for example, 2122EB-BK_-__) or replace the letter ‘D’ with the
letter ‘J’ (for example, 2122EB-BJ_-___).

Bulletin 2122F 2-speed, 1-winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TS1W)
• Basic configuration includes one set of 3-pole fuse clips.
IMPORTANT A 2-speed, 1-winding motor (TS1W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of 3-pole and 5-pole
contactors. A 2-speed, 2-winding motor (TS2W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of two 3-pole
assistance.
Table 44 - Bulletin 2122F 2-speed, 1-winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TS1W)
NEMA Constant or Variable Torque Fuse Clip Space Catalog Number (2) Delivery
Size Horsepower (See Appendix for short Factor Wiring Type B—Class I Program
208V 240V 380… 480V/ Rating Class NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 12
415V 600V (Amperes) and Type 1 w/
gasket
1 0.125…7.5 0.125…7.5 0.125…10 0.125…10 30 CC, J, R, H 2.0 2122FB-BA_-__ 2122FB-BD_-__ ENG
60 J, R, H
2 10 10…15 15…25 15…25 30 (1) J, R, H 2.0 2122FB-CA_-__ 2122FB-CD_-__
60 J, R, H
100 J, R, H
3 15…25 20…30 30…50 30…50 60 (1) J, R, H 4.0 2122FB-DA_-__ 2122FB-DD_-__
100 J, R, H
200 J, R, H

• Select the control voltage type from table on page 297 (for example, 2122FB-BABD).
• Select the horsepower from table on page 298 (for example, 2122FB-BABD-31).
• If power fuse is NOT selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 300 (for example, 2122FB-BABD-31-24J).
• If power fuse is selected, first select clip designator from table on page 300 (for example, 2122FB-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 300 (for
example, 2122FB-BABD-31GT-20J).
external reset button, replace the letter ‘A’ with the letter ‘K’ (for example, 2122FB-BK_-__) or replace the letter ‘D’ with the
letter ‘J’ (for example, 2122FB-BJ_-___).

Bulletin 2123E 2-speed, 2-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (TS2W)
• Includes line terminal guards on circuit breakers for all units.
IMPORTANT A 2-speed, 2-winding motor (TS2W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of two 3-pole contactors.
A 2-speed, 1-winding motor (TS1W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of 3-pole and 5-pole
assistance.
Table 45 - Bulletin 2123E 2-speed, 2-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (TS2W)
NEMA Constant or Variable Torque Space Catalog Number (1) Delivery
Size Horsepower Factor Wiring Type B—Class I Program
208V 240V 380…415V 480V/600V NEMA Type 1 and Type NEMA Type 12
1 w/ gasket
1 0.125…7.5 0.125…7.5 0.125…10 0.125…10 2.0 2123EB-BA_-__ 2123EB-BD_-__ ENG
2 10 10…15 15…25 15…25 2.0 2123EB-CA_-__ 2123EB-CD_-__
3 15…25 20…30 30…50 30…50 3.0 2123EB-DA_-__ 2123EB-DD_-__

• Select the control voltage type from table on page 297 (for example, 2123EB-BABD).
• Select the horsepower from table on page 298 (for example, 2123EB-BABD-30).
• Select the circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 304 (for example, 2123EB-BABD-30TGA).
external reset button, replace the letter ‘A’ with the letter ‘K’ (for example, 2123EB-BK_-__) or replace the letter ‘D’ with the
letter ‘J’ (for example, 2123EB-BJ_-___).

Bulletin 2123F 2-speed, 1-winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (TS1W)
• Includes line terminal guards on circuit breakers for all units.
IMPORTANT A 2-speed, 1-winding motor (TS1W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of 3-pole and 5-pole
contactors. A 2-speed 2-winding motor (TS2W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of two 3-pole
assistance.
Table 46 - Bulletin 2123F 2-speed, 1-winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (TS1W)
NEMA Constant or Variable Torque Space Catalog Number (1) Delivery
Size Horsepower Factor Wiring Type B—Class I Program
208V 240V 380…415V 480V/600V NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
1 0.125…7.5 0.125…7.5 0.125…10 0.125…10 2.0 2123FB-BA_-__ 2123FB-BD_-__ ENG
2 10 10…15 15…25 15…25 2.0 2123FB-CA_-__ 2123FB-CD_-__
3 15…25 20…30 30…50 30…50 3.5 2123FB-DA_-__ 2123FB-DD_-__

• Select the control voltage type from table on page 297 (for example, 2123FB-BABD).
• Select the horsepower from table on page 298 (for example, 2123FB-BABD-30).
• Select the circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 304 (for example, 2123FB-BABD-30TGA).
external reset button, replace the letter ’A’ with the letter ’K’ (for example, 2123FB-BK_-__) or replace the letter ’D’ with the
letter ’J’ (for example, 2123FB-BJ_-___).

Chapter 6
Metering Units Power Monitor
Bulletin 2190 - Metering Compartments (METER)

Bulletin 2190 metering compartments are used for power management of three-phase systems and include analog ammeter and
voltmeter, and PowerMonitor™ 5000 unit. The PowerMoniter 5000 unit includes a 30 A fused disconnect switch.
• Ammeter:
Panel type (not switchboard type) with 5 A movement, 3.5” scale, 102° deflection, and 2% of full scale accuracy.
• Voltmeter:
Phase-to-phase voltage measurement only. Panel type (not switchboard type) with 120V movement, 3.5” scale, 102°
deflection, and 2% of full scale accuracy.
• PowerMonitor 5000, Bulletin 1426-M5:
1426-DM is a PanelView™ Component C400 terminal with factory-installed applications. The power monitor can display 64
real-time parameters, including current (Ia, Ib, Ic, In, I3 avg, ±0.2% full-scale accuracy), voltage (Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca
±0.2% full-scale accuracy), current, and voltage imbalance. There are four forms of power (real, reactive, apparent, and true,
±0.4% full-scale accuracy), kWh, KVARh, kVAHnet, true RMS to the 63th harmonic, frequency (±0.05%), and power factor
(±0.4%). The PowerMonitor 5000 unit includes min./max, event logs, trend log (up to 45,867 data points), and distortion
analysis with THD, crest factor (I, V), and distortion power factor. Every PowerMonitor 5000 unit includes Ethernet network
communication as standard and has options for DeviceNet and ControlNet network communication. The 1426-M5 unit can be
flash upgraded to M6, and M8 PowerMonitor 5000 units. Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation
sales representative for details.
• The PowerMonitor 5000 Display Module, Series A, catalog number 1426-DM, is a PanelView™ Component C400 terminal with
factory-installed applications.
The PowerMonitor 5000 Display Module, Series B, catalog number 1426-DM, is a PanelView 800 terminal with factory-
installed applications.
This display module displays key information from one, two, or three PowerMonitor 5000 units.

Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2190

• Analog Voltmeter and/or Ammeter or Digital Metering System
• Current Transformers (CTs) shipped loose for field mounting
• Potential transformers (PTs) included as needed
• Field mountable in 0.5, 1.0, or 1.5 space factor location
• Control Transformers included as needed
Table 47 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2190
2190 - B K B - 54M - 86UCCXB - **

Bulletin Number Space Factor Enclosure Type Line Voltage Ammeter Scale Meter Designation Options
Code Type Code Enclose Type Code Ammeter Scale Code Options
2190 Metering Unit (METER) K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 48M 300 A See Options section
with gasket 50M 400 A beginning on Page 141.
J NEMA Type 12 52M 600 A
54M 800 A
56M 1200 A
58M 1600 A
Code Line Voltage 60M 2000 A
H 208V
Code Space Factor P 220…230V
A 0.5 Space Factor A 240V
Code Meter Designation
B 1.0 Space Factor N 380V
85AAXX Analog ammeter
C 1.5 Space Factor KN 400V
85BBXX Analog ammeter with ammeter switch (2 CTs)
I 415V
85BCXX Analog ammeter with ammeter switch (3 CTs)
B 480V
85EBB_ Analog ammeter and voltmeter with switches (2
C 600V CTs)
85ECB_ Analog ammeter and voltmeter with switches (3
CTs)
86W5__X_ Bulletin 1426-M5 PowerMonitor 5000

Table 48 - Analog Metering Compartments

Meter Type Description Line Space Catalog Number (1) Delivery
Voltage Factor Wiring Type A Only—Class I Program
(Volts)
NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 NEMA Type 12
w/ gasket
Analog One current transformer Current transformers 600 Max. 0.5 2190-AKC-__-85AAXX 2190-AJC-__-85AAXX SC
Ammeter and panel type ammeter. shipped loose with
hardware and mounting 1.0 2190-BKC-__-85AAXX 2190-BJC-__-85AAXX
instructions. Metering
Analog Two current transformers, mounted in door, no 0.5 2190-AKC-__-85BBXX 2190-AJC-__-85BBXX
Ammeter panel type ammeter, and disconnect means, no
with ammeter switch. Use on unit insert. 1.0 2190-BKC-__-85BBXX 2190-BJC-__-85BBXX
Ammeter 3-phase, 3-wire systems
Switch only.
Three current 0.5 2190-AKC-__-85BCXX 2190-AJC-__-85BCXX
transformers, panel type
ammeter, and ammeter 1.0 2190-BKC-__-85BCXX 2190-BJC-__-85BCXX
switch. Use on
3-phase, 3-wire systems
only.
Analog Two current transformers, Plug-in metering units 208 1.0 2190-BKH-__-85EBBH 2190-BJH-__-85EBBH
Ammeter panel type ammeter with with disconnect and
and ammeter switch, two fuses. Current 220/230 2190-BKP-__-85EBBP 2190-BJP-__-85EBBP
Voltmeter fused potential transformers shipped
with transformers, and panel loose with hardware and 240 2190-BKA-__-85EBBA 2190-BJA-__-85EBBA
Switches type Voltmeter with mounting instructions.
Voltmeter switch. Use on 380 2190-BKN-__-85EBBN 2190-BJN-__-85EBBN
3-phase, 3-wire systems 400 2190-BKKN-__-85EBBKN 2190-BJKN-__-85EBBKN
only.
415 2190-BKI-__-85EBBI 2190-BJI-__-85EBBI
480 2190-BKB-__-85EBBB 2190-BJB-__-85EBBB
600 2190-BKC-__-85EBBC 2190-BJC-__-85EBBC
Three current 208 1.0 2190-BKH-__-85ECBH 2190-BJH-__-85ECBH
transformers, panel type
ammeter with ammeter 220/230 2190-BKP-__-85ECBP 2190-BJP-__-85ECBP
switch, two fused
potential transformers, 240 2190-BKA-__-85ECBA 2190-BJA-__-85ECBA
and panel type Voltmeter
with Voltmeter switch. 380 2190-BKN-__-85ECBN 2190-BJN-__-85ECBN
Use on 3-phase, 3-wire 400 2190-BKKN-__-85ECBKN 2190-BJKN-__-85ECBKN
systems only.
415 2190-BKI-__-85ECBI 2190-BJI-__-85ECBI
480 2190-BKB-__-85ECBB 2190-BJB-__-85ECBB
600 2190-BKC-__-85ECBC 2190-BJC-__-85ECBC
(1) The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate catalog string number from table on page 74 to identify the ammeter scale and current transformer primary ratio
(for example, 2190-AKC-52M-85AAXX).

Table 49 - Digital Metering Compartments

Meter Type Description Space Catalog Number (1) Delivery
Factor Wiring Type A Only—Class I Program
w/ gasket
Bulletin 1426-M5 Plug-in unit with disconnect, fuses, and control 1.5 2190-CK_-_-86W5_ _X_ 2190-CJ_-_-86W5_ _X_ SC
PowerMonitor 5000 circuit transformer. For 3-phase, 3-wire systems,
with EtherNet/IP™ three current transformers are shipped loose with
Communication hardware and mounting instructions. For 3-phase, 4-
wire systems, four current transformers are shipped
loose with hardware and mounting instructions.

• Select the appropriate voltage code from Line Voltage table to identify the line voltage code. The voltage code must be in two places in the catalog string (for example, 2190-CKB-
54M-86W50CXB).
• Select the appropriate catalog string number from Ammeter Scales table to identify the current transformer primary ratio (for example, 2190-CKB-54M-86W50CXB).
• For PowerMonitor 5000 units, select the appropriate letter from the PowerMonitor 5000 Communication Options table to identify the communication platform
(for example, 2190-CKB-54M-86W54CXB).
• The wiring system is determined in the system settings for Assembled MCC Orders and must be selected for Unassembled MCC Orders. For Unassembled MCC Orders, select the
appropriate letter from System Wiring table to identify the system wiring (for example, 2190-CKB-54M-86W50CXB.)
Table 50 - Line Voltage

Line Voltage Voltage Code
208 H
240 A
380 N
400 KN
415 I
480 B
600 C
Table 51 - Ammeter Scales

Ammeter Scale Catalog String
300 A 48M
400 A 50M
600 A 52M
800 A 54M
1200 A 56M
1600 A 58M
2000 A 60M

Table 52 - PowerMonitor 5000 Communication Options

Platform Communication
Code
Standard with Display 0
DeviceNet with 2
Display(1)
Ethernet with Display 4
(1) These communication platforms are in addition to

the native EtherNet/IP.
Table 53 - System Wiring(1)

System Wiring Letter Code
3-phase, 3-wire, Wye, Solid Ground C
3-phase, 4-wire, Wye, Solid Ground D
3-phase, 3-wire, Delta, Ungrounded E
3-phase, 3-wire, Wye, Impedance (HRG) Ground F
(1) System Wiring is determined by the system setting. This option must match the system
setting for the incoming power.

Notes:

Chapter 7
Main and Feeder Units
Bulletin 2191F and 2191M Outgoing Feeder Lug Compartment (FLUG) and
Incoming Main Lug Compartment (MLUG)
Bulletin 2191M and 2191F are line lug compartments that provide a lug connection for incoming lines (2191M) to distribute power to
the motor control center or for outgoing cables (2191F) to feed power from the MCC to an external load. These line lug compartments
are available with ratings from 300…2000 A. Optional mechanical or crimp lugs can be supplied with the lug compartments.
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2191F and 2191M

Incoming and Outgoing Lug Compartment Units
• Line Lug Compartments
• Rated from 300…2000 A
• Mechanical or crimp lugs are available
Table 54 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2191F and 2191M Incoming and Outgoing Lug Compartment Units
2191M T - C K C - 54 - 83D500-86UCCXB - **
Bulletin Number Mounting Space Factor Enclosure Type Line Voltage Amperes Lug and Meter Options Options
Code Space Factor Code Line Voltage Code Lug and Meter
C Up to 600V Options
A 0 (mounted in top
horizontal wireway) See tables on page 79.
Code Type B 1.0
2191F Outgoing Feeder Lug C 1.5
Compartment (FLUG) Code Amperes
D 2.0 Code Options
2191M Incoming Main Lug 48 300 A See Options section
Compartment (MLUG) J 4.5 (71” High Sections)
M 6.0 52 600 A beginning on page 141.
N 6.0 (Corner Section) 54 800 A
P 6.0 (10” Wide Section) 56 1200 A
58 1600 A
60 2000 A

Code Mounting K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with gasket
T Top J NEMA Type 12
B Bottom

Bulletin 2191M and 2191F Lug Compartments—Provisions for Basic Sections/Incoming

Lines (MLUG) and Outgoing Feeders (FLUG)
• All lugs compartments are frame mounted and must be located at top or bottom of section.
• Basic configuration includes door, unit support pan, lug pads, and hardware.
• Configure section and lugs separately.
• For 4-wire applications. Incoming neutral bus (see page 153) or neutral connection plates (see pages 33, 140, 154, and 310)
are available for Bulletins 2191MT and 2191MB.
• For 71” high sections, see restrictions on page 30.
2191FT—Top mounted feeder
2191FB—Bottom mounted feeder
2191MT—Top mounted main
2191MB—Bottom mounted main
• Top- and bottom-mounted mains are designed with adequate space to route cables to lugs. Give special consideration to
the mounting of the CTs for a metering device. Consider the addition of a pull box.
• Refer to Table 304 for wire size conversion table.
Table 55 - Bulletin 2191M and 2191F Lug Compartments—Provisions for Basic Sections/Incoming Lines (MLUG) and Outgoing
Feeders (FLUG)
Rating Cable Provisions Space Catalog Number (13) Delivery
(Amperes) Maximum Number Per Phase Factor Wiring Type A Only—Class I Program
and Maximum Cable Size (5)
Mechanical Type Lugs Crimp Type Lugs NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
Single Cable Lug Multiple Cable Lug
PROVISIONS FOR BASIC SECTIONS
300(1) (2) 400 kcmil — (2) 350 kcmil 1.0 (8),(6) 2191F_-BKC-48 2191F_-BJC-48 SC-II
1.0 (8),(10) 2191M_-BKC-48 2191M_-BJC-48
600(2) (2) 400 kcmil (4) 250 kcmil (2) 350 kcmil 1.0 (7),(8) 2191F_-BKC-52 2191F_-BJC-52
1.0 (8) 2191M_-BKC-52 2191M_-BJC-52
(1) 500 kcmil (2) 300 kcmil (2) 350 kcmil In top, horizontal 2191MT-AKC-52 2191MT-AJC-52
wireway (9),(10)
(2) 750 kcmil (4) 500 kcmil (1) 750 kcmil 1.5 (8) 2191M_-CKC-52 2191M_-CJC-52
(2) 500 kcmil
(4) 800 kcmil — (4) 750 kcmil 6.0 (11),(12), 2191_ _-MKC-52 2191_ _-MJC-52
20” W
800 (3) (4) (2) 800 kcmil — (2) 750 kcmil 1.0 (8),(9) 2191_ T-BKC-54 2191_ T-BJC-54
(4) 600 kcmil (4) 500 kcmil
(1) 750 kcmil — (3) 500 kcmil 1.5 (8) 2191_ _-CKC-54 2191_ _-CJC-54
(2) 600 kcmil (4) 350 kcmil
(4) 500 kcmil
(1) 800 kcmil — (2) 750 kcmil 2.0 (8) 2191_ _-DKC-54 2191_ _-DJC-54
(2) 750 kcmil (4) 500 kcmil
(4) 600 kcmil
800 (4) 800 kcmil — (4) 750 kcmil 6.0 (11),(12), 2191_ _-MKC-54 2191_ _-MJC-54
20” W
Table is continued on the next page.

Table 55 - Bulletin 2191M and 2191F Lug Compartments—Provisions for Basic Sections/Incoming Lines (MLUG) and Outgoing
Feeders (FLUG) (continued)
Rating Cable Provisions Space Catalog Number (13) Delivery
(Amperes) Maximum Number Per Phase Factor Wiring Type A Only—Class I Program
and Maximum Cable Size (5)
Type 1 w/ gasket
Single Cable Lug Multiple Cable Lug
PROVISIONS FOR BASIC SECTIONS
1200 (3) (4) (2) 800 kcmil — (2) 750 kcmil 1.0 (8),(9) 2191_ T-BKC-56 2191_ T-BJC-56 SC-II
(4) 600 kcmil (4) 500 kcmil
(1) 800 kcmil — (2) 750 kcmil 2.0 (8) 2191_ _-DKC-56 2191_ _-DJC-56
(2) 750 kcmil (4) 500 kcmil
(4) 600 kcmil
1200 (4) 800 kcmil — (4) 750 kcmil 6.0 (11),(12), 2191_ _-MKC-56 2191_ _-MJC-56
20” W
1600 — 2191_ _-MKC-58 2191_ _-MJC-58
2000 (6) 800 kcmil — (6) 750 kcmil 2191_ _-MKC-60 2191_ _-MJC-60
(1) 300 A 2191F can only be used with 600 A and 800 A horizontal bus ratings.
(2) 600 A 2191F can only be used with 600 A, 800 A, 1200 A, and 1600 A horizontal bus ratings.
(3) Main and feeder rating must match horizontal bus rating. Full-rated neutral bus for 1200 A, 2191M units requires a 6.0 space factor lug compartment.
(4) Feeder rating must match horizontal bus rating when 2191F is less than 6.0 space factor.
(5) By using a larger wire/lug size than is listed violates bend radius guidelines as listed in NEC/UL/C-UL wire bending tables and voids UL/C-UL listing and CSA certification.
(6) The maximum possible rating of this unit is 300 A. The rating of this unit can be determined by subtracting the current requirements of the units in the 3.0 space factors above or
below this unit. Review NEC/CEC for further information.
(7) The maximum possible rating of this unit is 600 A. The rating of this unit can be determined by subtracting the current requirements of the units in the 3.0 space factors above or
below this unit. Review NEC/CEC for further information.
(8) Cannot be mounted in section containing other frame mounted units (transformer units excluded). Unit compartments 1.0 through 2.0 space factors must be located at top or
bottom of section.
(9) Pullbox required. Must be mounted at top of vertical section. Cannot be mounted in section containing other frame mounted units (transformer units excluded).
(10) Not available with incoming neutral bus.
(11) Shipped in single shipping split only. Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway.
(12) Unit is 4.5 space factors in a 71” high section. The catalog number must be changed from 2191_ _ - M to 2191_ _-J (for example, 2191MT-JKC-52).
• If required, insert M for main or F for feeder (for example, 2191M or 2191F).
• If required, insert T for top mounted or B for bottom mounted (for example, 2191MT or 2191MB).
• If using optional lugs, select from table on page 82. Then add catalog string number to base catalog number (for example, 2191MT-CKC-52-82B500).
Lug Compartments Provisions for Inside Corner, 10” Wide Sections, and Neutrals/
Incoming Line and Outgoing Feeders
• See page 30 for section descriptions.
• Basic configuration includes cover plates, lug pads, and hardware.
• Configure section and lugs separately.
• Metering options not available.
• For 71” high sections, see restrictions on page 30.
2191FT—Top mounted feeder
2191FB—Bottom mounted feeder
2191MT—Top mounted main
2191MB—Bottom mounted main

Table 56 - Lug Compartments Provisions for Inside Corner, 10” Wide Sections, and Neutrals/Incoming Line and Outgoing
Feeders
Rating Cable Provisions (3) Space Catalog Number (5) Delivery
(Amperes) Maximum Number Per Phase Factor Wiring Type A—Class I Program
and Maximum Cable Size
Type 1 w/ gasket
Single Cable Lug
PROVISIONS FOR INSIDE CORNER SECTION
600(1) (4) 800 kcmil (4) 750 kcmil 6.0 (4) 2191_ _-NKC-52 2191_ _-NJC-52 PE-II
800 2191_ _-NKC-54 2191_ _-NJC-54
1200 2191_ _-NKC-56 2191_ _-NJC-56
1600 2191_ _-NKC-58 2191_ _-NJC-58
2000 2191_ _-NKC-60 2191_ _-NJC-60
PROVISIONS FOR 10” WIDE SECTION (2)
600(1) Not Applicable (2) 750 kcmil 6.0 (4) 2191_ _-PKC-52 2191_ _-PJC-52 PE-II
(4) 500 kcmil
800 2191_ _-PKC-54 2191_ _-PJC-54
1200 2191_ _-PKC-56 2191_ _-PJC-56
(1) 600 A 2191F can only be used with 600 A, 800 A, 1200 A, and 1600 A horizontal bus ratings.
(2) This section must be selected as part of a 2-section shipping split and shipped attached to a 20” wide section with standard depth horizontal power bus. It cannot be
selected as free standing or attached to a 25" wide section with a 9” vertical wireway or any 6 space factor, frame-mounted unit. It is not available in NEMA Type 3R, Type
4, or back-to-back construction.
(3) By using a larger wire/lug size than is listed, violates bend radius guidelines as listed in NEC/UL/C-UL wire bending tables and voids UL/C-UL listing and CSA certification.
(4) Not available in 71” high sections, NEMA Type 3R, or Type 4.
• Insert M for main or F for feeder (for example, 2191M or 2191F).
• Insert T for top mounted or B for bottom mounted (for example, 2191MT or 2191MB).
• If optional lugs will be selected, select from table on page 82. Then add catalog string number to base catalog number (for example, 2191MT-CKC-52-82B500).

Dimensiones y tipo de Terminales/Lugs

Table 57 - Lug Dimensions for Bulletin 2191F and 2191M
Lug Size Number of Cables Dimension ’A’ Refer to
Per Lug Figure
MECHANICAL TYPE LUGS
#6-350 kcmil 1 2.13” (54 mm) 1
(1)
#4/0-600 kcmil 1 2.31” (59 mm) 1
(2)
350-800 kcmil 1 2.25” (57 mm) 1
#6-350 kcmil (3) 2 2.13” (54 mm) 2
#4/0-600 kcmil (3) 2 2.13” (54 mm) 2
CRIMP TYPE LUGS (Panduit Type LCC)
250 kcmil 1 2.94” (75 mm) 3
350 kcmil 3.38” (86 mm)
500 kcmil 3.78” (96 mm)
750 kcmil 4.63” (118 mm)
CRIMP TYPE LUGS (Burndy YA-A Series)
250 kcmil 1 2.91” (74 mm) 3
350 kcmil 3.69” (94 mm)
500 kcmil 4.44” (113 mm)
750 kcmil 4.94” (125 mm)
(1) Recommended lug for 1600 A and 2000 A lug compartments.

(2) Two lugs per phase only when used on 1200 A lug compartment.
(3) Used in a horizontal wireway lug compartment when 2 cables per phase are specified,
or when more than 2 cables per phase are specified in a 1.0 or 1.5 space factor 600 A
lug compartment.

Lug Compartments, continued

• CENTERLINE® 2100 motor control centers are rated for use with 75 °C wire. Wire must be sized using the 75 °C column in
NEC/UL/C-UL. The actual temperature rating of the lug is not relevant.
• Refer to the Table 304 for a wire size conversion table.
Table 58 - Lug Selection

Wire/Cable Size Catalog Wire Range
String No. (2)
MECHANICAL TYPE LUGS FOR ALUMINUM/COPPER WIRE (1)
#6 AWG -80_006 #6-350 kcmil
#4 AWG -80_004
#2 AWG -80_002
#1 AWG -80_001
#1/0 AWG -80_1X0
#2/0 AWG -80_2X0
#3/0 AWG -80_3X0
#4/0 AWG -80_4X0
250 kcmil -80_250
300 kcmil -80_300
350 kcmil -80_350
400 kcmil -80_400 #4/0-600 kcmil
500 kcmil -80_500
600 kcmil -80_600
700 kcmil -80_700 350-800 kcmil
750 kcmil -80_750
800 kcmil -80_800
CRIMP TYPE LUGS (Panduit Type LCC) FOR COPPER WIRE
250 kcmil -82_250 —
350 kcmil -82_350
500 kcmil -82_500
750 kcmil -82_750
CRIMP TYPE LUGS (Burndy YA-A Series) FOR ALUMINUM or COPPER WIRE
250 kcmil -83_250 —
350 kcmil -83_350
500 kcmil -83_500(3)
750 kcmil -83_750
(1) Mechanical lugs are available for use with 42 kA bus bracing. For applications requiring over 42 kA
bus bracing, use crimp type lugs only.
(2) Catalog string numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate letter from Lug Quantity
table to identify the number of cables per phase desired (for example, 2191MT-AAC-52-80B4X0).
When optional neutral incoming bus is desired, optional neutral lugs will be the same type as
those for 3-phase cable. Only one option code is needed.
(3) Only one or two cables per phase allowed in 10” wide lug compartment.

Table 59 - Lug Quantity

Letter Number of Cables per Phase (1)
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
E 5
F 6
(1) If optional full-rated incoming neutral bus (see page 153)

is specified, the quantity and size/type of the lugs on
neutral lug pad is the same as the 3-phase lugs. When
optional half-rated incoming neutral bus (see page 153) is
specified and one or two lugs per phase are specified,
one lug is provided on the half-rated neutral riser. When
three or four lugs are specified, two lugs are provided.
When five or six lugs are specified, three lugs are
provided on half-rated neutral riser.

Bulletin 2191M Lug Compartments/Incoming Line—Dimensions

• Lug pads shown on page 86 are drilled for 2-hole NEMA 1.75” spacing.
Table 60 - Top Entry(1)

Compartment Ratings Refer to Dimensions A Dimension B Maximum Maximum
Size (Amperes) Figure No. of Number of Lugs
(2)
(Space Factor) Cables per per Phase
Phase
L1 L2 L3 Total Available Single Double
Space with Cable Cable
Pullbox
In horiz. WW 600 1 — — — 13.19” (335 mm) 2 1 1
(pullbox
required)
1.0 300 2 12.81” (325 mm) 12.81” (325 mm) 12.81” (325 mm) 24.81” (630 mm) 2 2 —
1.0 600 2 12.81” (325 mm) 12.81” (325 mm) 12.81” (325 mm) 24.81” (630 mm) 4 2 2
1.0 800 3 — — — 21.56” (548 mm) 4 4 N/A
(pullbox 1200
required)
1.5 600 2 19.31” (490 mm) 19.31” (490 mm) 19.31” (490 mm) 31.31” (795 mm) 4 2 2
800 3 15.75” (400 mm) 15.75” (400 mm) 15.75” (400 mm) 27.75” (705 mm) 4 4 N/A
(3) (3) (3)
16.63” (422 mm) 16.63” (422 mm) 16.63” (422 mm) 28.63” (727 mm) 2 2
2.0 800 3 20.00” (508 mm) 20.00” (508 mm) 20.00” (508 mm) 32.00” (813 mm) 4 4
1200
20.88” (530 mm) (3) 20.88” (530 mm) (3) 20.88” (530 mm) (3) 32.88” (835 mm) 2 2
6.0 600 4 37.63” (956 mm) 44.13” (1121 mm) 50.63” (1286 mm) — 4 4
(20” wide) 800
1200
1600
2000 4 37.63” (956 mm) 44.13” (1121 mm) 50.63” (1286 mm) — 6 6
6.0 600 5 37.63” (956 mm) 44.13” (1121 mm) 50.63” (1286 mm) — 4 4
(corner section) 800
1200
1600
2000
6.0 600 6 35.88” (911 mm) 42.38” (1076 mm) 48.88” (1242 mm) — 4 4
(10” wide) 800
1200
(1) Depending on wire size and wires per phase, pullbox is required to meet wire bending radius as specified by NEC/UL/C-UL.
(2) See page 86 for figures.
(3) When cable size selected limits the user to two single lugs per phase, Dimension A is measured from center set of holes in lug pad. See Figure 3 on page 86.

Table 61 - Bottom Entry

Compartment Ratings Refer to Dimensions A Maximum No. of Maximum Number of
Size (Amperes) Figure Cables per Phase Lugs per Phase
(1)
(Space Factor)
L1 L2 L3 Single Double
Cable Cable
1.0 300 2 12.81” (325 mm) 12.81” (325 mm) 12.81” (325 mm) 2 2 N/A
1.0 600 2 12.81” (325 mm) 12.81” (325 mm) 12.81” (325 mm) 4 2 2
1.5 600 2 19.31” (490 mm) 19.31” (490 mm) 19.31” (490 mm) 4 2 2
800 3 15.75” (400 mm) 15.75” (400 mm) 15.75” (400 mm) 4 4 N/A
(2) 16.63” (422 mm) (2) 16.63” (422 mm) (2) 2 2
16.63” (422 mm)
2.0 800 3 20.00” (508 mm) 20.00” (508 mm) 20.00” (508 mm) 4 4
1200 (2)
20.88” (530 mm) 20.88” (530 mm) (2) 20.88” (530 mm) (2) 2 2
6.0 600 4 50.63” (1286 mm) 44.13” (1121 mm) 37.63” (956 mm) 4 4
(20” wide) 800
1200
1600
2000 4 50.63” (1286 mm) 44.13” (1121 mm) 37.63” (956 mm) 6 6
6.0 600 5 50.63” (1286 mm) 44.13” (1121 mm) 37.63” (956 mm) 4 4
(corner section) 800
1200
1600
2000
6.0 600 6 48.88” (1242 mm) 42.38” (1076 mm) 35.88” (911 mm) 4 4
(10” wide) 800
1200
(1) See page 86 for figures.

(2) When cable size selected limits the user to two single lugs per phase, Dimension A is measured from center set of holes in lug pad. See Figure 3 on page 86.

Bulletin 2191M Lug Compartments/Incoming Line—Dimensions

Dimensions for drawings are provided on page 84.
"B"
"B" "
20.00
"A1" "A"
3.00
"A" 1.25 TYP
4.18
6.00 4.00 4.00 6.00
FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2 FIGURE 3
Phase A vertical bus on top incoming

2.0 space factors and Phase C vertical
bus on bottom incoming 2.0 space
factors are not required or supplied.
"A"
"A" "A"
(L1)
(L1) (L1)
"A"
"A" "A" (L2)
(L2) (L2) "A"
(L3)
"A"
)
(L3)
FIGURE 4 FIGURE 5 FIGURE 6
TIP All lug pads shown accept NEMA standard 2-hole lugs 1.75” on center using 0.5” hardware.

Bulletin 2192F and 2192M Feeder and Main Fusible Disconnect Switch Units
(FDS, MFDS)
Bulletin 2192M and 2192F are fusible disconnect switches. These switches are available with ratings up to 2000 A. The 2192F is a
plug-in unit for ratings from 30…200 A and frame mounted for ratings 400 A and above. The 2192M is frame mounted (rigidly
mounted and hardwired) in the structure for all ratings (100…2000 A). The bolted pressure switch design is used for 2192 units
rated 600…2000 A.
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2192F and 2192M

Fusible Disconnect Feeders and Mains
• 30…200 A Feeders are available as Plug-in Units
• 400…1200 A Feeders and all Mains are Frame Mounted
• 600…2000 A units have Visual Blade Bolted Pressure Switches
Table 62 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2192F and 2192M Fusible Disconnect Feeders and Mains
2192F T - B K C - 24J - **
Bulletin Number Mounting Maximum Trip Ratings NEMA Enclosure Type Line Voltage Fuse, Clip Rating and Class Options
Code Maximum Trip Code Line Voltage Code Fuse, Clip Rating
Code Type Ratings P 220/230V and Class
2192F Fusible Disconnect B(2) 30 A
Switch Feeder (FDS) A Up to 250V See Fuse Clip Sizes/Type on
C(2) 60 A N 380V page 89.
2192M Main Fusible
Disconnect Switch D 100 A KN 400V
(MFDS) E 200 A I 415V
F 400 A B 480V Code Options
G 600 A C Up to 600V See Options section
H 800 A beginning on page 141.
J 1200 A
K 1600 A
Code Mounting
L 2000 A
T (1) Top
B (1) Bottom Code NEMA Enclosure Type
(2) Only available for Fusible K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with
Z 0.5 Space Factor
Disconnect Switch Feeder gasket
(1) A ’T’ or ’B’ is required for all 2192M units. J NEMA Type 12
units and only 400A and above
2192F units.

Bulletin 2192F Fusible Disconnect Switch—Feeders (FDS)

• Select disconnect switch rating based upon 125% of actual load amperes. Refer to NEC/CEC.
2192FZ—Plug-in unit, 0.5 space factor, 30 A only.
2192F—Plug-in unit, 30…200 A.
2192FT—Top-mounted feeder, 400 A are top-fed, connect load to bottom of switch.
2192FT—Top-mounted feeder, 600…1200 A are reverse-fed, connect load to top of switch.
2192FB—Bottom-mounted feeder, 400…1200 A are top-fed, connect load to bottom of switch.
• Refer to Table 303 for horsepower ratings.
Table 63 - 2192F FDS Catalog Numbers

Switch Rating Fuse Clip Load Lugs Provided Space Catalog Number (6) Delivery
(Amperes) Factor Wiring Type A Only—Class I Program
Rating Class Cables Cable/ Wire NEMA Type 1 or NEMA Type 12
(Amperes) / Wire Size Type Type 1 w/ gasket
Phase Range
30 These units have horizontal 30 CC, J 1 #14-#8 CU 0.5(2) 2192FZ-BKC-__ 2192FZ-BJC-__ SC
operating handles and Bulletin AWG
194R fused disconnect switch.
See page 27 for information on
installation into series E-J
sections.
30 Wired to pull-apart terminal 30 CC, J, 1 #14-#4 1.0 2192F-BK_-__ 2192F-BJ_-__
blocks as standard. For unit R, H AWG
without power terminal blocks,
60 add 110 to the catalog number 60 J, R, 1 CU 1.0 2192F-CK_-__ 2192F-CJ_-__
string (N/C). Those units are H
supplied with a separately
mounted disconnect switch and
fuse block.
Dual 30 Dual disconnects use Cutler- 30 2192F-BK_-2424__ 2192F-BJ_-2424__
(1) (2)
, Hammer fusible switches. Duals
must have identical fuse clip
Dual types. Only 30 A and 60 A 60/30 2192F-CK_-2524__ 2192F-CJ_-2524__
60/30 disconnects with 600V Class H
(1),(2)
and R fuse clips are wired to
pull-apart terminal blocks.
Dual 60 Dual units require two sets of 60 2192F-CK_-2525__ 2192F-CJ_-2525__
(1) (2)
, fuses. The fuse size code must
correspond to the respective
Dual fuse clip designator code. The 100/30 1 #14-1/0 CU 1.5 2192F-DK_-2624__ 2192F-DJ_-2624__
100/30 AWG
(1),(2) fuse manufacturer for both #14-4 AWG
fuses must be the same (for
Dual example, 2192F-CAC-2524J- 100/60 2192F-DK_-2625__ 2192F-DJ_-2625__
100/60 609602G).
(1) (2) Larger switch must be mounted
,
on the left side.
Dual 100 100 1 #14-1/0 CU 2192F-DK_-2626__ 2192F-DJ_-2626__
(1),(2) AWG
100 100 1 #8-1/0 CU 2192F-DK_-__ 2192F-DJ_-__
AWG
200 200 1 #6-4/0 CU 2.0(3) 2192F-EK_-__ 2192F-EJ_-__
AWG
400(2) 400 2 #1/0-250 CU 2.5 (4) 2192F_-FK_-__ 2192F_-FJ_-__ SC-II
kcmil

Table 63 - 2192F FDS Catalog Numbers (continued)

Switch Rating Fuse Clip Load Lugs Provided Space Catalog Number (6) Delivery
(Amperes) Factor Wiring Type A Only—Class I Program
Rating Class Cables Cable/ Wire NEMA Type 1 or NEMA Type 12
(Amperes) / Wire Size Type Type 1 w/ gasket
Phase Range
600(2) Bolted pressure contact switch. 600 J, R, 2 #2-600 CU/ 3.5 (5) 2192F_-GK_-__ 2192F_-GJ_-__ SC-II
Viewing window on door for H, L kcmil AL
visual verification of
800(2) disconnect blades. 800 L 3 #6-350 3.5 (5) 2192F_-HKC-__ 2192F_-HJC-__
kcmil
1200(2) 1200 4 #6-350 3.5 (5) 2192F_-JKC-__ 2192F_-JJC-__
kcmil
(1) Not available with DSA (options 11DSA2 and 11DSA3).

(2) Not compatible with E300™ Electronic Overloads (-7FE3___).
(3) If E300 electronic overload is selected (-7FE3___), add 0.5 space factor.
(4) Frame mounted unit. Must be located at top or bottom of section.
(5) Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway next to this unit. Must be located at top or bottom of section. Cannot be mounted in section containing other frame mounted units.
For 400…1200 A, insert T for Top mounted or B for Bottom mounted (for example, 2192FT- or 2192FB-).
Unless already selected, select the voltage from Fuse Clip Voltage table (for example, 2192F-BKC).
Select the fuse clip designator from Fuse Clip Sizes/Types table (for example, 2192F-BKC-24J). For duals, add letter suffix only—numbers are already supplied in catalog number
(for example,2192F-CKA-2525J).
If power fuse is selected, select from table on page 301 (for example,, 2192F-BKC-24J-603G). Double code number for duals (for example, 603603G).
For fuse rating, based on disconnect rating, see publication 2100-TD003.
If optional load lugs are selected, select from table on page 91. Add option number to base catalog number (for example, 2192F-GKC-29R-603G-82B500).
Table 64 - Fuse Clip

Fuse Clip Voltage Fuse Clip Sizes/Types and UL Listed Short Circuit Current Ratings for Fusible Disconnect Switch Units (2192FT, 2192FB, 2192MT,
2192MB)
Fuse Clip Voltage Fuse Clip Fuse Clip Designator Available Short
Voltage Code Type (Amperes) Circuit Amperes
(rms symmetrical)
30 A (4) 60 A (4) 100 A 200 A 400 A 600 A 800 A 1200 A 1600 A 2000 A through 600V
220…230 P (2) J 24J 25J 26J 27J 28J 29J — — — — 100 kA
240 A (2) R 24R 25R 26R 27R 28R 29R — — — — 100 kA
250 A (1) H 24 25 26 27 28 29 — — — — 10 kA
380 N (2) L — — — — — 23L (5) 24L 25L 26L 27L 100 kA
400 KN (2) CC 24C — — — — — — — — — 100 kA
415 I (2) Non-fused (3) — — — — — 00N 00N 00N 00N 00N 100 kA (6)
480 B (2)
600 C
(1) Not available for 1600 A or 2000 A 2192M.
(2) These voltage codes are to be used only when ground fault protection (option 88GF) is selected on 1600…2000 A 2192M units.
(3) Available on mains (2192MT, 2192MB) only. This is 100% rated and can be supplied in NEMA 1, 1 with gasket, and 12. Not available in NEMA type 3R or 4 enclosures. Not available as
standard with 100 kA series coordinated bus bracing, consult factory.
(4) Only available for Fusible Disconnect Switch Feeder units.
(5) For 600 A, 100% rated, Class L fuses are the only valid option. 23L indicates provision for a 601A, Class L.
(6) Short circuit current rating is 100 kA only when protected upstream with Class L fuses that are sized in accordance with particular switch (for example, 800 A upstream fuses are to be used with 800 A
switch or 2000 A upstream fuses are to be used with 2000 A switch).

Bulletin 2192M Fusible Disconnect Switch—Mains (MFDS)

• Select disconnect switch rating based upon 125% of actual load amperes. Refer to NEC/UL/C-UL.
• Mains are suitable for use as service entrance per NEC (UL) and CEC (CSA). If application is a four-wire system, a neutral
connection plate rated for 280 A is available. Select on pages 33, 140, 154, and 310. If a Neutral connection greater then 280 A
is required, refer to page 33 and page 154 or contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales
representative.
• Mains rated 1000 A and above may require ground fault protection. For 1000…1200 A applications that require ground fault
protection, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative. For 1600…2000 A
applications that require ground fault protection, see option 88GF on page 152.
• Non-fused mains are available in 600…2000 A. See Fuse Clip Sizes/Types table on page 89.
2192MT—Top-mounted main, 100…2000 A are top-fed.
2192MB—Bottom-mounted main, 100…400 A are top-fed.
2192MB—Bottom-mounted main, 600…2000 A are reverse-fed.
• Top- and bottom-mounted mains are designed with adequate space to route cables to lugs. Give special consideration to the
mounting of the CTs for a metering device. Consider the addition of a pull box.
• Includes line terminal guard.
Table 65 - Bulletin 2192M Fusible Disconnect Switch—Mains (MFDS)

Switch Fuse Clip Line Lugs Provided Space Catalog Number (8) Delivery
Rating Factor Wiring Type A Only—Class I Program
(Amperes)
Rating Class Cables Cable/Wire Size Wire NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 12
(Amperes) /Phase Range (4) Type and Type 1 w/
gasket
100 100 J, R, H 1 #14-1/0 AWG (CU) CU/AL 1.5 (5) 2192M_-DK_-__ 2192M_-DJ_-__ SC-II
#12-1/0 AWG (AL)
200 200 1 #6-4/0 AWG CU 2.0 (5) 2192M_-EK_-__ 2192M_-EJ_-__
(5)
400 400 2 1/0-250 kcmil CU 2.5 2192M_-FK_-__ 2192M_-FJ_-__
(1),(2),(3) (6)
600 600 J, R, H, 2 #2-600 kcmil CU/AL 3.5 2192M_-GK_-__ 2192M_-GJ_-__
L
800 (1),(2),(3) 800 L 3 #6-350 kcmil CU/AL 2192M_-HKC-__ 2192M_-HJC-__
(1),(2),(3)
1200 1200 4 #6-350 kcmil CU/AL 2192M_-JKC-__ 2192M_-JJC-__
(1),(2),(3)
1600 1600 4 #2-600 kcmil CU/AL 6.0 2192M_-KK_-__ 2192M_-KJ_-__
(1),(2),(3)
20” D 35” W (7)
2000 2000 6 #2-600 kcmil CU/AL 2192M_-LK_-__ 2192M_-LJ_-__
(1) Fusible disconnect switch is a bolted pressure switch. No vertical wireway. Not available in NEMA Type 3R or Type 4 for 1600 A and 2000 A. The 600…1200 A units have viewing
window on door for visual verification of disconnect blades.
(2) Units having 100% ratings are available for these fusible disconnect switches for NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket only. Non-fused switches are 100% rated and available in
NEMA 1, 1 with gasket, and 12. See options on page 159 to select. For 100% rated 1600 A and 2000 A units, no top or bottom wireway is present above or below the unit and the unit
must be located at either end of the motor control center lineup.
(3) When used with a 3-phase, 4-wire power system, horizontal neutral bus and incoming neutral bus is required.
(4) If optional full-rated incoming neutral bus (see page 153) is specified, the quantity and size/type of the lugs on neutral lug pad will be the same as the 3-phase lugs. When optional
half-rated incoming neutral bus (see page 153) is specified and one or two lugs per phase are specified, one lug is provided on the half-rated neutral riser. When three or four lugs
are specified, two lugs are provided. When five or six lugs are specified, three lugs are provided on half-rated neutral riser.
(5) Frame mounted unit. Must be located at top or bottom of section.
(6) Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway next to this unit. Must be located at top or bottom of section. May not be mounted in section containing other frame
mounted units.
(7) Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway. Horizontal bus is 5” deeper than standard. A special bus splice kit is provided when this unit is supplied adjacent to a
section with standard depth bus.
• Insert T for Top mounted or B for Bottom mounted (for example, 2192MT- or 2192MB-).
• Unless already selected, select the voltage code from table on page 89 (for example, 2192MT-GKC).
• Then select the appropriate fuse clip designator from Fuse Clip Sizes/Types on page 89 (for example, 2192MT-GKC-29J).
• If power fuse is selected, select from table on page 301 (for example, 2192MT-GKC-29J-629G).
• For fuse rating, based on disconnect rating, see publication 2100-TD003.
• If optional line lugs are selected, select from Optional Crimp Lugs for Bulletins 2192FT, 2192FB, 2192MT and 2192MB table below (for example,2192MT-GKC-29J-629G-82B500).

Table 66 - Optional Crimp Lugs for Bulletins 2192FT, 2192FB, 2192MT and 2192MB(1)
Switch Size Type of Lug Cables Cable/Wire Size Wire Type Option 2192FT 2192MT
/ or Range Number (2) 2192FB 2192MB
Phase
200 A Mechanical Only 1 #6-250 kcmil CU 81A250  
400 A Panduit Type LCC 2 250 kcmil CU 82B250 (3),(4)
1 500 kcmil CU 82A500  (3),(4),(5)
Burndy YA-A Series 2 250 kcmil CU/AL 83B250 (3),(4)
,
1 500 kcmil CU/AL 83A500 (3),(4) (5)
600 A Panduit Type LCC 2 500 kcmil CU 82B500 (4) (4)
Burndy YA-A Series 2 CU/AL 83B500 (4) (4)
800 A Panduit Type LCC 3 CU 82C500 (4) (4)
(4)
Burndy YA-A Series 3 CU/AL 83C500  (4)
1200 A Panduit Type LCC 4 CU 82D500 (4) (4)
Burndy YA-A Series 4 CU/AL 83D500 (4) (4)
1600 A Panduit Type LCC 5 CU 82E500 (4)
Burndy YA-A Series 5 CU/AL 83E500 (4)
2000 A Panduit Type LCC 6 CU 82F500 (4)
Burndy YA-A Series 6 CU/AL 83F500 (4)
(1) Basic configuration includes set of lugs for three phases (and lug pads for the 400 A switch size).
(2) If optional full-rated incoming neutral bus (see page 153) is specified, the quantity and size/type of the lugs on neutral lug pad will be the same as the 3-phase lugs.
When optional half-rated incoming neutral bus (see page 153) is specified and one or two lugs per phase are specified, one lug is provided on the half-rated neutral
riser. When three or four lugs are specified, two lugs are provided. When five or six lugs are specified, three lugs are provided on half-rated neutral riser.
(3) For top entry of incoming cables only.
(4) Disconnect supplied with lug pad assembly, reference page 311 for additional lugs.
(5) Requires pullbox. Select on page 36.

Bulletin 2193F and 2193M Feeder and Main Circuit Breaker Units (FCB, MCB)
Bulletin 2193F and 2193M are circuit breaker units with trip ratings available from 15…3000 A. These units are available with
thermal magnetic trips up to 250 A and electronic trips 300 A and above.
• All trip ratings above 300 A are electronic trip, which includes long, short, and instantaneous (LSI) protection as standard.
• Ground fault protection (LSIG) is available as an option on 600…800 A.
• Ground Fault Protection and Maintenance Mode (LSIG-MM) is provided as standard for 1200…3000 A circuit breakers.
• Electronic trip (LSI) is available as an option on H-frame and J-frame circuit breakers.
The 2193F is a plug-in unit for ratings up to 300 A and is a frame mounted unit for ratings 400 A and above. The 2193M is frame
mounted for all ratings.
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2193F and 2193M Circuit Breaker Feeders and Mains
• 125 A and 250 A Frame Feeders through 225 A Trip are Plug-in Units
• 400 A Frame with 300 A trip is a Plug-in Unit
• 400…3000 A Frame Feeders at 400 A Trip and above and all Mains are Frame Mounted
• Mains 600…800 A available with Built in Ground Fault Protection
• Mains 1200…3000 A has Ground Fault Protection and Maintenance Mode as standard.
Table 67 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2193F and 2193M Circuit Breaker Feeders and Mains
2193F T - B K C - 30TGM - **
Bulletin Number Mounting Max Trip Rating NEMA Enclosure Type Line Voltage Circuit Breaker Trip Size and Type Options
Code Type Code Trip Rating Code Line Voltage Code Circuit Breaker Trip
2193F Circuit Breaker A 125 A B Up to 480V Size and Type
Feeder (FCB) B 125 A C Up to 600V See table on page 96.
2193M Main Circuit Breaker C 250 A
(MCB) D 400 A
E 600 A Code Options
F 800 A Code NEMA Enclosure Type See Options section
beginning on page 141.
G 1200 A K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1
J 2000 A with gasket
K 2500 A J NEMA Type 12
Code Mounting
L 3000 A
T (1) Top
B (1) Bottom
Z 0.5 Space Factor
(1) A ’T’ or ’B’ is required for all 2193M
units and all 400A frame and
larger Bulletin 2193F units.

Bulletin 2193F3-Pole Feeder Circuit Breaker (FCB)

• See Table 292 for circuit breaker characteristics.
• Continuous current rating based on 40 °C ambient.
• Select circuit breaker frame and trip size based upon 125% of actual load amperes. Refer to NEC/CEC. Contact your local
Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative if 100% rated circuit breakers are required.
• Two circuit breakers with trip current up to 100 A can be dual mounted in one plug-in unit for TGM, THM, THX, THML, THXL,
and TJU frames. To specify dual mounted units, add two numbers from Table 69 to base catalog number (for example,
2193F-AJB-3031TGM). Half space factor units cannot be dual-mounted.
2193F—Plug-in unit, 15…225 A.
2193FZ—Plug-in unit, 0.5 space factor, 15…175 A.
2193FT—Top-mounted feeder, 400 A are top-fed, connect load to bottom of switch.
2193FT—Top-mounted feeder, 600…1200 A are reverse-fed, connect load to top of switch.
2193FB—Bottom-mounted feeder, 400…1200 A are top-fed, connect load to bottom of switch.
• Includes line terminal guards for all circuit breaker units.
Table 68 - 2193F Circuit Breaker Feeder Catalog Numbers

Frame Range of Available Short Circuit Current Rating Space Catalog Number(21) Wiring Type A only - Delivery
Trips (Amperes) (RMS Symmetrical Amperes) Factor Class 1 Program
Rating Trip Suffix 208V/ 380V/ 600V NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 12
(Ampere) Style(6) 240V 400V Type 1 w/Gasket
415V/
480V
125 A Thermal TGM 15…100 A 100k 65k ----- 0.5 2193FZ-AKB-_TGM 2193FZ-AJB-_TGM SC
(16) (17)
A(1) Mag
15…125 A 100k 65k ----- 1.0(18) 2193F-AKB-_TGM 2193F-AJB-_TGM SC
125 A Thermal THM 15…125 A 100k 65k ----- 1.0(18) 2193F-BKC-_THM 2193F-BJC-_THM SC
B(2) (3) Mag
THX ----- 100k 35k 2193F-BKC-_THX 2193F-BJC-_THX SC
LSI THML 25 A, 60 A, 100 A, 100k 65k 25k 2193F-BKC-_THML 2193F-BJC-_THML PE
125 A(10)
THXL ----- 100k 35k 2193F-BKC-_THXL 2193F-BJC-_THXL PE
Thermal THM 15…100 A 100k 65k 25k 0.5 2193FZ-BKC-_THM 2193FZ-BJC-_THM SC
(16) (17)
Mag
THX ----- 100k 35k 2193FZ-BKC-_THX 2193FZ-BJC-_THX SC
(10)
LSI THML 25 A, 60 A, 100 A 100k 65k 25k 2193FZ-BKC-_THML 2193FZ-BJC-_THML PE
THXL ----- 100k 35k 2193FZ-BKC-_THXL 2193FZ-BJC-_THXL PE
160 A Thermal TJU 30…150 A ----- ----- 100k 0.5(17) 2193FZ-CKC-_TJU 2193FZ-CJC-_TJU SC
C(3) Mag
TJU 30…150A ----- ----- 100k 1.0(18) 2193F-CKC-_TJU 2193F-CJC-_TJU SC
LSI TJUL 15 A, 40 A, 60 A, ----- ----- 100k 2193FZ-CKC-_TJUL 2193FZ-CJC-_TJUL PE
100 A, 150 A
TJUL 15 A, 40 A, 60 A, ----- ----- 100k 2193F-CKC-_TJUL 2193F-CJC-_TJUL PE
100 A, 150 A

Table 68 - 2193F Circuit Breaker Feeder Catalog Numbers (continued)

415V/
480V
250 A Thermal TJM 70, 90…225 A(9) 100k 65k 25k 1.5(19) 2193F-CKC-_TJM 2193F-CJC-_TJM SC
C Mag
Thermal TJX ----- 100k 35k 2193F-CKC-_TJX 2193F-CJC-_TJX SC
Mag
LSI TJML 100 A, 150 A, 225 A (10) 100k 65k 25k 2193F-CKC-_TJML 2193F-CJC-_TJML PE
(11)
LSI TJXL ----- 100k 35k 2193F-CKC-_TJXL 2193F-CJC-_TJXL PE
Thermal TJM 70, 90…175 A 100k 65k 25k 0.5 2193FZ-CKC-_TJM 2193FZ-CJC-_TJM SC
(16) (17)
Mag
Thermal TJX ----- 100k 35k 2193FZ-CKC-_TJX 2193FZ-CJC-_TJX SC
Mag
LSI TJML 100 A, 150 A, 200 A 100k 65k 25k 2193FZ-CKC-_TJML 2193FZ-CJC-_TJML PE
(10) (12)
LSI TJXL ----- 100k 35k 2193FZ-CKC-_TJXL 2193FZ-CJC-_TJXL PE
400 A LSI TKM 300 A, 400 A (13) 100k 65k 25k 2.0(20) 2193F_-DKC-_TKM 2193F_-DJC-_TKM PE
D(4) (17)
LSI TKX ----- 100k 65k 2193F_-DKC-_TKX 2193F_-DJC-_TKX PE
LSI TKU ----- ----- 100k 2193F_-DKC-_TKU 2193F_-DJC-_TKU PE
(10) (20)
800 A LSI TMM 600 A 100k 65k 25k 2.0 2193F_-EKC-_TMM 2193F_-EJC-_TMM SC
E(4) (17)
LSI TMX ----- 100k 42k 2193F_-EKC-_TMX 2193F_-EJC-_TMX SC
LSIG(7) TMMG 100k 65k 25k 2193F_-EKC-_TMMG 2193F_-EJC-_TMMG PE
LSIG(7) TMXG ----- 100k 42k 2193F_-EKC-_TMXG 2193F_-EJC-_TMXG PE
(10)
800 A LSI TMM 800 A 100k 65k 25k 2.5 2193F_-FKC-_TMM 2193F_-FJC-_TMM SC
F(4) (17)
LSI TMX ----- 100k 42k 2193F_-FKC-_TMX 2193F_-FJC-_TMX SC
LSIG(7) TMMG 800 A(10) 100k 65k 25k 2193F_-FKC-_TMMG 2193F_-FJC-_TMMG PE
LSIG(7) TMXG ----- 100k 42k 2193F_-FKC-_TMXG 2193F_-FJC-_TMXG PE
1200 A LSIG- TNMG 400 A, 600 A, 800 A, 100k 65k ----- 3.5 2193F_-GKC-_TNMG 2193F_-GJC-_TNMG PE
G(4) (5) (17) MM(7) (8)
1000 A, 1200 A(14)
LSIG- TNXG(8 ----- 100k 65k 2193F_-GKC-_TNXG 2193F_-GJC-_TNXG PE
MM(7) )

Table 68 - 2193F Circuit Breaker Feeder Catalog Numbers (continued)

415V/
480V
3000 A LSIG- TRUG 1000 A, 1200 A, 100k 100k 100k 6.0 2193F_-JKC-_TRUG 2193F_-JJC-_TRUG PE
J(4) (17) MM(7) 1500 A, 2000 A(15) 30" W
100k 100k 100k 15" D PE
3000 A LSIG- 2500 A(15) 100k 100k 100k 6.0 2193F_-KKC-_TRUG 2193F_-KJC-_TRUG PE
K(4) (17) MM(7) 30" W
15" D
(1) Non-interchangeable trip breakers.

(2) Non-interchangeable trip breakers at 40 A or below.
(3) Option -11DSA2 or -11DSA3 not available with 2193FZ units.
(4) Frame mounted unit must be mounted at top or bottom of section. Not compatible with E300 Electronic Overloads (-7FE3___).
(5) Standard design supports 500MCM max. wire size. For larger cables contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative for alternate design
considerations.
(6) LSI = Long - Short - Instantaneous Electronic Trip
LSIG = Long - Short - Instantaneous - Ground Electronic Trip
LSIG-MM = Long - Short - Instantaneous - Ground - Maintenance Mode
Thermal Mag = Thermal Magnetic
HI-MAG = NOT UL listed. Internal auxiliary contacts (-790_) are not available on this breaker. Unit supplied with molded case switch with fixed high magnetic trip. Requires upstream
current limiting branch protection. See molded case switch markings for proper selection of this protection. Ratings listed are the maximum fault currents that can be applied to the
devices.
(7) The ground fault protection system is suited for solidly grounded system. Ground fault trip range is adjustable from 0.2 to 1 times the trip current rating of the circuit breaker rating
plug. The time delay setting can be adjusted from 0.1…0.8 seconds.
(8) Only available as top mounted at 600V unless MCC is rated as Device Limited with ArcShield™ technology.
(9) Breaker codes -45TJM, -45TJX, -46TJM, and -46TJX are not available with E300 Electronic Overloads (-7FE3___). Use a circuit breaker with an electronic trip (__TJ_L) instead.
(10) Value shown is max setting of trip unit. Trip unit is electronic, adjustable by 2% increments to 40…100% of maximum value selected. 225 A maximum value due to rating of plug-in
stab.
(11) 225A unit is supplied with a 250A trip unit. Unit ships set to 225A which is also the maximum setting allowed.
(12) 200 A unit is supplied with a 250 A trip unit. Unit ships set to 200 A which is also the maximum setting allowed.
(13) Value shown is max setting of trip unit. Trip unit is electronic, adjustable by 4% to 40…100% of maximum value selected.
(14) Value shown is max setting of trip unit. Trip unit is electronic, adjustable by 4% or 2.5% increments to 40…100% of maximum value selected
(15) Value shown is max setting of trip unit. Trip unit is electronic, adjustable by 2.5% increments to 40…100% of maximum value selected
(16) These units have horizontal operating handles.
(17) Not available with E300 electronic overloads (-7FE3___).
(18) For 125 A trip with E300 electronic overload (-7FE3___), add 0.5 space factor.
(19) For 150 A or greater trip with E300 electronic overload (-7FE3___), add 0.5 space factor.
(20) A 300 A trip is a plug-in unit, a 400 A trip is a frame mounted unit.
• Select the trip current from Table 69 (for example, 2193F-AKC-40TGM).
• If optional load lugs will be selected, select from Table 70 (for example, 2193F-AKC-40TGM-80A350).

Bulletin 2193F 3-Pole Feeder Circuit Breaker (FCB), continued

• CENTERLINE 2100 motor control centers are rated for use with 75 °C wires. Wire must be sized by using the 75 °C column
in NEC Table 310-16. The actual temperature rating of the lug is not relevant.
Corriente según código FCB
Table 69 - Trip Current
Trip Current (Amperes) Number Trip Current (Amperes) Number
15 30 250 46
20 31 300 48
25 61 400 50
30 32 600 52
40 34 800 54
50 35 1000 55
60 36 1200 56
70 37 1600 58
80 38 2000 60
90 39 2500 64
100 40 3000 65
125 41
150 42
175 43
200 44
225 45

Table 70 - Mechanical Lugs for Feeders(1)

Frame Type Rating Trip Space Cables/ Cable/Wire Size Wire Option Number (2)
(Amperes) Current Factor Phase Range Type
(Amperes)
Mechanical Lugs
TGM 125 15…125 1 #14…1/0 AWG CU
THM, THX, THML, THXL 125 15…125 1.0 and 1 #14…1/0 AWG CU
larger
0.5 1 #14…1/0 AWG CU/AL
TJM, TJX, TJU, TJML, TJXL, 250 70…250 1.5 or 1 #14…1/0 AWG CU/AL
TJUL larger
#10…250 kcmil CU
#14…1/0 AWG CU/AL 80A1X0
#10...350 kcmil CU 80A350
#6...350 kcmil AL
60 or less 0.5 #14…2/0 AWG CU/AL
70…225 #6...350 kcmil CU
TKM, TKX, TKU, TK_L, TK_G 400 300 1 250…500 kcmil CU
CU/AL 80A500
400 2 #2/0…250 kcmil CU
CU/AL 80B250
TMM, TMX, TM_G 800 600 2 #3/0...350 kcmil CU
250...500 kcmil CU/AL 80B500
800 3 #2/0...350 kcmil CU
#2/0…400 kcmil CU/AL 80C400
TN_G 1200 600…1200 4 #4/0...500 kcmil CU
#4/0…500 kcmil CU/AL 80D500
TRUG 2000 1000…1600 4 #2…600 kcmil CU/AL
2000 6
2500 2500 7
(1) Lugs are designed for use with breaker frame. Standard crimp or mechanical lugs cannot be used without special lug pad assembly.
(2) If optional full-rated incoming neutral bus is specified, the quantity and size/type of the lug(s) on neutral lug pad will be the same as the 3-phase lugs. When optional
half-rated incoming neutral bus is specified and one or two lugs per phase are specified, one lug is provided on the half-rated neutral riser. When three or four lugs
are specified, two lugs are provided. When five or six lugs are specified, three lugs are provided on half-rated neutral riser.

Bulletin 2193M 3-Pole Main Circuit Breaker (MCB)

• See Table 292 for circuit breaker characteristics.
• Select circuit breaker frame and trip size based upon 125% of actual load amperes. Continuous current rating based on 40
°C ambient. Refer to NEC/CEC.
• Mains are suitable for use as service entrance per NEC (UL) and CEC (CSA). If application is a four-wire system, a neutral
plate rated for 280 A is available, refer to page 33, 140, 154, and 310. If a neutral greater then 280 A is required, see page 33
or 154 or contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative. Mains rated 1000 A and
above may require ground fault protection. Refer to NEC/UL/C-UL.
• Main Breakers supplied with internal ground fault protection (breaker code T_ _ G) are supplied with a neutral CT for use on
a 3 Phase, 4 Wire, Solidly Grounded ’WYE’ System. Circuit breakers with internal ground fault protection are not designed
for use on a Delta System, Ungrounded ’WYE’ System, or Impedance Grounded ’WYE’ System.
• Main units are frame mounted. They must be located at the top or bottom of the section.
2193MT—Top-mounted main, 150…3000 A are top-fed.
2193MB—Bottom-mounted main, 150…400 A are top-fed.
2193MB—Bottom-mounted main, 600…3000 A are reverse-fed.
• All trip ratings about 300 A are electronic trip, which includes long, short, and instantaneous (LSI) protection as standard.
• Groud fault protection (LSIG) is available as an option on 600 A and above and as standard on R-frame circuit breakers.
• Electronic trip (LSI) is available as an option on H-frame and J-frame circuit breakers.
• Includes line terminal guard for all circuit breaker units.
Table 71 - Bulletin 2193M 3-Pole Main Circuit Breaker (MCB)

Frame Range of Short Circuit Current Rating Space Catalog Number(13) Delivery
Available Trips (rms symmetrical amperes) Factor Wiring Type A only - Class 1 Program
(amperes)
(ampere) Style(5) 240V 400V Type 1 w/Gasket
415V/
480V
125 A Thermal TGM 15…125 A 100k 65k ----- 1.5 2193M_-AKB-_TGM 2193M_-AJB-_TGM SC
A(1) Mag
125 A Thermal THM 15…125 A 100k 65k ----- 2193M_-BKC-_THM 2193M_-BJC-_THM SC

B(2) Mag
Thermal THX ----- 100k 35k 2193M_-BKC-_THX 2193M_-BJC-_THX SC
Mag
250 A Thermal TJM 70, 90…225 A 100k 65k ----- 2193M_-CKC-_TJM 2193M_-CJC-_TJM SC
C Mag
TJX ----- 100k 35k 2193M_-CKC-_TJX 2193M_-CJC-_TJX SC
LSI TJML 40 A, 60 A, 100 A, 100k 65k ----- 2193M_-CKC-_TJML 2193M_-CJC-_TJML PE
150 A, 250 A (9)
TJXL ----- 100k 35k 2193M_-CKC-_TJXL 2193M_-CJC-_TJXL PE
400 A LSI TKM 300 A, 400 A (10) 100k 65k ----- 2.0 2193M_-DKC-_TKM 2193M_-DJC-_TKM SC
D(3)
LSI TKX ----- 100k 65k 2193M_-DKC-_TKX 2193M_-DJC-_TKX SC
TKU ----- ----- 100k 2193M_-DKC-_TKU 2193M_-DJC-_TKU SC

Table 71 - Bulletin 2193M 3-Pole Main Circuit Breaker (MCB) (continued)

Frame Range of Short Circuit Current Rating Space Catalog Number(13) Delivery
Available Trips (rms symmetrical amperes) Factor Wiring Type A only - Class 1 Program
(amperes)
(ampere) Style(5) 240V 400V Type 1 w/Gasket
415V/
480V
800 A LSI TMM 600 A(10) 100k 65k ----- 2.0 2193M_-EKC-_TMM 2193M_-EJC-_TMM SC
E
LSI TMX ----- 100k 42k 2193M_-EKC-_TMX 2193M_-EJC-_TMX SC
LSIG(6) TMMG 600 A(10) 100k 65k ----- 2193M_-EKC- 2193M_-EJC-_TMMG PE
_TMMG
LSIG(6) TMXG ----- 100k 42k 2193M_-EKC-_TMXG 2193M_-EJC-_TMXG PE
800 A LSI TMM 800 A(10) 100k 65k ----- 2.5 2193M_-FKC-_TMM 2193M_-FJC-_TMM SC
F(3)
LSI TMX ----- 100k 42k 2193M_-FKC-_TMX 2193M_-FJC-_TMX SC
(6) 800 A(10)
LSIG TMMG 100k 65k ----- 2193M_-FKC-_TMMG 2193M_-FJC-_TMMG PE
(6)
LSIG TMXG ----- 100k 42k 2193M_-FKC-_TMXG 2193M_-FJC-_TMXG PE
HI-MAG TMN 800 A 65k 2193M_-FKC-_TMN 2193M_-FJC-_TMN PE
1200 A LSIG-MM(6) TNMG 400 A, 600 A, 800 100k 65k ----- 3.5 2193M_-GKC-_TNMG 2193M_-GJC-_TNMG PE
G(3) (4) (6)
A, 1000 A, 1200 A
(9)
LSIG-MM TNXG ----- 100k 65k 2193M_-GKC-_TNXG 2193M_-GJC-_TNXG PE
(7)
3000 A LSIG-MM(6) TRUG 1000 A, 1200 A, 100k 100k 100k 6.0 2193M_-JKC-_TRUG 2193M_-JJC-_TRUG PE
(8)
J(3) 1600 A, 2000 A(11) 30" W
15" D
3000 A LSIG-MM(6) 2500 A(11) 6.0 2193M_-KKC-_TRUG 2193M_-KJC-_TRUG PE
K(3) 30" W
15" D
(12)
3000 A LSIG-MM(6) 3000 A(11) 6.0 2193M_-LKC-_TRUG ----- PE

L(3) 30” W
20” D

(2) Non-interchangeable trip breakers at 40A or below
(3) Frame mounted unit must be mounted at top or bottom of section.
(4) Standard design supports 500MCM max. wire size. For larger cables contact your Rockwell Automation MCC Specialist for alternate design considerations.
(5) LSI = Long - Short - Instantaneous Electronic Trip
LSIG = Long - Short - Instantaneous - Ground Electronic Trip
LSIG-MM = Long - Short - Instantaneous - Ground - Maintenance Mode
Thermal Mag = Thermal Magnetic
HI-MAG = NOT UL listed. Internal auxiliary contacts (-790_) are not available on this breaker. Unit supplied with molded case switch with fixed high magnetic trip. Requires upstream
current limiting branch protection. See molded case switch markings for proper selection of this protection. Ratings listed are the maximum fault currents that can be applied to the
devices.
(6) The ground fault protection system is suited for solidly grounded system. Ground fault trip range is adjustable from 0.2 to 1 times the trip current rating of the circuit breaker rating
plug. The time delay setting can be adjusted from 0.1 to 0.8 seconds.
(7) Only available as top mounted at 600V unless MCC is Device Limited ArcShield.
(8) TRUG supports the -755 option at 2000 A, 2500 A, and 3000 A. At 2500 A and 3000 A, depth changes from 15" to 20".
(9) Value shown is max setting of trip unit. Trip unit is electronic, adjustable by 4% (T_ _) or 2.5% (T _ _ G) increments to 40…100% of maximum value selected.
(10) Value shown is max setting of trip unit. Trip unit is electronic, adjustable by 2% increments to 40…100% of maximum value selected.
(11) Value shown is max setting of trip unit. Trip unit is electronic, adjustable by 2.5% increments to 40…100% of maximum value selected.
(12) 100% rated requires 20" deep enclosure.
• Select the trip current from Table 69 (for example, 2193F-AKC-40TGM).
• If optional load lugs are selected, select and price from Table 70 (for example, 2193F-AKC-40TGM-80A350).

Bulletin 2193M 3-Pole Main Circuit Breaker (MCB), continued

• CENTERLINE 2100 motor control centers are rated for use with 75 °C wire. Wire must be sized using the 75 °C column in
NEC/UL/C-UL. The actual temperature rating of the lug is not relevant.
• Top- and bottom-mounted mains are designed with adequate space to route cables to lugs. Special consideration may
need to be given to the mounting of the CTs for a metering device. Consider the addition of a pull box.

Trip Current Number Trip Current Number
(Amperes) (Amperes)
15 30 225 45
20 31 250 46
25 61 300 48
30 32 400 50
40 34 600 52
50 35 800 54
60 36 1000 55
70 37 1200 56
80 38 1600 58
90 39 2000 60
100 40 2500 64
125 41 3000 65
150 42
175 43
200 44

Table 73 - Mechanical and Crimp Lugs for Mains(1)

Frame Type Rating Trip Current Cables/ Phase Cable/Wire Size Range Wire Type Option Number(3)
(Amperes) (Amperes)
Mechanical Lugs
TGM 125 15…125 1 #14…1/0 AWG CU
THM, THX, THML, THXL 125 15…125 1 #14…1/0 AWG CU
TJM, TJX, TJU, TJML, TJXL, 250 70…250 1 #10…250 kcmil CU
TJUL
#14…1/0 AWG CU/AL 80A1X0
#14…350 kcmil CU/AL
TKM, TKX, TKU, TK_L, TK_G 400 300 1 250…500 kcmil CU
CU/AL 80A500
400 2 #2/0…250 kcmil CU
CU/AL 80B250
TMM, TMX, TMN, TM_G 800 600 2 #3/0…350 kcmil CU
250…500 kcmil CU/AL 80B500
800 3 #2/0…350 kcmil CU
#2/0…400 kcmil CU/AL 80C400
TN_G 1200 400…1200 4 #4/0…500 kcmil CU
#4/0…500 kcmil CU/AL 80D500
TRUG 2000 1000…1600 4 #2…600 kcmil CU/AL
2000 6
2500 2500 7
3000 3000 8
Crimp Lugs
TKM, TKX, TKU, TK_L, TK_G 400 300…400 2 250 kcmil CU(2) 82B250
(2)
300 1 500 kcmil CU 82A500
300…400 2 250 kcmil CU/AL(2) 83B250
300 1 500 kcmil CU/AL(2) 83A500
TMM, TMX, TMN, TM_G 800 600 2 CU(2) 82B500(4)
CU/AL(2) 83B500(4)
800 3 CU(2) 82C500(4)
CU/AL(2) 83C500(4)
(2)
TN_G 1200 400…800 3 CU 82C500
CU/AL(2) 83C500
(2)
600…1200 4 CU 82D500
CU/AL(2) 83D500
TRUG 2000 1000…2000 6 500 kcmil CU(2) 82F500
(2)
CU/AL 83F500
2500 2500 7 CU(2) 82G500
CU/AL(2) 83G500
3000 3000 8 CU(2) 82H500
(2)
CU/AL 83H500
(1) Lugs are designed for use with breaker frame. For lug combinations other than those shown, contact the factory.
(2) CU crimp lugs are Panduit type LCC Series. CU/AL crimp lugs are Burndy YA-A Series.
(3) If optional full-rated incoming neutral bus is specified, the quantity and size/type of the lug(s) on neutral lug pad will be the same as the 3-phase lugs. When optional half-rated
incoming neutral bus is specified and one or two lugs per phase are specified, one lug is provided on the half-rated neutral riser. When three or four lugs are specified, two lugs are
provided. When five or six lugs are specified, three lugs are provided on half-rated neutral riser.
(4) Top entry requires Pull Box to comply with NEC.

Notes:

Chapter 8
Lighting and Power Panel Units
Bulletin 2193LE Lighting Panel (LPAN)

Bulletin 2193LE is a frame mounted lighting panel with either a main lug or main circuit breaker. The lighting panels are rated for
100 A or 225 A with up to 42 branch circuits. One, two, and three pole bolt-on branch circuit breakers are available with ratings from
15…100 A.
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2193LE Lighting Panel (LPAN)

• Frame mounted lighting panel that is designed for field installation
• When ordered as a SC-I Unit, supplied with lighting panel, door, hardware and instructions
• Rated for 100 A or 225 A with a maximum 42 branch circuits
• 1, 2, or 3 pole bolt-on branch circuit breakers are available with ratings from 15…100 A
• Reference page 316 for additional bolt-on breakers
Table 74 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2193LE Lighting Panel (LPAN)

2193LE - A K L 1 18 - 00WT - 30A18
Bulletin Number Maximum Rating NEMA Enclosure Type of Main System Phases 1-Pole Branch Main Breaker Trip Rating Branch
of Main Bus Type Breakers Positions and Type Rating Breakers
Code System Phases Code Main Breaker Trip

1 Single Phase Rating and Type
Code Type 3 Three Phase Rating
2193LE Lightning Panels with 00WT Lug Only
Bolt-on Branch 40WT 100 A
Breakers (LPAN)
Code Type of Main 45WT 225 A
L Main Lug Only
B Main Circuit Breaker
Code Max. Rating of Code 1-Pole Branch Breakers
Main Bus Positions
A 100A 15 15 Code Branch Breakers
C 225A 16 16 See Factory - Installed Bolt-On
18 18 Branch Breaker table on Page 105
27 27
30 30
Code NEMA Enclosure Type 42 42
gasket
J NEMA Type 12

Bulletin 2193LE Frame Mounted Lighting Panel for Bolt-on Branch Circuit Breakers (LPAN)
• Basic configuration includes door with T-handles (-111) and support pan.
• Units are NOT wired. Units have NO plug-in stabs.
• Load terminal blocks are NOT furnished.
• Lighting panel bus is aluminum with tin plating. Directory card is supplied.
Table 75 - Bulletin 2193LE Frame Mounted Lighting Panel for Bolt-on Branch Circuit Breakers (LPAN)
Type Panel Bus and Main Max. Number of Space Catalog Number Delivery
Lug Ampere 1-pole Factor Wiring Type A—Class I(2) Program
Rating Circuit Breakers
w/ gasket
WITH MAIN LUG ONLY (MLO)
Single Phase 100 18 2.0 2193LE-AKL118-00WT 2193LE-AJL118-00WT SC
3-wire 120/240V AC 10 kA
IC rms Sym. 225 30 2.5 2193LE-CKL130-00WT 2193LE-CJL130-00WT
42 3.0 2193LE-CKL142-00WT 2193LE-CJL142-00WT
Three Phase 100 18 2.0 2193LE-AKL318-00WT 2193LE-AJL318-00WT
4-wire 120/208V AC 10kA
IC rms Sym. 30 2.5 2193LE-AKL330-00WT 2193LE-AJL330-00WT
225 42 3.0 2193LE-CKL342-00WT 2193LE-CJL342-00WT
WITH MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCB) (1)
100 A Main Circuit Breaker is Cutler-Hammer BAB type series rating 10 kA.
225 A Main Circuit Breaker is Cutler-Hammer ED type series rating 65 kA.
Single Phase 100 (1) 16 2.0 2193LE-AKB116-40WT 2193LE-AJB116-40WT SC
3-wire 120/240V AC.
225 30 3.5 2193LE-CKB130-45WT 2193LE-CJB130-45WT
42 4.0 2193LE-CKB142-45WT 2193LE-CJB142-45WT
(1)
Three Phase 4-wre 100 15 2.0 2193LE-AKB315-40WT 2193LE-AJB315-40WT
120/208V AC.
27 2.5 2193LE-AKB327-40WT 2193LE-AJB327-40WT
225 42 4.0 2193LE-CKB342-45WT 2193LE-CJB342-45WT
(1) The 100 A main circuit breaker in a 100A lighting panel is a reverse-fed branch lighting panel circuit breaker.
(2) Catalog numbers do not include branch breakers. Refer to Factory-installed Bolt-on Branch Circuit Breakers table below for catalog string numbers.

Table 76 - Factory-installed Bolt-on Branch Circuit Breakers (1)

1-pole Thermal Magnetic 120V AC 2-pole Thermal Magnetic 120/240V AC 3-pole Thermal Magnetic 120/240V AC
Circuit Breaker 10 kA IC Sym Circuit Breaker 10 kA IC Sym Circuit Breaker 10 kA IC Sym
(for use on three phase lighting panels only)
Trip Rating Catalog String Trip Rating Catalog String Trip Rating Catalog String
@ 40°C Number (3) @ 40°C Number (3) @ 40°C Number (3)
(Amperes) (Amperes) (Amperes)
15 A 30A__ 15 A 30B__ 15 A 30C__
20 A 31A__ 20 A 31B__ 20 A 31C__
30 A 32A__ 30 A 32B__ 30 A 32C__
(2)
15 A w/ grd flt 30D__ 50 A 35B__ 50 A 35C__
(2)
20 A w/ grd flt 31D__ 100 A 40B__ 100 A 40C__
Filler Plate 00A__ — — — —
(1) Refer to page 316 for catalog numbers for field installed branch breakers. When breakers are to be factory-installed, specify filler plates for all remaining blank spaces in panel.
(2) Ground fault interrupting circuit breakers provide 5mA personnel protection.
• Select the number of branch breakers and add two digits to specify the number desired to the circuit breaker catalog number (for example,32A18). Two digits are required for
quantities less than ten (for example, 30A03).
• When selecting multiple branch breakers with different trip ratings, add additional string numbers to the end of the catalog number
(for example, 2193LE-AK318-00WT-32A18-30A03-30C02).
• Locations of the branch breakers are determined by the factory.
• The maximum amperes connected to any one connector cannot exceed 200 A on bolt-on branch breakers. All branch breakers are Type BAB.

Bulletin 2193PP Panel Board with Main Circuit Breaker (PPAN)

Bulletin 2193PP is a plug-in unit panel board with main circuit breaker. The panel boards are rated for 100 A, 150 A, or 225 A with up
to 42 branch circuits. One, two, and three pole bolt-on branch circuit breakers are available with ratings from 15 A to 100 A.
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2193PP Panel Board with Main Circuit Breaker
(PPAN)
• Plug-in unit panel board
• Rated for 100 A, 150 A, or 225 A with up to 42 branch circuits
• 1, 2 or 3 pole bolt-on branch circuit breakers available with ratings from 15…100 A
• Reference page 316 for additional bolt-on breakers
Table 77 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2193PP Panel Board with Main Circuit Breaker (PPAN)
2193PP - C K B 5 18 - 40 CB - 30A18
Bulletin Number Maximum Rating NEMA Enclosure Type of Main System Phases 1-Pole Branch Main Breaker Circuit Branch
of Main Bus Type Breakers Trip Rating Breaker Type Breakers
Positions
Code System Phases Code Circuit Breaker Type

Code Type
Code NEMA Enclosure Type 5 Three Phase CT Standard Interrupting
2193PP Plug-in Panel Capacity
Board (PPAN) K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1
with gasket CB Medium Interrupting
Capacity
J NEMA Type 12
Code 1-Pole Branch CM High Interrupting
Breakers Positions Capacity
18 18
Code Type of Main 30 30
B Main Circuit Breaker 42 42
Code Max. Rating of
Main Bus Code Branch Breakers
C 225A See Factory - Installed
Bolt-On Branch Breaker
Code Main Breaker Trip table on page 107.
Rating
40 100 A
42 150 A
45 225 A

Bulletin 2193PP Plug-in Panel Board with Main Circuit Breaker (PPAN)
• Basic configuration includes door with T-handles, unit support pan, panel board neutral and panel board ground bus.
• Unit plugs into the MCC vertical bus.
• The panel board bus is aluminum with tin plating.
• The panel board is series rated. The interrupting capacity rating shown can be applied to all branch circuit breakers.
• Bulletin 2193PP panel board is suitable for use with 3-phase, 4-wire, solidly grounded, Wye systems rated 480Y/277V or
less. Can also be used on solidly grounded 3-wire power systems, however, only 2-pole and 3-pole branch circuit breakers
can be used.
TIP Neutral and ground bar in Bulletin 2193PP is not factory connected to any neutral bus, neutral plate, or ground bus.
Table 78 - Bulletin 2193PP Plug-in Panel Board with Main Circuit Breaker (PPAN)
Main Max. Main Space IC Rating at 480Y/277V Catalog Number (3) Delivery
Breaker Number of Circuit Factor (rms Sym.) Wiring Type A—Class I Program
Trip Rating 1-pole Breaker (This rating can be applied
(Amperes) Circuit Type to all branch NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 NEMA Type 12
Breakers circuit breakers.) w/ gasket
WITH MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCB)

100 18 I3C 2.5 25 kA 2193PP-CKB518-40CB-__ 2193PP-CJB518-40CB-__ ENG
I6C 65 kA 2193PP-CKB518-40CM-__ 2193PP-CJB518-40CM-__
I0C 100 kA 2193PP-CKB518-40CX-__ 2193PP-CJB518-40CX-__
150 30 I3C 3.0 25 kA 2193PP-CKB530-42CB-__ 2193PP-CJB530-42CB-__
42 I3C 3.5 25 kA 2193PP-CKB542-42CB-__ 2193PP-CJB542-42CB-__
225 18 JD3D(1) 3.5 35 kA(2) 2193PP-CKB518-45CT-__ 2193PP-CJB518-45CT-__
(2)
30 3.5 35 kA 2193PP-CKB530-45CT-__ 2193PP-CJB530-45CT-__
(2)
42 4.0 35 kA 2193PP-CKB542-45CT-__ 2193PP-CJB542-45CT-__

(2) 35kA series combination rating only when used with 50 A or lower rated branch circuit breakers. Series combination rating is 22kA when used with branch circuit breakers rated 60
A or higher.
• Select the appropriate catalog string number from Factory-Installed Bolt-on Branch Breaker table below to identify the branch breaker trip rating (for example, 32A_).
• Add two digits to specify the number of branch breakers desired. Two digits are also required for quantities less than ten (for example, 03 for quantity three—2193PP-CKB530-
42CX-32A03).
• When selecting multiple branch breakers with different trip ratings, add additional string numbers to the end of the catalog number (for example, 2193PP-CKB518-40CB-30A08-
31B02-30C02).
• Locations of the branch breakers are determined by the factory.

Table 79 - Factory-Installed Bolt-on Branch Breaker (1)

1-Pole Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) 2-Pole Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) 480Y/ 3-Pole Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) 480Y/ Delivery
277V AC 277V AC 277V AC Program
Circuit Breaker 14 kA I.C. SYM Circuit Breaker 14 kA I.C. SYM Circuit Breaker 14 kA I.C. SYM
Trip Rating @ 40 °C Catalog String Trip Rating @ 40°C Catalog String Trip Rating @ Catalog String
(Amperes) Number (Amperes) Number 40 °C Number
(Amperes)
15 30A__ 15 30B__ 15 30C__ ENG
20 31A__ 20 31B__ 20 31C__
25 61A__ 25 61B__ 25 61C__
30 32A__ 30 32B__ 30 32C__
35 33A__ 35 33B__ 35 33C__
40 34A__ 40 34B__ 40 34C__
50 35A__ 50 35B__ 50 35C__
60 36A__ 60 36B__ 60 36C__
70 37A__ 70 37B__ 70 37C__
80 38A__ 80 38B__ 80 38C__
90 39A__ 90 39B__ 90 39C__
100 40A__ 100 40B__ 100 40C__
Filler Plate 00A__ — — — —
(1) All branch breakers are Type GHB. Refer to page 316 for catalog number of field installed branch breakers. Specify filler plates for all blank spaces in panel. The maximum amperes
connected to any one connector cannot exceed 200 A. The 14 kA interrupting capacity rating applies to the individual branch breaker. When used in the 2193PP, the I.C. rating of the
main breaker can be applied to all branch breakers.

Chapter 9
Transformer Units
Bulletin 2195, 2196, 2197 Control and Lighting Transformers (XFMR)

Bulletins 2195, 2196, and 2197 are control and lighting transformer units. The transformer units are available with ratings from 0.5
kVA through 50 kVA for single-phase and 10 kVA through 45 kVA for three-phase. Secondary fuses are provided with each
transformer unit. Factory installed primary fusing is optional on the 2196 transformer unit.
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2195, 2196 and 2197 Transformer Units
• Control and lighting transformers
• Rated from 0.5…50 kVA, single-phase and 10…45 kVA, three-phase
• Secondary protection provided
Table 80 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2195, 2196 and 2197 Transformer Units
2195 - A K BD - - **
2196 - A K BD - 24J - **
2197 - A K BD - 30TGM - **
Bulletin Number Transformer Size NEMA Enclosure Line Voltage Fuse, Clip Rating and Class or Options
Type Circuit Breaker Trip and Type
Code Fuse, Clip Rating and Class or

Code Type Code NEMA Enclosure Type Circuit Breaker Trip and Type
2195 Control and Lighting Transformer K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 2195 Not Applicable
without Disconnecting Means with gasket 2196 ’24J’ Fuse Clip Rating and Class.
(XFMR) J NEMA Type 12 See table on page 303
2196(Z) Control and Lighting Transformer 2197 ’30TGM’ Circuit Breaker Trip and
with Fusible Disconnect (XFMR) Type. See table on page 303 and
2197(Z) Control and Lighting Transformer Code Transformer Size 305
with Circuit Breaker (XFMR)
Single Phase Line Voltage
Note: The (Z) denotes that the disconnect
portion of the unit is 0.5 space factor. A 0.5 kVA Single Phase
B 0.75 kVA Code Primary Secondary
C 1.0 kVA AD 240 V 120 V, (1) Fuse
Z 1.6 kVA BD 480 V0 V 120 V, (1) Fuse
E 2.0 kVA CD 600 V 120 V, (1) Fuse Code Options
F 3.0 kVA AA 240 V 240/120 V, (2) Fuses See Options Section
G 5.0 kVA beginning on page 141
BA 480 V 240/120 V, (2) Fuses
H 7.5 kVA CA 600 V 240/120 V, (2) Fuses
J 10 kVA NS 380 V 110/115 V, (1) 1-pole CB
K 15 kVA KNS 400 V 110/115 V, (1) 1-pole CB
M 25 kVA IS 415 V 110/115 V, (1) 1-pole CB
X 37.5 kVA NP 380 V 110 V, (2) 1-pole CB
Y 50 kVA KNP 400 V 115 V, (2) 1-pole CB
Three Phase IP 415 V 220 V, (2) 1-pole CB
P 10 kVA IT 415 V 240 V, (2) 1-pole CB
Q 15 kVA Three Phase
S 25 kVA Code Primary Secondary
T 30 kVA AH 240 V 208/120 V, (3) Fuses
V 37.5 kVA BH 480 V 208/120 V, (3) Fuses
W 45 kVA CH 600 V 208/120 V, (3) Fuses

Bulletin 2195 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit without Disconnecting Means (XFMR)
TIP • Do not mount transformer units below drive units. Heat from transformer units can cause drive to trip.
• To address the heating effects from loads containing a high degree of harmonic content, it can be necessary to
oversize the field conductors (especially neutrals), use k-factor lighting transformers, and oversize the lighting
contactor units (increase by 50%). Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales
representative.
• Tap arrangement for 15…50 kVA single phase transformers is two 2-1/2% Taps FCAN, four 2-1/2% Taps FCBN.
Tap arrangements for 10…45 kVA three phase transformers is two 2-1/ 2% Taps FCBN.
• Transformers with 7.5 kVA rating and larger have Class 180 °C, 80 °C rise.
For 71” high sections, see restrictions on page 30.
Table 81 - Bulletin 2195 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit without Disconnecting Means (XFMR)
Rating Recommended Primary Space Catalog Number (4) Delivery
kVA (1) Protection (Amperes) Factor Wiring Type A—Class I Program
240 V 480 V 600 V NEMA Type 1 and Type NEMA Type 1 with NEMA Type 12 (1)
1 w/ gasket(5) filters and Type 1 w/
gasket and filters (6)
SINGLE PHASE—120 Volt secondary with one secondary fuse
(7)
0.5 15 15 15 1.0 2195-AK_D — 2195-AJ_D
0.75 2195-BK_D — 2195-BJ_D
1 1.5 2195-CK_D — 2195-CJ_D
1.6 2.0 2195-ZK_D — 2195-ZJ_D
2 2195-EK_D — 2195-EJ_D
3 (1.5) 1.5 (2) 2195-FK_D 2195-FK_D-16A 2195-FJ_D (8)
5 (2.5) — — 1.5 (2) 2195-GK_D 2195-GK_D-16A 2195-GJ_D

SINGLE PHASE—120/240 Volt secondary with two secondary fuses
Transformer secondary wired and protected for 240 V phase to phase/120 V phase to center tap neutral.
5 (2.5) 30 15 — 1.5 (2) 2195-GK_A 2195-GK_A-16A 2195-GJ_A (8)
7.5 (3.7) 40 20 20 2195-HK_A 2195-HK_A-16A 2195-HJ_A

10 (5) 50 30 20 2195-JK_A 2195-JK_A-16A 2195-JJ_A
(3)
15 (7.5) 70 40 30 2.0 2195-KK_A 2195-KK_A-16A 2195-KJ_A
25 (12.5) 125 70 60 2195-MK_A 2195-MK_A-16A 2195-MJ_A
37.5 (18.5) 200 100 70 2.0 2195-XK_A 2195-XK_A-16A 2195-XJ_A
20” D (3)
50 (25) 300 150 100 2195-YK_A 2195-YK_A-16A 2195-YJ_A

Table 81 - Bulletin 2195 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit without Disconnecting Means (XFMR) (continued)
Rating Recommended Primary Space Catalog Number (4) Delivery
kVA (1) Protection (Amperes) Factor Wiring Type A—Class I Program
1 w/ gasket(5) filters and Type 1 w/
THREE PHASE—120/208 Volt secondary with three secondary fuses
Transformer secondary wired and protected for 208 V phase to phase/120 V phase to WYE neutral.
10 (5) — 20 15 2.0 (3) 2195-PK_H 2195-PK_H-16A 2195-PJ_H (8)
15 (7.5) — 20 15 2195-QK_H 2195-QK_H-16A 2195-QJ_H

25 (12.5) — 40 30 2195-SK_H 2195-SK_H-16A 2195-SJ_H
30 (15) — 50 40 2195-TK_H 2195-TK_H-16A 2195-TJ_H
37.5 (18.5) — 60 50 2.0 2195-VK_H 2195-VK_H-16A 2195-VJ_H
20” D (3)
45 (22.5) — 70 60 2195-WK_H 2195-WK_H-16A 2195-WJ_H
(1) In NEMA Type 12 applications (non-ventilated 3 kVA and larger transformers), to maximize the transformer’s life, we recommend that the transformer not be loaded to
greater than 50% of its nameplate rating. Number in parentheses indicates approximate derated rating. However, in many applications, NEMA Type 1 with gasket design
(vented and filtered doors) can be sufficient.
(2) Frame mounted unit. Must be located at bottom of section.
(3) Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway next to this unit. Must be located at bottom of section.
(4) The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the primary voltage code from table on page 297 to identify the transformer primary voltage desired (for example,
2195-FKBD).
(5) For ratings 3 kVA and larger, vented door is provided.
(6) For ratings 3 kVA and larger, vented and filtered door is provided. 3 kVA and larger are available on NEMA Type 12 structures but unit still is NEMA Type 1/1G with gasket and
filters.
See page 150 for option -16A.
(7) 240V and 480V are SC in U.S. and Canada. 600V is PE in U.S. and SC in Canada.
(8) 240V and 480V are SC-II in U.S. and Canada. 600V is PE-II in U.S. and SC-II in Canada.

Bulletin 2195 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit without Disconnecting Means (XFMR),
continued
representative.
Table 82 - Bulletin 2195 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit without Disconnecting Means (XFMR)
Rating Recommended Primary Space Catalog Number Delivery
kVA (1) Protection Factor Wiring Type A—Class I Program
(Amperes)
1 w/ gasket (7) filters and Type 1 w/
SINGLE PHASE—110/115 Volt secondary with one 1-pole circuit breaker (2)
0.5 (2) 15 15 15 1.0 2195-AK_S (8) — 2195-AJ_S (8) PE
0.75 (2) 2195-BK_S (8) — 2195-BJ_S (8)
1 (2) 1.5 2195-CK_S (8) — 2195-CJ_S (8)
1.6 (2) 2.0 2195-ZK_S (8) — 2195-ZJ_S (8)
2 (2) 2195-EK_S (8) — 2195-EJ_S (8)
3 (2) (1.5) 1.5 (5) 2195-FK_S (8) 2195-FK_S-16A (8) 2195-FJ_S (8) PE-II
SINGLE PHASE—110/220, Volt secondary with two 1-pole circuit breakers
Transformer secondary wired and protected for 220V phase-to-phase, 110V phase-to-center tap neutral.
5 (2.5) (2) 20 — — 1.5 (5) 2195-GKNP 2195-GKNP-16A 2195-GJNP PE-II
(2)
7.5 (3.7) 20 — — 2195-HKNP 2195-HKNP-16A 2195-HJNP
10 (5) (2) 30 — — 2195-JKNP 2195-JKNP-16A 2195-JJNP
15 (7.5) 50 — — 2.0 (6) 2195-KKNP 2195-KKNP-16A 2195-KJNP
SINGLE PHASE—115/230 Volt secondary with two 1-pole circuit breakers
5 (2.5) — 20 — 1.5 (5) 2195-GKKNP 2195-GKKNP-16A 2195-GJKNP PE-II
7.5 (3.7) — 20 — 2195-HKKNP 2195-HKKNP-16A 2195-HJKNP
10 (5) — 30 — 2195-JKKNP 2195-JKKNP-16A 2195-JJKNP

Table 82 - Bulletin 2195 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit without Disconnecting Means (XFMR) (continued)
Rating Recommended Primary Space Catalog Number Delivery
kVA (1) Protection Factor Wiring Type A—Class I Program
(Amperes)
SINGLE PHASE— 120/240 Volt secondary with two 1-pole circuit breakers (3)
5 (2.5) (2) — — 20 1.5 (5) 2195-GKIT 2195-GKIT-16A 2195-GJIT PE-II
(2)
7.5 (3.7) — — 20 2195-HKIT 2195-HKIT-16A 2195-HJIT
(2)
10 (5) — — 30 2195-JKIT 2195-JKIT-16A 2195-JJIT
15 (7.5) (4) — — 50 2.0 (6) 2195-KKIP 2195-KKIP-16A 2195-KJIP
(1) In NEMA Type 12 applications (non-ventilated 3 kVA and larger transformers), to maximize the transformer’s life, it is recommended that the transformer not be loaded to
(vented and filtered doors) can be sufficient.
(2) Incorporates primary taps for future conversion to new global IEC voltage standards (for example, 400V/115V/230V). Allows conversion without the need to replace
transformers.
(3) The 15k VA transformer has 110/220V secondary with two 1-pole circuit breakers.
(4) Tap arrangement is two 2-1/2% Taps FCAN, four 2-1/2% Taps FCBN.
(8) The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the primary voltage code from table on page 297 to identify the transformer primary voltage desired (for example,
2195-FKNS).
(9) For ratings 3 kVA and larger, vented and filtered door is provided. 3 kVA and larger are available on NEMA Type 12 structures but unit still will be NEMA Type 1/1G with
gasket and filters. See page 150 for option -16A.

Bulletin 2196 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch
(XFMR)
representative.
Tap arrangements for 10…45 kVA three phase transformers is two 2-1/ 2% Taps FCBN.
• 3…50 kVA consists of two compartments—a fusible disconnect compartment and a transformer compartment wired
and interlocked together.
Table 83 - Bulletin 2196 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (XFMR)
Rating Fuse Clip Rating Space Factor Catalog Number (6) Delivery
kVA (1) (Amperes) Wiring Type A—Class I Program
(9)
0.5 30 30 30 1.0 2196-AK_D-__ — 2196-AJ_D-__
0.75 2196-BK_D-__ — 2196-BJ_D-__
1 1.5 2196-CK_D-__ — 2196-CJ_D-__
1.6 2.0 2196-ZK_D-__ — 2196-ZJ_D-__
2 2196-EK_D-__ — 2196-EJ_D-__
3 (1.5) 2.5 (2) 2196-FK_D-__ 2196-FK_D-__-16A 2196-FJ_D-__ (10)
5 (2.5) — — 30 2.5 (2) 2196-GK_D-__ 2196-GK_D-__-16A 2196-GJ_D-__

Transformer secondary wired and protected for 240V phase to phase/120V phase to center tap neutral.
5 (2.5) 30 30 — 2.5 (2) 2196-GK_A-__ 2196-GK_A-__-16A 2196-GJ_A-__ (10)
7.5 (3.7) 60 30 30 2196-HK_A-__ 2196-HK_A-__-16A 2196-HJ_A-__

10 (5) 60 30 30 2196-JK_A-__ 2196-JK_A-__-16A 2196-JJ_A-__
(3),(4)
15 (7.5) 100 60 60 3.0 2196-KK_A-__ 2196-KK_A-__-16A 2196-KJ_A-__
25 (12.5) 200 60 60 3.0 (3),(4) 2196-MK_A-__ 2196-MK_A-__-16A 2196-MJ_A-__
37.5 (18.5) 200 100 100 3.5 20” D (3),(4) 2196-XK_A-__ 2196-XK_A-__-16A 2196-XJ_A-__
50 (25) — 200 100 3.5, 20” D (4),(5) 2196-YK_A-__ 2196-YK_A-__-16A 2196-YJ_A-__

Table 83 - Bulletin 2196 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (XFMR) (continued)
Transformer secondary wired and protected for 280V phase to phase/120V phase to WYE neutral.
10 (5) — 30 30 3.0 (4) 2196-PK_H-__ 2196-PK_H-__-16A 2196-PJ_H-__ (10)
15 (7.5) — 30 30 2196-QK_H-__ 2196-QK_H-__-16A 2196-QJ_H-__

25 (12.5) — 60 60 2196-SK_H-__ 2196-SK_H-__-16A 2196-SJ_H-__
30 (15) — 60 60 2196-TK_H-__ 2196-TK_H-__-16A 2196-TJ_H-__
37.5 (18.5) — 60 60 3.0 20” D (4) 2196-VK_H-__ 2196-VK_H-__-16A 2196-VJ_H-__
45 (22.5) — 100 60 3.0 20” D (4),(5) 2196-WK_H-__ 2196-WK_H-__-16A 2196-WJ_H-__
(1) In NEMA Type 12 applications (non-ventilated 3 kVA and larger transformers), to maximize the transformer’s life, it is recommended that the transformer not be loaded to greater
than 50% of its nameplate rating. Number in parentheses indicates approximate derated rating. However, in many applications, NEMA Type 1 with gasket design (vented and
filtered doors) can be sufficient.
(3) For transformers with 240V primary, add 0.5 space factor.
(6) The catalog numbers listed are not complete.
Select the voltage code from table on page 297 (for example, 2196-FKBD).
If power fuse is NOT selected, select fuse clip designator from table on page 302 (for example, 2196-FKBD-24J).
If power fuse IS selected, select the fuse clip designator AND the manufacturer from table on page 302 (for example, 2196-FKBD-24JG).
For fuse rating, based on transformer rating, see publication 2100-TD003.
(8) For ratings 3 kVA and larger, vented and filtered door is provided. 3kVA and larger are available on NEMA Type 12 structures but unit still will be NEMA Type 1/1G with gasket and
filters.
(9) 240V and 480V are SC in U.S. and Canada. 600 V is PE in U.S. and SC in Canada.
(10) 240 V and 480V are SC-II in U.S. and PE-II in Canada. 600V is PE-II in U.S. and SC-II in Canada.
Bulletin 2196Z Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch
(XFMR)
TIP The (Z) denotes that the disconnect portion of the unit is 0.5 space factor.
representative.
• Tap arrangement for 15…50 kVA single phase transformers is two 2-1/2% Taps FCAN, four2-1/2% Taps FCBN.
Tap arrangements for 10…45 kVA three phase transformers is two 2 1/ 2% Taps FCBN.
• Unit consists of two compartments—a fusible disconnect compartment and a transformer compartment wired and
interlocked together. The fusible disconnect compartment has a horizontal operating handle.

Table 84 - Bulletin 2196Z Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (XFMR)
3 (1.5) 30 30 30 2.0 (2) 2196Z-FK_D-__ 2196Z-FK_D-__-16A 2196Z-FJ_D-__ (7)
5 (2.5) — — 30 2.0 (2) 2196Z-GK_D-__ 2196Z-GK_D-__-16A 2196Z-GJ_D-__

Transformer secondary wired and protected for 240 V phase to phase/120 V phase to center tap neutral.
5 (2.5) 30 30 — 2.0 (2) 2196Z-GK_A-__ 2196Z-GK_A-__-16A 2196Z-GJ_A-__ (7)
7.5 (3.7) — 30 30 2196Z-HK_A-__ 2196Z-HK_A-__-16A 2196Z-HJ_A-__

10 (5) — 30 30 2196Z-JK_A-__ 2196Z-JK_A-__-16A 2196Z-JJ_A-__
Transformer secondary wired and protected for 280 V phase to phase/120 V phase to WYE neutral.
10 (5) — 30 30 2.5 (3) 2196Z-PK_H-__ 2196Z-PK_H-__-16A 2196Z-PJ_H-__ (7)
15 (7.5) — 30 30 2196Z-QK_H-__ 2196Z-QK_H-__-16A 2196Z-QJ_H-__
(1) In NEMA Type 12 applications (non-ventilated 3 kVA and larger transformers), to maximize the transformer’s life, it is recommended that the transformer not be loaded to greater
than 50% of its nameplate rating. Number in parentheses indicates approximate derated rating. However, in many applications, NEMA Type 1 with gasket design (vented and
filtered doors) is sufficient.
• Select the voltage code from table on page 297 (for example, 2196Z-FKBD).
• If power fuse is NOT selected, select fuse clip designator from table on page 302 (for example, 2196Z-FKBD-24J).
• If power fuse IS selected, select the fuse clip designator AND the manufacturer from table on page 302 (for example, 2196Z-FKBD-24JG).
• For fuse rating, based on transformer rating, see publication 2100-TD003.
(6) For ratings 3 kVA and larger, vented and filtered door is provided. 3kVA and larger are available on NEMA Type 12 structures but unit is still NEMA Type 1/1G with gasket and filters.
(7) 240V and 480V are SC-II in U.S. and PE-II in Canada. 600V is PE-II in U.S. and SC-II in Canada.

Bulletin 2196 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch
(XFMR), continued
See 109 for product description.
representative.
• 3…50 kVA consists of two compartments—a fusible disconnect compartment and a transformer compartment wired
and interlocked together.
Table 85 - Bulletin 2196 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (XFMR)
Rating Fuse Clip Rating Space Catalog Number (7) Delivery
kVA (1) (Amperes) Factor Wiring Type A—Class I Program
0.5 (2) 30 30 30 1.0 2196-AK_S-__ — 2196-AJ_S-__ PE
0.75 (2) 2196-BK_S-__ — 2196-BJ_S-__
1 (2) 1.5 2196-CK_S-__ — 2196-CJ_S-__
(2)
1.6 2.0 2196-ZK_S-__ — 2196-ZJ_S-__
(2)
2 2196-EK_S-__ — 2196-EJ_S-__
3 (1.5) (2) 2.5 (5) 2196-FK_S-__ 2196-FK_S-__-16A 2196-FJ_S-__ PE-II
5 (2.5) (2) 30 — — 2.5 (5) 2196-GKNP-__ 2196-GKNP-__-16A 2196-GJNP-__ PE-II
(2)
7.5 (3.7) 30 — — 2196-HKNP-__ 2196-HKNP-__-16A 2196-HJNP-__
10 (5) (2) 30 — — 2196-JKNP-__ 2196-JKNP-__-16A 2196-JJNP-__
15 (7.5) (3) 60 — — 3.0 (6) 2196-KKNP-__ 2196-KKNP-__-16A 2196-KJNP-__
SINGLE PHASE—115 /230 Volt secondary with two 1-pole circuit breakers
5 (2.5) — 30 — 2.5 (5) 2196-GKKNP-__ 2196-GKKNP-__-16A 2196-GJKNP-__ PE-II
7.5 (3.7) — 30 — 2196-HKKNP-__ 2196-HKKNP-__-16A 2196-HJKNP-__
10 (5) — 30 — 2196-JKKNP-__ 2196-JKKNP-__-16A 2196-JJKNP-__

Table 85 - Bulletin 2196 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (XFMR) (continued)
SINGLE PHASE—120/240 Volt secondary with two 1-pole circuit breakers (4)
5 (2.5) (2) — — 30 2.5 (5) 2196-GKIT-__ 2196-GKIT-__-16A 2196-GJIT-__ PE-II
(2)
7.5 (3.7) — — 30 2196-HKIT-__ 2196-HKIT-__-16A 2196-HJIT-__
(2)
10 (5) — — 30 2196-JKIT-__ 2196-JKIT-__-16A 2196-JJIT-__
15 (7.5) (3) — — 60 3.0 (6) 2196-KKIP-__ 2196-KKIP-__-16A 2196-KJIP__
(vented and filtered doors) is sufficient.
(2) Incorporates primary taps for future conversion to new global IEC voltage standards (for example, 400 V/115 V/230 V). Allows conversion without the need to replace
transformers.
(4) The 15 kVA transformer has 110/220V secondary with two 1-pole circuit breakers.
• Select the voltage code from table on page 297 (for example, 2196-FKNS).
• Select the fuse clip designator from table on page 302 for example, 2196-FKNS-24J). No power fuses available.
(9) For ratings 3 kVA and larger, vented door is provided. 3 kVA and larger are available on NEMA Type 12 structures but unit is still NEMA Type 1/1G with gasket and filters. See
page 150 for option -16A.

Bulletin 2196Z Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch
(XFMR), continued
• To address the heating effects from loads containing a high degree of harmonic content, it can necessary to oversize
the field conductors (especially neutrals), use k-factor lighting transformers, and oversize the lighting contactor units
(increase by 50%). Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.
• Unit consists of two compartments—a fusible disconnect compartment and a transformer compartment wired and
interlocked together.The fusible disconnect compartment has a horizontal operating handle.

Table 86 - Bulletin 2196Z Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (XFMR)
3 (1.5) (2) 30 30 30 2.0 (3) 2196Z-FK_S-__ 2196Z-FK_S-__-16A 2196Z-FJ_S-__ PE-II
Transformer secondary wired and protected for 220 V phase-to-phase, 110 V phase-to-center tap neutral.
5 (2.5) (2) 30 — — 2.0 (5) 2196Z-GKNP-__ 2196Z-GKNP-__-16A 2196Z-GJNP-__ PE-II
(2)
7.5 (3.7) 30 — — 2196Z-HKNP-__ 2196Z-HKNP-__-16A 2196Z-HJNP-__
(2)
10 (5) 30 — — 2196Z-JKNP-__ 2196Z-JKNP-__-16A 2196Z-JJNP-__
5 (2.5) — 30 — 2.0 (5) 2196Z-GKKNP-__ 2196Z-GKKNP-__-16A 2196Z-GJKNP-__ PE-II
7.5 (3.7) — 30 — 2196Z-HKKNP-__ 2196Z-HKKNP-__-16A 2196Z-HJKNP-__
10 (5) — 30 — 2196Z-JKKNP-__ 2196Z-JKKNP-__-16A 2196Z-JJKNP-__
5 (2.5) (2) — — 30 2.0 (5) 2196Z-GKIT-__ 2196Z-GKIT-__-16A 2196Z-GJIT-__ PE-II
(2)
7.5 (3.7) — — 30 2196Z-HKIT-__ 2196Z-HKIT-__-16A 2196Z-HJIT-__
(2)
10 (5) — — 30 2196Z-JKIT-__ 2196Z-JKIT-__-16A 2196Z-JJIT-__
(vented and filtered doors) is sufficient.
transformers.
• Select the voltage code from table on page 297 (for example, 2196Z-FKNS).
• Select the fuse clip designator from table on page 302 (for example, 2196Z-FKNS-24J). No power fuses available.
(6) For ratings 3 kVA and larger, vented door is provided. 3kVA and larger are available on NEMA Type 12 structures but unit is still NEMA Type 1/1G with gasket and filters. See
page 150 for option -16A.

Bulletin 2197 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR)
representative.
• 3…50 kVA consists of a circuit breaker compartment and transformer compartment wired and interlocked together.
Table 87 - Bulletin 2197 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR)
Rating Size of Primary Protection Space Catalog Number (6) Delivery
kVA (1) Factor Wiring Type A Only—Class I Program
0.5 15 15 15 (2) 1.0 2197-AK_D-__ — 2197-AJ_D-__ (9)
0.75 2197-BK_D-__ — 2197-BJ_D-__

1 1.5 2197-CK_D-__ — 2197-CJ_D-__
1.6 2.0 2197-ZK_D-__ — 2197-ZJ_D-__
2 2197-EK_D-__ — 2197-EJ_D-__
(3) (10)
3 (1.5) 2.5 2197-FK_D-__ 2197-FK_D-__-16A 2197-FJ_D-__
5 (2.5) — — 15 2.5 (3) 2197-GK_D-__ 2197-GK_D__-16A 2197-GJ_D-__
5 (2.5) 30 15 — 2.5 (3) 2197-GK_A-__ 2197-GK_A-__-16A 2197-GJ_A-__ (10)
7.5 (3.7) 40 20 20 2197-HK_A-__ 2197-HK_A-__-16A 2197-HJ_A-__

10 (5) 50 30 20 2197-JK_A-__ 2197-JK_A-__-16A 2197-JJ_A-__
15 (7.5) 70 40 30 3.0 (4) 2197-KK_A-__ 2197-KK_A-__-16A 2197-KJ_A-__
25 (12.5) 125 70 60 2197-MK_A-__ 2197-MK_A-__-16A 2197-MJ_A-__
37.5 (18.5) 200 100 70 3.0 2197-XK_A-__ 2197-XK_A-__-16A 2197-XJ_A-__
20” D (4),(5)
50 (25) — 150 100 2197-YK_A-__ 2197-YK_A-__-16A 2197-YJ_A-__

Table 87 - Bulletin 2197 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR) (continued)
10 (5) — 20 15 3.0 (4) 2197-PK_H-__ 2197-PK_H-__-16A 2197-PJ_H-__ (10)
15 (7.5) — 20 20 2197-QK_H-__ 2197-QK_H-__-16A 2197-QJ_H-__

25 (12.5) — 40 30 2197-SK_H-__ 2197-SK_H-__-16A 2197-SJ_H-__
30 (15) — 50 40 2197-TK_H-__ 2197-TK_H-__-16A 2197-TJ_H-__
37.5 (18.5) — 60 50 3.0 2197-VK_H-__ 2197-VK_H-__-16A 2197-VJ_H-__
20” D (4)
45 (22.5) — 70 60 2197-WK_H-__ 2197-WK_H-__-16A 2197-WJ_H-__
(1) In NEMA Type 12 applications (non-ventilated 3 kVA and larger transformers), to maximize transformer life, we recommend that the transformer not be loaded to greater
than 50% of its nameplate rating. Number in parentheses indicates approximate derated rating. However, in many applications, NEMA Type 1 with gasket design (vented
and filtered door) is sufficient.
(2) Transformer secondary wired and protected for 240V phase to phase/120V phase to center tap neutral.
• Select the primary voltage code from table on page 297 (for example, 2197-EKBD).
• Select the trip current from table on page 302 (for example, 2197-EKBD-30).
• Select the circuit breaker from table on page 305 (for example, 2197-EKBD-30TGM).
(8) For ratings 3 kVA and larger, vented and filtered door is provided. 3 kVA and larger are available on NEMA Type 12 structures but unit is still NEMA Type 1/1G with gasket and
filters. See page 150 for option -16A.
(9) 240V and 480V are SC in U.S. and Canada. 600V is PE in U.S. and SC in Canada.

Bulletin 2197Z Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR)
representative.
• Units consists of a circuit breaker compartment and transformer compartment wired and interlocked together. This
circuit breaker compartment has a horizontal operating handle.
Table 88 - Bulletin 2197Z Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR)
3 (1.5) 15 15 15 2.0 (2) 2197Z-FK_D-__ 2197Z-FK_D-__-16A 2197Z-FJ_D-__ (7)
5 (2.5) — — 15 2.0 (2) 2197Z-GK_D-__ 2197Z-GK-D__-16A 2197Z-GJ_D-__

5 (2.5) 30 15 — 2.0 (2) 2197Z-GK_A-__ 2197Z-GK_A-__-16A 2197Z-GJ_A-__ (7)
7.5 (3.7) 40 20 20 2197Z-HK_A-__ 2197Z-HK_A-__-16A 2197Z-HJ_A-__

10 (5) 50 30 20 2197Z-JK_A-__ 2197Z-JK_A-__-16A 2197Z-JJ_A-__
(3)
15 (7.5) 70 40 30 2.5 2197Z-KK_A-__ 2197Z-KK_A-__-16A 2197Z-KJ_A-__
25 (12.5) 125 70 60 2197Z-MK_A-__ 2197Z-MK_A-__-16A 2197Z-MJ_A-__
37.5 (18.5) 200 100 70 2.5 2197Z-XK_A-__ 2197Z-XK_A-__-16A 2197Z-XJ_A-__
20” D (3)
50 (25) — 150 100 2197Z-YK_A-__ 2197Z-YK_A-__-16A 2197Z-YJ_A-__

Table 88 - Bulletin 2197Z Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR) (continued)
10 (5) — 20 15 2.5 (3) 2197Z-PK_H-__ 2197Z-PK_H-__-16A 2197Z-PJ_H-__ (7)
15 (7.5) — 20 20 2197Z-QK_H-__ 2197Z-QK_H-__-16A 2197Z-QJ_H-__

25 (12.5) — 40 30 2197Z-SK_H-__ 2197Z-SK_H-__-16A 2197Z-SJ_H-__
30 (15) — 50 40 2197Z-TK_H-__ 2197Z-TK_H-__-16A 2197Z-TJ_H-__
37.5 (18.5) — 60 50 2.5 2197Z-VK_H-__ 2197Z-VK_H-__-16A 2197Z-VJ_H-__
20” D (3)
45 (22.5) — 70 60 2197Z-WK_H-__ 2197Z-WK_H-__-16A 2197Z-WJ_H-__
(1) In NEMA Type 12 applications (non-ventilated 3 kVA and larger transformers), to maximize transformer life, we recommend that the transformer not be loaded to greater
than 50% of its nameplate rating. Number in parentheses indicates approximate derated rating. However, in many applications, NEMA Type 1 with gasket design (vented
and filtered door) is sufficient.
• Select the primary voltage code from table on page 297 (for example, 2197Z-FKBD).
• Select the trip current from table on page 302 (for example, 2197Z-FKBD-30).
• Select the circuit breaker from table on page 305 (for example, 2197Z-FKBD-30TGM).
(6) For ratings 3 kVA and larger, vented and filtered door is provided. 3kVA and larger are available on NEMA Type 12 structures but unit is still NEMA Type 1/1G with gasket and
filters.

Bulletin 2197 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR),
continued
representative.
• 3…50 kVA consists of a circuit breaker compartment and transformer compartment wired and interlocked together.
Table 89 - Bulletin 2197 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR)
kVA (1) Factor Wiring Type A—Class I Program
380 V 400 V 415 V NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 1 with NEMA Type 12 (1)
Type 1 w/ gasket (8) filters and Type 1
w/ gasket and
filters (9)
SINGLE PHASE—110/115 secondary with one 1-pole circuit breaker (2)
0.5 (2) 15 15 15 1.0 2197-AK_S-__ — 2197-AJ_S-__ PE
(2)
0.75 2197-BK_S-__ — 2197-BJ_S-__
(2)
1 1.5 2197-CK_S-__ — 2197-CJ_S-__
(2)
1.6 2.0 2197-ZK_S-__ — 2197-ZJ_S-__
2 (2) 2197-EK_S-__ — 2197-EJ_S-__
(2)
3 (1.5) 2.5 (5) 2197-FK_S-__ 2197-FK_S-__-16A 2197-FJ_S-__ PE-II
5 (2) (2.5) 20 — — 2.5 (5) 2197-GKNP-__ 2197-GKNP-__-16A 2197-GJNP-__ PE-II
7.5 (2) (3.7) 20 — — 2197-HKNP-__ 2197-HKNP-__-16A 2197-HJNP-__
10 (2) (5) 30 — — 2197-JKNP-__ 2197-JKNP-__-16A 2197-JJNP-__
(3)
15 (7.5) 50 — — 3.0 (6) 2197-KKNP-__ 2197-KKNP-__-16A 2197-KJNP-__
5 (2.5) — 20 — 2.5 (5) 2197-GKKNP-__ 2197-GKKNP-__-16A 2197-GJKNP-__ PE-II
7.5 (3.7) — 20 — 2197-HKKNP-__ 2197-HKKNP-__-16A 2197-HJKNP-__
10 (5) — 30 — 2197-JKKNP-__ 2197-JKKNP-__-16A 2197-JJKNP-__

Table 89 - Bulletin 2197 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR) (continued)
Type 1 w/ gasket (8) filters and Type 1
w/ gasket and
filters (9)
SINGLE PHASE—120/240 Volt secondary with two 1-pole circuit breakers (4)
5 (2.5) (2) — — 20 2.5 (5) 2197-GKIT-__ 2197-GKIT-__-16A 2197-GJIT-__ PE-II
(2)
7.5 (3.7) — — 20 2197-HKIT-__ 2197-HKIT-__-16A 2197-HJIT-__
(2)
10 (5) — — 30 2197-JKIT-__ 2197-JKIT-__-16A 2197-JJIT-__
15 (7.5) (3) — — 50 3.0 (6) 2197-KKIP-__ 2197-KKIP-__-16A 2197-KJIP__
greater than 50% of its nameplate rating. Number in parentheses indicates approximate derated rating. However, in many applications, NEMA Type 1 with gasket
design (vented and filtered doors) is sufficient.
(2) Incorporates primary taps for future conversion to new global IEC voltage standards (for example, 400 V/115 V/230 V). Allows conversion without the need to replace
transformers.
• Select the primary voltage code from table on page 297 (for example, 2197-EKNS).
• Select the trip current from table on page 303 (for example, 2197-EKNS-30).
• Select the circuit breaker from table on page 305 (for example, 2197-EKNS-30TGM).
(9) For ratings 3 kVA and larger, vented and filtered door is provided. 3 kVA and larger are available on NEMA Type 12 structures but unit is still NEMA Type 1/1G with gasket
and filters. See page 150 for option -16A.

Bulletin 2197Z Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR),
continued
representative.
• Units consists of a circuit breaker compartment and transformer compartment wired and interlocked together. The
circuit breaker compartment has a horizontal operation handle.
Table 90 - Bulletin 2197Z Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR)
Type 1 w/ gasket (8) filters and Type 1 w/
SINGLE PHASE—110/115 secondary with one 1-pole circuit breaker (2)
3 (1.5) (2) 15 15 15 2.0 (5) 2197Z-FK_S-__ 2197Z-FK_S-__-16A 2197Z-FJ_S-__ PE-II
SINGLE PHASE—110/220V secondary with two 1-pole circuit breakers
Transformer secondary wired and protected for 220V phase-to-phase, 110V phase-to-enter tap neutral.
5 (2) (2.5) 20 — — 2.0 (5) 2197Z-GKNP-__ 2197Z-GKNP-__-16A 2197Z-GJNP-__ PE-II
(2)
7.5 (3.7) 20 — — 2197Z-HKNP-__ 2197Z-HKNP-__-16A 2197Z-HJNP-__
10 (2) (5) 30 — — 2197Z-JKNP-__ 2197Z-JKNP-__-16A 2197Z-JJNP-__
(3) (6)
15 (7.5) 50 — — 2.5 2197Z-KKNP-__ 2197Z-KKNP-__-16A 2197Z-KJNP-__
SINGLE PHASE—115/230V secondary with two 1-pole circuit breakers
5 (2.5) — 20 — 2.0 (5) 2197Z-GKKNP-__ 2197Z-GKKNP-__-16A 2197Z-GJKNP-__ PE-II
7.5 (3.7) — 20 — 2197Z-HKKNP-__ 2197Z-HKKNP-__-16A 2197Z-HJKNP-__
10 (5) — 30 — 2197Z-JAKNP-__ 2197Z-JAKNP-__-16A 2197Z-JJKNP-__

Table 90 - Bulletin 2197Z Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR) (continued)
Type 1 w/ gasket (8) filters and Type 1 w/
SINGLE PHASE—120/240V secondary with two 1-pole circuit breakers (4)
Transformer secondary wired and protected for 240V phase-to-phase, 120V phase-to-center tap neutral. 0
5 (2.5) (2) — — 20 2.0 (5) 2197Z-GKIT-__ 2197Z-GKIT-__-16A 2197Z-GJIT-__ PE-II
(2)
7.5 (3.7) — — 20 2197Z-HKIT-__ 2197Z-HKIT-__-16A 2197Z-HJIT-__
(2)
10 (5) — — 30 2197Z-JKIT-__ 2197Z-JKIT-__-16A 2197Z-JJIT-__
15 (7.5) (3) — — 50 2.5 (6) 2197Z-KKIP-__ 2197Z-KKIP-__-16A 2197Z-KJIP__
greater than 50% of its nameplate rating. Number in parentheses indicates approximate derated rating. However, in many applications, NEMA Type 1 with gasket
design (vented and filtered doors) is sufficient.
transformers.
• Select the primary voltage code from table on page 297 (for example, 2197Z-EKNS).
• Select the trip current from table on page 303 (for example, 2197Z-EKNS-30).
• Select the circuit breaker from table on page 305 (for example, 2197Z-EKNS-30TGM).
(9) For ratings 3 kVA and larger, vented and filtered door is provided. 3 kVA and larger are available on NEMA Type 12 structures but unit is still NEMA Type 1/1G with gasket
and filters. See page 150 for option -16A.

Notes:

Chapter 10
Miscellaneous Units
Catalog Number Explanation - Full Section Mounting Plates

Table 91 - Catalog Number Explanation - Full Section Mounting Plates
Full Section Blank Mounting Plate with No Disconnecting Means, with or without Horizontal Power Bus
2100 - E K C 1 X 1 B - - 120 - **
Full Section Blank Mounting Plate with Fusible Disconnect Switch, with or without Horizontal Power Bus
2100 - F K C 1 X 1 B - 24J - 120 - **
Full Section Blank Mounting Plate with Circuit Breaker, with or without Horizontal Power Bus
2100 - G K C 1 X 1 B - 32TGM - 120 - **
Bulletin Disconnecting NEMA Type Voltage Unit Depth Placeholder Unit Width Mounting Fuse Clip Horizontal Option
Number Means Plate Depth or Circuit Power Bus s
Breaker
Code Type Code Placeholder

2100 X is a placeholder
Code Option
See available
Options
Code Unit Width
Code Voltage 1 20” wide
A Up to 250V 2 25” wide
Code Disconnecting Means C Up to 600V 3 30” wide
E No disconnecting means 4 35” wide
F With fusible disconnect 5 40” wide
G With circuit breaker
Code Unit Depth
Code Horizontal Power Bus
1 15” Deep
Blank Provided with
2 20” Deep Code Mounting Plate Depth horizontal power bus
B 14” Deep 120 No horizontal power
Code NEMA Enclosure Type C 19” Deep bus is provided
K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with D 8.5” Deep
gasket
J NEMA Type 12
Code Fuse Clip or Circuit

Breaker
2100-F and See page 131 for fuse
2100-G only clip rating or circuit
breaker

Full Section Blank Mounting Plates

• Line side of disconnect or circuit breaker is connected to horizontal bus for sections with horizontal bus.
• Customer cables connect to the line side of the disconnect or circuit breaker for sections without horizontal bus.
Table 92 - Full Section Blank Mounting Plates

Description Space Catalog Number (3) Delivery
Factor Program
w/ gasket
Full section Blank Full width door, no With no With horizontal bus 6.0 2100-EKC_ X _ _ 2100-EJC_ X _ _ SC-II
Mounting Plates (1) vertical wireway or disconnect
(2) Without horizontal bus 2100-EKC_ X _ _-120 2100-EJC_ X _ _-120
vertical bus, with or means
without horizontal
power bus. Frame With With horizontal bus 2100-FK_ _ X _ _-_ 2100-FJ_ _ X _ _-_
Mounted. fusible
disconnect Without horizontal bus 2100-FK_ _ X _ _-_-120 2100-FJ_ _ X _ _-_-120
switch
With With horizontal bus 2100-GKC_ X _ _ -_ 2100-GJC_ X _ _ -_
circuit
breaker Without horizontal bus 2100-GKC_ X _ _-_-120 2100-GJC_ X _ _-_-120
(1) 20” wide sections can be grouped up to three sections in a shipping split. 25” and wider sections are in separate shipping splits. Sections without horizontal bus must be located on
the end of the MCC lineup, in a separate shipping split.
(2) Industrial EtherNet switches are not mounted in Full Section Blank Mounting Plates.
For 2100-E catalog numbers

• Select unit depth from table below (for example, 2100-EKC1).
• Select unit width from table below (for example, 2100-EKC1X1).
• Select mounting plate depth from table below (for example, 2100-EKC1X1D).
For 2100-F catalog numbers

• Select fuse clip voltage from table below (for example, 2100-FKC).
• Select unit depth from table below (for example, 2100-FKC1).
• Select unit width from table below (for example, 2100-FKC1X1).
• Select mounting plate depth from table below (for example, 2100-FXC1X1D).
• Select disconnect rating and fuse clip from table on page 131 (for example, 2100-FKC1X1D-24J).
For 2100-G catalog numbers

• Select unit depth from table below (for example, 2100-GKC1).
• Select unit width from table below (for example, 2100-GKC1X1).
• Select mounting plate depth from table below (for example, 2100-GKC1X1D).
• Select trip current and circuit breaker option from tables on page 131 (for example, 2100-GKC1X1D-32TGM).
Table 93 - Voltage Code Table 94 - Unit Depth

Fuse Clip Code Unit Depth (In.) Code
Voltage
250 A 15 1
600 C 20 2
Table 95 - Unit Width

Width (Inches) Code Depth
20 1 15
25 2
30 3
35 4
(1)
40 5
20 1 20
25 2
30 3
35 4
40 (1) 5
(1) Only available with 2100-E. 40” wide section is a two-door section with a 3-point latch. 40”
wide cannot have horizontal power bus.

Table 96 - Mounting Plate Depth

Mounting Plate Depth (Inches) Code
14 B (1),(2)
19 C (3)
8.5 D (4)
(1) Horizontal bus is 5” deeper than standard.

(2) For 15” deep sections without horizontal bus or 20” deep sections with or without horizontal
bus.
(3) Only available with 20” deep section without horizontal bus.
(4) Not available with 40” wide mounting plate.
Table 97 - Disconnect Rating and Fuse Clip

Disconnect Rating Fuse Clip Short Circuit Fuse Clip
and Fuse Clip Size Class Current Rating Designator
through 600V
30 J 100 kA 24J
R 100 kA 24R
H 10 kA 24
60 J 100 kA 25J
R 100 kA 25R
H 10 kA 25
100 J 100 kA 26J
R 100 kA 26R
H 10 kA 26
200 J 100 kA 27J
R 100 kA 27R
H 10 kA 27
400 J 100 kA 28J
R 100 kA 28R
H 10 kA 28

Trip Current Number Trip Current Number Trip Current Number
15 30 80 38 200 44
20 31 90 39 225 45
30 32 100 40 250 46
40 34 125 41 300 48
50 35 150 42 350 49
60 36 175 43 400 50
70 37 — — — —

Table 99 - Circuit Breaker Option(1)

Rating High Interrupting Extra High Interrupting Ultra High Interrupting
(Amperes) Capacity (typical rating) Capacity 100 kA at 480V Capacity 100 kA at 600V
100 kA at 240V 35 kA at 600V
65 kA at 480V
Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame
15…70 TGM G6C3 THX H0C3 TJU J15C3
80…125 TGM G6C3 THX H0F3 TJU J15F3
150 TJM J6F3 TJX J0F3 TJU J15F3
175…250 TJM J6F3 TJX J0F3 — —
300…400 TKM K6H3 TKX K0H3 TKU K15H3
(1) Refer to page 330 for circuit breaker short circuit current ratings.
Table 100 - Blank Unit Doors

Description Space Catalog Number Delivery
NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
Blank Unit Door Covers the unused unit space (includes unit 0.5 2100-BK05 2100-BJ05 SC
support pan)
1.0 2100-BK10 2100-BJ10
1.5 2100-BK15 2100-BJ15
2.0 2100-BK20 2100-BJ20
2.5 2100-BK25 2100-BJ25
3.0 2100-BK30 2100-BJ30
3.5 2100-BK35 2100-BJ35
4.0 2100-BK40 2100-BJ40

Table 101 - Field-mounted Equipment Units

Type 1 w/ gasket
Empty Unit Insert (1) For field installed equipment and 8.625” working depth. No 0.5 (8) 2100-NK05 2100-NJ05 SC
plug-in stabs.
Inserts come with unit support pan and door. 1.0 2100-NK10 2100-NJ10
Inserts are NOT UL listed and are NOT CSA certified.
1.5 2100-NK15 2100-NJ15
2.0 2100-NK20 2100-NJ20
2.5 2100-NK25 2100-NJ25
3.0 2100-NK30 2100-NJ30
3.5 2100-NK35 2100-NJ35
4.0 2100-NK40 2100-NJ40
Empty Unit Insert For field installed equipment, 8.625” working depth. Includes 1.5 2100D-CK_-__ 2100D-CJ_-__
with Disconnecting fusible disconnect and plug-in stabs.(6)
Means (1),(2),(3) Inserts come with unit support pan and door. 2.0 2100D-DK_-__ 2100D-DJ_-__
Adding equipment to this unit insert may require field
evaluation by UL/CSA to retain listing/certification. 2.5 2100D-EK_-__ 2100D-EJ_-__
3.0 2100D-FK_-__ 2100D-FJ_-__
3.5 2100D-GK_-__ 2100D-GJ_-__
4.0 2100D-HK_-__ 2100D-HJ_-__
Empty Unit Insert For field installed equipment, 8.625” working depth. Includes 1.5 2100M-CKC-__ 2100M-CJC-__ SC
with Disconnecting inverse time (thermal magnetic) circuit breaker and plug-in
Means (1),(4),(5) stabs.(7) 2.0 2100M-DKC-__ 2100M-DJC-__
Inserts come with unit support pan and door.
Adding equipment to this unit insert may require field 2.5 2100M-EKC-__ 2100M-EJC-__
evaluation by UL/CSA to retain listing/certification.
3.0 2100M-FKC-__ 2100M-FJC-__
3.5 2100M-GKC-__ 2100M-GJC-__
4.0 2100M-HKC-__ 2100M-HJC-__
(1) See Options, Modifications, and Accessories, pages 160, for terminal block options.
(2) These units do not meet service entrance requirements. Not intended to be used as feeder circuits.
(3) See Appendix for short circuit current ratings.
(4) These units do not meet service entrance requirements. Not intended to be used as feeder circuits.
(5) See Appendix for short circuit current ratings.
• Select the voltage code from table on page 134 (for example, 2100D-CKC).
• Select the fuse clip designator from table on page 134 (for example, 2100D-CKC-24J).
• If power fuse is selected, select from page 301 (for example, 2100D-CKC-24J-604G).
• Select the trip current from table on page 134 (for example, 2100M-CKC-30).
• Select the circuit breaker from table on page 135 (for example, 2100M-CKC-30TGM).
(8) Terminal block options (-800, -801, -802, -803, -804) are not available on 2100-NK05 or 2100-NJ05.

Tables for Configuring Bulletin 2100D and 2100M Unit Catalog Numbers
Table 102 - Voltage Code
Fuse Clip Voltage Voltage Code
250 A
600 C
Table 103 - Fuse Clip Designator (1)

Fuse Clip Fuse Clip Short Circuit Fuse Clip
Rating Class Current Rating Designator
(Amperes) through 600V
30 J 100 kA 24J
R 100 kA 24R
H 10 kA 24
CC 100 kA 24C
60 J 100 kA 25J
R 100 kA 25R
H 10 kA 25
100 J 100 kA 26J
R 100 kA 26R
H 10 kA 26
(2)
200 J 100 kA 27J
R 100 kA 27R
H 10 kA 27
(1) Refer to the CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Power Fuses Product Data,
publication 2100-TD003.
(2) Not available in 1.5 space factors.

Trip Current Number Trip Current Number
(Amperes) (Amperes)
15 30 90 39
20 31 100 40
30 32 125 41
40 34 150 42
50 35 175 43
60 36 200 44
70 37 225 45
80 38 — —

Table 105 - Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breaker Option (1) (2)
Rating High Interrupting Capacity Extra High Interrupting Ultra High Interrupting Capacity
(Amperes) (typical rating) Capacity 100 kA at 480V 100 kA at 600V
100 kA at 240V 35 kA at 600V
65 kA at 480V
Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame
15…70 TGM G6C3 THX H0C3 TJU J15C3
80…125 TGM G6C3 THX H0F3 TJU J15F3
150 TJM J6F3 TJX J0F3 TJU J15F3
175…250 TJM J6F3 TJX J0F3 — —
(1) Refer to page 330 for circuit breaker short circuit current ratings.
(2) Refer to the CENTERLINE MCCs Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers, publication 2100-TD032.

Table 106 - Miscellaneous DeviceNet Units and EtherNet/IP Units

Description Space Catalog Number(14) Delivery
w/ gasket
DeviceNet® Power Supply Without disconnection means, plug-in stabs or 0.5 2100-DPS8KXWD 2100-DPS8JXWD SC
Unit (110…120V AC input control circuit transformer. Requires separate
and 8.0 A 24V DC output) 110…120V AC source.
(1)
This power supply is to be Includes disconnect, fuses, and 350VA control 1.0 2100-DPS8K_(11) 2100-DPS8J_(11)
used with 8.0 A Class I circuit transformer to provide power to power
Cable only. Refer to the supply
DeviceNet Media Design
and Installation Manual, Includes circuit breaker, fuses, and 350VA control 1.5 2100-DPS8K_-30_(12) 2100-DPS8J_-30_(12)
publication circuit transformer to provide power to power
DNET-UM072 .(2) (3) (4) supply
Includes circuit breaker, fuses, and 350VA control 1.5 2100-DPS8K_H-30_(12) 2100-DPS8J_H-30_ (12)
circuit transformer to provide power to power
supply. (Unit disconnecting means has a
horizontal handle.)
Redundant DeviceNet Without disconnection means, plug-in stabs or 1.0 2100-DPS8KXWD-767C 2100-DPS8JXWD-767C
Power Supply Unit control circuit transformer. Requires separate
(110…120V AC input and 110…120V AC source.
8.0 A, 24V DC output).
Two power supplies Includes disconnect, fuses, and 750VA control 1.5 2100-DPS8K_-767C(11) 2100-DPS8J_-767C(11)
providing back-up for circuit transformer to provide power to power
DeviceNet system.(1) (3) (4) supply
(5)
Includes circuit breaker, fuses, and 750VA control 1.5 2100-DPS8K_-30_-767C(12) 2100-DPS8J_-30_-767C(12)
circuit transformer to provide power to power
supply
Ethernet Power Supply Without disconnection means, plug-in stabs, or 0.5 2100-EPS8KXWD 2100-EPS8JXWD
Unit (110…120V AC input control circuit transformer. Requires separate
and 8.0 A 24V DC 110…120V AC source.
output).(1) This power
supply is to be used with Includes disconnect, fuses, and control circuit 1.0 2100-EPS8K_(13) 2100-EPS8J_(13)
two 4.0 A outputs for transformer to provide power to power supply.
Class II Wiring. (4) (6) (7)
Includes circuit breaker, fuses, and control circuit 1.5 2100-EPS8K_-30_(14) 2100-EPS8J_-30_(14)
transformer to provide power to power supply.
Includes circuit breaker, fuses, and control circuit 1.5 2100-EPS8K_H-30_ (14) 2100-EPS8J_H-30_ (14)
(Unit disconnecting means has a horizontal
handle.)
Ethernet 24V DC Two- Without disconnection mean, plug-in stabs, or 0.5 2100-EPSR8K 2100-EPSR8J
Branch Redundant Unit control circuit transformer. Required to have two
(8.0 A 24V DC input and 24V DC power supply units supplied by Rockwell
8.0 A 24V DC output). This Automation for each redundant unit.
redundant unit provides
automatic 24V DC power Without disconnection means, plug-in stabs, or 0.5
transfer when one source control circuit transformer. Required to have one
is removed. Two unique 24V DC power supply unit supplied by Rockwell
24V input power sources Automation and one power supply external to the
are external to the unit MCC for each redundant unit.
and are required for
operation.(7) Without disconnection means, plug-in stabs, or 0.5
control circuit transformer. Required to hav e two
power supplies external to MCC for each
redundant unit.
Redundant Ethernet Without disconnection means, plug-in stabs, or 1.0 2100-EPS8KXWD-768C 2100-EPS8JXWD-768C
Power Supply Unit control circuit transformer. Requires separate
(110…120V AC input and 110…120V AC source.
8.0 A, 24V DC output).
Two power supplies Includes disconnect, fuses, and control circuit 1.5 2100-EPS8K_-768C(13) 2100-EPS8J_-768C(13)
providing back-up for transformer to provide power to power supply.
Ethernet system.(1) (4) (7)
Includes circuit breaker, fuses, and control circuit 1.5 2100-EPS8K_-30_-768C(14) 2100-EPS8J_-30_-768C (14)

Table 106 - Miscellaneous DeviceNet Units and EtherNet/IP Units (continued)

Description Space Catalog Number(14) Delivery
w/ gasket
Bulletin 1788 ControlNet® Without disconnecting means, plug-in stabs, or 0.5 2100-C2DKXWD 2100-C2DJXWD ENG
to DeviceNet linking control circuit transformer. Requires separate
device used to interface a 110…120V AC source. Viewing window in door to
DeviceNet network to a provide visual verification of status indicators.
ControlNet network
without the need for a With disconnect, fuses, and 80VA control circuit 1.0 2100-C2DK_ (11) 2100-C2DJ_ (11)
PLC chassis (3) (4) (8) (9) transformer. Viewing window in door to provide
visual verification of status indicators.
With circuit breaker, fuses, and 80VA control 1.0 2100-C2DK_-30_ (12) 2100-C2DJ_-30_ (12)
circuit transformer. Viewing window in door to
provide visual verification of status indicators.
Bulletin 1788 Ethernet to Without disconnecting means, plug-in stabs or 0.5 2100-E2DKXWD 2100-E2DJXWD SC
DeviceNet linking device. control transformer. Requires separate 110…120V
Used to connect an AC source. Viewing window in door to provide
Ethernet network to a visual verification of status indicators.
DeviceNet network
without the need for a With fusible disconnect and 80VA control 1.0 2100-E2DK_(11) 2100-E2DJ_(11)
PLC chassis.(3) (4) (8) (10) transformer. Viewing window in door to provide
With circuit breaker and 80VA control 1.0 2100-E2DK_-30_(12) 2100-E2DJ_-30_(12)
transformer. Viewing window in door to provide
External DeviceNet Door mounted external DeviceNet connection and 0.5 2100-DCK05XWD 2100-DCJ05XWD ENG
Connector Unit with 120V AC receptacle for connection of computer to
remotely powered 120V DeviceNet without having to open doors.
AC receptacle (3)
(1) Includes buffer module which provides for minimum 500 ms ride-through at full-load. Power supply must be located within one section of center for MCCs with eight or more
sections.
(2) See page 160 for optional external DeviceNet connector with 120V AC receptacle (option 767A).
DeviceNet power supply requires a 95…132V AC 50/60 Hz power source that provides sinusoidal waveform. Use of non-sinusoidal power sources, including some UPSs, could
damage the DeviceNet power supply.
(3) Not available for IntelliCENTER MCC with EtherNet/IP™ network orders.
(4) Disconnecting means not available with 208V system.
(5) Optional DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (Option -11DSA3) is available. Select from page 150.
(6) See page 160 for optional external Ethernet Connector with 120V AC receptacle (option -768A).
Ethernet power supply requires a 95…132V AC 50/60 Hz power source that provides sinusoidal waveform. Use of non-sinusoidal power sources, including some UPSs, could damage
the Ethernet power supply.
(7) Not available for DeviceNet IntelliCENTER Orders.
(8) ControlNet to DeviceNet linking device units are supplied with a 1794 Flex I/O power supply to provide the 24V DC source for the unit so the linking device unit does not burden the
DeviceNet power supply with its 1.0 A load.
(9) Refer to the ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide, publication CNET-IN002, and the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-IN041,
for information on installing and routing ControlNet Cable.
(10) Refer to the Ethernet Design Considerations Reference Manual, publication ENET-RM002, and the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, 1770-IN041, for
information on installing and routing ethernet cable.
(11) The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Short circuit current rating is 100 kA. Select the voltage code from the Voltage Code table, Table 107 (for example, 2100-DPS8KB).
• Select the voltage code from the Voltage Code table, Table 107 (for example, 2100-DPS8KB).
• Select the circuit breaker from the Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breaker Option table, Table 108 (for example, 2100-DPS8KB-30TGM).
(13) The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Short circuit current rating is 100 kA. Select the voltage code from the Voltage Code table, Table 107 (for example, 2100-EPS8KB).
• Select the voltage code from the Voltage Code Table, Table 107 (for example, 2100-EPS8KB).
• Select the circuit breaker from the Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breaker Option table, Table 108 (for example, 2100-EPS8KB-30TGM).

Table 107 - Voltage Code Table 108 - Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit
Breaker Option(1)
Fuse Clip Voltage Voltage Code Suffix Frame Type Circuit Breaker Description
220…230 P TGM G6C3 High Interrupting Capacity
100 kA at 240V
65 kA at 480V
240 A THX H0F3 Extra High Interrupting Capacity
100 kA at 480V
35 kA at 600V
380 N TJU J15F3 Ultra High Interrupting Capacity
100 kA at 600V
400 KN
415 I
480 B
600 C
(1) Refer to Appendix for circuit breaker short circuit current ratings.
Table 109 - Catalog Explanation for Stratix Switch Unit

2100 - ESW 10 K - T 10 L A P
Bulletin Number Ethernet Switch Switch Size Enclosure Mounting Space Factor Switch Switch Wireway
Unit (Port Count) Code Location Software Type Features Adapter
Connection
Type
Table 110 Table 111 Table 112 Table 113 Table 114 Table 115 Table 116
Table 110 - Switch Size (Port Count)

Code Switch Size (Port Count) Delivery
Program
06 6-port Stratix 5700 (4 usable ports) PE
10 10-port Stratix 5700 (8 usable ports) PE
20(1) 20-port Stratix 5700 (16 usable ports) PE
30(1) 10 and 20-port Stratix 5700 (24 usable PE
ports)
(1) Only available with unit design (Space Factor Option 10).
Table 111 - Enclosure Code

Code Enclosure Code(1) Delivery
Program
K NEMA 1/1G Enclosure PE
J NEMA 12 Enclosure PE
(1) Must match the system enclosure code.

Table 112 - Mounting Location

Code Mounting Location(1) Delivery
Program
T Top Mounted PE
B Bottom Mounted PE
(1) Defaulted to match the System Selection. If changed to the other location in
the unit, then Delivery Program is changed to ENG.
Table 113 - Space Factor

Code Space Factor Delivery
Program
HW(1) Horizontal Wireway PE
(1)
5 0.5 SF Design PE
10 1.0 SF Design PE
(1) Only available with 6 or 10-port switch options (06, or 10)
Table 114 - Switch Software Type

Code Switch Software Type Delivery
Program
F Full Stratix 5700 Firmware PE
L Lite Stratix 5700 Firmware (default) PE
Table 115 - Switch Features

Code Switch Features Delivery
Program
A No Additional Options (default) PE
B(1) (2) Gigabit ENG
C(1) (3) (4) CIP Sync (Includes Gigabit Ports) PE
(1) (3) (4)
D NAT (Includes CIP Sync and Gigabit PE
Ports)
(1) For 6-port switch, gigabit ports are RJ-45 ports 5 and 6.
For 10-port switch, gigabit ports are combo ports 9 and 10.
For 20-port switch, gigabit ports are combo ports 19 and 20.
(2) Not available on 20-port and 30-port with full firmware (firmware option F).
(3) Only available with full firmware (firmware option F).
(4) Only available on 10-port or 20-port switches in 0.5 or 1.0 SF designs. Not
available with 6 or 30 port options.
Table 116 - Wireway Adapter Connection Type

Code Wireway Adapter Connection Type Delivery
Program
P Power Adapters Only PE
(1)
E Ethernet Adapters Only
A Both Ethernet and Power Adapters
(1)
N None
(1) Only available when switches are the only devices requiring 24V DC power.

Table 117 - Other Miscellaneous Units

Type 1 w/ gasket
NEMA Type ’C’ Terminal Board Unit Includes Bulletin Top- mounted 44 TB 1.0 2100-CK10T-0044CA 2100-CJ10T-0044CA SC
(supplied unwired) 1492-CA1
terminal blocks 66 TB 2100-CK10T-0066CA 2100-CJ10T-0066CA
88 TB 2100-CK10T-0088CA 2100-CJ10T-0088CA
110 TB 2100-CK10T-0110CA 2100-CJ10T-0110CA
Bottom- 44 TB 2100-CK10B-0044CA 2100-CJ10B-0044CA
mounted
66 TB 2100-CK10B-0066CA 2100-CJ10B-0066CA
88 TB 2100-CK10B-0088CA 2100-CJ10B-0088CA
110 TB 2100-CK10B-0110CA 2100-CJ10B-0110CA
Top- mounted 76 TB 1.5 2100-CK15T-0076CA 2100-CJ15T-0076CA
114 TB 2100-CK15T-0114CA 2100-CJ15T-0114CA
152 TB 2100-CK15T-0152CA 2100-CJ15T-0152CA
190 TB 2100-CK15T-0190CA 2100-CJ15T-0190CA
Bottom- 76 TB 2100-CK15B-0076CA 2100-CJ15B-0076CA
mounted
114 TB 2100-CK15B-0114CA 2100-CJ15B-0114CA
152 TB 2100-CK15B-0152CA 2100-CJ15B-0152CA
190 TB 2100-CK15B-0190CA 2100-CJ15B-0190CA
Neutral Connection Plate Unit (1) 0.25” x 2” x 12” copper tin plated bus plate with 0.5 2100-BKNPC-05SF 2100-BJNPC-05SF
#6-250 kcmil lug (280 A capacity)
0.25” x 2” x 12” copper silver plated bus plate with 0.5 2100-BKNPS-05SF 2100-BJNPS-05SF ENG
#6-250 kcmil lug (280 A capacity)
Surge Protective Device Unit WYE power 480V L-L, 277V L-G (2) 0.5 2100-SPKB-1 2100-SPJB-1 SC
(formerly known as TVSS) systems with a
solidly grounded 208V L-L, 120V L-G (3) 2100-SPKH-1 2100-SPJH-1 PE
The SPD consists of an Allen-
Bradley Bulletin 4983-DS with neutral 380V L-L, 220V L-G (3) 2100-SPKN-1 2100-SPJN-1
circuitry provided to monitor the 3-wire
status of all protection modes. 400V L-L, 230V L-G (3) 2100-SPKKN-1 2100-SPJKN-1
Unit consists of a fused 415V L-L, 240V L-G (3) 2100-SPKI-1 2100-SPJI-1
disconnect feeding a surge
protective device (SPD) rated to WYE power 480V L-L, 277V L-G, 277V L-N 2100-SPKB-3 2100-SPJB-3
provide a minimum of 80 kA per systems with a
phase of surge current protection. solidly grounded
The unit is provided with one neutral,
green light as a status indicator. 4-wire
(Response time is 0.5 nS or less)
SPD meets UL 1449 requirements. WYE power 480V 2100-SPKB-2 2100-SPJB-2 SC
Refer to the Surge and Filter systems with
impedence 240V 2100-SPKA-2 2100-SPJA-2 PE
Protection publication
4983-BR001, for more grounded 380V 2100-SPKN-2 2100-SPJN-2
information. neutral or 3
Phase, 3 Wire 400V 2100-SPKKN-2 2100-SPJKN-2
Delta Power
415V 2100-SPKI-2 2100-SPJI-2
Systems
Corner Section Use this catalog number to select a corner section 6.0 2100-CS60 2100-CS60 SC-II
with an MCC lineup. See page 30 for corner section
description. Available as lug compartment, see
page 79.
(1) Neutral Connection Plate 0.5 SF Unit can only be used in sections with vertical wireway. Not for use in sections with full width frame mounted units, including all mains.When
horizontal neutral bus is selected the cable connection from the neutral connection plate to the horizontal neutral plate is NOT provided.
(2) For systems with neutral bus (4-wire systems), use 2100-SP_B-3
(3) For systems with neutral bus (4-wire systems), contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.

Chapter 11
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Contactors and
Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, Transformer,
and Miscellaneous Units
Multiple option numbers are separated by a dash and added to the base catalog number in ascending order.
Table 118 - Push Buttons and Selector Switches
Option Description FVC FVR FVNR TS1W, Option Delivery
TS2W Number Program
2102L, 2103L 2106, 2107 2112, 2113 2122, 2123
Push Buttons (1) (2) (3) (4) START-STOP (7)  -1 SC
FORWARD-OFF-REVERSE 
HIGH-LOW-STOP 
OFF  -1B
STOP   
ON-OFF (7)  -1E
FAST-SLOW-STOP 
Push Buttons and Selector HAND-ON, HAND-OFF, HAND-OFF-AUTO  -1F (8)
Switch (1) (2) (4) (5)
HAND-START, HAND-STOP, HAND-OFF- 
AUTO
Control Station Housing, (4) (5) Blank     -2
(6)
1 hole—for one pilot device     -2A
2 holes—for two pilot devices     -2B
3 holes—for three pilot devices     -2C
4 holes—for four pilot devices   -2D (9)
(1) (2) (4) (5)
Selector Switch HAND-OFF-AUTO   -3
(800H) (3)
(maximum one switch per FORWARD-OFF-REVERSE 
unit) HIGH-LOW-OFF (3)
FAST-SLOW-OFF  -3E(3)
OFF-ON  
(1) Push buttons cannot be used in conjunction with selector switches, except with option 1F. Generally, when more than three devices are selected, Bulletin 800F pilot devices are
supplied. When three or less devices are selected, Bulletin 800T pilot devices are supplied except selector switches are Bulletin 800H devices. On 0.5 space factor units, Bulletin
800F pilot devices are supplied.
(2) Maximum of four pilot devices on 0.5 space factor units and maximum of three pilot devices on dual mounted units. Legend plates are available in French or Spanish at no
additional cost by adding 860F or 860S to catalog string number.
(3) Mutually exclusive with DeviceNet® communication modules, E1 Plus™ solid state overload relay with DeviceNet communication module (7FEE_D), EtherNet/IP™ communication
option (-ENET), and E300™ Overload Options (-7FE3 or -7FE2).
(4) Mutually exclusive with E300 Electronic Overloads (-7FE3___) on Size 1 starters in 0.5 space factor
(5) Not available with E300 Control or Diagnostic Stations.
(6) Available only on units without pilot devices. The control station on the dual 2103L or dual 2113 is a flat mounting plate, flush mounted to the door of the unit. Holes are for Bulletin
800T devices when unit is 1.0 space factor and larger. Holes are for Bulletin 800F pilot devices when unit is 0.5 space factor.
(7) Two Bulletin 800F pilot lights are supplied when two pilot lights are selected in conjunction with push buttons, separate or transformer control only. Only one 800T pilot light can be
supplied on 2103L or 2113 dual units when push buttons are also selected.
(8) When option 1F is used with 11DSA_, 7FEE_D, -ENET, or -7FE3, option 90 (1 N.O. auxiliary contact) is required. IMPORTANT: Required option code for Bulletin 2112 and 2113 vacuum
contactor starter units is 900111).
(9) Not available for 1.0 space factor and larger units.

Pilot Lights (Non-Push-To-Test)

•
Bulletin 800T pilot lights are transformer type, Bulletin 800F pilot lights are full-voltage type.
•
When three or less devices are selected, pilot devices supplied are Bulletin 800T (800H for selector switches).
•
When more than three devices are selected, pilot devices supplied are Bulletin 800F.
•
On 0.5 space factor units, pilot devices supplied are Bulletin 800F, maximum of four pilot devices can be selected.
•
On dual mounted units, pilot devices supplied are Bulletin 800T (800H for selector switches), maximum of three pilot
devices may be selected.
• When selected, option 85T (Elapsed Time Meter) occupies the space of one Bulletin 800T (or 800H) pilot device or the
space of two Bulletin 800F pilot devices, reducing the number of other devices which can be selected.
• Legend plates are available in French or Spanish, at no additional cost, by adding 860F or 860S to the catalog string.
Table 119 - Pilot Lights (Non-Push-To-Test)
Description FVC FVR FVNR TS1W, Incandescent Lamps(12) LED Lamps(13)
TS2W
2102L, 2106, 2112, 2122, Option Number(13) Delivery Option Number(13) Delivery
2103L 2107 2113 2123 Program Program
ON(1)  -4_ ENG -4L_ SC(14)
ON-OFF(2) (3)  -4_ _ -4L_ _
(4)
FORWARD-REVERSE  -4_ _ -4L_ _
FORWARD-REVERSE-OFF(5)  -4_ _ _ -4L_ _ _
ON(6)  -4_ -4L_
ON-OFF(3) (7)  -4_ _ -4L_ _
(8) (9)
HIGH-LOW  -4_ _ -4L_ _
FAST-SLOW(8) (9)  -4E_ _ -4EL_ _
HIGH-LOW-OFF(9) (10)  -4_ _ _ -4L_ _ _
FAST-SLOW-OFF(9) (10)  -4E_ _ _ -4EL_ _ _
(11) (3)
OVERLOAD    -4T_ -4TL_
(1) When used with option 1F or 11DSA_, option -90 (N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected. When used with option 1F and 11DSA3, option -90-90 (two N.O. auxiliary contacts) must be
selected.
(2) Option -91 (one N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
When used with option 1F or 11DSA_, option -90-91 (one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
When used with option 1F and 11DSA3, option -90-90-91 (two N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contacts) must be selected.
(3) When ON and OFF or ON and OVERLOAD pilot lights are selected in conjunction with push buttons, and control type is separate control or transformer control, the pilot lights are
Bulletin 800F pilot lights and the push buttons are Bulletin 800T.
(4) When used with option 11DSA_ or 7FE3, option -90 (1 N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
(5) Option -91 (one N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected. When used with option 11DSA_ or 7FE3, option -90-91 (one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
(6) When used with option 1F, 11DSA_, 7FEE_D, or -ENET, or 7FE3, option -90 (N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
(Important: required option code for Bulletin 2112 and 2113 vacuum contactor starter units is -900-9111.)
When used with option 1F and 11DSA3, 7FEE_D, -ENET, or 7FE3, option -900 (2 N.O. auxiliary contacts) must be selected.
(7) Option -91 (one N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected. When used with option 1F, 11DSA_, 7FEE_D, -ENET, or 7FE3 option -90-91 (one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contact) must be
selected. (Important: required option code for Bulletin 2112 and 2113 vacuum contactor starter units is -900-9111.) When used with option 1F and 11DSA3, 7FEE_D, or -ENET, or 7FE3,
option -900-91 (two N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contacts) must be selected. (Important: required option code for Bulletin 2112 and 2113 vacuum contactor starter units is -900-9111.)
(8) When used with option 11DSA_ or 7FEE_DEE_D, option -90 (one N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
(9) Not available on -7FE3 Overload Relay Options.
When used with option 11DSA_ or 7FEE_DEE_D, option -90-91 (one N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
(11) Not available with option 11DSA3, 7FEE_D, -ENET, or 7FE3.
(12) Bulletin 800F incandescent lamps are only available for 110…120V AC separate or transformer control.
(13) Option numbers are not complete, select pilot light lens color, add letters to the option number (A = amber, B = blue, C = clear, G = green, R = red, W = white) (for example, 4RG is a red ON
and green OFF pilot light). Clear and white are not available for Bulletin 800T LED type pilot lights. White is not available on Bulletin 800F incandescent pilot lights. Clear is not
available on Bulletin 800F LED pilot lights.
(14) SC delivery for 110…120V control voltage. PE delivery for 220…240V control voltage. Bulletin 800F pilot lights cannot be used with common (line voltage) control.

Pilot Lights (Push-To-Test)

• When selected, option 85T (Elapsed Time Meter) occupies the space of one Bulletin 800T (or 800H) pilot device or the space
of two Bulletin 800F pilot devices, reducing the number of other devices which can be selected.
• Bulletin 800T pilot lights are transformer type, Bulletin 800F pilot lights are full-voltage type.
• When three or less devices are selected, pilot devices supplied are Bulletin 800T (800H for selector switches).
• When more than three devices are selected, pilot devices supplied are Bulletin 800F.
• On 0.5 space factor units, pilot devices supplied are Bulletin 800F, maximum of four pilot devices can be selected.
• On dual mounted units, pilot devices supplied are Bulletin 800T (800H for selector switches), maximum of three pilot devices
can be selected.
• Legend plates are available in French or Spanish, at no additional cost, by adding 860F or 860S to the catalog string.
Table 120 - Pilot Lights (Push-To-Test)
Description FVC FVR FVNR TS1W, Incandescent Lamps(12) LED Lamps
TS2W
2102L, 2106, 2112, 2113 2122, Option Number(13) Delivery Option Number(13) Delivery
2103L 2107 2123 Program Program
ON(1)  -5_ ENG -5L_ SC(14)
(2) (3)
ON-OFF  -5_ _ -5L_ _
FORWARD-REVERSE(4)  -5_ _ -5L_ _
FORWARD-REVERSE-OFF(5)  -5_ _ _ -5L_ _ _
ON(6)  -5_ -5L_
ON-OFF(3) (7)  -5_ _ -5L_ _
HIGH-LOW(8) (9)  -5_ _ -5L_ _
FAST-SLOW(8) (9)  -5E_ _ -5EL_ _
HIGH-LOW-OFF(9) (10)  -5_ _ _ -5L_ _ _
FAST-SLOW-OFF(9) (10)  -5E_ _ _ -5EL_ _ _
OVERLOAD(11)  (1)  -5T_ -5TL_
(1) When used with option 1F or 11DSA_, option -90 (N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
When used with option 1F and 11DSA3, option -900 (two N.O. auxiliary contacts) must be selected.
When used with option 1F or 11DSA_, option -90-91 (one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
When used with option 1F and 11DSA3, option -900-91 (two N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contacts) must be selected.
(3) When ON and OFF or ON and OVERLOAD pilot lights are selected in conjunction with push buttons, and control type is separate control or transformer control, the pilot lights are Bulletin
800F pilot lights and the push buttons are Bulletin 800T.
(4) When used with option 11DSA_ or 7FE3, option -90 (1 N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
When used with option 11DSA_ or 7FE3, option -90-91 (one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
(6) When used with option 1F, 11DSA_, 7FEE_D, -ENET, or 7FE3, option -90 (N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
(Important: required option code for Bulletin 2112 and 2113 vacuum contactor starter units is 900111.)
When used with option 1F and 11DSA3, 7FEE_D, -ENET, or 7FE3, option -900 (2 N.O. auxiliary contacts) must be selected.
When used with option 1F, 11DSA_, 7FEE_D, -ENET, or 7FE3 option -90-91 (one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
When used with option 1F and 11DSA3, 7FEE_D, -ENET, or 7FE3, option -900-91 (two N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contacts) must be selected.
(8) When used with option 11DSA_ or 7FEE_DEE_D, option -90 (one N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
(9) Not available on -7FE3 Overload Relay Options.
When used with option 11DSA_ or 7FEE_DEE_D, option -90-91 (one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
(11) Not available with option 11DSA3, 7FEE_D, -ENET, or 7FE3.
(12) Bulletin 800F incandescent lamps are only available for 110…120V AC separate or transformer control.
(13) Option numbers are not complete, select pilot light lens color, add letters to the option number
(A = amber, B = blue, C = clear, G = green, R = red, W = white) (for example, 4RG is a red ON and green OFF pilot light).
Clear and white are not available for Bulletin 800T LED type pilot lights. White is not available on Bulletin 800F incandescent pilot lights. Clear is not available on Bulletin 800F LED pilot
lights.
(14) SC delivery for 110…120V control voltage. PE delivery for 220…240V control voltage. Bulletin 800F pilot lights cannot be used with common (line voltage) control.

Table 121 - Control Circuit Transformer Options

Option Option Description Size or FVC Size or FVR FVNR TS1W Main Delivery
Number Rating Rating TS2W 2193M Program
2102L 2106 2112 2122
2103L 2107 2113 2123
VA VA VA VA
(1),(7) (6) (6)
Control Circuit -6P Standard capacity with 30 A 80 1 80 80 80 — SC
Transformer (with primary fusing
grounded and 60 A 80 2 80 80 80 —
fused secondary) 100 A(5) 200 3 200 200 200 —
200 A 250 4 250 250 250 —
300 A 350 5 350 350 350 —
— — 6 — 80 — —
— — 200 A — 250 — —
and
400 A
— — 600A — 500 — —
(2),(7)
-6P_ Standard capacity with primary fusing — — — — — — 500 PE
for 3000AT 100% rated mains
-6XP 100 watt extra capacity with 30 A 130 1 130 130 130 — SC
(1),(3),(4),(7)
primary fusing
60 A 130 2 130 130 130 —
100 A(5) 250 3 250 250(7) 250 —
200 A 350 4 350 350 350 —
300 A 500 5 500 500 500 —
— — 6 — 130 — —
— — 200 A — 350 — —
and
400 A
— — 600 A — 750 — —
(1) When a control circuit transformer is selected on dual 2103L and 2113 units, one auxiliary contact mounting position (P3) is given up for the transformer secondary fuse.
(2) Catalog number listed is not complete. Select voltage code from Table 122.
(3) Not available on 0.5 space factor units.
(4) Not available with Size 4 Starter units with E300 overloads using 200 A sensing modules (-7FE3_ _ _ _2_ _ _ _ _).
(5) For 100 A 2103L units, increase space factor from 1.5 to 2.0.
(6) For 0.5 space factor 2102L, 2103L, 2112 and 2113, standard capacity VA rating is 75VA.
(7) Not available on Feeders.
Table 122 - Line Voltage

208 H
240 A
380 N
400 KN
415 I
480 B
600 C

Electronic Overload Relays
IMPORTANT All EtherNet/IP network orders require an Electronic Overload module.
Table 123 - Electronic Overload Relays

Option Option Description FVR FVNR TS1W Delivery
Number TS2W Program
2106, 2107 2112, 2113 2122, 2123
E1 Plus Electronic -7FEE_ (7) Selectable trip class (10, 15, 20, 30) NEMA Size 1, 2   SC
Overload Relay (1) (2) selectable Auto/Manual-Auto reset (11), (17)
electronic overload relay for NEMA dual (17)
starters, Size 1…6. NEMA Size 3  
(17)
NEMA Size 4 (8) (12)
NEMA Size 5  
NEMA Size 6 
Vacuum Contactor Starters 200 A, 400 A, 600 
A
E1 Plus Electronic -7FEE_D Selectable to class (10, 15, 20, 30) NEMA Size 1, 2 
(7)
Overload Relay with selectable Auto/Manual-Auto reset
DeviceNet module (1) electronic overload relay NEMA (17)
(2) (3) (4)
starters, Size 1…6. Includes DeviceNet NEMA Size 3 
module with two 24V DC inputs and one
110…240V AC output. (17)
NEMA Size 4 (12)
NEMA Size 5 
NEMA Size 6 
A
E1 Plus Electronic -7FEE_G Selectable to class (10, 15, 20, 30) NEMA Size 1, 2  (13)
(7)
Overload Relay with selectable Auto/Manual-Auto reset
Ground Fault electronic overload relay for NEMA NEMA Size 3 (9) (9)
Protection Module & starters, Size 1…6. Includes Ground NEMA Size 4  (10) (14)
Jam Protection (1) (2) Fault Protection Module with integral
(5) (6)
Jam Protection and external Ground NEMA Size 5  (15)
Fault Sensor.
NEMA Size 6  (16)
Vacuum Contactor Starters 200 A 
400 A, 600 A 

Table 123 - Electronic Overload Relays (continued)

Option Option Description FVR FVNR TS1W Delivery
Number TS2W Program
2106, 2107 2112, 2113 2122, 2123
E1 Plus with Jam 7FEE_J (7) Selectable trip class (10, 15, 20, 30) NEMA Size 1, 2  (13) SC
Protection selectable Auto/Manual-Auto reset
Module (1) (2) (11) electronic overload relay for NEMA dual(11) (17) (17)
starters, size 1…6 with Jam Protection NEMA Size 3  
Module
(17)
NEMA Size 4 (8) (12)
NEMA Size 5  
NEMA Size 6 
A
(1) Options -7FEE_, 7FEE_D, 7FEE_G and 7FEE_J are supplied with one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contact.
(2) Options -7FEE_, 7FEE_D, 7FEE_G and 7FEE_J are mutually exclusive with each other and E300 overload relay options.
(3) Mutually exclusive with 89_ relay and 87_auxiliary timer options. Not available with pushbuttons or selector switches, except 3 and 1F are allowed for Bulletin 2112 and 2113.
Separate or transformer control only. Not available with option 11DSA2 or 11DSA3.
(4) Not available on IntelliCENTER MCC with EtherNet/IP network orders.
(5) Not available on dual starter units or with option 85XA (current transformer), 85AA (ammeter) or 700TC_ (current transducer).
(6) Available for separate, transformer, or line-to-neutral control only; not available with common control.
(7) Option number is not complete: Select overload relay code from appropriate table on page 147 and add to option number (for example, 7FEEB).
(8) Bulletin 2106 NEMA Size 4 is increased to 4.5 space factor.
(9) NEMA size 3, power terminal blocks must be supplied. Not available with Type A wiring or option 106 (omission of power terminal blocks).
(10) Bulletin 2107, NEMA Size 4 with circuit breaker is increased to 4.5 space factor.
(11) Not available on NEMA Size 2 dual units.
(12) Bulletin 2112 NEMA 4 with Class J fuses is increased to 3.0 space factor. Bulletin 2113 Size 4 with circuit breaker option -TGM requires 3.0 space factor.
(13) Not available on 0.5 space factor units with option 11DSA2 or 11DSA3.
(14) Bulletin 2112, NEMA Size 4 is increased to 3.5 space factor. Bulletin 2113, NEMA Size 4 with circuit breaker suffix TJA is increased to 2.5 space factors.
(15) Bulletin 2112, NEMA Size 5 with Class J fuse clips is increased to 4.0 space factor.
(16) Not available for 200 HP at 240V or 400 HP at 480V.
(17) For 2-speed starter and dual mounted starter units, there are two overload option codes required (for example, 7FEEEEEB, with DeviceNet module 7FEEEDEEBD, with Jam
Protection module 7FEEEJEEBJ).
For 2-speed applications, the first code denotes the high speed overload relay and the second code denotes the low speed overload relay.
For dual unit applications, the first code denotes the left-side overload relay, the second code denotes the right-side overload relay.

Table 124 - Overload Relay Codes for E1 Plus, Option -7FEE_ ,-7FEE_D, -7FEE_G, or 7FEE_
For Use with Full Load Current Range (Amperes) Overload Relay Code (Add to Option Number from 145
NEMA Size [for example, 7FEEB]) (4)
1(1) 0.2…1.0 B
1.0…5.0 C
3.2…16 D
5.4…27 E
(2)
2 9…45 F
3 18…90 G
4 30…150 H
5 60…300 J
6 120…600 K
200 A Vacuum Contactor Starter 40 …200 L
(3)
400 A Vacuum Contactor Starter 60…300 J
(3)
400 A Vacuum Contactor Starter 100…500 M
600 A Vacuum Contactor Starter 120…600 K
(1) Not available on NEMA Size 1 dual units when option 7FEE_G (ground fault protection) is used.
(2) Not available on NEMA Size 2 dual units.
(3) 400 A Vacuum Contactor Starters use code ‘J’ except 125 HP at 208V, 125…150 HP at 240V, 250 HP at 380…415V, 250…300 HP at 480V, and 350…400 HP at 600V use code ’M’
(4) For 2-speed starter and dual mounted starter units, there are two overload option codes required (for example, 7FEEEEEB, with DeviceNet module 7FEEEDEEBD, with Jam
Protection module 7FEEEJEEBJ). For 2-speed applications, the first code denotes the high speed overload relay and the second code denotes the low speed overload relay.
For dual mounted starter units, the first code denotes the overload relay for the left-hand starter, the second code denotes the overload relay for the right-hand starter. If a
DeviceNet module or Jam protection module is selected, it must be added to both overload relay codes and be the same option, either DeviceNet or Jam protection for both
codes.

IMPORTANT All EtherNet/IP network orders require an Electronic Overload module.
Table 125 - Catalog Explanation for E300 Electronic Overload Relay

-7FE3 E J CN 3C C DD
Type Communication Voltage Control Module Sensing Module Operator Station Expansion
Module
Table 126 Table 127 Table 128 Table 129 Table 130 Table 131 Table 132
Table 126 - Solid State Overload Type

Option Option Number Description FVC FVR FVNR TS1W, 2192F2 Delivery
TS2W 193F Program
2102L, 2106, 2112, 2122,
2103L 2107 2113 2123
E300 Electronic -7FE3(1)(2)(3) E300 - Communication Based Overload X X X(4) SC
Overload Relay
(1) Outputs are rated NEMA B300 (3 A at 120V AC and 1.5 A at 240V AC). Not available with common (line voltage) control. Not available with Type A wiring. Not available on dual units. Not
available in Space Saving.
(2) Mutually exclusive with all other overload options. Mutually exclusive with option 9 and 9A, 11DSA_, 18, 84A1, 85XA and 85AA, 87_, 89_, and 700TC_.
(3) Catalog options are not complete. An option from each table in Table 127…Table 132 is required to add an E300 Electronic Overload Relay.
(4) Not compatible with dual mount units.
Table 127 - E300 Overload Relay Communication Option

Code Communication Option
D DeviceNet
E EtherNet/IP
Table 128 - E300 Overload Relay Voltage Code

Code Voltage Code
(1)
D 120V AC
(2)
J 24V DC
(1) Mutually exclusive with all 220…240V control voltage types.

(2) Surge suppressor (-17) required except with vacuum contactors. Suppressor provided is RC
snubber.
Table 129 - E300 Overload Relay Control Module

Code Control Module
(4)
CN Control Only (6 In/3 Out w/24V DC; 4 In/3 Out w/AC Voltages)
GN(1) (2) (3) (4) Ground Fault & PTC (4 In/ 2 Out w/24V DC; 2 In/2 Out w/AC Voltages)
(1) (2) (3)
GT Ground Fault & PTC (4 In/ 2 Out w/24V DC; 2 In/2 Out w/AC Voltages) - Includes Bulletin 193-CBCT_ ground fault sensor.
(1) When used on 2106 and 2107, option requires Digital Expansion Module.
(2) Operator Stations and Expansion Modules cannot be added to the same unit.
(3) Electronic Reset (Option R) is not available with this option for Bulletins 2112 / 2113 (including those with vacuum contactors) with 120V Control (Option D). Any CB auxilliary is not wired
to E300 Input when any selector switch option is selected.
(4) Not available on Feeder units (2192F, 2193F).

Table 130 - E300 Overload Relay Sensing Module

Code Sensing Module (4) Starter 2193F Trip 2192F Fuse
NEMA Size
3C 0.5…30 A Current Only 1 15…30 A 30 A
(1)
3G 0.5…30 A Current/Ground Fault 1 15…30 A 30 A
3V 0.5…30 A Current/Ground Fault/Voltage 1 15…30 A 30 A
5C 0.5…30 A Pass-thru Current Only 4-6
5V 0.5…30 A Pass-thru Current/Voltage 4-6
6C 6…60 A Current Only 2 35…70 A 60 A
6G(1) 6…60 A Current/Ground Fault 2 35 …70 A 60 A
6V 6…60 A Current/Ground Fault/Voltage 2 35…70 A 60 A
1C 10…100 A Current Only 3 80…125 A 100 A
1G(1) 10…100 A Current/Ground Fault 3 80…125 A 100 A
1V 10…100 A Current/Ground Fault/Voltage 3 80…125 A 100 A
2C (2) (3) 20…200 A Current Only 4 150…250 A 200 A
2G (1) (2) (3) 20…200 A Current/Ground Fault 4 150 …250 A 200 A
2V (2) (3) 20…200 A Current/Ground Fault/Voltage 4 150…250 A 200 A
(1) Not available on Feeder units.

(2) Not compatible with -6XP option. Available only for 2.0SF Bulletin 2113. Not available if also using control module option -GT or
control transformer option -6XP. For those applications, use 5_ instead.
(3) Not available with E300 with DeviceNet, -7FE3D_, with options -18C or -18M.
(4) Modules with Internal Ground Fault Sensing: 500 mA - 5 A.
Table 131 - E300 Overload Relay Operator Station

Code Operator Station
(1)
X No Operator Station
C(2) (3) (4) Control Station
(2) (3) (4)
D Diagnostic Station
R(2) Electronic Reset
(1) Requires Enclosure code K or J for Bulletin 2106, 2107, 2112 or 2113 units.
(2) Requires Enclosure code A or D for Bulletin 2106, 2107, 2112 or 2113 units.
(3) Control and Diagnostic Operator Stations are mutually exclusive with all push button,
pilot light, selector switch, and control station options. Control and Diagnostic
Operator Stations are not available with E300 with DeviceNet, -7FE3D_, with options -
18C or -18M.
(4) Operator Stations and Expansion Modules cannot be added to the same unit.
Table 132 - E300 Overload Relay Expansion Module(1)

Code Expansion Module
-- None Selected
DD(2) (3) 120V AC Digital I/O Module
DJ(2) (3) 24V DC Digital I/O Module
(1) Expansion modules are automatically added when other options require them. They
cannot be added manually.
(2) Available on Bulletin 2106 and 2107 with GN or GT Control Module Option. Not available
on feeder units. Not available with E300 with DeviceNet with External Control Relay
Contact (-18C) or E3 Plus Emulation Mode (-18M) options.
(3) Operator Stations (options C and D in Table 131) and Expansion Modules can not be
added to the same unit.

Table 133 - E300 Digital Expansion I/O

E300 Control Module Option 120V AC Control 24V DC Control
Inputs Outputs Inputs Outputs
CN – Standard Control Module 4 3 6 3
GN / GT – Ground Fault and PTC Control FVNR FVR FVNR FVR FVN FVR FVNR FVR
Module R
2 2(1) 2 2(1) 4 4(1) 2 2(1)
(1) I/O shown is using the Programmed Control Relay Contact (option -18A with EtherNet communication or -18B with DeviceNet
communication). For applications that do not use the Programmed Control Relay Contact (no option -18A), include the expansion
module inputs (4 additional) and outputs (2 additional).
Table 134 - Miscellaneous Options
Option Option Description FVC FVR FVNR TS1W Feeder 2100- Delivery
Number TS2W /Main ESW Program
2102L 2106 2112 2122 2192
2103L 2107 2113 2123 2193
DeviceNet -11DSA2 For use with contactors and starters to provide     (16) SC
(17) (18)
Starter Auxiliary DeviceNet inputs and outputs. Four 120V inputs and two
(DSA) (1) (2) (3) 120V outputs. Available for 110…120V control only. (19)
-11DSA3 For use with contactors and starters to provide     

(17) (18)
DeviceNet inputs and outputs. Four 24V DC inputs and
(19)
two 240V AC (max), 30V DC (max) outputs. Available for
110…120V AC or 220…240V AC control voltage.
Overload -ENET(7) For use on starters to provide EtherNet/IP (14)
EtherNet/IP communication for the E1 Plus Electronic Overload Relay.
Communication
Module(4)
ArcShield™ -112A Make the unit Device Limited ArcShield compatible.       (23) PE
(15)
-112B Make the unit 100 ms Duration Rated ArcShield     (23)
compatible.
SecureConnect™ -113 Adds SecureConnect to the unit.    (20)
(5)
Additional Unit -15 Adds 0.5 space factor unit space to Bulletin 2112 and 2113   (23) SC
(24)
Space size 1, 2, and 3 units.
Important: Bulletin 2112 and 2113, sizes 1 and 2, cannot be
increased from 1.5 to 2.0 space factors by selecting
option 15, nor can size 1 increase from 0.5 to 1.0 space
factor by using option 15.
Filters for Door -16A Filters for door vents on NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 1 Available on NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 1
Vents with gasket Bulletin 2195, 2196 and 2197 units. with gasket Bulletins 2195, 2196, and 2197
only
Surge -17 (8) On coil, one per contactor, for starters and contactors,    
Suppressor (6) not available on vacuum type, selection of this option
requires the selection of -17R if an option relay (89__) is
also selected.
-17R For units with interposing relays (89CB and 89CBL) and    
unwired control relays (89CF and 89P), can only be used if
option relay (89__) is selected. Selection of this option
requires selection of option -17. Except when 89CBL or
Common Control is selected.
O/L Contact on -18 (7) Moves overload trip contact from right (grounded) side of   
Left Side of the control circuit to left (power input) side of control
Circuit circuit.
Programmed -18A (9) Replace external control relay contact with applicable    
Control Relay (10)
programmable mode within E300 Overload Relay
Contact
-18B (9)   (15)  (21)
(10)
External Control -18C (10) Includes external control relay contact.   (15)  (21)
(11)
Relay Contact

Table 134 - Miscellaneous Options (continued)

Option Option Description FVC FVR FVNR TS1W Feeder 2100- Delivery
Number TS2W /Main ESW Program
2102L 2106 2112 2122 2192
2103L 2107 2113 2123 2193
E3 Plus -18M (10) E3 Plus Emulation mode is enabled.   (15)  (21) SC
Emulation Mode (11)
Omit Wiring -19 Omission of control wiring(12) (13)    

Control Circuit -21 One control circuit fuse for separate control or line to     (22)
Fuse neutral control
-22(19) Two control circuit fuses for common control     PE
(1) Not available for dual 2103L or dual 2113 units. Not available for 0.5 space factor 2103L units. Not available for 0.5 space factor 2112 or 0.5 space factor 2113 units with E1 Plus with
ground fault/jam protection (option 7FEE_G) or E1 Plus with jam protection (option 7FEE_J). Mutually exclusive with 89_ relay and 87 timer options. Not available with push buttons
or selector switches, except options 3 and 1F are allowed for Bulletin 2102L, 2103L, 2112 and 2113.
(2) DeviceNet options 11DSA2 and 11DSA3 are mutually exclusive. Not available with 7FEE_D. Mutually exclusive with E300 overload relays, option 7FE3.
(3) DSA option is not allowed on 2193FZ-B and 2193FZ-C due to the addition of the lug pad.
(4) Mutually exclusive with E1 Plus options -7FEE_D, -7FEE_G, and -7FEE_J.
(5) Available with plug-in units only. Not available with 0.5 S.F. units. Automatic shutters are required.
(6) Available for 110…240V control voltage. SC delivery for 110…120V control voltage. PE delivery for 220…240V control voltage. Not available for common control.
(7) Not available with E300 overload relays, option -7FE3.
(8) Options 17 and 89CBL are mutually exclusive.
(9) This is the default option in PCBr. The correct mode is automatically selected and documented on the drawings. Available for modes 3, 5, 11, and 13. See Operating Modes in
publication 193-um015.
(10) Options -18A, -18B, -18C, and -18M are mutually exclusive. Option -18A is only avaiulable with E300 overload relay with EtherNet/IP, -7FE3E. Options -18B, -18C, and -18M are only
available with E300 overload relay with DeviceNet, -7FE3D.
(11) Not available with E300 Control and Diagnostic Operator Stations or Expansion IO.
(12) Except primary wiring to control transformers. On units where the control transformer is inaccessible (for example, installed under a mounting bracket), the transformer
secondary ‘x1’ is wired to the transformer secondary fuse and the transformer secondary ‘x2’ is grounded and wired to the coil on Bulletin 2102 or 2103 units, to the coil on the
starter units when option -18 is selected, to the normally closed overload relay auxiliary contact on the starter units when option -18 is not selected.
(13) On units with E300 overload relay, the external reset (option R) is always wired and with separate control E300 overload relay is wired to control circuit fuse.
(14) Not available with dual units.
(15) Excludes Vacuum starters.
(16) A 120/240V AC source must be provided.
(17) Bulletins 2192F and 2192M require option 98 (external N.O. auxiliary contact). Bulletins 2193F and 2193M require option 98 (N.O. external auxiliary contact) or -790K (G, H, and J) and
-790A (all other frames) (N.O. internal auxiliary contact).
(18) Not available with dual 2192F units.
(19) Not compatible with E300 Electronic Overloads (-7FE3___).
(20) Not available with 3 A and 7 A MCP circuit breakers
(21) Available with 2192F and 2193F.
(22) Available only with E300 Electronic Overloads with 120V (Voltage Code "D") (-7FE3_D_____).
(23) Only available with non-wireway switch units.
(24) Delivery Program is PE.

Table 135 - Ground Options
Option Option Description FVC FVR FVNR TS1W Delivery
Number TS2W Program
2102L 2106 2112 2122
2103L 2107 2113 2123
Grounded -79GD Hinge mounted ground strap mounted on bottom hinge of unit door. Unit door Available on all units SC
Unit Door hinge grounding strap for IEC requirements.
Unit Load -79L Select on all plug-in units in sections with vertical unit load Unplated copper Available on all plug-in units
Connector -79LT(10) ground bus. Provides ground connection at unit location for Tin plated copper
cable size# 14-4 AWG
Unit Ground — Copper unit ground stabs also may be used with steel Copper alloy Available on all plug-in units
Stab vertical ground bus. Select on plug-in units in sections with
-79U Unplated copper
vertical plug-in ground bus.
-79UT(10) Tin plated copper
Thermistor -84A1 Bulletin 817-E2P, 110…120V AC, 50/60 Hz, output is unwired. 
Protection
Relay(1)
Unit -85AA Analog ammeter and current transformer.  
Ammeter (2)
(3) (4) -85XA Current transformer only for use with external meter. Current transformer rated  
2.5VA or greater.
Elapsed -85T Six digit non-resettable meter (with tenths), mounted in control station  
Time Meter
(5) (6) (7)
Unwired -87A Bulletin 596 time delay addition to NEMA size 1 through 5 On delay 
Timer contactors with N.O. and N.C. contacts.
-87B Off delay 
Auxiliary (not
available on
0.5 SF units)
Ground -88A Three Bulletin 800T pilot lights (clear), wired in grounded 240 Volt Available on Bulletin 2191M, 2192M SC
Detection -88B WYE, complete with fusing 480 Volt and 2193M ONLY
Lights (8) Not for use with solidly grounded
-88C 600 Volt power systems
-88H 208 Volt
-88I 415 Volt
-88KN 400 Volt
-88N 380 Volt
-88AT Three Bulletin 800T push-to-test pilot lights (clear), wired in 240 Volt Available on Bulletin 2191M, 2192M
-88BT grounded WYE, complete with fusing 480 Volt and 2193M ONLY
Not for use with solidly grounded
-88CT 600 Volt power systems
-88HT 208 Volt
-88IT 415 Volt
-88KNT 400 Volt
-88NT 380 Volt
Ground Fault -88GF Integral ground fault protection system with adjustable pick-up, adjustable time Only available on Bulletin 2192M, PE-II
Protection (9) delay, control power indicator light, trip indicator and built-in test feature. Shunt 1600…2000 A. For use with solidly
trip is included. See required voltage code on 89. grounded WYE systems only.
(1) Not available on dual starters, requires 1.5 space factor for size 1 and 2 and 2.0 space factor for 2113 size 3. Requires extra 0.5 space factor for NEMA Size 4 Bulletin 2112 with Class
J fuses. Requires 2.5 space factor for NEMA Size 4 Bulletin 2113 with MCP circuit breaker (Circuit Breaker code CA) and E1 Plus overload relay (Option 7FEE_). Not available in units
containing a current transducer (700TC_). Available in Canada only. Available for 120V separate or transformer control only. Not available with E300 overload relay; for thermistor
protection, use E300 overload relay.
(2) 85XA, 85AA not available with 7FEE_D or 7FE3.
(3) Ammeter has 5 A movement, 3.5” scale, 102° deflection and 2% of full scale accuracy. Current transformer for external meter is supplied with 8-foot secondary leads. Ammeter
scale and CT ratio are determined by the horsepower code. Not valid on 0.5 space factor or dual mounted units, units with E300 overload relay (7FE3), or units with E1 Plus overload
relay with ground fault/jam protection (option 7FEE_G). Requires 2.5 space factor for NEMA Size 4 Bulletin 2113 with MCP circuit breaker (Circuit Breaker code CA) and E1 Plus
overload relay (Option 7FEE_).
(4) Unit ammeter and current transducer options are mutually exclusive.
(5) Elapsed time meter mounts in position normally used for a pilot device, limiting the maximum number of pilot devices selected. On 0.5 space factor units, elapsed time meter uses
two positions normally used for a pilot device. Not available on dual mounted units. Available on units with 120V separate or transformer control only. Not available on 380…415V, 50
Hz applications.
(6) Mutually exclusive with control relay options 89CB, 89CBL, 89CF_ and 89P in 1.0 space factor and current transformer options 700TC1 and 700TC4 in 1.0 space factor. 1.0 space
factor units are increased to 1.5 space factor.
(7) Requires option -90, Normal open auxiliary contact for Bulletin 2102L, 2103L, 2112 and 2113. Requires option -900011 for Bulletin 2112 and 2113 vacuum contactor starters.
(8) Not available on Bulletin 2191M units specified with metering options. Not available on Bulletin 2191MT, 600A in horizontal wireway, corner section or 10” wide incoming lug section.
Not available on non-fused 2192M units. Mutually exclusive with key interlock mounting provision (option 201).
(9) Horizontal neutral bus and incoming neutral bus is required when 3-phase, 4-wire power system is specified. Available only on 480…600V, 60 Hz applications.
(10) Unit load ground connector and unit ground stab plating must match the horizontal and vertical ground bus plating.

Table 136 - Incoming Neutral Bus

Option Option Description Rating Main Neutral Bus Space Factor Adder MLUG MFDS MCB Delivery
Number Location 2191M 2192M 2193M Program
(11)
MLUG MFDS MCB MLUG MFDS MCB
(5)
Incoming -88HN_ Provides for incoming 600 None  PE
Neutral Bus (1) (half- neutral connection to (6)
For Bulletin rated) horizontal neutral bus 800 None 
2191M (main within the main incoming (6)
lug) units. unit. Incoming neutral bus 1200 None 
See table on rating must match the (7)
page 79 for horizontal neutral bus 1600 None 
available lugs rating, half or full. (7)
2000 None 
(5)
-88FN_ 600 None 
(full- (6)
rated) 800 None 
(6) (6)
1200 
(7)
1600 None 
(7)
2000 None 
(9) (9) (10)
Incoming -88HN Provides for incoming 400 None  
Neutral Bus (half- neutral connection to (8) (8)
(2)
rated) horizontal neutral bus 600 1.0 1.0 (10)  
For Bulletins within the main incoming (8) (8)
2192M (main unit. Incoming neutral bus 800 1.0 1.0 (10)  
fusible rating must match the (8) (8)
horizontal neutral bus 1200 1.0 1.0  
disconnect
switch) and rating, half or full (5)
1600 N/A None N/A  
2193M (main
circuit (5) (5)
2000 None None  
breaker).
(9)
See tables on -88FN 150 N/A N/A None 
page 91 for (full- (9)
2192M and rated) 225 N/A N/A None 
page 100 for (9) (9) (10)
2193M 400 None  
standard and (8) (8)
optional lugs. 600 1.0 1.0 (10)  
(8) (8)
800 1.0 1.0 (10)  
(8) (8)
1200 1.0 1.0  
(5)
1600 N/A None N/A  
(5) (5)  
2000 None None
(5) (5)  
2500 None None
(5) (5)
3000 None None  

Table 136 - Incoming Neutral Bus (continued)

Option Option Description Rating Main Neutral Bus Space Factor Adder MLUG MFDS MCB Delivery
Number Location 2191M 2192M 2193M Program
(11)
MLUG MFDS MCB MLUG MFDS MCB
Incoming -88NPC 0.25” x 2” x 12” copper tin plated bus plate with #6–250 kcmil lug. Insulated from and (12) (13) (14) SC-II
(4)
Neutral mounted on unit support pan. Located below main incoming unit if top entry and located
Connection above main incoming unit if bottom entry. Adds 0.5 space factor for main unit if less than
Plate (3) 6.0 space factor. Not available for 2191M unit in top horizontal wireway. 280 A capacity.
(can be used
only in -88NPS 0.25” x 2” x 12” copper silver plated bus plate with #6–250 kcmil lug. Insulated from and (12) (13) (14) ENG
(4)
sections with mounted on unit support pan. Located below main incoming unit if top entry and located
a vertical above main incoming unit if bottom entry. Adds 0.5 space factor for main unit if less than
wireway) 6.0 space factor. Not available for 2191M unit in top horizontal wireway. 280 A capacity.
(1) Option code is not complete. Add location (‘T’ for the top, ‘B’ for the bottom) which matches the location of the horizontal neutral bus. Use ‘T’ for neutral bus above the main power bus.
Use ‘B’ for neutral bus below the main power bus. IMPORTANT: For 800 A and 1200 A which are not 6.0 space factor, the neutral bus code is opposite the incoming bus compartment
mounting code.
(2) Available in U.S. In Canada, this option is engineered.
(3) Can only be used in sections with a vertical wireway. Cannot be used if horizontal neutral bus is selected. For applications with horizontal neutral bus, select the appropriate 88HN or
88FN option. If incoming neutral cable is greater than one, #6 AWG to 250 kcmil, or if neutral current exceeds 280 A, do not use option 88NPC or 88NPS. Select horizontal neutral bus
and appropriate 88HN or 88FN options.
(4) Increases unit size by 0.5 SF, mounted below main unit that is top mounted or mounted above main unit that is bottom mounted. Main unit and neutral unit doors are interlocked
(5) Same as MLUG, MFDS, MCB (for example, if MLUG, MFDS, or MCB is in the top of the section, main neutral bus is above the main power bus).
(6) Horizontal neutral must be located on the opposite side of the MLUG, except 6 space factor, the neutral bus location is unrestricted. 1200 A full-rated neutral must be 6 space factor.
(7) No restrictions.
(8) Horizontal neutral must be located below the main power bus.
(9) Top incoming only. Horizontal neutral must be located below the main power bus.
(10) Option 88HN/88FN changes unit to full-width of section, with no vertical wireway next to unit.
(11) Not available with 600 A incoming lug compartment in horizontal wireway, or 10” wide section with incoming lugs.
(12) May only be selected for 300 A main incoming lug compartment. For ratings greater than 300 A, use incoming neutral bus option (-88HN_ or -88FN_).
(13) May only be selected for 400 A and smaller main fusible disconnect switch. For ratings greater than 400 A, use incoming neutral bus option (-88HN or -88FN).
(14) May only be selected for 400 A and smaller frame main circuit breaker. For frame ratings greater than 400 A, use incoming neutral bus option (-88HN or -88FN).
Table 137 - Interposing Relay

Number TS2 Program
W
2102L 2106 2112 2122
2103L 2107 2113 2123
Interposing Relay (1) -89CB Control circuit interposing relay. Utilizes Bulletin 700-CF control relay   SC (4)
(2)
to control starter coil in control circuit. Available on NEMA sizes 1…5
and vacuum contactor starters. The starter or contactor coil voltages  
Mutually exclusive and interposing relay coil voltages are the same as the control voltage.
with 89CF and 89P,
unwired control -89CBL Line circuit interposing relay. Utilizes Bulletin 700-CF control relay to  
(3)
relays control starter coil in control circuit. Available on NEMA sizes 1…5. The
starter or contactor coil voltages are the same as the line voltage. The  
interposing relay coil voltage is the same as the control voltage.
(1) 2.0 space factor minimum when selected on Bulletin 2113 size 3 starters and Bulletin 2106 and 2107 size 1 or 2. Not available on dual 2103L, dual 2113 units or 0.5 space factor
units. Not available with common control. Mutually exclusive with 7FE3 options, 11DSA2 or 11DSA3 DeviceNet starter auxiliary options or 7FEE_D. When selected on 2122 or 2123
size 1 or 2 stater units, power terminal blocks are not provided; this requires the selection of option 106 (omit power terminal blocks).
(2) 2.5 space factor required when selecting Bulletin 2113B-E with E1+ Overload Relay
(3) Options 89CBL and 17 are mutually exclusive. When one control circuit fuse for separate control (21) is selected with 89CBL on 1.0 space factor Bulletin 2102L, 2103L, 2112 or
2113 units, one auxiliary contact mounting position (P3) is given up for the control circuit fuse.
(4) SC delivery for 110…120V control voltage. PE delivery for 220…240V control voltage.

Table 138 - Unwired Control Relay

Number TS2W Program
2102L 2106 2112 2122
2103L 2107 2113 2123
QUANTITY SUPPLIED
Unwired -89CF40 Bulletin 700CF 4-pole relay (3) Instantaneous 4 N.O. 1 2 1 2 SC (5)
Control Relay Contacts
(1) (2) -89CF31 3 N.O. and 1
N.C.
Mutually (Instantaneous
exclusive -89CF22 contacts on 2 N.O. and 2
with 89CB Bulletin 700CF N.C.
and 89CBL relays are non-
interposing -89CF40A Bulletin 700CF On-delay convertible. 4 N.O. 1 2 1 2
relays 4-pole relay with includes one Bulletin 700P
-89CF22A time attachment NOTC and one relays have 2 N.O. and 2
NCTO contact N.C.
For common instantaneous
control, 120V 0.3…30 s (4) contacts that
-89CF40B Off-delay are convertible 4 N.O.
coil is includes one
provided -89CF22B NOTO and one from normally 2 N.O. and 2
open to normally N.C.
NCTC contact closed.)
-89CF40C Bulletin 700CF On-delay 4 N.O. 1 2 1 2
4-pole relay with includes one
-89CF22C time attachment NOTC and one 2 N.O. and 2
NCTO contact N.C.
1.8 …180 s (4)
-89CF40D Off-delay 4 N.O.
includes one
-89CF22D NOTO and one 2 N.O. and 2
NCTC contact N.C.
-89CF40L Bulletin 700CF 4-pole relay with 4 N.O. 1 2 1 2 PE

mechanical latch attachment (4)
-89CF22L 2 N.O. and 2
N.C.
-89P2 Bulletin 700P relay 2 N.O. 1 2 1 2 SC (5)
-89P4 4 N.O.
-89PT Bulletin 700P with pneumatic time No 1 2 1 2 PE
delay attachment (on/off delay) with instantaneous
two timed contacts (0.1…60 s) (4) contacts
-89PT2 2 N.O.
-89PT4 4 N.O.
-89PL2 Bulletin 700P 2 N.O. 1 2 1 2
with mechanical latch attachment (4)
(1) Not available on dual 2103L units, dual 2113 units or 0.5 space factor units. When selected on 2122 or 2123 size 1 or 2 starter units, power terminal blocks are not provided; this
requires the selection of option 106 (omit power terminal blocks). One relay is furnished per each contactor on reversing (2106/2107) or 2-speed (2122/2123) starters. Bulletin
2106 and 2107 size 1 and 2 starters and Bulletin 2113 size 3 starters require 2.0 space factors when a relay is selected. Mutually exclusive with 11DSA2 and 11DSA3 DeviceNet
starter auxiliary, 7FEE_D or 7FE3.
(3) When control circuit transformer is selected on Bulletin 2102L or 2103L 30 A or 60 A units or Bulletin 2112 or 2113 size 1 or 2 units, the secondary control transformer fuse is
mounted in one of the three starter auxiliary contact pockets.
(4) When selected for 1 space factor Bulletin 2102L or 2103L 30 A or 60 A units or 1 space factor Bulletin 2112 or 2113 size 1 and 2 starters, the unit is increased to 1.5 space factor.
(5) SC delivery for 110…120V control voltage. PE delivery for 220…240V control voltage.

Table 139 - Externally Mounted Contacts

Option Option Description NEMA Wiring Misc. FVC FVR FVNR TS1W FDS CB Xfmr Delivery
(5) (5)
Number Size Type Units TS2W Program
2100M
2192M
2193M
2100D
2102L
2103L
2192F
2193F
2106
2122
2123
2196
2107
2197
2112
2113
Auxiliary -90 NORMALLY OPEN 1…6 A     SC
Contacts(1) One N.O. auxiliary contact mounted on
(2) each contactor or starter    
B (4)    
   
-91 NORMALLY CLOSED 1…6 A    
One N.C. auxiliary contact mounted on
each contactor or starter    
(4)    
B
   
-98 (3) NORMALLY OPEN 1…5 A or B                
(6)
One N.O. auxiliary contact (operates with
movement of external handle only)
6  
-99 (3) NORMALLY CLOSED 1…5 A or B                
One N.C. auxiliary contact (operates with (6)

6  
(1) Multiple auxiliary contacts of the same type must be grouped by repeating the second digit for each required contact of that type. For example, to get four of option -98 and two of option -99, the combined string
would be -98888-999.
(2) All options use 120V AC rated accessories.
(3) The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied is two, in any combination. Contacts actuate with movement of unit handle to ON or OFF position only. Contacts are not designed to actuate as the result of a circuit
breaker trip. For such applications, auxiliary contacts -790K (G, H, and J) and -790A (all other frames) mounted internally must be selected. Auxiliary contacts are supplied unwired. Not available on dual 2192F units or 1600
A and 2000 A 2193M units.
(4) Type B auxiliary contacts are wired to terminal blocks. If the number of auxiliary contact wiring points required exceeds the number of terminals available in the unit, remaining auxiliary contacts are unwired. Refer to wiring diagram.
(5) For vacuum contactor starters only options codes -91 or -900-9111 are allowed.
(6) For 1600 A and 2000 A 2192M, the maximum number of auxiliary contacts is four. The following contact arrangements are allowed.
-98, -99, or -98-99 two contacts, (1) N.O/N.C. Form-C contacts
-988, -999 four contacts, two (1) N.O/N.C. Form-C contacts
The auxiliary contacts are mounted external to the switch and are actuated by the movement of the operating handle. Auxiliary contacts are supplied unwired.

Table 140 - Internally Mounted Contacts

Option Option Description Breaker Wiring Misc. FVC FVR FVNR TS1W CB Xfm Delivery
Number Frame Type Units TS2W r Program
2100M
2193M
2100D
2102L
2103L
2193F
2106
2122
2123
2196
2107
2197
2112
2113
Auxiliary -790K One Form C Aux mounted internally in G, H, J A or B         SC
Contacts(1) Circuit Breaker
(2)
-790G Four 120V AC Form C Aux mounted R A or B  
internally in Circuit Breaker
-790J Three 120V AC Aux and One 24V DC R A or B  
Aux mounted internally in Circuit
Breaker
-790L Two Form C Aux mounted internally in G, H, J A or B        
Circuit Breaker
-790A One Form C Aux, One Form C Alarm G, H, J, A or B        
mounted internally in Circuit Breaker K, M, N
-790T One Form C Alarm mounted internally G, H, J A or B        
in Circuit Breaker
-790B Two Form C Aux, One Form C Alarm G, H, J A or B        
mounted internally in Circuit Breaker
(1) Multiple auxiliary contacts of the same type must be grouped by repeating the second digit for each required contact of that type. For example, to get four of option -98 and two of option -99, the combined string is
-98888-999.
(2) All options use 120V AC rated accessories unless otherwise noted.
Table 141 - Maximum Number of Additional Auxiliary Contacts Per Starter/Contactor

Bulletin Number (1) NEMA
Size 1-2 Size 3-5 Size 6
2102L, 2103L 6 5 —
(2) (3)
2112/2113 4
2103L/2113 Dual — —
2106/2107 4 4 —
2122/2123
2102L/2103L/2112/2113 0.5SF 3 — —
(1) Units selected with OFF pilot light use one of these contacts.
(2) Size 1 and 2 with E300 overload relays are limited to 5 contacts.
(3) When Bulletin 596 timers are selected on 30…300 A contactors or size 1…5 starters, auxiliary mounting positions (P3 and P4) are used, limiting the maximum number of starter
auxiliaries to two. When 89CB, 89CBL, 89CF, 89P, 700TC_, 11DSA2 or 11DSA3 with NEMA Type B wiring is present with transformer control in 1.0 space factor units, the number of
starter auxiliary contacts is limited to four. For size 2 units with 7FEEE_ or 7FEE_D, E1 Plus Overload, the number of auxiliary contacts is limited to five. In E300 overloads, the
number of starter auxiliary contacts is limited to five.

Table 142 - Terminal Blocks, Key-Interlock, Current Transducers, and Sensors
Option Option Description FVC FVR FVNR TS1W 2100- Delivery
Number TS2W ESW Program
2102L 2106 2112 2122
2103L 2107 2113 2123
Omission of Power -106 For contactors and starters (NEMA NEMA sizes 1, 2 and 3    SC
Terminal Blocks (1) Type BD)

-110 (6) For 30 A, 60 A, and 100 A fusible disconnect feeders. Available for Bulletin 2192F
ONLY
Control Terminal -107 One extra 5-pole control terminal block (unwired).    
Block (1) (2) (3) (4)
T-Handle -111 T-handle latch on unit door.(8) Available on all units except 2191F, 2191M,
2192M, 2193M, 2195, and 2100-ESW(12), (13)
Locking Latch -114 Provision for accepting a lock on the door latch for the Ethernet  (12) PE
Switch Unit. (1.0 SF Only) (13)
Key-interlock -201 For circuit breaker or fusible disconnect main or feeder units. Available for Bulletins 2192 and SC
Mounting Provision(5) Permits customer mounting of Superior or Kirk brand key interlocks 2193 ONLY
on unit operating handle. (9)
Window -203W(12) Door mounted window on an Ethernet Switch Unit to provide 
visibility to the status LEDs on the Ethernet Switch(es) in the unit.
Current Transducers -700TC1 Ohio Semitronics Model MCT5-005E 
(4…20mA Output) (7)
85…135V AC, 50/60 Hz power (includes current transformer).
-700TC2 Crompton Instruments Model 253-TALU-LSHG 120V AC +/-20%,  PE
(7)
50/60 Hz power (includes current transformer).
Current Sensors -700TC4 N-K Technologies model AT 12…40V DC at sensor (current  SC
(4…20mA Output) (7)
transformer not needed on sizes 1…3, included on sizes 4…6).
-700TC5 Katy Instruments, 5…40V DC at sensor (current transformer not 
(7)
needed) model 420, sizes 1…3, all voltages.
Katy Instruments, 5…40V DC at sensor (current transformer not 
needed).(10)
Katy Instruments, 5…40V DC at sensor (current transformer not 
needed).(11)
(1) Available for NEMA Wiring Type B only. Not available on 0.5 space factor units.
(2) A maximum of two 5-pole control terminal blocks only for each side of dual unit.
(3) An additional block of five control terminals can be supplied for customer use, provided the total number of control terminals does not exceed 15 maximum on units with power
terminals, 20 maximum on units without power terminals. Check wiring diagram for limitations.
(4) Clarification for 2122/2123 units. NEMA size 1 or 2 requires the addition of -106 to accept -107. NEMA size 3 does not require -106 due to side mounted Power TB's.
(5) Mutually exclusive with ground detection lights (option 88_). Not available on 0.5 space factor units.
(6) This option is not available on dual mounted 2192F.
(7) Transducer/sensor output is unwired. Not available on 0.5 space factor or dual starter units. Not available with E1 Plus O.L. with ground fault/jam protection (option 7FEE_G). Options
700TC1, 700TC4 and 700TC5 require minimum 1.5 space factors for size 1 and 2 if optional control relay, timer auxiliary relay or 11DSA2/11DSA3 is used. Option 700TC1 requires minimum
2.0 space factors for Bulletin 2113, size 3 when 11DSA2 or 11DSA3 is used. When control circuit transformer primary fusing is selected, the control transformer secondary fuse is
mounted in one of the three starter auxiliary contact pockets. Option 700TC2 always requires minimum 1.5 space factors for sizes 1 and 2. Option 700TC2 requires minimum 2.0 space
factors for Bulletin 2113, size 3. Unit ammeter options, current transducer and thermistor protection relay options are mutually exclusive. Options 700TC1, 700TC2, 700TC4 and 700TC5
require extra 0.5 space factor for NEMA Size 4 Bulletin 2112 with Class J fuses. Requires 2.5 space factor for NEMA Size 4 Bulletin 2113 with HMCP circuit breaker (circuit breaker code
CA) and E1 Plus overload relay (Option 7FEE_). Option 700TC5 requires extra 0.5 space factor for NEMA Size 5 Bulletin 2112 with Class J fuses. Not available when -21 is selected.
(8) Provided as standard with Bulletin 2193LE and 2193PP.
(9) For 150…1200 A 2192M and 150…1200 A 2193M units, use Superior key interlock #S105810Y, Type B-4003-1 (bolt flush when withdrawn) or Kirk key interlock #KFL000010. For 1600 A and
2000 A 2192M units, use Superior key interlock #S105821Y, Type B-06003-1 (bolt extends 0.375” when withdrawn) or Kirk key interlock #KBL003710. IMPORTANT: Fusible units should
not be used on a tie (double ended) system, due to access to fuses and back feeding. For these applications, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation
sales representative. Not available on R-frame circuit breakers (option -TRUG).
(10) Model 420L, size 4 (all voltages) and size 5 at 380V, 415V, 480V, and 600V only.
(11) Model 420X, size 5 at 208V and 240V and size 6 (all voltages).
(12) Only available with unit-mounted industrial Ethernet switches.
(13) Locking Latch (-114) and T-Handles (-111) are mutually exclusive.

Table 143 - Control Circuit Wiring and Lugs, Shunt Trips, Omission of Circuit Breaker Cableado de control
Option Option Description FVC FVR FVNR TS1W Feeder 2100- Frame Delivery
Number TS2W s ESW Program
2102L 2106 2112 2122 2192
2103L 2107 2113 2123 2193
Control — Type MTW(TEW) 90°C copper #16 AWG     (10) SC
Circuit wire, VW1 rated
Wiring (1)
- Align control wiring I/O to faceplates used in  
600PAX PlantPAx
(6)
-750 (7) Type MTW(TEW) 90°C copper #14 AWG (tinned)     (10)
wire, VW1 rated
-750S (7) Type SIS 90°C copper wire #14 AWG (tinned)     (10) SC
(+2 days)
Control Circuit -750RL Insulated ring lugs for control wires where possible     (10)
Lugs (1) (7) (2)
-750SL Insulated spade lugs for control wires where     (10)
possible
Control Wire -751D Adhesive Brady Datab type markers at each end of     (10)  SC
Markers (1) control wire.
-751HS Heat shrink type wire marker     (10)  SC
(+2 days)
-751S Sleeve type wire marker     (10)  SC
Device -751M Mylar Device Markers       SC
Markers
Omission of -752 For combination starter units, NEMA size 1 and 2    SC
Circuit MCP frame only. N/A in 0.5
Breaker space factor units. NEMA size 3   
NEMA size 4   
(3)
Shunt Trip -754 Shunt Trip Relay. Applying potential to the relay trips Available on all circuit breaker
the breaker. (120V) units(8)
100% Rating of -755 Provides 100% rating of main switch or circuit Available on 2192M, 600…2000 PE-II
Main breaker. NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket only, A(9)
Disconnect except non-fused 2192M is available in NEMA Type
Switch or 12. Not available with NEMA Type 3R or Type 4. Available on 2193M, 1200…3000 A 1200 A SC
Circuit Only
Breaker(4) 2000 A
2500 A
3000
A(11)
Undervoltage -780 Undervoltage relay. Loss of potential to the relay     (10)
Release (3) (5) trips the breaker. (120V)
(1) Options for factory wiring of control circuits. Also available for 2100-DPS_, 2100-C2D, 2100-E2D_, and 2100-DC_05XWD units. Also 2192F, 2192M, 2193F, and 2193M units when option -
11DSA_ is selected. Dedicated auxiliary devices (for example, fans), device and component internal wiring and wiring that could affect operation or certifications (for example,
insulation temperature class, EMC shielding requirements, communication requirements, UL, C-UL, CSA, CE) are not included.
(2) Examples where insulated lugs CANNOT be used: Bulletin 800F pilot devices, 700CF, size 6 auxiliaries, and disconnect/circuit breaker auxiliaries and where more than one wire per
terminal is required.
(3) Shunt trip (-754) and Undervoltage Release (-780) are mutually exclusive.
(4) 100% rated circuit breakers mains not available with ArcShield due to venting requirements.
(5) Only applies to the circuit breaker units.
(6) Available only for E300 electronic overloads on EtherNet/IP, -7FE3E_.
(7) Not available on 0.5 space factor Bulletin 2102L, 2103L, 2112, or 2113 units.
(8) Not available on 2193PP plug-in panel board with main circuit breaker or 2193LE lighting panels or 2100M- empty units with circuit breaker.
(9) 600 A switch must use 601A, Class L fuse for 100% rating.
(10) Available only with E300 Electronic Overloads (-7FE3___).
(11) Requires Over Temp Alarm pilot light (-4LH_) Shunt Trip (-754), or Undervoltage Release (-780), and separate control (-21) or transformer control (-6P_). Undervoltage Release requires
separate control. Shunt trip requires transformer control.

Table 144 - Miscellaneous Options

2102L 2106 2112 2122
2103L 2107 2113 2123
External -767A(2) Door mounted external DeviceNet connection and 120V AC Available on 2100-DPS_ units only. See SC
Network receptacle for connection of computer to DeviceNet without Table 106 for unit selection.
Connector having to open doors. Mounted on door of DeviceNet power
with 120V AC supply unit. See Table 106.
Receptacle
-768A(2) Door mounted external Ethernet connection and 120V AC Available on 2100-EPS_ units only. See 
receptacle for connection of computer to Ethernet network Table 106 for unit selection.
without having to open doors. Mounted on door of Ethernet power
supply unit. See Table 106.
-768B(3) Door mounted external Ethernet connection for connection of Available on 2100-EPS_ units only. See 
computer to the embedded EtherNet/IP network without having Table 106 for unit selection.
to open doors. Mounted on the door of industrial Ethernet switch
units. (Does not include 120V AC Receptacle.)
Network -767C Provides second power supply and anti-backfeed, blocking Available only for 2100-DPS8_ units. See
Power Supply, diodes. Allows seemless transfer of power from primary to Table 106 for unit selection.
Redundant secondary power supply in the event of an internal failure of the
Design primary power supply.
-768C Provides second power supply and anti-backfeed, blocking Available only for 2100-EPS8_ units. See
diodes. Allows seemless transfer of power from primary to Table 106 for unit selection.
secondary power supply in the event of an internal failure of the
primary power supply.
Provides a second set of terminal blocks for a second power 
supply connection to the switches. This secondary connection is
intended to be customer supplied. (Typically external to the MCC.)
I/O Block -768D Switch I/O and status contacts wired to control terminal blocks. 
Enables #22 to #12 guage I/O wire for these connections.
Industrial SD -768E Includes 1GB Industrial SD Card. (Includes 1784-SD1)  PE
Card
Unwired Pull- -800 Bulletin 1492-EC All mounting tabs on unit bottom Available on 2100-NK and 2100-NJ empty SC
apart Terminal 5-pole terminal blocks plate are turned up for field unit inserts and 2100D and 2100M empty
Blocks installed terminal blocks unit inserts with disconnecting means
ONLY
-801 All mounting tabs on unit bottom Not available on 2100-NK05 or 2100-
plate are turned up. One 5-pole NJ05 units.
pull-apart terminal block included.
-802 All mounting tabs on unit bottom
plate are turned up. Two 5-pole
pull-apart terminal blocks included.
plate are turned up. Three 5-pole
plate are turned up. Four 5-pole
French Legend -860F Legend plates printed in French are available on all pilot devices. Available on all pilot devices
Plates Specify 860F when pilot device option is selected.
Spanish -860S Legend plates printed in Spanish are available on all pilot devices. Available on all pilot devices
Legend Plates Specify 860S when pilot device option is selected.

Table 144 - Miscellaneous Options (continued)

2102L 2106 2112 2122
2103L 2107 2113 2123
Unit Door — Door Nameplate Screws Plated steel nameplate screws. Available on all units SC
Nameplates (1) Provided when cardholder or
nameplates are not selected.
Card Holder for Unit Doors 1.125'' x 3.625'' plastic card holders Available on all units
with blank cards
1.125” x 3.625” engraved 3- Acrylic plate (available in U.S. only). Available on all units
line or 4-line nameplate Lettering is white with black letters
or black with white letters.
Phenolic plate. Lettering is white Available on all units
with black letters, black with white
letters or red with white letters.
Stainless Steel — Stainless steel nameplate screws for unit nameplates Available on all units
Nameplate (2 per unit)
Screws
Export Packing — Container is skid mounted and packaged in clear plastic. Packing     SC
Below Deck is not watertight or waterproof. Considerations should be taken if (+2 days)
extended storage is expected.
(1) Blank nameplates are supplied when no engraving is selected. Letter height for 3-line nameplates is 0.22”. Letter height for 4-line nameplates is 0.18”. All text is centered
horizontally and vertically.
(2) When specified on a Power Supply Unit with DeviceNet or EtherNet/IP network, the control circuit transformer increases to 500VA.
(3) Only available with non-wireway industrial Ethernet switch units.

Notes:

Chapter 12
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for

Space Saving NEMA Starter Units
• Multiple option numbers are separated by a dash and added to the base catalog number in ascending order.
• Pilot devices are Bulletin 800F.
• To select pilot light lens color, add letter(s) to the option number:
A = amber, B = blue, C = clear, G = green, R = red, W = white (for example, 4RG is a red ON and green OFF pilot light).
Clear is not available on Bulletin 800F LED pilot lights. White is not available on Bulletin 800F incandescent pilot lights.

Table 145 - Pushbutton, Selector Switch, and Pilot Light Options

Option Description FVR FVNR Option Delivery
Number Program
2106, 2107 2112, 2113
(1) (2)  -1 (3)
Push Buttons START-STOP SC
FORWARD-REVERSE-STOP 
STOP   -1B(3)
Push Buttons and Selector Switch HAND-START, HAND-STOP, HAND-OFF-AUTO  -1F(4)
(1) (2)
Selector Switch (1) (2) HAND-OFF-AUTO  -3

(3)
FORWARD-OFF-REVERSE 
OFF-ON  -3E(3)
Pilot Lights Incandescent ON  -4_(4) (5) ENG
(Full-voltage 800F) (2) Type (4) (6) (7)
Lens color ON-OFF  -4_ _
designator
A, B, C, G, R FORWARD-REVERSE  -4_ _(7)
FORWARD-REVERSE-OFF  -4_ _ _ (6) (8)
OVERLOAD   -4T _(9)
LED Type ON  -4L_(4) (5) SC
Lens color (4) (6) (7)
designator ON-OFF  -4L_ _
A, B, G, R, W
FORWARD-REVERSE  -4L_ _ (7)
FORWARD-REVERSE-OFF  -4L_ _ _(6) (8)
OVERLOAD   -4TL _(9)
Push-to-Test ON  -5_(4) (5) ENG
Incandescent
Type ON-OFF  -5_ _(4) (6) (7)
Lens color
designator FORWARD-REVERSE  -5_ _ (7)
A, B, C, G, R
FORWARD-REVERSE-OFF  -5_ _ _ (6) (8)
OVERLOAD   -5T _ (9)
Push-to-Test LED ON  -5L_ (4) (5) SC
Type (4) (6) (7)
Lens color ON-OFF  -5L_ _
designator
A, B, G, R, W FORWARD-REVERSE  -5L_ _ (7)
FORWARD-REVERSE-OFF  -5L_ _ _(6) (8)
OVERLOAD   -5TL _(9)
(1) Push buttons cannot be used in conjunction with selector switches, except with option 1F.
(2) Maximum of four pilot devices on 0.5 space factor units. When more than four pilot devices are required, the 0.5 space factor units is increased to 1.0 space factor. Maximum of six
pilot devices on 1.0 space factor and larger units.
(3) Mutually exclusive with DeviceNet® Starter Auxiliary (11DSA_), E1 Plus™ solid state overload relay 7FEE_D, and EtherNet/IP™ Communication Module (ENET).
(4) When option 1F is used with 11DSA_ , 7FEE_D, or ENET, one N.O. auxiliary contact, option 90, is required. When option 1F is selected with any ON pilot light, one N.O. auxiliary contact,
option 90, is required.
(5) When used in 2112 or 2113 with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA_), 7FEE_D or -ENET, one N.O. auxiliary contact, option 90, is required.
When used in 2112 or 2113 with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA3) and option 1F, 7FEE_D and option 1F or -ENET and option 1F, two N.O. auxiliary contacts, option 900, are required.
(6) Select one N.C. auxiliary contact, option 91, for OFF pilot light when in 2106, 2107, 2112 or 2113.
(7) When used in 2112 or 2113 with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA3), 7FEE_D or -ENET, one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contact, option 901, is required.
When used in 2112 or 2113 with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA3) and option 1F, 7FEE_D and option 1F or -ENET and option 1F, two N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contacts, option 9001,
are required.
When used in 2106 or 2107 with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA3), one N.O. auxiliary contact, option 90, is required.
(8) When used in 2106 or 2107 with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA3) , one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contact, option 901, is required.
(9) Not available with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA3), 7FEE_D, or -ENET.

Table 146 - Control Circuit Transformers, OL Relays, and DSA Options

Option Option Description FVR FVNR Delivery
Number Program
2106, 2112,
2107 2113
Control Circuit Transformer (with -6P Standard capacity with primary fusing NEMA Size 1 80VA(9) 80VA(9) SC
grounded and fused secondary)
NEMA Size 2 80VA 80VA(9)
NEMA Size 3 130VA 130VA
-6XP (7) Extra capacity with primary fusing NEMA Size 1 130VA 130VA
E1 Plus Electronic Overload Relay (1) (2) -7FEE_ (8) Selectable trip class (10, 15, 20, 30) selectable Auto/Manual-Auto reset  
electronic overload relay for NEMA starters, size 1…4.
E1 Plus Electronic Overload Relay -7FEE_D(8) Selectable trip class (10, 20, 30). Selectable Auto/Manual-Auto reset 
with DeviceNet Module (1) (2) (3) electronic overload relay for starters Size 1…4. Includes DeviceNet module
with two 24V DC inputs and one 110…120V AC output.
E1 Plus Electronic Overload Relay -7FEE_G(8) Selectable to class (10, 15, 20, 30) selectable Auto/ NEMA Size 1, 2  
with Ground Fault Protection Module Manual-Auto reset electronic overload relay for NEMA
& Jam Protection (1) (2) starters, size 1…3. Includes Ground Fault Protection NEMA Size 3  
Module with integral Jam Protection and external NEMA Size 4 (10)
Ground Fault Sensor.
E1 Plus Electronic Overload Relay 7FEE_J(8) Selectable trip class (10, 15, 20, 30) selectable Auto/Manual-Auto reset  
with Jam Protection Module (1) (2) electronic overload relay for NEMA starters, size 1…4 with Jam Protection
Module
DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (DSA) (3) -11DSA2 For use with starters to provide DeviceNet inputs and outputs. Four 120V   SC
(4) (5) AC inputs and two 120V outputs. Cannot be selected with E1 Plus with
(mutually exclusive) DeviceNet (7FEE_D).
-11DSA3 For use with starters to provide DeviceNet inputs and outputs. Four 24V  
DC inputs and two 240V AC max outputs. Cannot be selected with E1 Plus
with DeviceNet (7FEE_D).
Overload EtherNet/IP -ENET For use on staraters to provide EtherNet/IP E1 Plus 
Communication Module (6) communication for the Electronic Overload Relay.
(1) E1 Plus electronic overload relay is supplied with one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contact.
(2) Overload relay option 7FEE_, 7FEE_D, 7FEE_G, or 7FEE_J must be specified.
Overload relay option 7FEE_, 7FEE_D, 7FEE_G, and 7FEE_J are mutually exclusive.
(3) Not available with push button or selector switches, except options 3 and 1F. Not available with unwired control relay, option 89CF_ and 89HA_.
(4) 0.5 space factor Size 1, Bulletin 2107 units are increased to 1.0 space factor.
(5) 1.0 space factor Size 4, Bulletin 2113 units are increased to 1.5 space factor.
(6) Mutually exclusive with E1 Plus options -7FEE_D, -7FEE_G, and -7FEE_J.
(7) Extra capacity control circuit transformer, option 6XP, changes 0.5 space factor units to 1.0 space factor.
(8) Option number is not complete.
• Select overload relay code from appropriate table below and add to option number (for example, 7FEED or 7FEC3E).
(9) For 0.5 space factor or 1.0 space factor with option -15; Bulletin 2106, 2107, 2112 and 2113, the standard capacity VA rating is 75VA.
(10) Bulletin 2113, NEMA Size 4 with circuit breaker suffix CA are increased to 1.5 space factors. Bulletin 2113, NEMA Size 4 with circuit breaker suffix CT or CM are increased to 2.0 space
factors.

Table 147 - Overload Relay Codes for E1 Plus, Option 7FEE

For use with Space Full Load Overload Relay Code, Add to
Saving NEMA Size Current Range Option Number
(Amperes) (for example, 7FEED)
1 1…5 C
3.2…16 D
5.4…27 E
2 9…45 F
3 18…90 G
4 30…150 H

Table 148 - Space, Surge Suppression, Grounding, and Relay Options

Number Program
2106, 2112,
2107 2113
Additional Unit -15 Adds 0.5 space factor to the unit after any required space factor increases (due to   SC
Space other options) have been added.
Surge Suppressor -17 On starter coil, one per contactor. Selection of this option requires the selection of 
Option -17R if an optional relay (89__) is also selected.

-17R On control relay, one per control relay. Can only be used if optional relay (89__) is 
selected. Selection of this option requires selection of Option -17.

Omit Wiring -19 Omission of control wiring, except primary and secondary transformer wiring  
Control Circuit -21 One control circuit fuse for separate control  
Fuse
Grounded Unit -79GD Hinge mounted ground strap mounted on bottom hinge of unit door  
Door
Unit Load -79L Select on all plug-in units in section with vertical unit load ground bus Unplated  
Connector Copper
-79LT(6) Tin Plated  
Copper
Unit Ground Stab — Copper unit grounds stabs can be used with steel vertical ground bus. Copper  
Select on plug-in units in sections with vertical plug-in ground bus Alloy
-79U Unplated  
Copper
-79UT(6) Tin Plated  
Copper
Elapsed Time -85T Six-digit non-resettable meter with tenths, mounted in control station 
Meter(1)
Unwired Control -89CF40 Bulletin 700CF 4-pole relay Instantaneous 4 N.O. 2 1
Relay (2) (3) (4) (5) Contacts
-89CF31 3 N.O. / 2 1
1 N.C.
-89CF22 2 N.O. / 2 1
2 N.C.
-89CF40A (7) Bulletin 700CF 4-pole relay with On-delay with 4 N.O. 2 1
time attachment one NOTC and
-89CF22A (7) 0.3…30 s one NCTO 2 N.O. / 2 1
contact 2 N.C.
-89CF40B (7) Off-delay with 4 N.O. 2 1

(7) one NOTO and
-89CF22B one NCTC 2 N.O. / 2 1
contact 2 N.C.
-89CF40C (7) Bulletin 700CF 4-pole relay with On-delay with 4 N.O. 2 1
time attachment one NOTC and
-89CF22C (7) 1.8…180 s one NOTO 2 N.O. / 2 1
contact 2 N.C.
-89CF40D (7) Off-delay with 4 N.O. 2 1

one NCTO and
-89CF22D (7) one NCTC 2 N.O. / 2 1
contact 2 N.C.
-89CF40L (7) Bulletin 700CF 4-pole relay with 4 N.O. 2 1
mechanical latch attachment
-89CF22L (7) 2 N.O. / 2 1
2 N.C.
-89HA33 (8) Bulletin 700HA 3PDT relay 3 N.O. / 2 1
(Contacts rated 240V AC, max.) 3 N.C.
(1) Elapsed Time Meter (85T) requires one N.O. auxiliary contact, option 90. Mounts in position normally used for two pilot devices, limiting the maximum number of pilot
devices allowed.
(2) Not available with E1 Plus electronic overload relay with DeviceNet Communications (7FEE_D).
(3) Requires Size 3 Bulletin 2113 unit to be 1.5 space factor when specified with control circuit transformer (Option 6P or 6XP).
(4) Requires Size 4 Bulletin 2113 unit to be 1.5 space factor when specified with E1 Plus overload relay (Option 7FEE_), and control circuit transformer (Option 6P or 6XP).
(5) 2.5 space factor required when selecting Bulletin 2113B-E with E1Plus Overload Relay.
(6) Unit load ground connector and unit ground stab plating must match the horizontal and vertical ground bus plating.
(7) Requires Size 2 Bulletin 2107 unit to be 1.5 space factor when specified with control circuit transformer (Option 6P or 6XP).
(8) Size2 Bulletin 2113 units will be increased to 1.0 space factor.

Table 149 - Contact, T-Handle, Wire Marker, and Legend Options

Number Program
2106, 2112,
2107 2113
Auxiliary Contacts (1) -90(3) NORMALLY OPEN One N.O. auxiliary contact on each contactor or starter  SC

(3)
-91 NORMALLY CLOSED One N.C. auxiliary contact on each contactor or starter 

-98(4) NORMALLY OPEN One N.O. auxiliary contact (operates with movement of external handle only)  
(4)
-99 NORMALLY CLOSED, One N.C. auxiliary contact (operates with movement of external handle  
only)
-790K(5) One Form C Aux mounted internally in Circuit Breaker  
(5)  
-790L Two Form C Aux mounted internally in Circuit Breaker
-790A(5) One Form C Aux, One Form C Alarm mounted internally in Circuit Breaker  
(5)
-790T One Form C Alarm mounted internally in Circuit Breaker  
(5)
-790B Two Form C Aux, One Form C Alarm mounted internally in Circuit Breaker  
T-Handles -111 T-handle latch on unit door  
Control Wire -751D Adhesive Brady Datab type markers at each end of control wire.  
Markers
-751HS Heat shrink type wire marker  
-751S Sleeve type wire marker  
Device Markers -751M Mylar Device Markers  
French Legend -860F Legend plates printed in French are available on all pilot devices. Specify 860F when pilot  
Plates device option is selected.
Spanish Legend -860S Legend plates printed in Spanish are available on all pilot devices. Specify 860S when pilot  
Plates device option is selected.
Unit Door — Door Nameplate Screws Plated steel nameplate screws. Provided when  
Nameplate(2) cardholder or nameplates are not selected.
Card Holder for Unit Doors 1.125'' x 3.625'' plastic card holders with blank   SC-II
cards
— 1.125” x 3.625” engraved 3-line or 4-line Acrylic plate (available in U.S. only), white with  
nameplate black letters or black with white letters
— Phenolic plate, white with black letters, black  
with white letters or red with white letters
Stainless Steel — Stainless steel nameplate screws for unit nameplates (two per unit)   SC
Nameplate Screws
Export Packing — Container is skid mounted and packaged in clear plastic. Packing is not watertight or   SC
Below Deck waterproof. Considerations should be taken if extended storage is expected. (+2 days)
(1) Multiple auxiliary contacts must be group coded by adding the second and third digit of the special feature number to the base digit ’9’ (for example, 90-91-98-99, when group coded,
reads 9018X9)
(2) Blank nameplates are supplied when no engraving is selected or provided. Letter height for 3-line nameplates is 0.22.” Letter height for 4-line nameplates is 0.18.” All text is centered
horizontally and vertically.
(3) Auxiliary contacts are wired to terminal blocks. If the number of auxiliary contact wiring points exceeds the number of terminals available in the unit, remaining auxiliary contacts are
unwired. See Table 150 for allowable auxiliary contact configurations.
(4) The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied is two in any combination. Contacts actuate with movement of unit handle to ON or OFF position only. Contacts are not
designed to actuate as the result of a circuit breaker trip. For such applications, auxiliary contacts -790K (G, H, and J) and -790A (all other frames) mounted internally must be selected.
(5) Only available for Bulletin 2107 and 2113.

Table 150 - Auxiliary Contact Options

Auxiliary Contact Bulletin 2106 and 2112 Bulletin 2113
Catalog String Sizes 1, 2, and 3 Size 4
-90  
-91  
-900  
-90-91  
-911  
-9000  
-900-91  
-90-911  
-9111  N/A
-90000  
-9000-91  
-900-911  
-90-9111  N/A
-91111  N/A

Notes:

Chapter 13
Combination Soft Starter (SMC) Units
Bulletin 2154H and 2155H Soft Starter (SMC) Units - SMC-3

These combination soft starter units are designed especially for use in CENTERLINE motor control centers. Each unit contains a
microprocessor-controlled motor controller, control circuit transformer, and either a fusible disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
Features include:
• Three starting modes: soft start, kick start, and current limit
• Electronic overload protection with selectable overload trip class
• Motor and system diagnostics
• Configurable auxiliary contacts
• Soft stop
• Integrated bypass contactor
• High Interrupting Capacity Fuses (Option -13HIC) included on all units
Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class 1, Type B unit with terminal blocks mounted within the controller unit for connection of items
such as, remote pilot devices and input signals. Bulletins 2154H and 2155H are available in NEMA Type 1, NEMA Type 1 with gasket and
NEMA Type 12 plug-in construction. Class J time delay fuses provide branch circuit protection on Bulletin 2154H units.
Instantaneous or a variety of inverse time (thermal magnetic) circuit breakers provide branch circuit protection on 2155H units. A
variety of options such as isolation contactors, auxiliary contacts, pilot devices, protective modules, and DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
(DSA), can be added to Bulletin 2154H and 2155H units. Extra space can be required to accommodate the optional equipment.

Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2154H and 2155H

Combination Soft Starter (SMC-3) Unit
• Bulletin 150 SMC-3 Solid State Controller
• Three starting modes: soft start, kick start, and current limit
• 3…135 A rating
• Built-in bypass contactor and overload relay
Table 151 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2154H and 2155H Combination Soft Starter (SMC-3) Unit
2154H B - A A B - 38 - **
2155H B - A A B - 38THM - **
Bulletin Number Wiring Type Current Rating NEMA Enclosure Line Voltage Horsepower/kW Code and Options
Type Disconnecting Means
Code Type
2154H SMC-3 Soft Starter Code NEMA Enclosure Type Code Options
(SMC) with Fusible A NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with See Options section
Disconnect gasket with external reset button beginning on page
2155H SMC-3 Soft Starter K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with 183.
(SMC) with Circuit gasket without external reset
Breaker button
D NEMA Type 12 with external reset
button Code Horsepower/kW Code and
J NEMA Type 12 without external Disconnecting Means
reset button 2154H- ’38’ ’38’ Horsepower/kW code
Code Wiring Type See tables on Page 298
B Type B 2155H- ’38THM’ ’38__’ Horsepower/kW code
’__THM’ Circuit Breaker Type
See tables on page 298 and
305
Code Current Code Line Voltage

Rating
P 220…230V (1)
A 3A
A 240V
B 9A
D 19 A N 380V (1)
E 25 A KN 400V (1)
F 30 A I 415V (1)
G 37 A B 480V
H 43 A C 600V
J 60 A (1) Units at these
K 85 A voltages are not UL or
L 108 A C-UL listed.
M 135 A

Units—2154H Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Fusible Disconnect Switch
(SMC-3)
• Basic configuration includes power fuses.
• Isolation contactor (-13IC) is optional. Select on page 187. This addition or other options can require additional space, see
Table 153, Table 154, and the footnotes in the Options section.
• Control circuit transformer included.
• Bulletin 150 SMC-3 controller includes one N.O. auxiliary contact set to NORMAL. The Bulletin 150-CF64 fan also is included
for 3…37 A ratings. Integrated fan is standard for 43…135 A ratings.
• Bulletin 150 SMC-3 controllers are cULus (UL and C-UL listed) as motor overload protective devices. An external overload
relay is not required for single motor applications.
• See page 333 for short circuit current ratings.
Table 152 - Bulletin 2154H Units

Rating Nominal Horsepower (Nominal kW) NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 NEMA Type 12 Delivery
(Amps) The horsepower and kW ratings shown are nominal. w/gasket Program
The limiting factor in the application and use of the SMC-3 is
the output ampere rating.
220…230V (1) 240V 380…415V (1) 480V 600V (2) Space Catalog Number (5) Space Catalog Number (5)
Factor(3) Wiring Type B— Factor(3) Wiring Type B—
Class I Class I
3 (0.25…0.55) 0.5 (0.37…1.1) 0.5…1.5 0.75…2 0.5 (4) 2154HB-AA_-_ 0.5 (4) 2154HB-AD_-_ SC
9 (0.75…2.2) 0.75… (1.5…3.7) 2…5 3…7.5 0.5 (4) 2154HB-BA_-_ 0.5 (4) 2154HB-BD_-_
2
19 (3.7) 3…5 (5.5…7.5) 7.5…10 10…15 0.5 (4) 2154HB-DA_-_ 0.5 (4) 2154HB-DD_-_
25 (5.5) 7.5 (11) 15 20 1.0 2154HB-EA_-_ 1.0 2154HB-ED_-_
30 (7.5) 10 (15) 20 25 1.0 2154HB-FA_-_ 1.0 2154HB-FD_-_
37 — — (18.5) 25 30 1.0 2154HB-GA_-_ 1.0 2154HB-GD_-_
43 (11) 15 (22) 30 40 1.5 2154HB-HA_-_ 2.0 2154HB-HD_-_
60 (15) 20 (30) 40 50 1.5 2154HB-JA_-_ 2.5 2154HB-JD_-_
85 (18.5…22) 25… (37) 50 — 2154HB-KA_-_ 2154HB-KD_-_
30
— — (45) 60 60…75
108 (30) 40 (55) 75 100 3.5 2154HB-LA_-_ 4.0 2154HB-LD_-_
135 (37) 50 — 100 125 2154HB-MA_-_ 2154HB-MD_-_
(1) Units at these voltages are not UL or C-UL listed.

(2) Delivery program is PE in U.S. and SC in Canada.
(3) See space factor tables below for NEMA Type 12 or for any NEMA Type when options are selected.
(4) These units have horizontal operating handles, Bulletin 194R fused molded case switch, up to four Bulletin 800F pilot devices and one 10 pt. pull-apart control terminal block
(Type B-D only), with #16 AWG control wire only.
• Select the control voltage code from table on page 297 to identify the preferred control voltage (for example, 2154HB-AAB).
• If horsepower rated, select the number from table on page 298 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired (for example, 2154HB-AAB-35).
• If kW rated, select the number from table on page 299 that corresponds to the nominal kW desired (for example, 2154HB-AAN-35K).
• The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the SMC-3. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, replace the letter ’A’, in the second
position, with the letter ’K’ (for example, 2154HB-AK __-__) or replace the letter ’D’ with the letter ’J’ (for example, 2154HB-AJ__-__).

Table 153 - Bulletin 2154H Space Factors with NEMA Type 1 Unit Options (refer to page 186…188)
Ratings NEMA Type 1 and 1 with Gasket
(Amps)
Standard Unit With Option 13DSA_ With Option 13IC With Option 89CF With Option 13IC and With Option 13IC and 89CF
13DSA_
3…19 0.5(1) 0.5(1) 0.5(1) 0.5(1),(3) 1.5 1.5
25…37 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
43 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
60 2.0 2.0
85 1.5 (2) 1.5(2) 1.5(2)
108…135 3.5
(1) 1.0 space factor when -750, -750B, or -750S is selected.

(2) 2.0 space factor for 45 kW at 380…415V, 60 HP at 480V and 60…75 HP at 600V applications.
(3) 1.0 space factor when -89CF_A, -89CF_B, -89CF_C, -89CF_D or -89CF_L specified.
Ratings NEMA Type 12
(Amps)
Standard Unit With Option 13DSA_ With Option 13IC With Option 89CF With Option 13IC and 13DSA_ With Option 13IC and 89CF
3…19 0.5(1) 0.5(1) 0.5(1) 1.0 1.5 1.5
25…37 1.0 1.0
43 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
60 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
85 3.0 3.0 3.0
108…135 4.0
(1) 1.0 space factor when -750, -750B, or -750S is selected.
Units—2155H Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Circuit Breaker (SMC-3)
• Isolation contactor (-13IC) is optional. Select on page 187. This addition or other options can require additional space, see
Table 155, Table 156, and the footnotes in the Options section.
• Bulletin 150 SMC-3 controller includes one N.O. auxiliary contact set to NORMAL. The Bulletin 150-CF64 fan also is included
for 3…37 A ratings. Integrated fan is standard for 43…135 A ratings.
• Bulletin 150 SMC-3 controllers are cULus (UL and C-UL listed) as motor overload protective devices. An external overload
relay is not required for single motor applications.
• See page 333 for short circuit current ratings. Fusing is required.

Table 155 - Bulletin 2155H Units

Rating Nominal Horsepower (Nominal kW) NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket NEMA Type 12 Delivery
(Amps) The horsepower and kW ratings shown are nominal. Program
The limiting factor in the application and use of the SMC-3 is
the output ampere rating.
220…230V (1) 240V 380…415V (1) 480V 600V (2) Space Catalog Number (4) Space Catalog Number(4)
Factor(3) Wiring Type B - Class I Factor(3) Wiring Type B - Class I
3 (0.25…0.55) 0.5 (0.37…1.1) 0.5…1.5 0.75…2 1.5 2155HB-AA_-__ 1.5 2155HB-AD_-__ SC
9 (0.75…2.2) 0.75…2 (1.5…3.7) 2…5 3…7.5 2155HB-BA_-__ 2155HB-BD_-__
19 (3.7) 3…5 (5.5…7.5) 7.5…10 10…15 2155HB-DA_-__ 2155HB-DD_-__
25 (5.5) 7.5 (11) 15 20 2155HB-EA_-__ 2155HB-ED_-__
30 (7.5) 10 (15) 20 25 2155HB-FA_-__ 2155HB-FD_-__
37 — — (18.5) 25 30 2155HB-GA_-__ 2155HB-GD_-__
43 (11) 15 (22) 30 40 1.5 2155HB-HA_-__ 2.5 2155HB-HD_-__
60 (15) 20 (30) 40 50 2155HB-JA_-__ 3.0 2155HB-JD_-__
85 (18.5…22) 25…30 (37) 50 — 2155HB-KA_-__ 3.5(5) 2155HB-KD_-__
— — (45) 60 60…75
108 (30) 40 (55) 75 100 3.5 (5) 2155HB-LA_-__ 4.0 (5) 2155HB-LD_-__
135 (37) 50 — 100 — 3.5 (5) 2155HB-MA_-__ 2155HB-MD_-__
135 — — — 125 3.5 (5)
(1) Units at these voltages are not UL listed or CSA certified.
(2) Delivery program is PE in the United States and SC in Canada.
(3) See space factor tables below for options.
• Select the control voltage code from the table on page 298 to identify the preferred control voltage (for example, 2155HB-AAB)
• If horsepower rated, select the number from the table on page 298 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired (for example, 2155HB-AAB-35)
• If kW rated, select the number from the table on page 299 that corresponds to the nominal kW desired (for example, 2155HB-AAN-35K)
• Select the appropriate suffix from the table on page 305 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2155HB-AAB-35THM or 2155HB-AAN-35KTHM)
• The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the SMC-3. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, replace the letter ’A’ with the letter ’K’
(for example, 2155HB-AK__-__) or replace the letter ’D’ with the letter ’J’ (for example, 2155HB-AJ__-__).
(5) Increase space factor by 0.5 when circuit breaker suffix THM is selected.
Ratings NEMA Type 1 and 1 with Gasket
(Amps)
Standard Unit With With Option With Option With Option With Option 13HIC and With Option 13HIC and
Option 13HIC 13HIC and 13DSA_ 13HIC and 13IC 13HIC and 89CF 13IC and 13DSA_ 13IC and 89CF
3…37 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
43
60 2.0 2.0 2.0
85 1.5 (2) 1.5 (2) 1.5 (2)
108… 3.5 3.5
135
108… 4.0 4.0
135(1)
(1) Space factor when circuit breaker suffix THM is selected.

(2) 2.0 space factor for 45 kW at 380…415V, 60 HP at 480V and 60…75 HP at 600V applications, when used with circuit breaker types THM.

Ratings NEMA Type 12
(Amps)
Standard Unit With Option With Option With Option With Option 13HIC and With Option 13HIC and
With Option 13HIC and 13DSA_ 13HIC and 13IC 13HIC and 89CF 13IC and 13DSA_ 13IC and 89CF
13HIC
3…37 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
43 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
60 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
(2) 3.5(2) 4.0(2) 3.5(2) 4.0(2) 4.0(2)
85 3.5
108…135 4.0 4.0
(1)
108…135 4.5 4.5
(1) Space factor when circuit breaker THM is selected.

(2) Reduce by 0.5 space factor for 45 kW at 380…415V, 60 HP at 480V and 60…75 HP at 600V applications when circuit breaker suffix THM is selected.
Bulletin 2154J and 2155J Soft Starter (SMC) Units - SMC Flex
These combination soft starter units are designed especially for use in CENTERLINE motor control centers. Each unit contains a
microprocessor-controlled motor controller, control circuit transformer, and either a fusible disconnect switch or circuit
breaker.
Features include:
• Seven standard modes of operation: soft start, current limit start, dual ramp, full voltage, linear speed acceleration, preset
slow speed, and soft stop
• Optional modes of operation: pump control, Smart Motor Braking, Accu-Stop™, and slow speed with braking
• Integral SCR bypass
• Electronic overload protection with selectable trip class
• Full metering and diagnostics
• Four programmable auxiliary contacts
• DPI communication
• LCD display
• Keyboard programming
• High Interrupting Capacity Fuses (Option -13HIC) included on all units
Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class 1, Type B unit with terminal blocks mounted within the controller unit for connection of
items such as remote pilot devices and input signals. Bulletins 2154J and 2155J are available in NEMA Type 1, NEMA Type 1 with
gasket, and NEMA Type 12 construction. Each unit door includes a window for viewing the LCD display, except when door
mounted human interface is provided. Class J time delay fuses provide branch circuit protection on 5…361 A Bulletin 2154J units.
Class L time delay fuses provide branch circuit protection on 480 A Bulletin 2154J units. Instantaneous or varieties of inverse
time (thermal magnetic) circuit breakers provide branch circuit protection on 2155J units. A variety of options such as isolation
contactors, auxiliary contacts, pilot devices, protective modules, human interface modules, and network communication can be
added to Bulletin 2154J and 2155J units. In some cases, extra space can be required to accommodate the optional equipment.

Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2154J and 2155J Combination Soft Starter (SMC
Flex) Unit
• Seven standard modes of operation: soft start, current limit, dual ramp, full-voltage, linear speed acceleration, preset
slow speed, and soft stop
• Optional modes of operation: pump control, Smart Motor Braking, Accu-Stop, and slow speed with braking
• 5…480 A rating
• Built-in bypass contactor and overload relay
• NEMA Class I, Type B wiring with terminals mounted in unit
Table 158 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2154J and 2155J Combination Soft Starter (SMC Flex) Unit
2154J B - F108 L K B - 49 - **
2155J B - F108 L K B - 49THM - **
Bulletin Number Wiring Type Current Rating NEMA Type Line Voltage Horsepower/kW Code and Options
Disconnecting Means
Code Type Code Current Code Line Voltage Code Options

Rating
2154J SMC Flex Soft Starter P 220…230V (1) See Options section
(SMC) with Fusible F005 5 A beginning on page
Disconnect A 240V 183.
F025 25 A
2155J SMC Flex Soft Starter F043 43 A N 380V (1)
(SMC) with Circuit
F060 60 A KN 400V (1)
Breaker I 415V (1)
F085 85 A
F108 108 A L Line B 480V
Connected
F135 135 A C 600V
F201 201 A (1) Units at these
F251 251 A voltages are not UL or
Code Wiring Type F317 317 A C-UL listed.
B Type B F361 361 A
F480 480 A
Code NEMA Enclosure Type Code Horsepower/kW Code and
K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 Disconnecting Means
with gasket without 2154J-’49’ ’49’ Horsepower/kW code’
external reset button See table on Page 298
J NEMA Type 12 without 2155J- ’49THM ’49__’ Horsepower/kW code
external reset button ’__THM’ Circuit Breaker Type
See tables on pages 298 and
305

Units—2154J Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Fusible Disconnect Switch
(SMC Flex) - Line Connected
• SMC Flex units are configured as line connected, for Delta connected contact factory.
• Isolation contactor (-13IC) is optional. Select on page 187. The addition of this option can require additional space. See
Table 160, for space factor of units with option.
• Basic configuration includes power fuses.
• Bulletin 150 SMC Flex controllers are cULus (UL and C-UL listed) as motor overload protective devices. An external
overload relay is not required for single motor applications.
• See page 333 for short circuit current ratings.
Table 159 - Bulletin 2154J Units

The limiting factor in the application and use of the SMC Flex
is the output ampere rating.
220…230V (1) 240V 380…415V (1) 480V 600V (2) Space Catalog Number (5) Space Catalog Number (5)
Factor Wiring Type B— Factor Wiring Type B—
Class I Class I
5 (0.25…1.1) 0.5…1 (0.37…2.2 0.5…3 0.75…3 2.0 2154JB-F005LK_-__ 3.0 2154JB-F005LJ_-__ SC
25 (1.5…5.5) 1.5…7. (3.7…11) 5…15 5…20 2154JB-F025LK_-__ 2154JB-F025LJ_-__
5
43 (7.5…11) 10… (15…22) 20… 25…40 2154JB-F043LK_-__ 2154JB-F043LJ_-__
15 30
60 (15) 20 (30) 40 50 2.5 2154JB-F060LK_-__ 2154JB-F060LJ_-__
85 (18.5…22) 25… (37) 50 — 2154JB-F085LK_-__ 2154JB-F085LJ_-__
30
— — (45) 60 60…75 3.5
108 (30) 40 (55) 75 100 3.5 2154JB-F108LK_-__ 4.0 2154JB-F108LJ_-__
135 (37) 50 — 100 125 2154JB-F135LK_-__ 2154JB-F135LJ_-__
201 (45…55) 60… (75…90) 125…1 150… 6.0(3) 2154JB-F201LK_-__ 6.0(3) 2154JB-F201LJ_-__ SC-II
75 50 200 20” W 20” W
251 (75) 100 (110…132) 200 250 2154JB-F251LK_-__ 2154JB-F251LJ_-__
(4) (4)
317 (90) 125 (150…160) 250 300 6.0 2154JB-F317LK_-__ 6.0 2154JB-F317LJ_-__
20” W, 20” W,
361 (110) 150 (185) 300 350 20” D 2154JB-F361LK_-__ 20” D 2154JB-F361LJ_-__
480 (132) 200 (200…250) 350… 400… 2154JB-F480LK_-__ 2154JB-F480LJ_-__
400 500

(2) Delivery program is PE-II in the United States and SC-II in Canada.
(3) Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway. The design of these units is optimized for bottom entry of load cables. For top entry of load cables, consult the
factory.
(4) Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway. Horizontal bus is 5” deeper than standard. The design of these units is optimized for bottom entry of load
cables. For top entry of load cables, consult the factory.
Select the control voltage code from table on page 297 to identify the preferred control voltage (for example, 2154JB-F108LKB).
If horsepower rated, select the number from table on page 299 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired, (for example, 2154JB-F108LKB-49).
If kW rated, select the number from table on page 299 that corresponds to the nominal kW desired, (for example, 2154JB-F108LKN-49K).

Table 160 - Bulletin 2154J Space Factors with Unit Options

Rating Space Factor for NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket Units Space Factor for NEMA Type 12 Units
(Amperes)
Standard Unit With Option With Option With Options 13GF Standard Unit With Option With Option With Options
13GF 13IC and 13IC 13GF 13IC 13GF and 13IC
5 2.0 3.0
25
43
60 2.5
85 3.0 / 3.5 (1)
108 3.5 4.0
135 3.5 4.0
201 6.0, 20” W 6.0, 20” W
251 6.0, 20” W 6.0, 20” W
317 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 25” W, 20” D 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 25” W, 20” D
361 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 25” W, 20” D 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 25” W, 20” D
480 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 30” W, 20” D 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 30” W, 20” D
(1) Requires 3.5 space factor for 45 kW at 380…415V, 60 HP at 480V and 60…75 HP at 600V.

Units—2155J Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Circuit Breaker (SMC Flex) -
Line Connected
• SMC Flex units are configured as line connected, for Delta connected contact factory.
• Isolation contactor (-13IC) is optional. Select on page 187. The addition of this option can require additional space. See
page 181 for space factor of units with options.
• Bulletin 150 SMC Flex controllers are cULus (UL and C-UL listed) as motor overload protective devices. An external
overload relay is not required for single motor applications.
• See page 333 for short circuit current ratings. Fusing is required.
Table 161 - Bulletin 2155J Units

The limiting factor in the application and use of the SMC Flex is the
output ampere rating.
220…230V (1) 240V 380V…415V (1) 480V 600V (2) Space Catalog Number (5) Space Catalog Number (5)
Factor Wiring Type B— Factor Wiring Type B—
Class I Class I
5 (0.25…1.1) 0.5…1 (0.37…2.2) 0.5…3 0.75…3 2.0 2155JB-F005LK_-__ 3.0 2155JB-F005LJ_-__ SC
25 (1.5…5.5) 1.5…7.5 (3.7…11) 5…15 5…20 2155JB-F025LK_-__ 2155JB-F025LJ_-__
43 (7.5…11) 10…15 (15…22) 20…30 25…40 2155JB-F043LK_-__ 2155JB-F043LJ_-__
60 (15) 20 (30) 40 50 2155JB-F060LK_-__ 2155JB-F060LJ_-__
85 (18.5…22) 25…30 (37) 50…60 60…75 2155JB-F085LK_-__ 2155JB-F085LJ_-__
— — (45) — — 2.5 3.5(6)
108 (30) 40 (55) 75 100 3.0(6) 2155JB-F108LK_-__ 4.0(6) 2155JB-F108LJ_-__
135 (37) 50 — 100 125 2155JB-F135LK_-__ 2155JB-F135LJ_-__
201 (45…55) 60…75 (75…90) 125…150 150…200 6.0(3) 2155JB-F201LK_-__ 6.0(3) 2155JB-F201LJ_-__ SC-II
20” W 20” W
251 (75) 100 (110…132) 200 250 2155JB-F251LK_-__ 2155JB-F251LJ_-__
317 (90) 125 (150…160) 250 300 6.0 (4) 2155JB-F317LK_-__ 6.0 (4) 2155JB-F317LJ_-__
20” W, 20” W,
361 (110) 150 (185) 300 350 20” D 2155JB-F361LK_-__ 20” D 2155JB-F361LJ_-__
(4) (4)
480 (132) 200 (200…250) 350…400 400…500 6.0 2155JB-F480LK_-__ 6.0 2155JB-F480LJ_-__
20” W, 30” W,
30” D 20” D

(2) Delivery program is PE-II in the United States and SC-II in Canada.
(3) Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway next to this unit. The design of these units is optimized for bottom entry of load cables. For top entry of load cables,
consult the factory.
(4) Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway. Horizontal bus is 5” deeper than standard. The design of these units is optimized for bottom entry of load cables. For top
entry of load cables, consult the factory.
• Select the control voltage code from table on page 297 to identify the preferred control voltage (for example, 2155JB-F108LKB).
• If horsepower rated, select the number from table on page 298 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired, (for example, 2155JB-F108LKB-49).
• If kW rated, select the number from table on page 299 that corresponds to the nominal kW desired, (for example, 2155JB-F108LKN-49K).
• Select the appropriate suffix from the table on page 305 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2155JB-F108LKB-49TJM or 2155JB-F108LKB-49KTJM).
(6) Increase space factor by 0.5 when circuit breaker suffix THM is selected.

Table 162 - Bulletin 2155J Space Factors with Unit Options

Rating Space Factor for NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket Units
(Amps)
Standard With Option With Options 13GF and With Options 13IC and With Options 13GF, 13IC,
13HIC 13HIC 13HIC and 13HIC
5 2.0 2.5
25
43 2.0 2.5 2.0
60 2.5
85 2.0 (2) 2.5
2.5(3) 3.0(3)
108…135 3.5
(1)
108…135 4.0
201 6.0, 20” W
251 6.0, 20” W
317 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 25” W, 20” D
361 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 25” W, 20” D
480 6.0, 30” W, 20” D
Rating Space Factor for NEMA Type 12 Units
(Amps)
Standard With Option With Options 13GF and With Options 13IC and With Options 13GF, 13IC,
13HIC 13HIC 13HIC and 13HIC
5 3.0
25
43
60 3.0 3.5
(3)
85 3.5
108…135 4.0
(1)
108…135 4.5
201 6.0, 20” W
251 6.0, 20” W
317 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 25” W, 20” D
361 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 25” W, 20” D
480 6.0, 30” W, 20” D
(1) Space factor when circuit breaker suffix THM is selected.

(2) The following combination of option requires 2.5 space factors: Options 89_ and 4T_ or 4TL_ or 5TL and 9_ (without Option 13IC).
(3) Space factor for 45kW applications at 380…415V when circuit suffix THM is selected.

Notes:

Chapter 14
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Combination Soft
Starter (SMC) Units
Table 163 - Bulletins 2154 and 2155 Push Button, Control Station Housing, and Pilot Light Options
Option Description SMC-3 (9) SMC Flex Option Delivery
Number Program
2154H 2155H 2154J 2155J
Push Buttons (1) (2) START-STOP (6)   (10) (10) -1 SC
STOP   (10) (10) -1B
START-STOP IMPORTANT: When SMC Flex option 13XB is  (10)  (10) -1XA SC
and SOFT selected, the only push button option that can be
STOP selected is 1XB. When SMC Flex option 13XD is
selected, the only push button options that can be
selected are 1XD, 1XE, or 1XF
START-STOP and PUMP STOP  (11)  (11) -1XB PE
(10)
START-STOP and SLOW SPEED   (10) -1XC SC
START-STOP and BRAKE  (12)  (12) -1XD PE
START-STOP and ACCU-STOP  (12)  (12) -1XE
(12) (13) (12) (13)
START-STOP, SLOW SPEED and BRAKE   -1XF
Control Station Blank     -2 SC
Housing (3)
1 hole—for one pilot device     -2A
2 holes—for two pilot devices     -2B
3 holes—for three pilot devices     -2C
4 holes—for four pilot devices  -2D (14)
(1)
Selector Switch HAND-OFF-AUTO     -3
(4)
OFF-ON     -3E (2)
Selector Switch (1) HAND-OFF-AUTO for Soft Stop (7)   -3XA SC
(5)
HAND-OFF-AUTO for Pump Control   -3XB PE
HAND-OFF-AUTO for Smart Motor Braking (8)   -3XD
(1) Maximum one switch per unit. Push buttons cannot be used in conjunction with selector switches. When three or less pilot devices are selected, Bulletin 800T pilot devices are
supplied, except selector switches are Bulletin 800H devices. Generally, when more than three pilot devices are selected, Bulletin 800F pilot devices are supplied. For 0.5 space
factor units, Bulletin 800F pilot devices are supplied. Maximum four pilot devices on 0.5 space factor units. Only one push button or selector switch option can be selected.
(2) Mutually exclusive with 13GC, 13GD, 13GE, 13GR and 13DSA_.
(3) Available only on units without pilot devices. Holes are for Bulletin 800T pilot devices when unit is 1.0 space factor and larger. Holes are for Bulletin 800F pilot devices when unit
is 0.5 space factor.
(4) Selector switches 3 and 3E are not available when option 13XB or 13XD is selected.
(5) These selector switches can only be used with corresponding control options (for example, -3XA used only with standard starting mode, -3XB used only for 13XB and 3XD only
used for 13XD).
(6) Two Bulletin 800F pilot lights are supplied when two pilot lights are selected in conjunction with two push buttons.
(7) Selector switch option 3XA functions when SMC Flex is operating in Soft Stop mode. Consult factory if SMC Flex is operating in Preset Slow Speed mode.
(8) Selector switch option 3XD functions when SMC Flex is operating in Smart Motor Braking mode. Consult factory if SMC Flex is operating in Accu-Stop or Slow Speed Braking
mode.
(9) Pilot devices for 0.5 space factor units are Bulletin 800F. A minimum of 1.0 space factor is required for SMC-3 units when more than four pilot devices are required.
(10) Can only be used with standard starting mode for SMC Flex.
(11) Can only be used with Pump Control option 13XB for SMC Flex.
(12) Can only be used with Smart Motor Braking, Accu-Stop and Slow Speed with Braking option 13XD for SMC Flex.
(13) Option 1XF cannot be used with ON/OFF and fault pilot lights for SMC Flex.
(14) Not available for 1.0 space factor and larger units.

To select pilot light lens color, add letters to the option number: A = amber, B = blue, C = clear, G = green, R = red,
W = white (for example, 4RG is a red ON and green OFF pilot light). Clear and white are not available for Bulletin 800T LED type
pilot lights. Clear is not available on Bulletin 800F LED pilot lights. White is not available on Bulletin 800F incandescent pilot lights.
Table 164 - Bulletins 2154 and 2155 Pilot Light Options

Option Description SMC-3 (2) SMC Flex Option Delivery
Number Program
2154H
2155H
2154J
2155J
Pilot Lights (Transformer Type for Incandescent ON (3) (3)  (6)  (6) -4_ ENG
800T, Full-voltage for 800F)(1) type (4)
ON-OFF  (4)  (6)  (6) -4_ _
(5) (5)
FAULT    -4T_
(3) (3)  (6)  (6)
LED type ON  -4L_ SC
ON-OFF (4) (4)  (6)  (6) -4L_ _
FAULT (5) (5)   -4TL_
(3)
Push-To-Test ON  (3)  (6)  (6) -5_ ENG
Incandescent (4)
Type ON-OFF  (4)  (6)  (6) -5_ _
FAULT (5) (5)   -5T_
Push-To-Test ON (3) (3)  (6)  (6) -5L_ SC
LED Type (4) (4) (6) (6)
ON-OFF     -5L_ _
(5) (5)
FAULT     -5TL_
(1) When three or less pilot devices are selected, Bulletin 800T pilot devices are supplied, except selector switches are Bulletin 800H devices. Generally, when more than three
pilot devices are selected, Bulletin 800F pilot devices are supplied. For 0.5 space factor units, Bulletin 800F pilot devices are supplied. Maximum four pilot devices on 0.5
space factor units.
(2) Pilot devices for 0.5 space factor units are Bulletin 800F. A minimum of 1.0 space factor is required for SMC-3 units when more than four pilot devices are required.
(3) Select two N.O. auxiliary contacts (option 900) for SMC-3 units with ON light and DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option 13DSA_) when isolation contactor (option 13IC) is not
selected.
Select one N.O. auxiliary contacts (option 90) for SMC-3 units with ON light and DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option 13DSA_) and when isolation contactor (option 13IC) is
selected.
(4) Select one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contact (option 901) when isolation contactor (option 13IC) is not selected.
Select one N.C. auxiliary contact (option 91) when isolation contactor (option 13IC) is selected.
If used with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option 13DSA_), select isolation contactor (option 13IC) and two N.O. contacts and one N.C. auxiliary contact (option 9001).
(5) Not available with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (Option 13DSA3).
(6) Select one N.O. auxiliary contact (Option 90) when ON pilot light is selected for SMC Flex units.
Select one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contact (Option 90 and 91) when ON-OFF pilot lights are selected for SMC Flex units.

Table 165 - Bulletins 2154 and 2155 Converter Modules, and Line and Load Protection Modules Options
Option Option Description SMC-3 SMC Flex Delivery
Number Program
2154H 2155H 2154J 2155J
Protective -13D Protective module contains Line Side 480V MAX 3…37 A   SC
Modules capacitors and metal oxide
varistors (MOVs) which 43…85 A  
protect the internal power
circuitry from severe 108…135 A  
electrical transients and
high electrical noise 5…85 A  
108…480 A  
600V 3…37 A   PE in U.S.,
SC in
43…85 A   Canada
108…135 A  
5…85 A  
108…480 A  
(1)
-13E Load Side 480V MAX 43…85 A   SC
108…135 A  
5…85 A  
108…480 A  
600V 43…85 A   PE in U.S.,
SC in
108…135 A   Canada
5…85 A  
108…480 A  
(1) Load side protective module not allowed with pump control (-13XB) or braking control (-13XD) options; see Table 167 for details.

Table 166 - Bulletins 2154 and 2155 Communication, HIM, and HIC Fusing Options
Number Program
2154H 2155H 2154J 2155J
DeviceNet Starter -13DSA2 Four 120V AC inputs and two 120V AC outputs for DeviceNet.   (5) (5) SC
Auxiliary (5)
(mutually exclusive) (1) -13DSA3 Four 24V DC inputs and two 120V AC outputs for DeviceNet.    (5)
Communication -13GC ControlNet communication module.  

Modules Mounted internal to SMC Flex.
(mutually exclusive) Includes one 1786-TPYS tap, supplied loose for customer mounting.
-13GD(3) DeviceNet communication module. Mounted internal to SMC Flex.  
(4)
-13GE Ethernet communication module.  
Mounted internal to SMC Flex.
-13GR Single Point Remote I/O  
Ground Fault Current -13GF Provides ground fault core balance current transformer for ground fault  
Transformer indication.
Human Interface -13HBA0 Blank Cover. No Door mounted in bezel. Cable to SMC Flex unit   SC
Module (HIM) functionality included. No window on door.
(mutually exclusive) Available on NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket only.
-13HBA3 LCD display, full  
numeric keypad
-13HBA5 LCD display  
programmer
only
-13HC3S LCD display, full Door mounted. HIM is not removable from bezel. One  
numeric keypad HIM required per SMC Flex unit. No window on door.
Available on NEMA 12 only.
-13HC5S LCD display  
programmer
only
High Interrupting -13HIC Provides unit with high Class J - Time 3…19 A 
Capacity Fuses interrupting capacity fuses for Delay
(Class J - Time increased short circuit current 25…37 A 
Delay)(2) rating.
43…60 A 
See page 333 for short circuit 85…108 A 
current ratings of Bulletin 2155J
units with this option. 135 A 
5A 
25 A 
43…60 A 
85…108 A 
135…201 A 
251…361 A 
Class L - Time 480 A 
Delay
(1) Not available with push buttons, selector switch (option 3E), and control relays (option 89C_ or 89P_). The addition of DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option 13DSA_) increases space
factor of 2154H and 2155H SMC-3 units. See page 174 and page 175. Select one N.O. auxiliary contact (Option 90) when used with Bulletin 2154J and 2155J.
(2) This option is required to be included on Bulletin 2155H units and Bulletin 2155J units.
(3) Not available on Ethernet IntelliCENTER orders.
(4) Not available for DeviceNet IntelliCENTER orders.
(5) When specifying options 13DSA2 or 13DSA3 with Bulletin 2154J and 2155J units, option 13GD must also be specified.

Table 167 - Bulletins 2154 and 2155 Isolation Contactor, SCR Fusing, and SMC Flex Control Mode Options
Number Program
2154H 2155H 2154J 2155J
Add Isolation -13IC Provides unit with Bulletin 100 isolation contactor. 3…19 A     SC
Contactor (1)
24 A, 25 A    
30…37 A  
43 A    
54…60 A    
85 A    
97…108 A    
135…180 A    
201…251 A  
317…361 A  
480…500 A  
Standard Starting — This starting mode group provides soft start, soft stop, 5…480 A  
Mode (2) (3) current limit, full voltage, kick start, preset slow
speed, linear speed start and stop, and dual ramp.
Refer to SMC Flex section of publication A117-CA001 for
detailed description of modes of operation.
Pump Control (2) (4) -13XB This starting mode provides pump start and stop in 5…480 A   PE
addition to soft start, soft stop, current limit, full
voltage, and kick start.
Refer to SMC Flex section of publication A117-CA001 for
Braking Control -13XD This starting mode provides Smart Motor Braking, 5…85 A  
Smart Motor Accu-Stop, and Slow Speed Braking in addition to soft
Braking, Accu-Stop, start, soft stop, current limit, full voltage, kick start, 108 A  
and Slow Speed and preset slow speed.
Braking (2) (5) Refer to SMC Flex section of publication A117-CA001 for 135 A  
201 A  
251 A  
317 A  
361 A  
480 A  
(1) Adding this option increases the space factor of the unit.
• For Bulletin 2154H, see page 174, for Bulletin 2155H, see page 175.
• For Bulletin 2154J, see page 179, for Bulletin 2155J, see page 181.
(2) Soft Start, Pump Stop, Smart Motor Braking, Accu-Stop, and slow speed with braking are not intended to be used as an emergency stop.
(3) Push Button option 1XA and 1XC and selector switch option 3XA can only be used with standard starting mode and are the only push button and selector switch options that can
be selected with standard starting mode.
(4) Push button option 1XB and selector switch option 3XB can only be used with Pump Control (Option 13XB) and are the only push button and selector switch options that can be
selected with Pump Control.
(5) Push button option 1XD, 1XE and 1XF and selector switch option 3XD can only be used with Smart Motor Braking, Accu-Stop, and Slow Speed with Braking (Option 13XD) and are
the only push button and selector switch options that can be selected for Smart Motor Braking, Accu-Stop, and Slow Speed with Braking (Option 13XD).

Table 168 - Bulletins 2154 and 2155 Grounding and Control Relay Options
Number Program
2154H 2155H 2154J 2155J
Surge -17R Provides surge suppressor across coil of unwired control relays (option 89CF     SC
Suppressor or 89P)
Omit Wiring -19 Omission of control wiring, except primary and secondary transformer    
wiring.
Grounded Unit -79GD Hinge mounted ground strap mounted on bottom hinge of unit door. Unit    
Door door hinge grounding strap for IEC requirements.
Unit Load -79L Specify on all plug-in units in sections with vertical unit load Unplate    
Connector ground bus d copper
-79LT(4) Tin    
plated
copper
Unit Ground — Specify on plug-in units in sections with vertical plug-in ground Copper    
Stab bus. Copper unit ground stabs also may be used with steel alloy
vertical ground bus.
-79U Unplate    
d copper
-79UT(4) Tin    
plated
copper
Unwired Control -89CF40 Bulletin 700CF 4-Pole Relay 4 N.O.     SC
Relay (1),(2), (3)
-89CF31 3 N.O.    
and 1
N.C.
-89CF22 2 N.O.    
and 2
N.C.
-89CF40A Bulletin 700CF On Delay 4 N.O.    
4-Pole Relay with Time Includes one NOTC and one
-89CF22A Attachment 2 N.O.    
NCTO Contact and 2
0.3…30 s N.C.
-89CF40B Off Delay 4 N.O.    
Includes one NOTO and one
-89CF22B 2 N.O.    
NCTC Contact and 2
N.C.
-89CF40C Bulletin 700CF On Delay 4 N.O.    
4-Pole Relay with Time Includes one NOTC and one
-89CF22C Attachment 2 N.O.    
NCTO Contact and 2
1.8 …180 s N.C.
-89CF40D Off Delay 4 N.O.    
Includes one NOTO and one
-89CF22D 2 N.O.    
NCTC Contact and 2
N.C.
-89CF40L Bulletin 700CF 4 N.O.     PE
4-Pole Relay with Mechanical Latch Attachment
-89CF22L 2 N.O.    
and 2
N.C.
-89P2 Bulletin 700P Relay 2 N.O.   SC
-89P4 4 N.O.  
-89PT Bulletin 700P with Pneumatic Time Delay Attachment (on/off None   PE
delay) with two timed contacts (0.1…60 s)
-89PT2 2 N.O.  
-89PT4 4 N.O.  
-89PL2 Bulletin 700P Relay with Mechanical Latch Attachment 2 N.O.  
(1) Mutually exclusive with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option 13DSA_). The addition of unwired control relay (option 89CF) increases the space factor of 2154H SMC-3 units. See page
174.
(2) Instantaneous contacts on Bulletin 700CF relays are non-convertible Bulletin 700P relays have instantaneous contacts that are convertible from normally open to normally closed.
(4) Unit Load Ground Connector and Unit Ground Stab plating must match, horizontal and vertical ground bus plating

Table 169 - Bulletins 2154 and 2155 Auxiliary Contact Options

Number Program
2154H 2155H 2154J 2155J
Auxiliary -90 Normally Open—One N.O. auxiliary contact mounted on isolation contactor (2)  (2)  (3)  (3) SC
Contacts (13IC) when supplied
Type B
Wiring -91 Normally Closed—One N.C. auxiliary contact mounted on isolation contactor  (2)  (2)  (3)  (3)
(13IC) when supplied
-98 (1) Normally Open—One N.O. mounted on operating mechanism (operates with    
-99 (1) Normally Closed—One N.C. mounted on operating mechanism (operates    
with movement of external handle only)
-790K One Form C Aux mounted internally in Circuit Breaker  
-790L Two Form C Aux mounted internally in Circuit Breaker  
-790A One Form C Aux, One Form C Alarm mounted internally in Circuit Breaker  
-790T One Form C Alarm mounted internally in Circuit Breaker  
-790B Two Form C Aux, One Form C Alarm mounted internally in Circuit Breaker  
(1) The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied is two in any combination. Contacts actuate with movement of unit handle to ON or OFF position only.
Contacts are not designed to actuate as a result of a circuit breaker trip. For such applications, auxiliary contacts -790K (G, H, and J) and -790A (all other frames) ‘mounted
internally’ must be selected. Auxiliary contacts are supplied unwired.
(2) The following apply to auxiliary contacts for Bulletin 2154H and 2155H SMC-3 units:
• Bulletin 150 SMC-3 controller includes one N.O. auxiliary contact set to NORMAL (unless otherwise specified below).
• When isolation contactor (option -13IC) is not selected, the maximum number of auxiliary contacts is two in the following combinations two N.O. or one N.O. and one N.C.
The auxiliary contacts are side-mounted on the SMC-3 and set to NORMAL. The standard SMC-3 N.O. auxiliary contact is set for AT SPEED and is not used.
• When isolation contactor (option -13IC) is selected, the maximum number auxiliary contacts is four in any combination (except three N.C, four N.C., or one N.O. and three
N.C.). These auxiliary contacts are on the isolation contactor. The standard SMC-3 N.O. auxiliary contact is set for NORMAL and is used to control the isolation contactor.
• When ON pilot light or DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option -13DSA_) is selected in SMC-3 units, without an isolation contactor and without any additional auxiliary contacts,
the standard SMC-3 N.O. auxiliary contact will be used and set to NORMAL.
• When ON pilot light or DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option -13DSA_) is selected in SMC-3 units, without an isolation contactor, only one additional N.O. or N.C. contact can be
selected, select two N.O. auxiliary contacts (option -900) or one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contacts (option -901). The auxiliary contacts are side-mounted on the SMC-3
and set to NORMAL. The standard SMC-3 N.O. auxiliary contact is set for AT SPEED and is not used.
• When ON pilot light and DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option -13DSA_) are selected in SMC-3 units, select two N.O. auxiliary contacts (option -900). Without an isolation
contactor (option-13IC) the auxiliary contacts are side-mounted on the SMC-3 and set to NORMAL. The standard SMC-3 N.O. auxiliary contact is set for AT SPEED and is not
used.
• When ON-OFF pilot lights are selected on SMC-3 units, select one N.O. auxiliary contact and one N.C. auxiliary contact (option -901). Without an isolation contactor (option-
13IC) the auxiliary contacts are side-mounted on the SMC-3 and set to NORMAL. The standard SMC-3 N.O. auxiliary contact is set for AT SPEED and is not used.
• When ON-OFF pilot lights and DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option -13DSA_) are selected on SMC-3 units, select two N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contact (option -900-91).
IMPORTANT: this number of auxiliary contacts requires the selection of an isolation contactor (option -13IC).
(3) The following apply to auxiliary contacts for Bulletin 2154J and 2155J SMC Flex units:
• When isolation contactor (Option 13IC) is selected, the maximum number of auxiliary contacts is four in any combination (except three N.C, four N.C., or one N.O. and three
N.C.).
• When isolation contactor (Option 13IC) is not selected, the maximum number of auxiliary contacts is four in the following combinations: two N.O./two N.C., three N.O./one
N.C., four N.O. or four N.C.
• When ON pilot light is selected on SMC Flex units, select one N.O. auxiliary contact (option -90).
• When ON-OFF pilot lights are selected on SMC Flex units, select one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contact (option -90 and -91).
• When DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (-13DSA_) is selected on SMC Flex units, select one N.O. auxiliary contact (option -90).

Table 170 - Bulletins 2154 and 2155 T-handle, Control Circuit, Wire Marker, Shunt Trip, and Legend Options
Number Program
2154H 2155H 2154J 2155J
T-handle -111 T-handle latch on unit door     SC
Arc Resistant Latches -112 Requires arc resistant MCC    
(1)    
Control Circuit Wiring — Type MTW (TEW) 90°C #16 AWG copper wire, VW1 rated
(4)  (4)
-750 Type MTW (TEW) 90°C #14 AWG (tinned) copper wire, VW1   
rated
-750B Tinned Power wire and #14Awg, tinned, MTW control wire  (4)  (4)   SC
(4) (4)
(+2 days)
-750S Type SIS 90°C #14 AWG (tinned) copper wire    
(2)
Control Circuit Ring Lugs -750RL Insulated ring lugs for control wires where possible    
(2)
Control Circuit Spade Lugs -750SL Insulated spade lugs for control wires where possible    
Control Wire Markers -751D Adhesive Brady Datab type markers at each end of control     SC
wire.
-751HS Heat shrink type marker at each end of control wire     SC
(+2 days)
-751S Sleeve type marker at each end of control wire     SC
Device Markers -751M Mylar Device Markers    
Shunt Trip -754 (3) For tripping circuit breakers from remote 120V, 60 Hz source  
French Legend Plates -860F Legend plates printed in French are available on all pilot    
devices. Specify 860F when pilot device option is selected.
Spanish Legend Plates -860S Legend plates printed in Spanish are available on all pilot    
devices. Specify 860S when pilot device option is selected.
Unit Door Nameplates — Door Nameplate Plated steel nameplate screws.    
Screws Provided when cardholder or
Card Holder for Unit 1.125'' x 3.625'' plastic card holders with     SC-II
Doors blank cards
1.125” × 3.625” Acrylic plate (available in U.S. only).    
engraved Lettering is white with black letters or
3-line or 4-line black with white letters.
nameplate
Phenolic plate. Lettering is white with    
black letters, black with white letters,
or red with white letters.
Stainless Steel Nameplate — Stainless steel nameplate screws for unit nameplates (2 per    
Screws unit)
Export Packing Below — Container is skid mounted and packaged in clear plastic.     SC-II
Deck Packing is not watertight or waterproof. Take consideration if (+2 days)
extended storage is expected.
(1) Options for factory wiring of control circuits. Dedicated auxiliary devices (for example, fans), device and component internal wiring, and wiring that could affect operation or
certifications (for example, insulation temperature class, EMC shielding requirements, communication requirements, UL, C-UL, CSA, CE) are not included.
(2) Examples of where insulated lugs cannot be used include SMC terminals, Bulletin 800F pilot devices, 700CF relays, disconnects/circuit breakers, and areas where more than
one wire per terminal is required.
(3) Not available when two N.O. and two N.C. (form C) internal contacts are selected for circuit breakers.
(4) Requires 0.5 space factor SMC-3 units to be increased to 1.0 space factor.

Chapter 15
Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units
Bulletin 2162Q and 2163Q with PowerFlex 70 Drive

These combination variable frequency AC motor drive units are specifically designed for use in CENTERLINE motor control centers.
Each unit contains a high performance, microprocessor-controlled, variable frequency AC drive and either a fusible disconnect
switch or a circuit breaker.
They also:
• Include isolated logic and power.
• Include fans and venting where required. See page 338.
• Include internal electronic overload protection.
• Include EMC filters on 380…415V AC.
• Include UL Class J time delay fuses. These fuses provide both branch circuit protection and drive input protection. The drive
input fuses are provided in series with the circuit breaker in Bulletin 2163Q units.
• Include control circuit transformer (CCT). The CCT is sized to provide power for all standard pilot devices and any required
fans.
• Produce a three-phase, pulse width modulated (PWM) adjustable frequency output and voltage output for exceptional
control of motor speed and torque.
• Are digitally programmable with access to mode programming, providing precise and repeatedly accurate setup, control and
operation, and adaptability to handle a variety of applications.
A Human Interface Module (HIM) and Control Platform Type must be selected.
Bulletin 2162Q and 2163Q use PowerFlex 70 drives.
Each unit is provided as a NEMA Wiring Class I, Type A unit with terminals mounted on the drive chassis for connection of items
such as, remote pilot devices and input signals. For NEMA Type 3R and NEMA Type 4 enclosure construction, contact your local
Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.

Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162Q and 2163Q PowerFlex 70 Drive

• Bulletins 2162Q and 2163Q use PowerFlex 70 drives
• NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with gasket or Type 12 Enclosure Type
• NEMA Wiring Class I, Type A
• Isolated logic and power produces a three-phase, pulse-width-modulated (PWM) adjustable frequency output to vary
motor speed
Table 171 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162Q and 2163Q PowerFlex 70 Drive
2162Q A - 1P1N K B - 33 - 14HA0

2163Q A - 1P1N K B - 33THM - 14HA0
Bulletin Number Wiring Type PowerFlex 70 Nominal NEMA Enclosure Line Voltage Nominal Horsepower/kW Human Interface
Output Current Rating Type and Circuit Breaker Type Module and Options
Code Type Code NEMA Enclosure Type Code Nominal Horsepower/kW Code and
2162Q PowerFlex 70 Variable K NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 Circuit Breaker Type
Frequency AC Drive with gasket 2162Q-’33’ ’33’ Nominal Horsepower/kW code.
with Fusible Disconnect J NEMA Type 12 See Table 251 and Table 252.
2163Q PowerFlex 70 Variable 2163Q-’33THM’ ’33_’ Nominal Horsepower/kW code.
Frequency AC Drive See Table 251 and Table 252.
with Circuit Breaker ’__THM’ Circuit Breaker Type. See
table on page 306
Code Line Voltage

N 380V (1)
KN 400V (1)
Code Wiring Type
I 415V (1) Code Human Interface Module
A Type A
B 480V and Options
C 600V
See options section beginning on
(1) Units at these voltages page 269
are not UL or C-UL
listed.
Drive Size Code, Output Current Rating (Amperes) and Nominal HP or (kW) (1)
Normal Duty Applications Heavy Duty Applications
380…415V Line Voltage 480V Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage 480V Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage
Code Ratings kW Code Ratings HP Code Ratings HP Code Ratings HP Code Ratings HP
1P3N 1.3 0.37 1P1N 1.1 0.5 0P9N 0.9 0.5 2P1H 1.1 0.5 1P7H 0.9 0.5
2P1N 1.5 0.55 2P1N 1.6 0.75 1P7N 1.3 0.75 2P1H 1.6 0.75 1P7H 1.3 0.75
2P1N 2.1 0.75 2P1N 2.1 1 1P7N 1.7 1 3P4H 2.1 1 2P7H 1.7 1
3P5N 2.6 1.1 3P4N 3.0 1.5 2P7N 2.4 1.5 3P4H 3.0 1.5 2P7H 2.4 1.5
3P5N 3.5 1.5 3P4N 3.4 2 2P7N 2.7 2 5P0H 3.4 2 3P9H 2.7 2
5P0N 5.0 2.2 5P0N 5.0 3 3P9N 3.9 3 8P0H 5.0 3 6P1H 3.9 3
8P7N 8.7 3.7 8P0N 8.0 5 6P1N 6.1 5 011H 8.0 5 9P0H 6.1 5
011N 11.5 5.5 011N 11 7.5 9P0N 9.0 7.5 014H 11 7.5 011H 9.0 7.5
015N 15.4 7.5 014N 14 10 011N 11 10 022H 14 10 017H 11 10
022N 22 11 022N 22 15 017N 17 15 027H 22 15 022H 17 15
030N 30 15 027N 27 20 022N 22 20 034H 27 20 027H 22 20
037N 37 18.5 034N 34 25 027N 27 25 040H 34 25 032H 27 25
043N 43 22 040N 40 30 032N 32 30 052H 40 30 041H 32 30
060N 60 30 052N 52 40 041N 41 40 065H 52 40 052H 41 40
072N 72 37 065N 65 50 052N 52 50
(1) The kW and HP ratings shown are for reference only.
Size PowerFlex 70 drive units according to the applications and output ampere rating.

Units—2162Q Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with

Fusible Disconnect, 380…415V (NORMAL DUTY)
• Normal Duty Ratings, the drive overload capabilities (based on the output currents listed below) are:
110% for 60 seconds and 150% for 3 seconds.
• For specific drive applications refer to PowerFlex 70 User Manual, publication 20A-UM001.
• Basic configuration includes branch circuit (short circuit)/drive input fuses, control circuit transformer, door and unit
support pan. Branch circuit overload protection is provided by the internal drive overload.
• PowerFlex 70 drives are cULus (UL and C-UL listed) as motor overload protected devices.
An external overload relay is not required for single motor applications.
PowerFlex 70 AC drives are not intended for use with single phase motors.
• See page 334 for Combination Unit Short Circuit Current Ratings table.
• Wiring is Type A only. Drive can accept 16 AWG control wire maximum.
• Proper placement of drive units in the MCC is essential for proper operation and life cycle of the drive.
Give strong consideration to placing units with drives at the bottom of the section.
When more than one drive unit is placed in a section, locate the drive unit with the highest rating at the bottom of the
section.
• Do not mount transformer units below drive units. Heat from transformer units can cause drive to trip.
• HIM (Human Interface Module) and Control Platform Type are required. Select on page 272 and 273.
• Combination VFD units at these voltages are not UL or C-UL listed.

IMPORTANT The horsepower and kW ratings in Table 172 are for reference only. Size PowerFlex 70 drive units according to the
application and output ampere rating.
Table 172 - Bulletin 2162Q PowerFlex 70 VFD Units (380…415V Normal Duty)
Frame Rating (1) Nominal kW NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket NEMA Type 12 Delivery
Program
Space Catalog Number (3) Space Catalog Number(3)
Factor Factor
B 1.3 0.37 1.5 2162QA-1P3NK_-33K 2.0 2162QA-1P3NJ_-33K PE
1.5 0.55 2162QA-2P1NK_-34K 2162QA-2P1NJ_-34K
2.1 0.75 2162QA-2P1NK_-35K 2162QA-2P1NJ_-35K
2.6 1.1 2162QA-3P5NK_-36K 2162QA-3P5NJ_-36K
3.5 1.5 2162QA-3P5NK_-37K 2162QA-3P5NJ_-37K
5.0 2.2 2162QA-5P0NK_-38K 2162QA-5P0NJ_-38K
8.7 3.7 2162QA-8P7NK_-39K 2.5 2162QA-8P7NJ_-39K
C 11.5 5.5 2.0 2162QA-011NK_-40K 3.0 2162QA-011NJ_-40K
15.4 7.5 2162QA-015NK_-41K 2162QA-015NJ_-41K
D 22 11 2.5 2162QA-022NK_-42K 2162QA-022NJ_-42K
30 15 2162QA-030NK_-43K 3.5 2162QA-030NJ_-43K
37 18.5 2162QA-037NK_-44K 3.0 2162QA-037NJ_-44K
43 22 3.0 2162QA-043NK_-45K 3.5 2162QA-043NJ_-45K
(2)
E 60 30 3.0 2162QA-060NK_-46K 4.0 2162QA-060NJ_-46K
72 37 3.5 2162QA-072NK_-47K 2162QA-072NJ_-47K
(1) Ampere ratings are at a 4 kHz carrier frequency. If carrier frequencies above 4 kHz are selected, the drive output ampere ratings must be derated.
For derating information, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative and/or refer to the PowerFlex 70/
700 Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM001.
(2) Requires 3.5 total space factors when door mounted pilot devices are selected.
• Select the appropriate voltage code: 380V = N, 400V = KN, 415 = I (for example, 2162QA-1P3NKN-33K).


Fusible Disconnect, 480V (NORMAL DUTY)
• Basic configuration includes branch circuit (short circuit)/drive input fuses, control circuit transformer, door, and unit
section.
Table 173 - Bulletin 2162Q PowerFlex 70 VFD Units (480V Normal Duty)
Frame Rating (1) Nominal HP NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket NEMA Type 12 Delivery
Program
Space Catalog Number Space Catalog Number
Factor Factor
A 1.1 0.5 1.5 2162QA-1P1NKB-33 2.0 2162QA-1P1NJB-33 SC
1.6 0.75 2162QA-2P1NKB-34 2162QA-2P1NJB-34
2.1 1 2162QA-2P1NKB-35 2162QA-2P1NJB-35
3.0 1.5 2162QA-3P4NKB-36 2162QA-3P4NJB-36
3.4 2 2162QA-3P4NKB-37 2162QA-3P4NJB-37
B 5.0 3 2162QA-5P0NKB-38 2162QA-5P0NJB-38
8.0 5 2162QA-8P0NKB-39 2.5 2162QA-8P0NJB-39
C 11 7.5 2.0 2162QA-011NKB-40 3.0 2162QA-011NJB-40
14 10 2162QA-014NKB-41 2162QA-014NJB-41
D 22 15 2.5 2162QA-022NKB-42 2162QA-022NJB-42
27 20 2162QA-027NKB-43 3.5 2162QA-027NJB-43
34 25 2162QA-034NKB-44 3.0 2162QA-034NJB-44
40 30 3.0 2162QA-040NKB-45 3.5 2162QA-040NJB-45
E 52 40 3.0(2) 2162QA-052NKB-46 4.0 2162QA-052NJB-46
65 50 3.5(3) 2162QA-065NKB-47 4.0(3) 2162QA-065NJB-47
(1) Ampere ratings are at a 4 kHz carrier frequency. If carrier frequencies above 4 kHz are selected, the drive output ampere ratings must be
derated. For derating information, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative and/or refer to the
PowerFlex 70/700 Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM001.
(2) Requires 3.5 total space factors when door mounted pilot devices are selected and line or load reactor (-14RLX or -14RXL) is not selected.
Requires 4.0 total space factors when line or load reactor (-14RLX or -14RXL) is selected.
(3) Requires 6.0 total space factors, 20” wide, frame mounted (section does not have vertical wireway), when line or load reactor (-14RLX or -14RXL)
is selected. Delivery program changes to SC-II.


Fusible Disconnect, 480V (HEAVY DUTY)
• Heavy Duty Ratings, the drive overload capabilities (based on the output currents listed below) are:
section.
Table 174 - Bulletin 2162Q PowerFlex 70 VFD Units (480V Heavy Duty)
Program
Factor Factor
A 1.1 0.5 1.5 2162QA-2P1HKB-33 2.0 2162QA-2P1HJB-33 SC
1.6 0.75 2162QA-2P1HKB-34 2162QA-2P1HJB-34
2.1 1 2162QA-3P4HKB-35 2162QA-3P4HJB-35
3.0 1.5 2162QA-3P4HKB-36 2162QA-3P4HJB-36
B 3.4 2 2162QA-5P0HKB-37 2162QA-5P0HJB-37
5.0 3 2162QA-8P0HKB-38 2.5 2162QA-8P0HJB-38
C 8.0 5 2.0 2162QA-011HKB-39 3.0 2162QA-011HJB-39
11 7.5 2162QA-014HKB-40 2162QA-014HJB-40
D 14 10 2.5 2162QA-022HKB-41 2162QA-022HJB-41
22 15 2162QA-027HKB-42 3.0 2162QA-027HJB-42
27 20 2162QA-034HKB-43 3.5 2162QA-034HJB-43
34 25 3.0 2162QA-040HKB-44 3.5 2162QA-040HJB-44
E 40 30 3.0(2) 2162QA-052HKB-45 4.0 2162QA-052HJB-45
52 40 3.5(3) 2162QA-065HKB-46 4.0(3) 2162QA-065HJB-46
(1) Ampere ratings are at a 4 kHz carrier frequency. If carrier frequencies above 4 kHz are selected, the drive output ampere ratings must be
derated. For derating information, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative and/or refer to the
PowerFlex 70/700 Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM001.
(3) Requires 6.0 total space factors, 20” wide, frame mounted (section does not have vertical wireway), when line or load reactor (-14RLX or -14RXL)
is selected. Delivery program changes to SC-II.


Fusible Disconnect, 600V (NORMAL DUTY)
section.
Program
Factor Factor
A 0.9 0.5 1.5 2162QA-0P9NKC-33 2.0 2162QA-0P9NJC-33 SC
1.3 0.75 2162QA-1P7NKC-34 2162QA-1P7NJC-34
1.7 1 2162QA-1P7NKC-35 2162QA-1P7NJC-35
2.4 1.5 2162QA-2P7NKC-36 2162QA-2P7NJC-36
2.7 2 2162QA-2P7NKC-37 2162QA-2P7NJC-37
B 3.9 3 2162QA-3P9NKC-38 2162QA-3P9NJC-38
6.1 5 2162QA-6P1NKC-39 2.5 2162QA-6P1NJC-39
C 9.0 7.5 2.0 2162QA-9P0NKC-40 3.0 2162QA-9P0NJC-40
11 10 2162QA-011NKC-41 2162QA-011NJC-41
D 17 15 2.5 2162QA-017NKC-42 2162QA-017NJC-42
22 20 2162QA-022NKC-43 3.5 2162QA-022NJC-43
27 25 2162QA-027NKC-44 3.0 2162QA-027NJC-44
32 30 2162QA-032NKC-45 2162QA-032NJC-45
E 41 40 3.0 (2) 2162QA-041NKC-46 4.0 2162QA-041NJC-46
52 50 2162QA-052NKC-47 2162QA-052NJC-47
(1) Ampere ratings are at a 4 kHz carrier frequency. If carrier frequencies above 4 kHz are selected, the drive output ampere ratings must be derated. For
derating information, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative and/or refer to the PowerFlex 70/700
Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM001.


Fusible Disconnect, 600V (HEAVY DUTY)
section.
IMPORTANT The horsepower and kW ratings in Table 176 are for reference only. Size PowerFlex 70 drive units according to the application
and output ampere rating.

Program
Factor Factor
A 0.9 0.5 1.5 2162QA-1P7HKC-33 2.0 2162QA-1P7HJC-33 SC
1.3 0.75 2162QA-1P7HKC-34 2162QA-1P7HJC-34
1.7 1 2162QA-2P7HKC-35 2162QA-2P7HJC-35
2.4 1.5 2162QA-2P7HKC-36 2162QA-2P7HJC-36
B 2.7 2 2162QA-3P9HKC-37 2162QA-3P9HJC-37
3.9 3 2162QA-6P1HKC-38 2.5 2162QA-6P1HJC-38
C 6.1 5 2.0 2162QA-9P0HKC-39 3.0 2162QA-9P0HJC-39
9.0 7.5 2162QA-011HKC-40 2162QA-011HJC-40
D 11 10 2.5 2162QA-017HKC-41 2162QA-017HJC-41
17 15 2162QA-022HKC-42 3.0 2162QA-022HJC-42
22 20 2162QA-027HKC-43 3.5 2162QA-027HJC-43
27 25 2162QA-032HKC-44 2162QA-032HJC-44
E 32 30 3.0 (2) 2162QA-041HKC-45 4.0 2162QA-041HJC-45
41 40 2162QA-052HKC-46 2162QA-052HJC-46
(1) Ampere ratings are at a 4 kHz carrier frequency. If carrier frequencies above 4 kHz are selected, the drive output ampere ratings must be derated. For derating
information, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative and/or refer to the PowerFlex 70/700 Reference Manual,
publication PFLEX-RM001.


Circuit Breaker Disconnect, 380…415V (NORMAL DUTY)
section.
Table 177 - Bulletin 2163Q PowerFlex 70 VFD Units (380…415V Normal Duty)
Program
Space Catalog Number(3) Space Catalog Number
Factor Factor
B 1.3 0.37 1.5 2163QA-1P3NK_-33K_ 2.0 2163QA-1P3NJ_-33K_ PE
1.5 0.55 2163QA-2P1NK_-34K_ 2163QA-2P1NJ_-34K_
2.1 0.75 2163QA-2P1NK_-35K_ 2163QA-2P1NJ_-35K_
2.6 1.1 2163QA-3P5NK_-36K_ 2163QA-3P5NJ_-36K_
3.5 1.5 2163QA-3P5NK_-37K_ 2163QA-3P5NJ_-37K_
5.0 2.2 2163QA-5P0NK_-38K_ 2163QA-5P0NJ_-38K_
8.7 3.7 2163QA-8P7NK_-39K_ 2.5 2163QA-8P7NJ_-39K_
C 11.5 5.5 2.0 2163QA-011NK_-40K_ 3.0 2163QA-011NJ_-40K_
15.4 7.5 2163QA-015NK_-41K_ 2163QA-015NJ_-41K_
D 22 11 2.5 2163QA-022NK_-42K_ 2163QA-022NJ_-42K_
30 15 2163QA-030NK_-43K_ 3.5 2163QA-030NJ_-43K_
37 18.5 2163QA-037NK_-44K_ 3.0 2163QA-037NJ_-44K_
43 22 3.0 2163QA-043NK_-45K_ 3.5 2163QA-043NJ_-45K_
E 60 30 3.0 (2) 2163QA-060NK_-46K_ 4.0(2) 2163QA-060NJ_-46K_
72 37 4.0 2163QA-072NK_-47K_ 4.0 2163QA-072NJ_-47K_
(2) Requires 3.5 total space factors when door mounted pilot devices are selected.
• Select the appropriate voltage code: 380V = N, 400V = KN, 415 = I (for example, 2163QA-1P3NKN-33K).
• Select the appropriate suffix code from the circuit breaker table on page 306 to identify the desired circuit breaker type (for example, 2163QA-1P3NKN-33KTHM).


Circuit Breaker Disconnect, 480V (NORMAL DUTY)
section.
Frame Rating (1) Nominal HP NEMA Type 1 Catalog Number (3) NEMA Type 12 Catalog Number(3) Delivery
and Type 1 w/ Program
gasket
Space Factor Space Factor
A 1.1 0.5 1.5 2163QA-1P1NKB-33_ 2.0 2163QA-1P1NJB-33_ SC
1.6 0.75 2163QA-2P1NKB-34_
2.1 1 2163QA-2P1NJB-34_
3.0 1.5 2163QA-2P1NJB-35_ 2163QA-3P4NJB-36_
3.4 2 2163QA-3P4NKB-37_ 2163QA-3P4NJB-37_
B 5.0 3 2163QA-5P0NKB-38_ 2163QA-5P0NJB-38_
8.0 5 2163QA-8P0NKB-39_ 2.5 2163QA-8P0NJB-39_
C 11 7.5 2.0 2163QA-011NKB-40_ 3.0 2163QA-011NJB-40_
14 10 2163QA-014NKB-41_ 2163QA-014NJB-41_
D 22 15 2.5 2163QA-022NKB-42_ 2163QA-022NJB-42_
27 20 2163QA-027NKB-43_ 3.5 2163QA-027NJB-43_
34 25 2163QA-034NKB-44_ 3.0 2163QA-034NJB-44_
40 30 3.0 2163QA-040NKB-45_ 3.5 2163QA-040NJB-45_
E 52 40 3.0(2) 2163QA-052NKB-46_ 4.0 2163QA-052NJB-46_
65 50 3.5(4) 2163QA-065NKB-47_ 4.0(4) 2163QA-065NJB-47_
information, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative and/or refer to the PowerFlex 70/700 Reference Manual, publication
PFLEX-RM001.
(3) The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate suffix code from the Circuit Breaker table on page 306 to identify the desired circuit breaker type (for
example, 2163QA-1P1NKB-33THM).
(4) Requires 6.0 total space factors, 20” wide, frame mounted (section does not have vertical wireway), when line or load reactor (-14RLX or -14RXL) is selected. Delivery
program changes to SC-II.


Circuit Breaker Disconnect, 480V (HEAVY DUTY)
section.
Frame Rating (1) Nominal HP NEMA Type Catalog Number (3) NEMA Catalog Number Delivery
1 and Type 1 Type 12 Program
w/gasket
Space Space
Factor Factor
A 1.1 0.5 1.5 2163QA-2P1HKB-33_ 2.0 2163QA-2P1HJB-33_ SC
1.6 0.75 2163QA-2P1HKB-34_ 2163QA-2P1HJB-34_
2.1 1 2163QA-3P4HKB-35_ 2163QA-3P4HJB-35_
3.0 1.5 2163QA-3P4HKB-36_ 2163QA-3P4HJB-36_
B 3.4 2 2163QA-5P0HKB-37_ 2163QA-5P0HJB-37_
5 3 2163QA-8P0HKB-38_ 2.5 2163QA-8P0HJB-38_
C 8 5 2.0 2163QA-011HKB-39_ 3.0 2163QA-011HJB-39_
11 7.5 2163QA-014HKB-40_ 2163QA-014HJB-40_
D 14 10 2.5 2163QA-022HKB-41_ 2163QA-022HJB-41_
22 15 2163QA-027HKB-42_ 3.5 2163QA-027HJB-42_
27 20 2163QA-034HKB-43_ 3.0 2163QA-034HJB-43_
34 25 3.0 2163QA-040HKB-44_ 3.5 2163QA-040HJB-44_
Table continued on the next page.

Table 179 - Bulletin 2163Q PowerFlex 70 VFD Units (480V Heavy Duty) (continued)
Frame Rating (1) Nominal HP NEMA Type Catalog Number (3) NEMA Catalog Number Delivery
w/gasket
Space Space
Factor Factor
E 40 30 3.0(2) 2163QA-052HKB-45_ 4.0 2163QA-052HJB-45_ SC
52 40 3.5(4) 2163QA-065HKB-46_ 4.0(4) 2163QA-065HJB-46_
• Select the appropriate suffix code from the Circuit Breaker Table on page 306 to identify the desired circuit breaker type (for example,2163QA-1P1NKB-
33THM).
(4) Requires 6.0 total space factors, 20” wide, frame mounted (section does not have vertical wireway), when line or load reactor (-14RLX or -14RXL) is selected.
Delivery program changes to SC-II.

Circuit Breaker Disconnect, 600V (NORMAL DUTY)
• Wiring is Type A only. Drive can only accept 16 AWG control wire.
section.

Frame Rating (1) Nominal HP NEMA Type Catalog Number (3) NEMA Catalog Number (3) Delivery
w/gasket
Space Space
Factor Factor
A 0.9 0.5 1.5 2163QA-0P9NKC-33_ 2.0 2163QA-0P9NJC-33_ SC
1.3 0.75 2163QA-1P7NKC-34_ 2163QA-1P7NJC-34_
1.7 1 2163QA-1P7NKC-35_ 2163QA-1P7NJC-35_
2.4 1.5 2163QA-2P7NKC-36_ 2163QA-2P7NJC-36_
2.7 2 2163QA-2P7NKC-37_ 2163QA-2P7NJC-37_
B 3.9 3 2163QA-3P9NKC-38_ 2163QA-3P9NJC-38_
6.1 5 2163QA-6P1NKC-39_ 2.5 2163QA-6P1NJC-39_
C 9.0 7.5 2.0 2163QA-9P0NKC-40_ 3.0 2163QA-9P0NJC-40_
11 10 2163QA-011NKC-41_ 2163QA-011NJC-41_
D 17 15 2.5 2163QA-017NKC-42_ 2163QA-017NJC-42_
22 20 2163QA-022NKC-43_ 3.5 2163QA-022NJC-43_
27 25 2163QA-027NKC-44_ 3.0 2163QA-027NJC-44_
32 30 2163QA-032NKC-45_ 2163QA-032NJC-45_
E 41 40 3.0 (2) 2163QA-041NKC-46_ 4.0 2163QA-041NJC-46_
52 50 2163QA-052NKC-47_ 2163QA-052NJC-47_
(3) The catalog number is not complete:
• Select the appropriate suffix code from the Circuit Breaker Table on page 306 to identify the desired circuit breaker type (for example, 2163QA-0P9NKC-33THM).


Circuit Breaker Disconnect, 600V (HEAVY DUTY)
section.
Program
Space Catalog Number (3) Space Catalog Number(3)
Factor Factor
A 0.9 0.5 1.5 2163QA-1P7HKC-33_ 2.0 2163QA-1P7HJC-33_ SC
1.3 0.75 2163QA-1P7HKC-34_ 2163QA-1P7HJC-34_
1.7 1 2163QA-2P7HKC-35_ 2163QA-2P7HJC-35_
2.4 1.5 2163QA-2P7HKC-36_ 2163QA-2P7HJC-36_
B 2.7 2 2163QA-3P9HKC-37_ 2163QA-3P9HJC-37_
3.9 3 2163QA-6P1HKC-38_ 2.5 2163QA-6P1HJC-38_
C 6.1 5 2.0 2163QA-9P0HKC-39_ 3.0 2163QA-9P0HJC-39_
9 7.5 2163QA-011HKC-40_ 2163QA-011HJC-40_
D 11 10 2.5 2163QA-017HKC-41_ 2163QA-017HJC-41_
17 15 2163QA-022HKC-42_ 3.5 2163QA-022HJC-42_
22 20 2163QA-027HKC-43_ 3.0 2163QA-027HJC-43_
27 25 2163QA-032HKC-44_ 2163QA-032HJC-44_
E 32 30 3.0 (2) 2163QA-041HKC-45_ 4.0 2163QA-041HJC-45_
41 40 2163QA-052HKC-46_ 2163QA-052HJC-46_
(3) The catalog number is not complete:
• Select the appropriate suffix code from the Circuit Breaker Table on page 306 to identify the desired circuit breaker type (for example, 2163QA-0P9HKC-33THM).

Bulletin 2162R and 2163R with PowerFlex 700 Drive

These combination variable frequency AC motor drive units are specifically designed for use in CENTERLINE motor control
centers. Each unit contains a high performance, microprocessor-controlled, variable frequency AC drive and either a fusible
disconnect switch or a circuit breaker.
They also:
• Include EMC filters on 380…415V AC.
• Include UL Class J time delay fuses. These fuses provide both branch circuit protection and drive input protection. The
drive input fuses are provided in series with the circuit breaker in Bulletin 2163R units.
fan(s).
• Are digitally programmable with access to mode programming, providing precise and repeatedly accurate set-up, control
and operation, and adaptability to handle a variety of applications.
• Have available 24V DC or 115V AC control voltages.
• A Human Interface Module (HIM) and Control Interface Type must be selected.
• Bulletin 2162R and 2163R use PowerFlex 700 drives.
Each unit is provided as a NEMA Wiring Class I, Type A unit with terminals mounted on the drive chassis for connection of items
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162R and 2163R

PowerFlex 700 Drive
• Bulletins 2162R and 2163R use PowerFlex 700 Drives
• Class J time delay drive input fuses provide both branch circuit and drive input protection
motor speed

Table 182 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162R and 2163R PowerFlex 700 Drive
2162R A - 034N K B - 44 - 14HA0
2163R A - 034N K B - 44THM - 14HA0
2162R PowerFlex 700 Variable K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with Circuit Breaker Type
Frequency AC Drive with gasket 2162R-’33’ ’33_’ Nominal Horsepower/kW code.
Fusible Disconnect J NEMA Type 12 See Table 251 and Table 252.
2163R PowerFlex 700 Variable 2163R-’33THM’ ’33’ Nominal Horsepower/kW code.
Frequency AC Drive with See Table 251 and Table 252.
Circuit Breaker ’__THM’ Circuit Breaker Type. See
table on page 306
Code Wiring Type Code Line Voltage

A Type A N 380V (1)
KN 400V (1) Code Human Interface Module
I 415V (1) and Options
B 480V See options section beginning on
C 600V page 269
(1) Units at these voltages
are not UL or C-UL listed.
Drive Size Code, Output Current Rating (Amperes) and Nominal HP or (kw) (1)
380…415V Line Voltage 480V Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage 480V Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage
Code Ratings kW Code Ratings HP Code Ratings HP Code Ratings HP Code Ratings HP
1P3N 1.3 0.37 1P1N 1.1 0.5 1P7N 1.7 1 2P1H 1.1 0.5 2P7H 1.7 1
2P1N 1.5 0.55 2P1N 1.6 0.75 2P7N 2.4 1.5 2P1H 1.6 0.75 2P7H 2.4 1.5
2P1N 2.1 0.75 2P1N 2.1 1 2P7N 2.7 2 3P4H 2.1 1 3P9H 2.7 2
3P5N 2.6 1.1 3P4N 3.0 1.5 3P9N 3.9 3 3P4H 3.0 1.5 6P1H 3.9 3
3P5N 3.5 1.5 3P4N 3.4 2 6P1N 6.1 5 5P0H 3.4 2 9P0H 6.1 5
5P0N 5.0 2.2 5P0N 5.0 3 9P0N 9.0 7.5 8P0H 5.0 3 011H 9.0 7.5
8P7N 8.7 3.7 8P0N 8.0 5 011N 11 10 011H 8.0 5 017H 11 10
011N 11.5 5.5 011N 11 7.5 017N 17 15 014H 11 7.5 022H 17 15
015N 15.4 7.5 014N 14 10 022N 22 20 022H 14 10 027H 22 20
022N 22 11 022N 22 15 027N 27 25 027H 22 15 032H 27 25
030N 30 15 027N 27 20 032N 32 30 034H 27 20 041H 32 30
037N 37 18.5 034N 34 25 041N 41 40 040H 34 25 052H 41 40
043N 43 22 040N 40 30 052N 52 50 052H 40 30 062H 52 50
056N 56 30 052N 52 40 062N 62 60 065H 52 40 077H 62 60
072N 72 37 065N 65 50 077N 77 75 077H 65 50 125H 77 75
105N 85 45 077N 77 60 125N 99 100 096H 77 60 125H 99 100
105N 105 55 096N 96 75 125N 125 125 125H 96 75 144H 125 125
170N 138 75 125N 125 100 144N 144 150 156H 125 100
170N 170 90 156N 156 125 180H 156 125
300N 205 110 180N 180 150 300H 180 150
300N 255 132 300N 255 200 300H 245 200
(1) The kW and HP ratings shown are for reference only.
Size PowerFlex 700 drive units according to the applications and output ampere rating.

Units—2162R Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with
Fusible Disconnect, 380…415V AC (NORMAL DUTY)
• For specific drive applications refer to the PowerFlex 700 User Manual, publication 20B-UM001.
support pan.
Branch circuit (overload) protection is provided by the internal drive overload.
• PowerFlex700 AC drives are cULus (UL and C-UL listed) as motor overload protected devices.
• Proper placement of drive units in the MCC is essential for proper operation and life cycle of the drive. Give strong
consideration to placing units with drives at the bottom of the section. When more than one drive unit is placed in a
section, locate the drive unit with the highest rating at the bottom of the section.
• HIM (Human Interface Module) and Control Interface Type are required. Select on page 272 and 273.

Table 183 - Bulletin 2162R PowerFlex 700 VFD Units (380…415V Normal Duty)
Program
Normal Duty 380…415V Space Factor Catalog Number(3) Space Factor Catalog Number
0 1.3 0.37 2.0 2162RA-1P3NK_-33K 2.0 2162RA-1P3NJ_-33K ENG
1.5 0.55 2162RA-2P1NK_-34K 2162RA-2P1NJ_-34K
2.1 0.75 2162RA-2P1NK_-35K 2162RA-2P1NJ_-35K
2.6 1.1 2162RA-3P5NK_-36K 2162RA-3P5NJ_-36K
3.5 1.5 2162RA-3P5NK_-37K 2162RA-3P5NJ_-37K
5.0 2.2 2162RA-5P0NK_-38K 2162RA-5P0NJ_-38K
8.7 3.7 2162RA-8P7NK_-39K 2.5 2162RA-8P7NJ_-39K
11.5 5.5 2162RA-011NK_-40K 2162RA-011NJ_-40K
1 15.4 7.5 2162RA-015NK_-41K 2162RA-015NJ_-41K
22 11 2162RA-022NK_-42K 3.0 2162RA-022NJ_-42K
2 30 15 2.5 2162RA-030NK_-43K 2162RA-030NJ_-43K
37 18.5 2162RA-037NK_-44K 2162RA-037NJ_-44K
3 43 22 3.0 2162RA-043NK_-45K 3.5 2162RA-043NJ_-45K
56 30 2162RA-056NK_-46K 4.0 2162RA-056NJ_-46K
72 37 2162RA-072NK_-47K 2162RA-072NJ_-47K
5 85 45 6.0, 25”W, 20”D(2) 2162RA-105NK_-48K 6.0, 2162RA-105NJ_-48K
25”W, 20”D(2)
105 55 2162RA-105NK_-49K 2162RA-105NJ_-49K
6 138 75 2162RA-170NK_-50K 6.0 2162RA-170NJ_-50K
30”W, 20”D(2)
170 90 2162RA-170NK_-51K 2162RA-170NJ_-51K
(1) Ampere ratings are at a 4 kHz carrier frequency. If carrier frequencies above 4 kHz are selected, the drive output current ratings must be derated. For derating
PFLEX-RM001.
(2) Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway. Horizontal bus is 5” deeper than standard.
• Select the appropriate voltage code (380V = N, 400V = KN, 415V = I) (for example, 2162RA-1P3NKN-33K).

Fusible Disconnect, 480V AC (NORMAL DUTY)
support pan.

Table 184 - Bulletin 2162R PowerFlex 700 VFD Units (480V Normal Duty)
Program
Normal Duty 480V Space Factor Catalog Number Space Catalog Number
Factor
0 1.1 0.5 2.0 2162RA-1P1NKB-33 2.0 2162RA-1P1NJB-33 ENG
1.6 0.75 2162RA-2P1NKB-34 2162RA-2P1NJB-34
2.1 1 2162RA-2P1NKB-35 2162RA-2P1NJB-35
3.0 1.5 2162RA-3P4NKB-36 2162RA-3P4NJB-36
3.4 2 2162RA-3P4NKB-37 2162RA-3P4NJB-37
5.0 3 2162RA-5P0NKB-38 2162RA-5P0NJB-38
8.0 5 2162RA-8P0NKB-39 2.5 2162RA-8P0NJB-39
11 7.5 2162RA-011NKB-40 2162RA-011NJB-40
1 14 10 2162RA-014NKB-41 2162RA-014NJB-41
22 15 2162RA-022NKB-42 3.0 2162RA-022NJB-42
2 27 20 2.5 2162RA-027NKB-43 2162RA-027NJB-43
34 25 2162RA-034NKB-44 2162RA-034NJB-44
3 40 30 3.0 2162RA-040NKB-45 3.5 2162RA-040NJB-45
52 40 2162RA-052NKB-46 4.0 2162RA-052NJB-46
65 50 2162RA-065NKB-47 2162RA-065NJB-47
4 77 60 6.0, 20” W(2) 2162RA-077NKB-48 6.0, 25” W(2) 2162RA-077NJB-48 ENG
5 96 75 6.0 2162RA-096NKB-49 6.0 2162RA-096NJB-49
25”W, 20”D(3) 25”W,
125 100 2162RA-125NKB-50 20”D(3) 2162RA-125NJB-50
6 156 125 2162RA-156NKB-51 6.0 2162RA-156NJB-51
30”W,
20”D(3)
180 150 2162RA-180NKB-52 6.0 2162RA-180NJB-52
35”W,
20”D(3)
PFLEX-RM001.

Fusible Disconnect, 480V AC (HEAVY DUTY)
support pan.
section.

Table 185 - Bulletin 2162R PowerFlex 700 VFD Units (480V Heavy Duty)
Program
Heavy Duty 480V Space Factor Catalog Number Space Factor Catalog Number
0 1.1 0.5 2.0 2162RA-2P1HKB-33 2.0 2162RA-2P1HJB-33 ENG
1.6 0.75 2162RA-2P1HKB-34 2162RA-2P1HJB-34
2.1 1 2162RA-3P4HKB-35 2162RA-3P4HJB-35
3.0 1.5 2162RA-3P4HKB-36 2162RA-3P4HJB-36
3.4 2 2162RA-5P0HKB-37 2162RA-5P0HJB-37
5.0 3 2162RA-8P0HKB-38 2.5 2162RA-8P0HJB-38
8.0 5 2162RA-011HKB-39 2162RA-011HJB-39
1 11 7.5 2162RA-014HKB-40 2162RA-014HJB-40
14 10 2162RA-022HKB-41 3.0 2162RA-022HJB-41
2 22 15 2.5 2162RA-027HKB-42 2162RA-027HJB-42
27 20 2162RA-034HKB-43 2162RA-034HJB-43
3 34 25 3.0 2162RA-040HKB-44 3.5 2162RA-040HJB-44
40 30 2162RA-052HKB-45 4.0 2162RA-052HJB-45
52 40 2162RA-065HKB-46 2162RA-065HJB-46
4 65 50 6.0, 20”W(2) 2162RA-077HKB-47 6.0, 25” W(3) 2162RA-077HJB-47 ENG
5 77 60 6.0 2162RA-096HKB-48 6.0 2162RA-096HJB-48
25”W, 20”D(3) 25”W, 20”D(3)
96 75 2162RA-125HKB-49 2162RA-125HJB-49
6 125 100 2162RA-156HKB-50 6.0 2162RA-156HJB-50
30”W, 20”D(3)
156 125 2162RA-180HKB-51 6.0 2162RA-180HJB-51
35”W, 20”D(3)
PFLEX-RM001.

Fusible Disconnect, 600V AC (NORMAL DUTY)
support pan.

Frame Rating Nominal HP NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket NEMA Type 12 Delivery
Program
Normal Duty 600V Space Catalog Number Space Factor Catalog Number
Factor
0 1.7 (1) 1 2.0 2162RA-1P7NKC-35 2.0 2162RA-1P7NJC-35 ENG
(1)
2.4 1.5 2162RA-2P7NKC-36 2162RA-2P7NJC-36
(1)
2.7 2 2162RA-2P7NKC-37 2162RA-2P7NJC-37
(1)
3.9 3 2162RA-3P9NKC-38 2162RA-3P9NJC-38
6.1 (1) 5 2162RA-6P1NKC-39 2.5 2162RA-6P1NJC-39
(1)
9.0 7.5 2162RA-9P0NKC-40 2162RA-9P0NJC-40
(1)
1 11 10 2162RA-011NKC-41 2162RA-011NJC-41
(1)
17 15 2162RA-017NKC-42 3.0 2162RA-017NJC-42
2 22 (1) 20 2.5 2162RA-022NKC-43 2162RA-022NJC-43
(1)
27 25 2162RA-027NKC-44 2162RA-027NJC-44
(1)
3 32 30 3.0 2162RA-032NKC-45 3.5 2162RA-032NJC-45
(1)
41 40 2162RA-041NKC-46 4.0 2162RA-041NJC-46
52 (1) 50 2162RA-052NKC-47 2162RA-052NJC-47
(2)
4 62 60 6.0, 20”W(3) 2162RA-062NKC-48 6.0, 25”W(3) 2162RA-062NJC-48
(2)
5 77 75 6.0, 25”W, 2162RA-077NKC-49 6.0, 2162RA-077NJC-49
20”D (4) 25”W, 20”D (4)
6 99 (2) 100 2162RA-125NKC-50 6.0, 2162RA-125NJC-50
30”W, 20”D (4)
125 (2) 125 2162RA-125NKC-51 2162RA-125NJC-51
(2)
144 150 2162RA-144NKC-52 6.0, 2162RA-144NJC-52
35”W, 20”D (4)
PFLEX-RM001.
(2) Ampere ratings are at 2 kHz carrier frequency. If carrier frequencies above 2 kHz are selected, the drive output current ratings can require derating. Contact your local
Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative and to the PowerFlex 70/700 Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM001.

Fusible Disconnect, 600V AC (HEAVY DUTY)
support pan.
section.
IMPORTANT The horsepower ratings in Table 187 are for reference only. Size PowerFlex 700 drive units according to the application and
Program
0 1.7 (1) 1 2.0 2162RA-2P7HKC-35 2.0 2162RA-2P7HJC-35 ENG
(1)
2.4 1.5 2162RA-2P7HKC-36 2162RA-2P7HJC-36
(1)
2.7 2 2162RA-3P9HKC-37 2162RA-3P9HJC-37
(1)
3.9 3 2162RA-6P1HKC-38 2.5 2162RA-6P1HJC-38
6.1 (1) 5 2162RA-9P0HKC-39 2162RA-9P0HJC-39
(1)
1 9.0 7.5 2162RA-011HKC-40 2162RA-011HJC-40
(1)
11 10 2162RA-017HKC-41 3.0 2162RA-017HJC-41
(1)
2 17 15 2.5 2162RA-022HKC-42 2162RA-022HJC-42
22 (1) 20 2162RA-027HKC-43 2162RA-027HJC-43
(1)
3 27 25 3.0 2162RA-032HKC-44 3.5 2162RA-032HJC-44
(1)
32 30 2162RA-041HKC-45 4.0 2162RA-041HJC-45
(1)
41 40 2162RA-052HKC-46 2162RA-052HJC-46
4 52 (2) 50 6.0, 20”W(3) 2162RA-062HKC-47 6.0, 25”W(3) 2162RA-062HJC-47

Table 187 - Bulletin 2162R PowerFlex 700 VFD Units (600V Heavy Duty) (continued)
Program
5 62 (2) 60 6.0, 2162RA-077HKC-48 6.0, 2162RA-077HJC-48 ENG
25”W, 20”D (4) 25”W, 20”D(4)
6 77 (2) 75 2162RA-125HKC-49 6.0, 2162RA-125HJC-49
(2)
30”W, 20”D (4)
99 100 2162RA-125HKC-50 2162RA-125HJC-50
(2)
125 125 2162RA-144HKC-51 6.0, 2162RA-144HJC-51
35”W, 20”D (4)
PFLEX-RM001.

Circuit Breaker, 380…415V AC (NORMAL DUTY)
support pan.

Table 188 - Bulletin 2163R PowerFlex 700 VFD Units (380…415V Normal Duty)
Program
Normal Duty 380-415V Space Factor Catalog Number (3) Space Factor Catalog Number (3)
0 1.3 0.37 2.0 2163RA-1P3NK_-33K_ 2.0 2163RA-1P3NJ_-33K_ ENG
1.5 0.55 2163RA-2P1NK_-34K_ 2163RA-2P1NJ_-34K_
2.1 0.75 2163RA-2P1NK_-35K_ 2163RA-2P1NJ_-35K_
2.6 1.1 2163RA-3P5NK_-36K_ 2163RA-3P5NJ_-36K_
3.5 1.5 2163RA-3P5NK_-37K_ 2163RA-3P5NJ_-37K_
5.0 2.2 2163RA-5P0NK_-38K_ 2163RA-5P0NJ_-38K_
8.7 3.7 2163RA-8P7NK_-39K_ 2.5 2163RA-8P7NJ_-39K_
11.5 5.5 2163RA-011NK_-40K_ 2163RA-011NJ_-40K_
1 15.4 7.5 2163RA-015NK_-41K_ 2163RA-015NJ_-41K_
22 11 2163RA-022NK_-42K_ 3.0 2163RA-022NJ_-42K_
2 30 15 2.5 2163RA-030NK_-43K_ 2163RA-030NJ_-43K_
37 18.5 2163RA-037NK_-44K_ 2163RA-037NJ_-44K_
3 43 22 3.0 2163RA-043NK_-45K_ 3.5 2163RA-043NJ_-45K_
56 30 2163RA-056NK_-46K_ 4.0 2163RA-056NJ_-46K_
72 37 3.5 2163RA-072NK_-47K_ 2163RA-072NJ_-47K_
5 85 45 6.0, 25”W, 2163RA-105NK_-48K_ 6.0, 25”W, 2163RA-105NJ_-48K_ ENG
20”D(2) 20”D(2)
105 55 2163RA-105NK_-49K_ 2163RA-105NJ_-49K_
6 138 75 2163RA-170NK_-50K_ 6.0, 30”W, 2163RA-170NJ_-50K_
20”D(2)
170 90 2163RA-170NK_-51K_ 2163RA-170NJ_-51K_
PFLEX-RM001.
• Select the appropriate voltage code: 380V = N, 400V = KN, 415 = I (for example, 2163RA-037NKN).
• Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 306 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2163RA-037NKN-44KTHM).

Circuit Breaker, 480V AC (NORMAL DUTY)
support pan.

Program
Normal Duty 480V Space Factor Catalog Number (4) Space Factor Catalog Number (4)
0 1.1 0.5 2.0 2163RA-1P1NKB-33_ 2.0 2163RA-1P1NJB-33_ ENG
1.6 0.75 2163RA-2P1NKB-34_ 2163RA-2P1NJB-34_
2.1 1 2163RA-2P1NKB-35_ 2163RA-2P1NJB-35_
3.0 1.5 2163RA-3P4NKB-36_ 2163RA-3P4NJB-36_
3.4 2 2163RA-3P4NKB-37_ 2163RA-3P4NJB-37_
5.0 3 2163RA-5P0NKB-38_ 2163RA-5P0NJB-38_
8.0 5 2163RA-8P0NKB-39_ 2.5 2163RA-8P0NJB-39_
11 7.5 2163RA-011NKB-40_ 2163RA-011NJB-40_
1 14 10 2163RA-014NKB-41_ 2163RA-014NJB-41_
22 15 2163RA-022NKB-42_ 3.0 2163RA-022NJB-42_
2 27 20 2.5 2163RA-027NKB-43_ 2163RA-027NJB-43_
34 25 2163RA-034NKB-44_ 2163RA-034NJB-44_
3 40 30 3.0 2163RA-040NKB-45_ 3.5 2163RA-040NJB-45_
52 40 2163RA-052NKB-46_ 4.0 2163RA-052NJB-46_
65 50 3.5 2163RA-065NKB-47_ 2163RA-065NJB-47_
4 77 60 6.0, 20” W(2) 2163RA-077NKB-48_ 6.0, 25” W(2) 2163RA-077NJB-48_ ENG
5 96 75 6.0 2163RA-096NKB-49_ 6.0 2163RA-096NJB-49_
25”W, 20”D(3) 25”W, 20”D(3)
125 100 2163RA-125NKB-50_ 2163RA-125NJB-50_
6 156 125 2163RA-156NKB-51_ 6.0 2163RA-156NJB-51_
30”W, 20”D(3)
180 150 2163RA-180NKB-52_ 6.0 2163RA-180NJB-52_
35”W, 20”D(3)
PFLEX-RM001.
• Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 306 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2163RA-034NKB-44THM).

Circuit Breaker, 480V AC (HEAVY DUTY)
support pan.
section.

Program
Heavy Duty 480V Space Factor Catalog Number (4) Space Factor Catalog Number (4)
0 1.1 0.5 2.0 2163RA-2P1HKB-33_ 2.0 2163RA-2P1HJB-33_ ENG
1.6 0.75 2163RA-2P1HKB-34_ 2163RA-2P1HJB-34_
2.1 1 2163RA-3P4HKB-35_ 2163RA-3P4HJB-35_
3.0 1.5 2163RA-3P4HKB-36_ 2163RA-3P4HJB-36_
3.4 2 2163RA-5P0HKB-37_ 2163RA-5P0HJB-37_
5.0 3 2163RA-8P0HKB-38_ 2.5 2163RA-8P0HJB-38_
8.0 5 2163RA-011HKB-39_ 2163RA-011HJB-39_
1 11 7.5 2163RA-014HKB-40_ 2163RA-014HJB-40_
14 10 2163RA-022HKB-41_ 3.0 2163RA-022HJB-41_
2 22 15 2.5 2163RA-027HKB-42_ 2163RA-027HJB-42_
27 20 2163RA-034HKB-43_ 2163RA-034HJB-43_
3 34 25 3.0 2163RA-040HKB-44_ 3.5 2163RA-040HJB-44_
40 30 2163RA-052HKB-45_ 4.0 2163RA-052HJB-45_
52 40 3.5 2163RA-065HKB-46_ 2163RA-065HJB-46_
4 65 50 6.0, 20” W(2) 2163RA-077HKB-47_ 6.0, 25” W(2) 2163RA-077HJB-47_ ENG
5 77 60 6.0 2163RA-096HKB-48_ 6.0 2163RA-096HJB-48_
25”W, 20”D(3) 25”W, 20”D(3)
96 75 2163RA-125HKB-49_ 2163RA-125HJB-49_
6 125 100 2163RA-156HKB-50_ 6.0 2163RA-156HJB-50_
30”W, 20”D(3)
156 125 2163RA-180HKB-51_ 6.0 2163RA-180HJB-51_
35”W, 20”D(3)
PFLEX-RM001.
Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 306 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2163RA-040HKB-44THM).

Circuit Breaker Disconnect, 600V AC (NORMAL DUTY)
support pan.

Program
Normal Duty 600V Space Factor Catalog Number(5) Space Factor Catalog Number(5)
0 1.7 (1) 1 2.0 2163RA-1P7NKC-35_ 2.0 2163RA-1P7NJC-35_ ENG
(1)
2.4 1.5 2163RA-2P7NKC-36_ 2163RA-2P7NJC-36_
2.7 (1) 2 2163RA-2P7NKC-37_ 2163RA-2P7NJC-37_
(1)
3.9 3 2163RA-3P9NKC-38_ 2163RA-3P9NJC-38_
(1)
6.1 5 2163RA-6P1NKC-39_ 2.5 2163RA-6P1NJC-39_
(1)
9.0 7.5 2163RA-9P0NKC-40_ 2163RA-9P0NJC-40_
1 11 (1) 10 2163RA-011NKC-41_ 2163RA-011NJC-41_
(1)
17 15 2163RA-017NKC-42_ 3.0 2163RA-017NJC-42_
(1)
2 22 20 2.5 2163RA-022NKC-43_ 2163RA-022NJC-43_
(1)
27 25 2163RA-027NKC-44_ 2163RA-027NJC-44_
3 32 (1) 30 3.0 2163RA-032NKC-45_ 3.5 2163RA-032NJC-45_
(1)
41 40 2163RA-041NKC-46_ 4.0 2163RA-041NJC-46_
(1)
52 50 3.5 2163RA-052NKC-47_ 2163RA-052NJC-47_
(2)
4 62 60 6.0, 20”W(3) 2163RA-062NKC-48_ 6.0, 25”W(3) 2163RA-062NJC-48_
5 77 (2) 75 6.0, 2163RA-077NKC-49_ 6.0, 2163RA-077NJC-49_
25”W, 20”D(4) 25”W, 20”D(4)
6 99 (2) 100 2163RA-125NKC-50_ 6.0, 2163RA-125NJC-50_
(2)
30”W, 20”D(4)
125 125 2163RA-125NKC-51_ 2163RA-125NJC-51_
(2)
144 150 2163RA-144NKC-52_ 6.0, 2163RA-144NJC-52_
35”W, 20”D(4)
PFLEX-RM001.
• Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 306 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2163RA-027NKC-44THM).

Circuit Breaker Disconnect, 600V AC (HEAVY DUTY)
support pan.
section.

Program
Heavy Duty 600V Space Factor Catalog Number(5) Space Factor Catalog Number(5)
0 1.7 (1) 1 2.0 2163RA-2P7HKC-35_ 2.0 2163RA-2P7HJC-35_ ENG
(1)
2.4 1.5 2163RA-2P7HKC-36_ 2163RA-2P7HJC-36_
2.7 (1) 2 2163RA-3P9HKC-37_ 2163RA-3P9HJC-37_
(1)
3.9 3 2163RA-6P1HKC-38_ 2.5 2163RA-6P1HJC-38_
(1)
6.1 5 2163RA-9P0HKC-39_ 2163RA-9P0HJC-39_
(1)
1 9.0 7.5 2163RA-011HKC-40_ 2163RA-011HJC-40_
11 (1) 10 2163RA-017HKC-41_ 3.0 2163RA-017HJC-41_
(1)
2 17 15 2.5 2163RA-022HKC-42_ 2163RA-022HJC-42_
(1)
22 20 2163RA-027HKC-43_ 2163RA-027HJC-43_
(1)
3 27 25 3.0 2163RA-032HKC-44_ 3.5 2163RA-032HJC-44_
32 (1) 30 2163RA-041HKC-45_ 4.0 2163RA-041HJC-45_
(1)
41 40 3.5 2163RA-052HKC-46_ 2163RA-052HJC-46_
(2)
4 52 50 6.0, 20”W(3) 2163RA-062HKC-47_ 6.0, 25”W(3) 2163RA-062HJC-47_
(2)
5 62 60 6.0, 2163RA-077HKC-48_ 6.0, 2163RA-077HJC-48_
25”W, 20”D (4) 25”W, 20”D(4)
6 77 (2) 75 2163RA-125HKC-49_ 6.0, 2163RA-125HJC-49_
(2)
30”W, 20”D (4)
99 100 2163RA-125HKC-50_ 2163RA-125HJC-50_
(2)
125 125 2163RA-144HKC-51_ 6.0, 2163RA-144HJC-51_
35”W, 20”D (4)
PFLEX-RM001.
• Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 306 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2163RA-032HKC-44THM).

Bulletin 2162U and 2163U PowerFlex 753 Drive

They also:
fans.
• Are digitally programmable with access to mode programming, providing precise and repeatedly accurate set-up, control,
• A Human Interface Module (HIM) must be selected.
• Bulletin 2162U and 2163U use PowerFlex 753 drives.
IMPORTANT In 480V applications, UL Class J time delay fuses are optional for both branch circuit protection and drive input protection.
In 600V applications, UL Class J time delay fuses are required for both branch circuit protection and drive input protection.
For Frame 1 drives, drive input protection is optional.
Each unit is provided as a NEMA Wiring Class I, Type B-T unit with terminals mounted in the unit for connection of remote items
such as pilot devices and input signals. For NEMA Type 3R and NEMA Type 4 enclosure construction, contact your local Allen-
Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.

Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162U and 2163U PowerFlex 753 Drive
Table 193 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162U and 2163U PowerFlex 753 Drive
2162U B - 034N K B - 44 - 14HA0
2163U B - 034N K B - 44THM - 14HA0
Bulletin Number Wiring Type PowerFlex 753 Nominal NEMA Line Voltage Nominal Horsepower/kW Human Interface
Output Current Rating Enclosure Type and Circuit Breaker Type Module and Options
2162U PowerFlex 753 Variable K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with Circuit Breaker Type
Frequency AC Drive with gasket 2162U-’33’ ’33_’ Nominal Horsepower/kW code.
2163U PowerFlex 753 Variable 2163U-’33THM’ ’33’ Nominal Horsepower/kW code.
table on page 306

B Type B B 480V
C 600V Code Human Interface Module and
Options
See options section beginning on page
269
Drive Size Code, Output Current Rating (Amperes) and Nominal HP or (kW) (1)
480V Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage 480V Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage
Code Frame Ratings HP Code Frame Ratings HP Code Frame Ratings HP Code Frame Ratings HP
2P1F1N 1 2.1 1 1P7N 3 0.9 0.5 3P4F1H 1 2.1 1 1P7H 3 0.9 0.5
3P4F1N 1 3.0 1.5 1P7N 3 1.3 0.75 5P0F1H 1 3.0 1.5 2P7H 3 1.3 0.75
3P4F1N 1 3.4 2 1P7N 3 1.7 1 5P0F1H 1 3.4 2 2P7H 3 1.7 1
5P0F1N 1 5.0 3 2P7N 3 2.4 1.5 8P0F1H 1 5.0 3 3P9H 3 2.4 1.5
8P0F1N 1 8.0 5 2P7N 3 2.7 2 011F1H 1 8.0 5 3P9N 3 2.7 2
011F1N 1 11 7.5 3P9N 3 3.9 3 014F1H 1 11 7.5 6P1H 3 3.9 3
014F1N 1 14 10 6P1N 3 6.1 5 2P1H 2 2.1 1 9P0H 3 6.1 5
2P1H(2) 2 2.1 1 9P0N 3 9 7.5 3P4H 2 3.0 1.5 011H 3 9 7.5
3P4H(2) 2 3.0 1.5 011N 3 11 10 3P4H 2 3.4 2 017H 3 11 10
3P4H(2) 2 3.4 2 017N 3 17 15 5P0H 2 5.0 3 022H 3 17 15
5P0H(2) 2 5.0 3 022N 3 22 20 8P0H 2 8.0 5 027H 4 22 20
8P0H(2) 2 8.0 5 027N 4 27 25 011H 2 11 7.5 032H 4 27 25
011H(2) 2 11 7.5 032N 4 32 30 022H 2 14 10 041H 5 32 30
014N 2 14 10 041N 5 41 40 027H 3 22 15 052H 5 41 40
022N 2 22 15 052N 5 52 50 034H 3 27 20 063H 6 52 50
027N 3 27 20 063N 6 63 60 040H 3 34 25 077H 6 63 60
034N 3 34 25 077N 6 77 75 052H 4 40 30 099H 6 77 75
040N 3 40 30 099N 6 99 100 065H 4 52 40 125H 6 99 100
052N 4 52 40 125N 6 125 125 077H 5 65 50 144H 6 125 125
065N 4 65 50 144N 6 144 150 096H 5 77 60 1P7H 3 0.9 0.5
077N 5 077 60 125H 6 96 75
096N 5 096 75 156H 6 125 100
125N 6 125 100 186H 6 150 125
156N 6 156 125 248H 6 186 150
186N 6 186 150
248N 6 248 200
(1) The kW and HP ratings shown are for reference only. Size PowerFlex 750 drive units according to the applications and output ampere rating.
(2) Drive comes pre-programmed for Heavy Duty Applications. See the PowerFlex 750 Series Programming Manual, 750-PM001.

Units — 2162U Combination PowerFlex 753 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with
Fusible Disconnect, 480V AC and 600V AC, Normal Duty
110% for 60 seconds, 150% for 3 seconds.
• For specific drive applications refer to the PowerFlex 750 Series Programming Manual, publication 750-PM001.
• Basic configuration includes an appropriately sized control circuit transformer (for pilot lights and/or fans), door, and unit
support pan.
• Branch circuit overload protection is provided by the internal drive overload.
• PowerFlex 753 AC drives are cULus (UL and C-UL listed) as motor overload protected devices.
• An external overload relay is not required for single motor applications.
• PowerFlex 753 AC drive units are not intended for use with single phase motors.
• Units with fusible disconnect switch do not include factory supplied/installed branch circuit/drive input fusing.
Optional factory supplied/installed UL Class J branch circuit/drive input fusing is available. If fusing is not factory
installed, UL Class J fuse clips are provided, sized based on the fuse size that would be factory installed.
• Combination Unit Short Circuit Rating is 100 kA for 480V. See Table 296.
• Wiring is Type B. Control terminal block can accept maximum of one #12 AWG wire or two #16 AWG wires.
Give strong consideration to placing drive units at the bottom of the section.
When more than one drive unit is placed in a section, locate the drive unit with the highest rating at the bottom.
• Do not mount transformer units below drive units. Heat from transformer units can cause the drive to trip.
• HIM (Human Interface Module) selection is required. Select from Options section.
• Drive includes two 24V DC Digital Inputs, one 24V DC/115V AC Digital Input, one Digital (Form-C Relay) Output, and one
Analog Output.
• An I/O option module is available to provide an additional 6 Digital Inputs (select either 24V DC or 115V AC option module),
two Digital (Form-C Relay) Outputs, two Analog Inputs and two Analog Outputs.

Table 194 - 2162U Combination PowerFlex 753 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect (480V Normal
Duty)
Frame Rating(1) Nominal HP(3) NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket NEMA Type 12 Delivery
Program
ND 480V Space Catalog Number Space Catalog Number
Factor(4) Factor(4)
1 2.1 1 2.0 2162UB-2P1F1NKB-35 SC
1 3.0 1.5 2.0 2162UB-3P4F1NKB-36
1 3.4 2 2.0 2162UB-3P4F1NKB-37
1 5.0 3 2.0 2162UB-5P0F1NKB-38
1 8.0 5 2.0 2162UB-8P0F1NKB-39
1 11 7.5 2.0 2162UB-011F1NKB-40
1 14 10 2.0 2162UB-014F1NKB-41
2 2.1(2) 1 2.5 2162UB-2P1HKB-35 2.5 2162UB-2P1HJB-35
2 3.0(2) 1.5 2.5 2162UB-3P4HKB-36 2.5 2162UB-3P4HJB-36
2 3.4(2) 2 2.5 2162UB-3P4HKB-37 2.5 2162UB-3P4HJB-37
2 5.0(2) 3 2.5 2162UB-5P0HKB-38 2.5 2162UB-5P0HJB-38
2 8.0(2) 5 2.5 2162UB-8P0HKB-39 2.5 2162UB-8P0HJB-39
2 11(2) 7.5 2.5 2162UB-011HKB-40 2.5 2162UB-011HJB-40
2 14 10 2.5 2162UB-014NKB-41 2.5…3.0 2162UB-014NJB-41
2 22 15 2.5 2162UB-022NKB-42 3.0…3.5 2162UB-022NJB-42
3 27 20 2.5…3.0 2162UB-027NKB-43 3.5 2162UB-027NJB-43
3 34 25 2.5…3.0 2162UB-034NKB-44 3.5 2162UB-034NJB-44
3 40 30 3.0…3.5 2162UB-040NKB-45 3.5…4.0 2162UB-040NJB-45
4 52 40 3.0…3.5 2162UB-052NKB-46 4.0 2162UB-052NJB-46
4 65 50 3.0…4.0 2162UB-065NKB-47 4.0…6.0 x 2162UB-065NJB-47
20" W x 15" D
5 77 60 6.0 x 20" W x 2162UB-077NKB-48 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-077NJB-48
15" D 15" D
5 96 75 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-096NKB-49 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-096NJB-49
15" D 15" D
6 125 100 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-125NKB-50(5) 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-125NJB-50(5)
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
20" D…6.0 x 20" D
30" W x 20" D
6 248 200 6.0 x 30" W x 2162UB-248NKB-54(5)
20" D
(1) The HP ratings shown are nominal values.
• Size PowerFlex 753 drive units according to the application and output ampere rating.
• Standard units are configured to properly protect only the nominal motor horsepower listed.
• Do not use another size motor without verifying the suitability of the unit for that motor size.
• Normal Duty Applications can allow 110% overload of listed output current for 60 seconds.
• Heavy Duty Applications can allow 150% overload of listed output current for 60 seconds.
• Ampere ratings are at a 4 kHz carrier frequency for Frame 3 and smaller.
• Ampere ratings are at a 2 kHz carrier frequency for Frame 4 and larger.
• If carrier frequencies above these values are selected, the drive output current ratings must be derated.
• For derating information, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative and/or refer to the PowerFlex 750 Series Programming
Manual, 750-PM001.
(2) Drive comes pre-programmed for Heavy Duty Applications. See the PowerFlex 750 Series Programming Manual, 750-PM001.
(3) The horsepower ratings shown are for reference only. Size PowerFlex 753 drive units according to the application and output ampere rating.
(4) Space factor ranges shown represent the addition of line or load reactors.
(5) Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway. Horizontal bus is 5 in. deeper than standard.

Table 195 - 2162U Combination PowerFlex 753 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect (600V Normal
Duty)
Program
ND 600 V Space Catalog Number Space Catalog Number
Factor(3) Factor(3)
3 0.9 0.50 2.5 2162UB-1P7NKC-33 2.5 2162UB-1P7NJC-33 PE
3 1.3 0.75 2.5 2162UB-1P7NKC-34 2.5 2162UB-1P7NJC-34

3 1.7 1 2.5 2162UB-1P7NKC-35 2.5 2162UB-1P7NJC-35
3 2.4 1.5 2.5 2162UB-2P7NKC-36 2.5 2162UB-2P7NJC-36
3 2.7 2.0 2.5 2162UB-2P7NKC-37 2.5 2162UB-2P7NJC-37
3 3.9 3 2.5 2162UB-3P9NKC-38 2.5 2162UB-3P9NJC-38
3 6.1 5 2.5 2162UB-6P1NKC-39 2.5 2162UB-6P1NJC-39
3 9.0 7.5 2.5 2162UB-9P0NKC-40 3.0 2162UB-9P0NJC-40
3 11 10.0 2.5 2162UB-011NKC-41 3.0 2162UB-011NJC-41
3 17 15 2.5 2162UB-017NKC-42 3.5 2162UB-017NJC-42
3 22 20 2.5 2162UB-022NKC-43 3.5 2162UB-022NJC-43
4 27 25 3.0 2162UB-027NKC-44 4.0 2162UB-027NJC-44
4 32 30 3.0 2162UB-032NKC-45 4.0 2162UB-032NJC-45
5 41 40 6.0 x 20" W x 2162UB-041NKC-46 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-041NJC-46
15" D 15" D
5 52 50 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-052NKC-47 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-052NJC-47
15" D 15" D
6 63 60 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-063NKC-48(4) 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-063NJC-48(4)
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
6 144 150 6.0 x 30" W x 2162UB-144NKC-52(4) —
20" D

Manual, 750-PM001.

Fusible Disconnect, 480V AC and 600V AC, Heavy Duty
support pan.
• Wiring is Type B. Control terminal block can accept maximum of one #12AWG wire or two #16 AWG wires.
Analog Output.
two Digital (Form-C Relay) Outputs, two Analog Inputs, and two Analog Outputs.

Table 196 - 2162U Combination PowerFlex 753 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect (480V Heavy
Duty)
Frame Rating(1) Nominal HP(2) NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket NEMA 12 Delivery
Program
HD 480V Space Catalog Number Space Number
Factor(3) Factor(3)
1 2.1 1 2.0 2162UB-3P4F1HKB-35 SC
1 3.0 1.5 2.0 2162UB-5P0F1HKB-36
1 3.4 2 2.0 2162UB-5P0F1HKB-37
1 5.0 3 2.0 2162UB-8P0F1HKB-38
1 8.0 5 2.0 2162UB-011F1HKB-39
1 11 7.5 2.0 2162UB-014F1HKB-40
2 2.1 1 2.5 2162UB-2P1HKB-35 2.5 2162UB-022HJB-41
2 3.0 1.5 2.5 2162UB-3P4HKB-36 2.5 2162UB-3P4HJB-36
2 3.4 2 2.5 2162UB-3P4HKB-37 2.5 2162UB-3P4HJB-37
2 5.0 3 2.5 2162UB-5P0HKB-38 2.5 2162UB-5P0HJB-38
2 8.0 5 2.5 2162UB-8P0HKB-39 2.5 2162UB-8P0HJB-39
2 11 7.5 2.5 2162UB-011HKB-40 2.5 2162UB-011HJB-40
2 14 10 2.5 2162UB-022HKB-41 3.0…3.5 2162UB-022HJB-41
3 22 15 2.5…3.0 2162UB-027HKB-42 3.5 2162UB-027HJB-42
3 27 20 2.5…3.0 2162UB-034HKB-43 3.5 2162UB-034HJB-43
3 34 25 3.0…3.0 2162UB-040HKB-44 3.5 2162UB-040HJB-44
4 40 30 3.0…3.5 2162UB-052HKB-45 4.0 2162UB-052HJB-45
4 52 40 3.0…4.0 2162UB-065HKB-46 4.0…6.0 x 20" 2162UB-065HJB-46
W x 15" D
5 65 50 6.0 x 20" W x 2162UB-077HKB-47 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-077HJB-47
15" D 15" D
5 77 60 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-096HKB-48 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-096HJB-48
15" D 15" D
6 96 75 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-125HKB-49(4) 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-125HJB-49(4)
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
20" D…6.0 x 20" D
30" W x 20" D
6 186 150 6.0 x 30" W x 2162UB-248HKB-52(4)
20" D

• For derating information, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative and/or refer to the PowerFlex 750 Series Programming Manual,
750-PM001.

Table 197 - 2162U Combination PowerFlex 753 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect (600V Heavy
Duty)
Program
HD 600 V Space Catalog Number Space Catalog Number
Factor(3) Factor(3)
3 0.9 0.5 2.5 2162UB-1P7HKC-33 2.5 2162UB-1P7HJC-33 PE
3 1.3 0.75 2.5 2162UB-2P7HKC-34 2.5 2162UB-2P7HJC-34

3 1.7 1.0 2.5 2162UB-2P7HKC-35 2.5 2162UB-2P7HJC-35
3 2.4 1.5 2.5 2162UB-3P9HKC-36 2.5 2162UB-3P9HJC-37
3 2.7 2 2.5 2162UB-3P9HKC-37 2.5 2162UB-3P9HJC-37
3 3.9 3 2.5 2162UB-6P1HKC-38 2.5 2162UB-6P1HJC-38
3 6.1 5 2.5 2162UB-9P0HKC-39 3.0 2162UB-9P0HJC-39
3 9 7.5 2.5 2162UB-011HKC-40 3.0 2162UB-011HJC-40
3 11 10 2.5 2162UB-017HKC-41 3.5 2162UB-017HJC-41
3 17 15 2.5 2162UB-022HKC-42 3.5 2162UB-022HJC-42
4 22 20 3.0 2162UB-027HKC-43 4.0 2162UB-027HJC-43
4 27 25 3.0 2162UB-032HKC-44 4.0 2162UB-032HJC-44
5 32 30 6.0 x 20" W x 2162UB-041HKC-45 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-041HJC-45
15" D 15" D
5 41 40 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-052HKC-46 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-052HJC-46
15" D 15" D
6 52 50 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-063HKC-47(4) 6.0 x 25" W x 2162UB-063HJC-47(4)
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
6 125 125 6.0 x 30" W x 2162UB-144HKC-51(4) na
20" D

Manual, 750-PM001

Circuit Breaker, 480V AC and 600V AC, Normal Duty
support pan.
• Units with circuit breaker use thermal-magnetic trip unit and do not include factory supplied/installed drive input fusing.
Optional factory supplied/installed UL Class J branch circuit/drive input fusing is available.
• See Table 297 for Combination Unit Short Circuit Ratings table.
When more than one drive unit is placed in a section, the drive unit with the highest rating should be located at the bottom.
• Do not mount transformer units below drive units. Heat from transformer units may cause the drive to trip.
Analog Output.

Table 198 - 2163U Combination PowerFlex 753 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker Disconnect (480V
Normal Duty)
Frame Rating (1) Nominal HP(3) NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket(4) NEMA 12(4) Delivery
(5)
Program
ND 480V Space Factor Catalog Number Space Catalog Number
Factor(5)
1 2.1 1 2.0 2163UB-2P1F1NKB-35__ SC
1 3.0 1.5 2.0 2163UB-3P4F1NKB-36__
1 3.4 2 2.0 2163UB-3P4F1NKB-37__
1 5.0 3 2.0 2163UB-5P0F1NKB-38__
1 8.0 5 2.0 2163UB-8P0F1NKB-39__
1 11 7.5 2.0 2163UB-011F1NKB-40__
1 14 10 2.0 2163UB-014F1NKB-41__
(2) 1 2.5 2163UB-2P1HKB-35__ 2.5 2163UB-2P1HJB-35__
2 2.1
(2)
2 3.0 1.5 2.5 2163UB-3P4HKB-36__ 2.5 2163UB-3P4HJB-36__
(2)
2 3.4 2 2.5 2163UB-3P4HKB-37__ 2.5 2163UB-3P4HJB-37__
2 5.0(2) 3 2.5 2163UB-5P0HKB-38__ 2.5 2163UB-5P0HJB-38__
(2)
2 8.0 5 2.5 2163UB-8P0HKB-39__ 2.5 2163UB-8P0HJB-39__
(2)
2 11 7.5 2.5 2163UB-011HKB-40__ 2.5 2163UB-011HJB-40__
2 14 10 2.5 2163UB-014NKB-41__ 2.5…3.0 2163UB-014NJB-41__
2 22 15 2.0…2.5 2163UB-022NKB-42__ 3.0…3.5 2163UB-022NJB-42__
3 27 20 2.5…3.0 2163UB-027NKB-43__ 3.5 2163UB-027NJB-43__
3 34 25 2.5…3.0 2163UB-034NKB-44__ 3.5 2163UB-034NJB-44__
3 40 30 3.0…3.5 2163UB-040NKB-45__ 3.5…4.0 2163UB-040NJB-45__
4 52 40 3.0…3.5 2163UB-052NKB-46__ 4.0 2163UB-052NJB-46__
4 65 50 3.0…4.0 2163UB-065NKB-47__ 4.0…6.0 x 2163UB-065NJB-47__
20" W x 15" D
5 77 60 6.0 x 20" W x 15" D 2163UB-077NKB-48__ 6.0 x 25" W x 15" 2163UB-077NJB-48__
D
5 96 75 6.0 x 25" W x 15" D 2163UB-096NKB-49__ 6.0 x 25" W x 15" 2163UB-096NJB-49__
D
6 125 100 6.0 x 25" W x 20" D 2163UB-125NKB-50__(6) 6.0 x 25" W x 2163UB-125NJB-50__(6)
20" D
6 156 125 6.0 x 25" W x 20" D 2163UB-156NKB-51__(6) 6.0 x 30" W x 2163UB-156NJB-51__(6)
20" D
6 186 150 6.0 x 25" W x 20" 2163UB-186NKB-52__(6) 6.0 x 35" W x 2163UB-186NJB-52__(6)
D…6.0 x 30" W x 20" D
20" D
6 248 200 6.0 x 30" W x 20" D 2163UB-248NKB-54__(6)

Manual, 750-PM001.
(2) Drive comes pre-programmed for Heavy Duty Applications. Refer to the PowerFlex 750 Series Programming Manual, 750-PM001.
(4) The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate suffix from Table 264 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2163UB-034NKB-44THM).

Table 199 - 2163U Combination PowerFlex 753 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker (600V Normal
Duty)
Frame Rating(1) Nominal HP(2) NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket(3) NEMA Type 12(3) Delivery
Program
Factor(4) Factor(4)
3 0.9 0.5 2.5 2163UB-1P7NKC-33___ 2.5 2163UB-1P7NJC-33___ PE
3 1.3 0.75 2.5 2163UB-1P7NKC-34___ 2.5 2163UB-1P7NJC-34___
3 1.7 1 2.5 2163UB-1P7NKC-35___ 2.5 2163UB-1P7NJC-35___
3 2.4 1.5 2.5 2163UB-2P7NKC-36___ 2.5 2163UB-2P7NJC-36___
3 2.7 2.0 2.5 2163UB-2P7NKC-37___ 2.5 2163UB-2P7NJC-37___
3 3.9 3 2.5 2163UB-3P9NKC-38___ 2.5 2163UB-3P9NJC-38___
3 6.1 5 2.5…3.0 2163UB-6P1NKC-39___ 2.5…3.0 2163UB-6P1NJC-39___
3 9.0 7.5 2.5…3.0 2163UB-9P0NKC-40___ 3.0 2163UB-9P0NJC-40___
3 11 10.0 2.5…3.0 2163UB-011NKC-41___ 3.0 2163UB-011NJC-41___
3 17 15 2.5…3.0 2163UB-017NKC-42___ 3.5 2163UB-017NJC-42___
3 22 20 2.5…3.0 2163UB-022NKC-43___ 3.5 2163UB-022NJC-43___
4 27 25 3.0…3.5 2163UB-027NKC-44___ 4.0 2163UB-027NJC-44___
4 32 30 3.0…3.5 2163UB-032NKC-45___ 4.0 2163UB-032NJC-45___
5 41 40 6.0 x 20" W x 2163UB-041NKC-46___ 6.0 x 25" W x 2163UB-041NJC-46___
15" D 15" D
5 52 50 6.0 x 25" W x 2163UB-052NKC-47___ 6.0 x 25" W x 2163UB-052NJC-47___
15" D 15" D
6 63 60 6.0 x 25" W x 2163UB-063NKC-48___(5) 6.0 x 25" W x 2163UB-063NJC-48___(5)
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
6 144 150 6.0 x 30" W x 2163UB-144NKC-52___(5) N/A
20" D

• For derating information, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative and/or refer to PowerFlex 750 Series Programming Manual,
750-PM001.
(3) The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate suffix from Table 264 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2163UB-034NKC-44THM).

Circuit Breaker, 480V AC and 600V AC, Heavy Duty
support pan.
Analog Output.

Table 200 - 2163U Combination PowerFlex 753 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker (480V Heavy Duty)
Frame Rating(1) Nominal HP(2) NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket(3) NEMA 12(3) Delivery
Program
HD 480V Space Catalog Number Space Catalog Number
Factor(4) Factor(4)
1 2.1 1 2.0 2163UB-3P4F1HKB-35__ SC
1 3.0 1.5 2.0 2163UB-5P0F1HKB-36__
1 3.4 2 2.0 2163UB-5P0F1HKB-37__
1 5.0 3 2.0 2163UB-8P0F1HKB-38__
1 8.0 5 2.0 2163UB-011F1HKB-39__
1 11 7.5 2.0 2163UB-014F1HKB-40__
2 2.1 1 2.5 2163UB-2P1HKB-35__ 2.5 2163UB-2P1HJB-35__
2 3.0 1.5 2.5 2163UB-3P4HKB-36__ 2.5 2163UB-3P4HJB-36__
2 3.4 2 2.5 2163UB-3P4HKB-37__ 2.5 2163UB-3P4HJB-37__
2 5.0 3 2.5 2163UB-5P0HKB-38__ 2.5 2163UB-5P0HJB-38__
2 8.0 5 2.5 2163UB-8P0HKB-39__ 2.5 2163UB-8P0HJB-39__
2 11 7.5 2.5 2163UB-011HKB-40__ 2.5 2163UB-011HJB-40__
2 14 10 2.0…2.5 2163UB-022HKB-41__ 3.0…3.5 2163UB-022HJB-41__
3 22 15 2.5…3.0 2163UB-027HKB-42__ 3.5 2163UB-027HJB-42__
3 27 20 2.5…3.0 2163UB-034HKB-43__ 3.5 2163UB-034HJB-43__
3 34 25 2.5…3.0 2163UB-040HKB-44__ 3.5 2163UB-040HJB-44__
4 40 30 3.0…3.5 2163UB-052HKB-45__ 4.0 2163UB-052HJB-45__
4 52 40 3.0…4.0 2163UB-065HKB-46__ 4.0…6.0 x 20" 2163UB-065HJB-46__
W x 15"D
5 65 50 6.0 x 20" W x 2163UB-077HKB-47__ 6.0 x 25" W x 2163UB-077HJB-47__
15" D 15"D
5 77 60 6.0 x 25" W x 2163UB-096HKB-48__ 6.0 x 25" W x 2163UB-096HJB-48__
15" D 15" D
6 96 75 6.0 x 25" W x 2163UB-125HKB-49__(5) 6.0 x 25" W x 2163UB-125HJB-49__(5)
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
20" D…6.0 x 20" D
30" W x 20" D
6 186 150 6.0 x 30" W x 2163UB-248HKB-52__(5)
20" D

750-PM001.
(3) The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate suffix from Table 264 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2163UB-034NKB-44THM).

Table 201 - 2163U Combination PowerFlex 753 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker (600V Heavy Duty)
Program
Factor(4) Factor(4)
3 0.9 0.5 2.5 2163UB-1P7HKC-33___ 2.5 2163UB-1P7HJC-33___ PE
3 1.3 0.75 2.5 2163UB-2P7HKC-34___ 2.5 2163UB-2P7HJC-34___
3 1.7 1.0 2.5 2163UB-2P7HKC-35___ 2.5 2163UB-2P7HJC-35___
3 2.4 1.5 2.5 2163UB-3P9HKC-36___ 2.5 2163UB-3P9HJC-36___
3 2.7 2 2.5 2163UB-3P9HKC-37___ 2.5 2163UB-3P9HJC-37___
3 3.9 3 2.5 2163UB-6P1HKC-38___ 2.5 2163UB-6P1HJC-38___
3 6.1 5 2.5…3.0 2163UB-9P0HKC-39___ 3.0 2163UB-9P0HJC-39___
3 9 7.5 2.5…3.0 2163UB-011HKC-40___ 3.0 2163UB-011HJC-40___
3 11 10 2.5…3.0 2163UB-017HKC-41___ 3.5 2163UB-017HJC-41___
3 17 15 2.5…3.0 2163UB-022HKC-42___ 3.5 2163UB-022HJC-42___
4 22 20 3.0…3.5 2163UB-027HKC-43___ 4.0 2163UB-027HJC-43___
4 27 25 3.0…3.5 2163UB-032HKC-44___ 4.0 2163UB-032HJC-44___
5 32 30 6.0 x 20" W x 2163UB-041HKC-45___ 6.0 x 25" W 2163UB-041HJC-45___
15" D x 15" D
5 41 40 6.0 x 25" W x 2163UB-052HKC-46___ 6.0 x 25" W 2163UB-052HJC-46___
15" D x 15" D
6 52 50 6.0 x 25" W x 2163UB-063HKC-47___(5) 6.0 x 25" W 2163UB-063HJC-47___(5)
20" D x 20" D
20" D x 20" D
20" D x 20" D
20" D x 20" D
6 125 125 6.0 x 30" W x 2163UB-144HKC-51___(5) N/A
20" D

Manual, 750-PM001.
(3) The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate suffix from Table 264 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2163UB-034HKC-44THM).

Bulletin 2162V and 2163V PowerFlex 755 Drive

They also:
fans.
• Are digitally programmable with access to mode programming, providing precise and repeatedly accurate set-up, control,
• A Human Interface Module (HIM) must be selected.
• Bulletin 2162V and 2163V use PowerFlex 755 drives.
IMPORTANT In 480V applications, UL Class J time delay fuses are optional for both branch circuit protection and drive input protection.
In 600V applications, UL Class J time delay fuses are required for both branch circuit protection and drive input protection.
For Frame 1 drives, drive input protection is optional.
Each unit is provided as a NEMA Wiring Class I, Type B-T unit with terminals mounted in the unit for connection of remote items
such as pilot devices and input signals. For NEMA Type 3R and NEMA Type 4 enclosure construction, contact your local Allen-

Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162V and 2163V PowerFlex 755 Drive
Table 202 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162V and 2163V PowerFlex 755 Drive
2162V B - 034N K B - 44 - 14HA0
2163V B - 034N K B - 44THM - 14HA0
2162V PowerFlex 755 Variable K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with Circuit Breaker Type
Frequency AC Drive with gasket 2162V-’33’ ’33_’ Nominal Horsepower/kW code.
2163V PowerFlex 755 Variable 2163V-’33THM’ ’33’ Nominal Horsepower/kW code.
table on page 306
Code Wiring Type Code Line Voltage Code Human Interface Module and
B Type B B 480V Options
C 600V See options section beginning on page 269
Drive Size Code, Maximum Output Current Rating (Amperes) and Nominal HP and (kW)(1)
Normal Duty Applications Normal Duty Applications Heavy Duty Applications Heavy Duty Applications
480V Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage 480V Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage
Code Frame Ratings HP Code Frame Ratings HP Code Frame Ratings HP Code Frame Ratings HP
2P1F1N 1 2.1 1 1P7N 3 0.9 0.5 3P4F1H 1 2.1 1 1P7H 3 0.9 0.5
3P4F1N 1 3.0 1.5 1P7N 3 1.3 0.75 5P0F1H 1 3 1.5 2P7H 3 1.3 0.75
3P4F1N 1 3.4 2 1P7N 3 1.7 1 5P0F1H 1 3.4 2 2P7H 3 1.7 1
5P0F1N 1 5.0 3 2P7N 3 2.4 1.5 8P0F1H 1 5 3 3P9H 3 2.4 1.5
8P0F1N 1 8.0 5 2P7N 3 2.7 2 011F1H 1 8 5 3P9H 3 2.7 2
011F1N 1 11 7.5 3P9N 3 3.9 3 014F1H 1 11 7.5 6P1H 3 3.9 3
014F1N 1 14 10 6P1N 3 6.1 5 2P1H 2 2.1 1 9P0H 3 6.1 5
(2)
2P1H 2 2.1 1 9P0N 3 9 7.5 3P4H 2 3 1.5 011H 3 9 7.5
3P4H(2) 2 3 1.5 011N 3 11 10 3P4H 2 3.4 2 017H 3 11 10
(2)
3P4H 2 3.4 2 017N 3 17 15 5P0H 2 5 3 022H 3 17 15
5P0H(2) 2 5 3 022N 3 22 20 8P0H 2 8 5 027H 4 22 20
8P0H(2) 2 8 5 027N 4 27 25 011H 2 11 7.5 032H 4 27 25
011H(2) 2 11 7.5 032N 4 32 30 022H 2 14 10 041H 5 32 30
014N 2 14 10 041N 5 41 40 027H 3 22 15 052H 5 41 40
022N 2 22 15 052N 5 52 50 034H 3 27 20 063H 6 52 50
027N 3 27 20 063N 6 63 60 040H 3 34 25 077H 6 63 60
034N 3 34 25 077N 6 77 75 052H 4 40 30 099H 6 77 75
040N 3 40 30 099N 6 99 100 065H 4 52 40 125H 6 99 100
052N 4 52 40 125N 6 125 125 077H 5 65 50 144H 6 125 125
065N 4 65 50 144N 6 144 150 096H 5 77 60
077N 5 77 60 125H 6 96 75
096N 5 96 75 156H 6 125 100
125N 6 125 100 186H 6 150 125
156N 6 156 125 248H 6 186 150
186N 6 186 150
248N 6 248 200
(1) The kW and HP ratings shown are for reference only. Size the PowerFlex 750 drive units according to the applications and output ampere rating.

Units — 2162V Combination PowerFlex 755 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with
Fusible Disconnect, 480V AC and 600V AC, Normal Duty
support pan.
installed, UL Class J fuse clips are provided, sized based on the fuse size that would be factory installed
Analog Output.
two Digital (Form-C Relay) Outputs, two Analog Inputs and two Analog Outputs.

Table 203 - 2162V Combination PowerFlex 755 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect (480V Normal
Duty)
Frame Rating (1) Nominal HP(3) NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket NEMA 12 Delivery
(4)
Program
ND 480V Space Factor Catalog Number Space Factor(4) Catalog Number
1 2.1 1 2.0 2162VB-2P1F1NKB-35 SC
1 3.0 1.5 2.0 2162VB-3P4F1NKB-36
1 3.4 2 2.0 2162VB-3P4F1NKB-37
1 5.0 3 2.0 2162VB-5P0F1NKB-38
1 8.0 5 2.0 2162VB-8P0F1NKB-39
1 11 7.5 2.0 2162VB-011F1NKB-40
1 14 10 2.0 2162VB-014F1NKB-41
2 2.1(2) 1 2.5 2162VB-2P1HKB-35 2.5 2162VB-2P1HJB-35
(2)
2 3.0 1.5 2.5 2162VB-3P4HKB-36 2.5 2162VB-3P4HJB-36
(2)
2 3.4 2 2.5 2162VB-3P4HKB-37 2.5 2162VB-3P4HJB-37
2 5.0(2) 3 2.5 2162VB-5P0HKB-38 2.5 2162VB-5P0HJB-38
(2)
2 8.0 5 2.5 2162VB-8P0HKB-39 2.5 2162VB-8P0HJB-39
(2)
2 11 7.5 2.5 2162VB-011HKB-40 2.5 2162VB-011HJB-40
2 14 10 2.5 2162VB-014NKB-41 2.5…3.0 2162VB-014NJB-41
2 22 15 2.5 2162VB-022NKB-42 3.0…3.5 2162VB-022NJB-42
3 27 20 2.5…3.0 2162VB-027NKB-43 3.5 2162VB-027NJB-43
3 34 25 2.5…3.0 2162VB-034NKB-44 3.5 2162VB-034NJB-44
3 40 30 3.0…3.5 2162VB-040NKB-45 3.5…4.0 2162VB-040NJB-45
4 52 40 3.0…3.5 2162VB-052NKB-46 4.0 2162VB-052NJB-46
4 65 50 3.0…4.0 2162VB-065NKB-47 4.0…6.0 x 20" W x 15" D 2162VB-065NJB-47
5 77 60 6.0 x 20" W x 15" D 2162VB-077NKB-48 6.0 x 25" W x 15" D 2162VB-077NJB-48
5 96 75 6.0 x 25" W x 15" D 2162VB-096NKB-49 6.0 x 25" W x 15" D 2162VB-096NJB-49
6 125 100 6.0 x 25" W x 20" D 2162VB-125NKB-50(5) 6.0 x 25" W x 20" D 2162VB-125NJB-50(5)
6 156 125 6.0 x 25" W x 20" D 2162VB-156NKB-51(5) 6.0 x 30" W x 20" D 2162VB-156NJB-51(5)
6 186 150 6.0 x 25" W x 20" 2162VB-186NKB-52(5) 6.0 x 35" W x 20" D 2162VB-186NJB-52(5)
D…6.0 x 30" W x 20" D
6 248 200 6.0 x 30" W x 20" D 2162VB-248NKB-54(5)

Manual, 750-PM001.

Table 204 - 2162V Combination PowerFlex 755 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect (600V Normal
Duty)
Program
Factor(3) Factor(3)
3 0.9 0.50 2.5 2162VB-1P7NKC-33 2.5 2162VB-1P7NJC-33 PE
3 1.3 0.75 2.5 2162VB-1P7NKC-34 2.5 2162VB-1P7NJC-34
3 1.7 1 2.5 2162VB-1P7NKC-35 2.5 2162VB-1P7NJC-35
3 2.4 1.5 2.5 2162VB-2P7NKC-36 2.5 2162VB-2P7NJC-36
3 2.7 2.0 2.5 2162VB-2P7NKC-37 2.5 2162VB-2P7NJC-37
3 3.9 3 2.5 2162VB-3P9NKC-38 2.5 2162VB-3P9NJC-38
3 6.1 5 2.5…3.0 2162VB-6P1NKC-39 2.5…3.0 2162VB-6P1NJC-39
3 9.0 7.5 2.5…3.0 2162VB-9P0NKC-40 3.0 2162VB-9P0NJC-40
3 11 10.0 2.5…3.0 2162VB-011NKC-41 3.0 2162VB-011NJC-41
3 17 15 2.5…3.0 2162VB-017NKC-42 3.5 2162VB-017NJC-42
3 22 20 2.5…3.0 2162VB-022NKC-43 3.5 2162VB-022NJC-43
4 27 25 3.0…3.5 2162VB-027NKC-44 4.0 2162VB-027NJC-44
4 32 30 3.0…3.5 2162VB-032NKC-45 4.0 2162VB-032NJC-45
5 41 40 6.0 x 20" W x 2162VB-041NKC-46 6.0 x 25" W 2162VB-041NJC-46
15" D x 15" D
5 52 50 6.0 x 25" W x 2162VB-052NKC-47 6.0 x 25" W 2162VB-052NJC-47
15" D x 15" D
6 63 60 6.0 x 25" W x 2162VB-063NKC-48(4) 6.0 x 25" W 2162VB-063NJC-48(4)
20" D x 20" D
20" D x 20" D
20" D x 20" D
20" D x 20" D
6 144 150 6.0 x 30" W x 2162VB-144NKC-52(4) N/A
20" D
(1) Size the PowerFlex 755 drive units according to the application and output ampere rating.
Manual, 750-PM001.
(2) The nominal horsepower ratings shown are for reference only. Size the PowerFlex 755 drive units according to the application and output ampere rating.

Fusible Disconnect, 480V AC and 600V AC, Heavy Duty
support pan.
Analog Output.

Table 205 - 2162V Combination PowerFlex 755 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect (480V Heavy
Duty)
Frame Rating (1) Nominal HP(2) NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket NEMA 12 Delivery
(3)
Program
HD 480V Space Factor Catalog Number Space Factor(3) Catalog Number
1 2.1 1 2.0 2162VB-3P4F1HKB-35 SC
1 3.0 1.5 2.0 2162VB-5P0F1HKB-36
1 3.4 2 2.0 2162VB-5P0F1HKB-37
1 5.0 3 2.0 2162VB-8P0F1HKB-38
1 8.0 5 2.0 2162VB-011F1HKB-39
1 11 7.5 2.0 2162VB-014F1HKB-40
2 2.1 1 2.5 2162VB-2P1HKB-35 2.5 2162VB-2P1HJB-35
2 3.0 1.5 2.5 2162VB-3P4HKB-36 2.5 2162VB-3P4HJB-36
2 3.4 2 2.5 2162VB-3P4HKB-37 2.5 2162VB-3P4HJB-37
2 5.0 3 2.5 2162VB-5P0HKB-38 2.5 2162VB-5P0HJB-38
2 8.0 5 2.5 2162VB-8P0HKB-39 2.5 2162VB-8P0HJB-39
2 11 7.5 2.5 2162VB-011HKB-40 2.5 2162VB-011HJB-40
2 14 10 2.5 2162VB-022HKB-41 3.0…3.5 2162VB-022HJB-41
3 22 15 2.5…3.0 2162VB-027HKB-42 3.5 2162VB-027HJB-42
3 27 20 2.5…3.0 2162VB-034HKB-43 3.5 2162VB-034HJB-43
3 34 25 2.5…3.0 2162VB-040HKB-44 3.5 2162VB-040HJB-44
4 40 30 3.0…3.5 2162VB-052HKB-45 4.0 2162VB-052HJB-45
4 52 40 3.0…4.0 2162VB-065HKB-46 4.0…6.0 x 20" W x 15" D 2162VB-065HJB-46
5 65 50 6.0 x 20" W x 15" D 2162VB-077HKB-47 6.0 x 25" W x 15" D 2162VB-077HJB-47
5 77 60 6.0 x 25" W x 15" D 2162VB-096HKB-48 6.0 x 25" W x 15" D 2162VB-096HJB-48
(4)
6 96 75 6.0 x 25" W x 20" D 2162VB-125HKB-49 6.0 x 25" W x 20" D 2162VB-125HJB-49(4)
6 125 100 6.0 x 25" W x 20" D 2162VB-156HKB-50(4) 6.0 x 30" W x 20" D 2162VB-156HJB-50(4)
6 156 125 6.0 x 25" W x 20" D 2162VB-186HKB-51(4) 6.0 x 35" W x 20" D 2162VB-186HJB-51(4)
…6.0 x 30" W x 20" D
6 186 150 6.0 x 30" W x 20" D 2162VB-248HKB-52(4)

Manual, 750-PM001.

Table 206 - 2162V Combination PowerFlex 755 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect (600V Heavy
Duty)
Program
Factor(3) Factor(3)
3 0.9 0.5 2.5 2162VB-1P7HKC-33 2.5 2162VB-1P7HJC-33 PE
3 1.3 0.75 2.5 2162VB-2P7HKC-34 2.5 2162VB-2P7HJC-34
3 1.7 1.0 2.5 2162VB-2P7HKC-35 2.5 2162VB-2P7HJC-35
3 2.4 1.5 2.5 2162VB-3P9HKC-36 2.5 2162VB-3P9HJC-37
3 2.7 2 2.5 2162VB-3P9HKC-37 2.5 2162VB-3P9HJC-37
3 3.9 3 2.5 2162VB-6P1HKC-38 2.5 2162VB-6P1HJC-38
3 6.1 5 2.5…3.0 2162VB-9P0HKC-39 3.0 2162VB-9P0HJC-39
3 9 7.5 2.5…3.0 2162VB-011HKC-40 3.0 2162VB-011HJC-40
3 11 10 2.5…3.0 2162VB-017HKC-41 3.5 2162VB-017HJC-41
3 17 15 2.5…3.0 2162VB-022HKC-42 3.5 2162VB-022HJC-42
4 22 20 3.0…3.5 2162VB-027HKC-43 4.0 2162VB-027HJC-43
4 27 25 3.0…3.5 2162VB-032HKC-44 4.0 2162VB-032HJC-44
5 32 30 6.0 x 20" W x 2162VB-041HKC-45 6.0 x 25" W x 2162VB-041HJC-45
15" D 15" D
5 41 40 6.0 x 25" W x 2162VB-052HKC-46 6.0 x 25" W x 2162VB-052HJC-46
15" D 15" D
6 52 50 6.0 x 25" W x 2162VB-063HKC-47(4) 6.0 x 25" W x 2162VB-063HJC-47(4)
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
6 125 125 6.0 x 30" W x 2162VB-144HKC-51(4) N/A
20" D
Manual, 750-PM001.

Circuit Breaker, 480V AC and 600V AC, Normal Duty
support pan.
When more than one drive unit is placed in a section, the drive unit with the highest rating should be located at the bottom.
• Do not mount transformer units below drive units. Heat from transformer units may cause the drive to trip.
Analog Output.
An I/O option module is available to provide an additional 6 Digital Inputs (select either 24V DC or 115V AC option module), two
Digital (Form-C Relay) Outputs, two Analog Inputs, and two Analog Outputs.

Table 207 - 2163V Combination PowerFlex 755 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker Disconnect (480V
Normal Duty)
(5)
Program
ND 480V Space Factor Catalog Number Space Factor(5) Catalog Number
1 2.1 1 2.0 2163VB-2P1F1NKB-35__ SC
1 3.0 1.5 2.0 2163VB-3P4F1NKB-
36__
1 3.4 2 2.0 2163VB-3P4F1NKB-
37__
1 5.0 3 2.0 2163VB-5P0F1NKB-
38__
1 8.0 5 2.0 2163VB-8P0F1NKB-
39__
1 11 7.5 2.0 2163VB-011F1NKB-40__
1 14 10 2.0 2163VB-014F1NKB-41__
(2)
2 2.1 1 2.5 2163VB-2P1HKB-35__ 2.5 2163VB-2P1HJB-35__
(2)
2 3.0 1.5 2.5 2163VB-3P4HKB-36__ 2.5 2163VB-3P4HJB-36__
(2)
2 3.4 2 2.5 2163VB-3P4HKB-37__ 2.5 2163VB-3P4HJB-37__
2 5.0(2) 3 2.5 2163VB-5P0HKB-38__ 2.5 2163VB-5P0HJB-38__
(2)
2 8.0 5 2.5 2163VB-8P0HKB-39__ 2.5 2163VB-8P0HJB-39__
(2)
2 11 7.5 2.5 2163VB-011HKB-40__ 2.5 2163VB-011HJB-40__
2 14 10 2.5 2163VB-014NKB-41__ 2.5…3.0 2163VB-014NJB-41__
2 22 15 2.0…2.5 2163VB-022NKB-42__ 3.0…3.5 2163VB-022NJB-42__
3 27 20 2.5…3.0 2163VB-027NKB-43__ 3.5 2163VB-027NJB-43__
3 34 25 2.5…3.0 2163VB-034NKB-44__ 3.5 2163VB-034NJB-44__
3 40 30 3.0…3.5 2163VB-040NKB-45__ 3.5…4.0 2163VB-040NJB-45__
4 52 40 3.0…3.5 2163VB-052NKB-46__ 4.0 2163VB-052NJB-46__
4 65 50 3.0…4.0 2163VB-065NKB-47__ 4.0…6.0 x 20" W x 15" D 2163VB-065NJB-47__
5 77 60 6.0 x 20" W x 15"D 2163VB-077NKB-48__ 6.0 x 25" W x 15" D 2163VB-077NJB-48__
5 96 75 6.0 x 25" W x 15" D 2163VB-096NKB-49__ 6.0 x 25" W x 15" D 2163VB-096NJB-49__
6 125 100 6.0 x 25" W x 20" D 2163VB-125NKB-50__(6) 6.0 x 25" W x 20" D 2163VB-125NJB-50__(6)
(6)
6 156 125 6.0 x 25" W x 20" D 2163VB-156NKB-51__ 6.0 x 30" W x 20" D 2163VB-156NJB-51__(6)
6 186 150 6.0 x 25" W x 20" D 2163VB-186NKB-52__(6) 6.0 x 35" W x 20" D 2163VB-186NJB-52__(6)
…6.0 x 30" W x 20" D
6 248 200 6.0 x 30" W x 20" D 2163VB-248NKB-
54__(6)

Manual, 750-PM001.
(4) The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate suffix from Table 264 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2163VB-034NKB-44THM).

Table 208 - 2163V Combination PowerFlex 755 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker (600V Normal
Duty)
Program
Factor(4) Factor(4)
3 0.9 0.5 2.5 2163VB-1P7NKC-33___ 2.5 2163VB-1P7NJC-33___ PE
3 1.3 0.75 2.5 2163VB-1P7NKC-34___ 2.5 2163VB-1P7NJC-34___
3 1.7 1 2.5 2163VB-1P7NKC-35___ 2.5 2163VB-1P7NJC-35___
3 2.4 1.5 2.5 2163VB-2P7NKC-36___ 2.5 2163VB-2P7NJC-36___
3 2.7 2.0 2.5 2163VB-2P7NKC-37___ 2.5 2163VB-2P7NJC-37___
3 3.9 3 2.5 2163VB-3P9NKC-38___ 2.5 2163VB-3P9NJC-38___
3 6.1 5 2.5…3.0 2163VB-6P1NKC-39___ 2.5…3.0 2163VB-6P1NJC-39___
3 9.0 7.5 2.5…3.0 2163VB-9P0NKC-40___ 3.0 2163VB-9P0NJC-40___
3 11 10.0 2.5…3.0 2163VB-011NKC-41___ 3.0 2163VB-011NJC-41___
3 17 15 2.5…3.0 2163VB-017NKC-42___ 3.5 2163VB-017NJC-42___
3 22 20 2.5…3.0 2163VB-022NKC-43___ 3.5 2163VB-022NJC-43___
4 27 25 3.0…3.5 2163VB-027NKC-44___ 4.0 2163VB-027NJC-44___
4 32 30 3.0…3.5 2163VB-032NKC-45___ 4.0 2163VB-032NJC-45___
5 41 40 6.0 x 20" W x 2163VB-041NKC-46___ 6.0 x 25" W x 2163VB-041NJC-46___
15" D 15" D
5 52 50 6.0 x 25" W x 2163VB-052NKC-47___ 6.0 x 25" W x 2163VB-052NJC-47___
15" D 15" D
6 63 60 6.0 x 25" W x 2163VB-063NKC-48___(5) 6.0 x 25" W x 2163VB-063NJC-48___(5)
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
6 144 150 6.0 x 30" W x 2163VB-144NKC-52___(5) N/A
20" D
Manual, 750-PM001.
(3) The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate suffix from Table 264 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2163VB-034NKC-44THM).

Circuit Breaker, 480V AC and 600V AC, Heavy Duty
support pan.
Analog Output.

Table 209 - 2163V Combination PowerFlex 755 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker (480V Heavy Duty)
(4)
Program
HD 480V Space Factor Catalog Number Space Factor(4) Catalog Number
1 2.1 1 2.0 2163VB-3P4F1HKB-35__ SC
1 3.0 1.5 2.0 2163VB-5P0F1HKB-36__
1 3.4 2 2.0 2163VB-5P0F1HKB-37__
1 5.0 3 2.0 2163VB-8P0F1HKB-38__
1 8.0 5 2.0 2163VB-011F1HKB-39__
1 11 7.5 2.0 2163VB-014F1HKB-40__
2 2.1 1 2.5 2163VB-2P1HKB-35__ 2.5 2163VB-2P1HJB-35__
2 3.0 1.5 2.5 2163VB-3P4HKB-36__ 2.5 2163VB-3P4HJB-36__
2 3.4 2 2.5 2163VB-3P4HKB-37__ 2.5 2163VB-3P4HJB-37__
2 5.0 3 2.5 2163VB-5P0HKB-38__ 2.5 2163VB-5P0HJB-38__
2 8.0 5 2.5 2163VB-8P0HKB-39__ 2.5 2163VB-8P0HJB-39__
2 11 7.5 2.5 2163VB-011HKB-40__ 2.5 2163VB-011HJB-40__
2 14 10 2.0…2.5 2163VB-022HKB-41__ 3.0…3.5 2163VB-022HJB-41__
3 22 15 2.5…3.0 2163VB-027HKB-42__ 3.5 2163VB-027HJB-42__
3 27 20 2.5…3.0 2163VB-034HKB-43__ 3.5 2163VB-034HJB-43__
3 34 25 2.5…3.0 2163VB-040HKB-44__ 3.5 2163VB-040HJB-44__
4 40 30 3.0…3.5 2163VB-052HKB-45__ 4.0 2163VB-052HJB-45__
4 52 40 3.0…4.0 2163VB-065HKB-46__ 4.0…6.0 x 20" W x 15 "D 2163VB-065HJB-46__
5 65 50 6.0 x 20" W x 15" D 2163VB-077HKB-47__ 6.0 x 25" W x 15" D 2163VB-077HJB-47__
5 77 60 6.0 x 25" W x 15" D 2163VB-096HKB-48__ 6.0 x 25" W x 15" D 2163VB-096HJB-48__
6 96 75 6.0 x 25" W x 20" D 2163VB-125HKB-49__(5) 6.0 x 25" W x 20" D 2163VB-125HJB-49__(5)
…6.0 x 30" W x 20" D
6 186 150 6.0 x 30" W x 20" D 2163VB-248HKB-52__(5)

750-PM001.
(3) The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate suffix from Table 264 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2163VB-034NKB-44THM).

Table 210 - 2163V Combination PowerFlex 755 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker (600V Heavy Duty)
Program
Factor(4) Factor(4)
3 0.9 0.5 2.5 2163VB-1P7HKC-33___ 2.5 2163VB-1P7HJC-33___ PE
3 1.3 0.75 2.5 2163VB-2P7HKC-34___ 2.5 2163VB-2P7HJC-34___
3 1.7 1.0 2.5 2163VB-2P7HKC-35___ 2.5 2163VB-2P7HJC-35___
3 2.4 1.5 2.5 2163VB-3P9HKC-36___ 2.5 2163VB-3P9HJC-36___
3 2.7 2 2.5 2163VB-3P9HKC-37___ 2.5 2163VB-3P9HJC-37___
3 3.9 3 2.5 2163VB-6P1HKC-38___ 2.5 2163VB-6P1HJC-38___
3 6.1 5 2.5…3.0 2163VB-9P0HKC-39___ 3.0 2163VB-9P0HJC-39___
3 9 7.5 2.5…3.0 2163VB-011HKC-40___ 3.0 2163VB-011HJC-40___
3 11 10 2.5…3.0 2163VB-017HKC-41___ 3.5 2163VB-017HJC-41___
3 17 15 2.5…3.0 2163VB-022HKC-42___ 3.5 2163VB-022HJC-42___
4 22 20 3.0…3.5 2163VB-027HKC-43___ 4.0 2163VB-027HJC-43___
4 27 25 3.0…3.5 2163VB-032HKC-44___ 4.0 2163VB-032HJC-44___
5 32 30 6.0 x 20" W x 2163VB-041HKC-45___ 6.0 x 25" W x 2163VB-041HJC-45___
15" D 15" D
5 41 40 6.0 x 25" W x 2163VB-052HKC-46___ 6.0 x 25" W x 2163VB-052HJC-46___
15" D 15" D
6 52 50 6.0 x 25" W x 2163VB-063HKC-47___(5) 6.0 x 25" W x 2163VB-063HJC-47___(5)
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
20" D 20" D
6 125 125 6.0 x 30" W x 2163VB-144HKC-51___(5) N/A
20" D
Manual, 750-PM001.
(3) The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate suffix from Table 264 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2163VB-034HKC-44THM).

Bulletin 2162W and 2163W PowerFlex 525 Drive

They also:
• Require UL Class CC or J time delay fuses. These fuses provide both branch circuit protection and drive input protection.
The drive input fuses are required in series with the circuit breaker in Bulletin 2163W units.
fans.
• Are digitally programmable with access to mode programming, providing precise and repeatedly accurate setup, control
Bulletin 2162W and 2163W use normal duty PowerFlex 525 drives.
NEMA Wiring Class I, Type B is an optional feature that has terminals mounted within the unit for connection of items such as,
remote pilot devices and input signals. For NEMA Type 3R and NEMA Type 4 enclosure construction, contact your local Allen-
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162W and 2163W PowerFlex 525 Drive
• Bulletins 2162W and 2163W use PowerFlex 525 Drives
• Bulletins 2162W and 2163W are sized for Normal Duty applications
• UL Class CC or J time delay drive input fuses required both branch circuit and drive input protection, fuse class dependent
on drive rating
motor speed

Table 211 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162W and 2163W PowerFlex 525 Drive
2162W B - 6P0 K B - 38 - 14HBA0
2163W B - 6P0 K B - 38TGM - 14HBA0
Bulletin Number Wiring Type PowerFlex 525 Maximum NEMA Enclosure Line Voltage Nominal Horsepower/kW Human Interface
2162W PowerFlex 525 Variable K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with Circuit Breaker Type
Frequency AC Drive with gasket 2162W-’38’ ’38’ Nominal Horsepower/kW code.
2163W PowerFlex 525 Variable 2163W-’38T_M’ ’38_’ Nominal Horsepower/kW code.
Circuit Breaker ’__TGM’ Circuit Breaker Type. See
table on page 306

A Type A B 480V
B Type B C 600V
Code Human Interface Module and

Drive Size Code, Maximum Output Current Rating (Amperes) and Nominal HP and (kW)(1) Options
480V Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage 269
Code Frame Maximum Output Nominal HP Code Frame Maximum Output HP
Current (Amperes) Current
(Amperes)
1P4 A 1.4 0.5 0P9 A 0.9 0.5
2P3 A 1.7 0.75 1P7 A 1.3 0.75
2P3 A 2.3 1 1P7 A 1.7 1
4P0 A 3 1.5 3P0 A 2.2 1.5
4P0 A 4 2 3P0 A 3 2
6P0 A 6 3 4P2 A 4.2 3
010 B 10.5 5 6P6 B 6.6 5
013 C 13 7.5 9P9 C 9.9 7.5
017 C 17 10 012 C 12 10
024 D 24 15 019 D 19 15
030 D 30 20 022 D 22 20
(1) The kW and HP ratings shown are for reference only. Size PowerFlex 525 drive units according to the applications and output
ampere rating.

Units-2162W Combination PowerFlex 525 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with
Fusible Disconnect, 480V and 600V AC
• For specific drive applications refer to PowerFlex 525 User Manual, publication 520-UM001.
• All PowerFlex ratings are Normal Duty.
• Bucket includes branch circuit (short circuit, 80VA control circuit transformer, door, and unit support pan. Branch circuit
(overload) protection is provided by the internal drive overload.
• See Table 297 for Combination Unit Short Circuit Current Ratings table.
• Wiring is Type B only. Drive can only accept 16 AWG control wire.
• Integrated HIM (Human Interface Module) is included. Door mounted HIM must be selected on page 272.
• PowerFlex 525 AC drives are cULus (UL and C-UL listed) as motor overload protective devices. An external overload relay is
not required for single motor applications. PowerFlex 525 AC drives are not intended for use with single phase motors.
Table 212 - 2162W Combination PowerFlex 525 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect (480V Normal
Duty)
Frame Rating(1) Nominal NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket NEMA 12 Delivery
HP(2) Program
480V Space Catalog Number Space Catalog Number
Factor(3) Factor(3)
A 1.4 0.5 1.0 2162WB-1P4KB-33 1.5 2162WB-1P4JB-33 SC
A 1.7 0.75 1.0 2162WB-2P3KB-34 1.5 2162WB-2P3JB-34
A 2.3 1.0 1.0 2162WB-2P3KB-35 1.5 2162WB-2P3JB-35
A 3.0 1.5 1.0 2162WB-4P0KB-36 2.0 2162WB-4P0JB-36
A 4.0 2.0 1.0 2162WB-4P0KB-37 2.0 2162WB-4P0JB-37
A 6.0 3.0 1.0 2162WB-6P0KB-38 2.0 2162WB-6P0JB-38
B 10.5 5.0 1.0 2162WB-010KB-39 2.0 2162WB-010JB-39
C 13 7.5 2.0 2162WB-013KB-40 2.5 2162WB-013JB-40
C 17 10 2.0 2162WB-017KB-41 2.5 2162WB-017JB-41
D 24 15 2.0 2162WB-024KB-42 3.0 2162WB-024JB-42
D 30 20 2.5 2162WB-030KB-43 3.5 2162WB-030JB-43
(1) PowerFlex 525 drive units should be sized according to the application and output ampere rating.
• Ampere ratings are at a 4 kHz carrier frequency.
• If carrier frequencies above 4 kHz are selected, the drive output current ratings must be derated.
• For derating information, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative and/or refer to the
PowerFlex 520 User Manual, publication 520-UM001.
(2) The nominal horsepower ratings shown are for reference only. Size the PowerFlex 525 drive units according to the application and output ampere
rating.
(3) Adding options to catalog string can increase space factor.

Table 213 - 2162W Combination PowerFlex 525 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect (600V Normal
Duty)
HP(2) Program
Factor(3) Factor(3)
A 0.9 0.5 1.0 2162WB-0P9KC-33 1.5 2162WB-0P9JC-33 SC
A 1.3 0.75 1.0 2162WB-1P7KC-34 1.5 2162WB-1P7JC-34
A 1.7 1.0 1.0 2162WB-1P7KC-35 1.5 2162WB-1P7JC-35
A 2.2 1.5 1.0 2162WB-3P0KC-36 2.0 2162WB-3P0JC-36
A 3.0 2.0 1.0 2162WB-3P0KC-37 2.0 2162WB-3P0JC-37
A 4.2 3.0 1.0 2162WB-4P2KC-38 2.0 2162WB-4P2JC-38
B 6.6 5.0 1.0 2162WB-6P6KC-39 2.0 2162WB-6P6JC-39
C 9.9 7.5 2.0 2162WB-9P9KC-40 2.5 2162WB-9P9JC-40
C 12 10 2.0 2162WB-012KC-41 2.5 2162WB-012JC-41
D 19 15 2.0 2162WB-019KC-42 3.0 2162WB-019JC-42
D 22 20 2.5 2162WB-022KC-43 3.5 2162WB-022JC-43
(2) The nominal horsepower ratings shown are for reference only. Size the PowerFlex 525 drive units according to the application and output ampere
rating.

Units - 2163W Combination PowerFlex 525 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with
Circuit Breaker, 480V and 600V AC
Table 214 - 2163W Combination PowerFlex 525 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker (480V Normal
Duty)
HP(2) Program
480V Space Catalog Number(4) Space Catalog Number(4)
Factor(3) Factor(3)
A 1.4 0.5 1.0 2163WB-1P4KB-33___ 1.5 2163WB-1P4JB-33___ SC
A 1.7 0.75 1.0 2163WB-2P3KB-34___ 1.5 2163WB-2P3JB-34___
A 2.3 1.0 1.0 2163WB-2P3KB-35___ 1.5 2163WB-2P3JB-35___
A 3.0 1.5 1.0 2163WB-4P0KB-36___ 2.0 2163WB-4P0JB-36___
A 4.0 2.0 1.0 2163WB-4P0KB-37___ 2.0 2163WB-4P0JB-37___
A 6.0 3.0 1.0 2163WB-6P0KB-38___ 2.0 2163WB-6P0JB-38___
B 10.5 5.0 1.0 2163WB-010KB-39___ 2.0 2163WB-010JB-39___
C 13 7.5 2.0 2163WB-013KB-40___ 2.5 2163WB-013JB-40___
C 17 10 2.0 2163WB-017KB-41___ 2.5 2163WB-017JB-41___
D 24 15 2.0 2163WB-024KB-42___ 3.0 2163WB-024JB-42___
D 30 20 2.5 2163WB-030KB-43___ 3.5 2163WB-030JB-43___
• For derating information, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative and/or refer to the PowerFlex 520
User Manual, publication 520-UM001.
(2) The nominal horsepower ratings shown are for reference only. Size PowerFlex 525 drive units according to the application and output ampere rating.
(4) The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate suffix from Table 264 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2163WB-
1P4KB-33TGM).

Table 215 - 2163W Combination PowerFlex 525 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker (600V Normal
Duty)
HP(2) Program
Factor(3) Factor(3)
A 0.9 0.5 1.0 2163WB-0P9KC-33___ 1.5 2163WB-0P9JC-33___ SC
A 1.3 0.75 1.0 2163WB-1P7KC-34___ 1.5 2163WB-1P7JC-34___
A 1.7 1.0 1.0 2163WB-1P7KC-35___ 1.5 2163WB-1P7JC-35___
A 2.2 1.5 1.0 2163WB-3P0KC-36___ 2.0 2163WB-3P0JC-36___
A 3.0 2.0 1.0 2163WB-3P0KC-37___ 2.0 2163WB-3P0JC-37___
A 4.2 3.0 1.0 2163WB-4P2KC-38___ 2.0 2163WB-4P2JC-38___
B 6.6 5.0 1.0 2163WB-6P6KC-39___ 2.0 2163WB-6P6JC-39___
C 9.9 7.5 2.0 2163WB-9P9KC-40___ 2.5 2163WB-9P9JC-40___
C 12 10 2.0 2163WB-012KC-41___ 2.5 2163WB-012JC-41___
D 19 15 2.0 2163WB-019KC-42___ 3.0 2163WB-019JC-42___
D 22 20 2.5 2163WB-022KC-43___ 3.5 2163WB-022JC-43___
• For derating information, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative and/or refer to the PowerFlex
520 User Manual, publication 520-UM001.
(4) The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate suffix from Table 264 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2163WB-
1P4KB-33TGM).

Bulletin 2162X and 2163X PowerFlex 523 Drive

They also:
• Require UL Class CC or J time delay fuses. These fuses provide both branch circuit protection and drive input protection.
The drive input fuses are required in series with the circuit breaker in Bulletin 2163X units.
fans.
• Are digitally programmable with access to mode programming, providing precise and repeatedly accurate setup, control
Bulletin 2162X and 2163X use normal duty PowerFlex 523 drives.
Each unit is provided as a NEMA Wiring Class I, Type B unit with terminals mounted within the bucket for connection of items

Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162X and 2163X PowerFlex 523 Drive
• Bulletins 2162X and 2163X use PowerFlex 523 Drives
• Bulletins 2162X and 2163X are sized for Normal Duty applications
• UL Class CC or J time delay drive input fuses required both branch circuit and drive input protection, fuse class dependent
on drive rating
motor speed
Table 216 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162X and 2163X PowerFlex 523 Drive
2162X B - 6P0 K B - 38 - 14HBA0
2163X B - 6P0 K B - 38TGM - 14HBA0
Bulletin Number Wiring Type PowerFlex 525 Maximum NEMA Enclosure Line Voltage Nominal Horsepower/kW Human Interface
2162X PowerFlex 523 Variable K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with Circuit Breaker Type
Frequency AC Drive with gasket 2162X-’38’ ’38’ Nominal Horsepower/kW code.
2163X PowerFlex 523 Variable 2163X-’38T_M’ ’38_’ Nominal Horsepower/kW code.
Circuit Breaker ’__TGM’ Circuit Breaker Type. See
table on page 306

A Type A B 480V
C 600V Code Human Interface Module and
B Type B Options
269
Drive Size Code, Maximum Output Current Rating (Amperes) and Nominal HP and (kW)(1)
480V Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage
Code Frame Rating Nominal HP Code Frame Rating HP
1P4 A 1.4 0.5 0P9 A 0.9 0.5
2P3 A 1.7 0.75 1P7 A 1.3 0.75
2P3 A 2.3 1 1P7 A 1.7 1
4P0 A 3 1.5 3P0 A 2.2 1.5
4P0 A 4 2 3P0 A 3 2
6P0 A 6 3 4P2 A 4.2 3
010 B 10.5 5 6P6 B 6.6 5
013 C 13 7.5 9P9 C 9.9 7.5
017 C 17 10 012 C 12 10
024 D 24 15 019 D 19 15
030 D 30 20 022 D 22 20
(1) The kW and HP ratings shown are for reference only. Size PowerFlex 525 drive units according to the applications and output
ampere rating.

Units - 2162X Combination PowerFlex 523 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with
Fusible Disconnect, 480V and 600V AC
Table 217 - 2162X Combination PowerFlex 523 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect (480V Normal
Duty)
HP(2) Program
Factor(3) Factor(3)
A 1.4 0.5 1.0 2162XB-1P4KB-33 1.5 2162XB-1P4JB-33 SC
A 1.7 0.75 1.0 2162XB-2P3KB-34 1.5 2162XB-2P3JB-34
A 2.3 1.0 1.0 2162XB-2P3KB-35 1.5 2162XB-2P3JB-35
A 3.0 1.5 1.0 2162XB-4P0KB-36 2.0 2162XB-4P0JB-36
A 4.0 2.0 1.0 2162XB-4P0KB-37 2.0 2162XB-4P0JB-37
A 6.0 3.0 1.0 2162XB-6P0KB-38 2.0 2162XB-6P0JB-38
B 10.5 5.0 1.0 2162XB-010KB-39 2.0 2162XB-010JB-39
C 13 7.5 2.0 2162XB-013KB-40 2.5 2162XB-013JB-40
C 17 10 2.0 2162XB-017KB-41 2.5 2162XB-017JB-41
D 24 15 2.0 2162XB-024KB-42 3.0 2162XB-024JB-42
D 30 20 2.5 2162XB-030KB-43 3.5 2162XB-030JB-43
(2) The nominal horsepower ratings shown are for reference only. Size PowerFlex 523 drive units according to the application and output ampere
rating.

Table 218 - 2162X Combination PowerFlex 523 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect (600V Normal
Duty)
HP(2) Program
Factor(3) Factor(3)
A 0.9 0.5 1.0 2162XB-0P9KC-33 1.5 2162XB-0P9JC-33 SC
A 1.3 0.75 1.0 2162XB-1P7KC-34 1.5 2162XB-1P7JC-34
A 1.7 1.0 1.0 2162XB-1P7KC-35 1.5 2162XB-1P7JC-35
A 2.2 1.5 1.0 2162XB-3P0KC-36 2.0 2162XB-3P0JC-36
A 3.0 2.0 1.0 2162XB-3P0KC-37 2.0 2162XB-3P0JC-37
A 4.2 3.0 1.0 2162XB-4P2KC-38 2.0 2162XB-4P2JC-38
B 6.6 5.0 1.0 2162XB-6P6KC-39 2.0 2162XB-6P6JC-39
C 9.9 7.5 2.0 2162XB-9P9KC-40 2.5 2162XB-9P9JC-40
C 12 10 2.0 2162XB-012KC-41 2.5 2162XB-012JC-41
D 19 15 2.0 2162XB-019KC-42 3.0 2162XB-019JC-42
D 22 20 2.5 2162XB-022KC-43 3.5 2162XB-022JC-43
(2) The nominal horsepower ratings shown are for reference only. Size PowerFlex 523 drive units according to the application and output ampere
rating.
(3) Adding options to catalog string may increase space factor.

Units - 2163X Combination PowerFlex 523 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with
Circuit Breaker, 480V and 600V AC
• See page page 262 for product description.
Table 219 - 2163X Combination PowerFlex 523 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker (480V Normal
Duty)
HP(2) Program
Factor(3) Factor(3)
A 1.4 0.5 1.0 2163XB-1P4KB-33___ 1.5 2163XB-1P4JB-33___ SC
A 1.7 0.75 1.0 2163XB-2P3KB-34___ 1.5 2163XB-2P3JB-34___
A 2.3 1.0 1.0 2163XB-2P3KB-35___ 1.5 2163XB-2P3JB-35___
A 3.0 1.5 1.0 2163XB-4P0KB-36___ 2.0 2163XB-4P0JB-36___
A 4.0 2.0 1.0 2163XB-4P0KB-37___ 2.0 2163XB-4P0JB-37___
A 6.0 3.0 1.0 2163XB-6P0KB-38___ 2.0 2163XB-6P0JB-38___
B 10.5 5.0 1.0 2163XB-010KB-39___ 2.0 2163XB-010JB-39___
C 13 7.5 2.0 2163XB-013KB-40___ 2.5 2163XB-013JB-40___
C 17 10 2.0 2163XB-017KB-41___ 2.5 2163XB-017JB-41___
D 24 15 2.0 2163XB-024KB-42___ 3.0 2163XB-024JB-42___
D 30 20 2.5 2163XB-030KB-43___ 3.5 2163XB-030JB-43___
• For derating information, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative and/or refer to the PowerFlex 520
User Manual, publication 520-UM001.
(4) The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate suffix from Table 264 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2163XB-
1P4KB-33TGM).

Table 220 - 2163X Combination PowerFlex 523 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker (600V Normal
Duty)
HP(2) Program
Factor(3) Factor(3)
A 0.9 0.5 1.0 2163XB-0P9KC-33___ 1.5 2163XB-0P9JC-33___ SC
A 1.3 0.75 1.0 2163XB-1P7KC-34___ 1.5 2163XB-1P7JC-34___
A 1.7 1.0 1.0 2163XB-1P7KC-35___ 1.5 2163XB-1P7JC-35___
A 2.2 1.5 1.0 2163XB-3P0KC-36___ 2.0 2163XB-3P0JC-36___
A 3.0 2.0 1.0 2163XB-3P0KC-37___ 2.0 2163XB-3P0JC-37___
A 4.2 3.0 1.0 2163XB-4P2KC-38___ 2.0 2163XB-4P2JC-38___
B 6.6 5.0 1.0 2163XB-6P6KC-39___ 2.0 2163XB-6P6JC-39___
C 9.9 7.5 2.0 2163XB-9P9KC-40___ 2.5 2163XB-9P9JC-40___
C 12 10 2.0 2163XB-012KC-41___ 2.5 2163XB-012JC-41___
D 19 15 2.0 2163XB-019KC-42___ 3.0 2163XB-019JC-42___
D 22 20 2.5 2163XB-022KC-43___ 3.5 2163XB-022JC-43___
• For derating information, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative and/or refer to the PowerFlex
520 User Manual, publication 520-UM001.
(4) The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate suffix from Table 264 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2163XB-
1P4KB-33TGM).

Notes:

Chapter 16
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Combination Variable

Frequency AC Motor Drive Units
To select pilot light lens color, add letters to the option number: A = amber, B = blue, C = clear, G = green, R = red,
W = white (for example, 4RG is a red ON and green OFF pilot light). Clear and white are not available for Bulletin 800T LED type pilot
lights. Clear is not available on Bulletin 800F LED pilot lights. White is not available on Bulletin 800F incandescent pilot lights.
Table 221 - Bulletins 2162…2163 VFD Push Button, Control Station Housing, and Selector Switch Options
Option Description PowerFlex 70, 520, 700, and 750 Series Drives Option Delivery
Number Program
2162Q 2162W 2162X 2162U 2162V
2162R 2163W 2163X 2163U(7) 2163V(7)
(7) (7) (10)
2163Q
2163R
Push Buttons(1),(2), (3) DRIVE START–DRIVE STOP (4) -1 SC
(4)
JOG  -1E
Push Buttons and HAND-OFF-AUTO, HAND -1F
Selector Switch(1) START-HAND STOP
Selector Switch(1),(2),(3) AUTO–MANUAL (speed (4) -3
select)
FORWARD–REVERSE (4) -3E
(4) (5) (8) (8) (8) (11)
HAND–OFF–AUTO   ,    -3F
Pilot Lights (Transformer Incandescent type RUN  (9) -4_ ENG
Type for 800T, full voltage (9)
800F)(1), (3) RUN-AT   -4_ _
SPEED
FAULT (9) -4T_
(5) (9) (6) (9) (9) (9)
LED type RUN   ,  ,   -4L_ SC
RUN-AT  (9) (9) -4L_ _
SPEED
FAULT (5),(9) (6),(9) (9) (9) -4TL_

Table 221 - Bulletins 2162…2163 VFD Push Button, Control Station Housing, and Selector Switch Options (continued)
Option Description PowerFlex 70, 520, 700, and 750 Series Drives Option Delivery
Number Program
2162Q 2162W 2162X 2162U 2162V
2162R 2163W 2163X 2163U(7) 2163V(7)
(7) (7) (10)
2163Q
2163R
Pilot Lights (Transformer Push-to-Test Incandescent RUN  (9) -5_ ENG
Type for 800T, full voltage type (9)
800F)(1), (3) RUN–AT   -5_ _
SPEED
FAULT (9) -5T_
(5),(9) (6),(9) (9) (9)
Push-to-Test LED type RUN   -5L_ SC
RUN-AT  (9) (9) -5L_ _
SPEED
FAULT (5),(9) (6),(9) (9) (9) -5TL_
(1) When three or less pilot devices are selected Bulletin 800T pilot devices are supplied except selector switches are Bulletin 800H devices. When more than three pilot lights
are selected, 800F pilot devices are supplied. For 2162U, 2163U, 2162V, 2163V, 2162W, 2163W, 2162X, and 2163Xsee footnote 8.
(2) Options 1, 1E, and 3E are not available with communication module 14GC, 14GD, 14GE, 14GR.
(3) Extra space can be required for Bulletin 2162Q, 2163Q, 2162W, 2163W, 2162X, and 2163X. Refer to specific drive selection pages for specific space factor adders.
(4) Option -3F is mutually exclusive with option -1, -1E, -3, and -3E.
(5) When -3F is selected only one Pilot Light is allowed.
(6) Only one Pilot Light is allowed.
(7) 800F pilot devices are supplied for all configurations.
(8) Option 3F is always wired to the built in 24VDC inputs.
(9) Pilot lights operate at 120V AC. When selecting RUN-AT SPEED and FAULT pilot lights, the pilot light style must be the same.
• For 2162U and 2163U, when more than one pilot light is selected, a Digital & Analog optional I/O module -14DA2R1 or -14DA2R2 must be selected.
• For 2162V and 2163V, when any pilot light is selected, a Digital and Analog optional I/O module -14DA2R_ must be selected.
(10) I/O Option Board -14DA2R1 or -14DA2R2 is required with any Push Button, Control Station Housing, or Selector Switch Options. When three pilot lights are selected, I/O
Option Board needs to be -14DA2R3 or -14DA2R4 containing two I/O Boards.
(11) Option 3F is wired with 120V AC with option -14DA2R1 or -14DA2R3 and 24VDC with option -14DA2R2 or -14DA2R4.

Table 222 - Bulletins 2162…2163 VFD Communication Options

Option Option Description PowerFlex 70, 520, 700, and 750 Series Drives Delivery
Number Program
2162Q 2162W 2162X 2162U 2162V
2163Q 2163W 2163X 2163U 2163V
(4) (4)
2162R
2163R
Communication -14GC(2) (3) ControlNet® Communication Module, Mounted  (6) (7) (6) (8) SC
Module(1) Internal to Drive. Includes one 1786-TPYS tap,
supplied loose for customer mounting.
-14GD(3) DeviceNet® communication module, mounted  (5) (6) (5) (6) (6) (7) (6) (8)
internal to drive.
-14GE(2) Ethernet communication module. Mounted 
internal to drive.
-14GER(2) Dual port DLR Ethernet communication module. (5) (6) (5) (6)  
Mounted internal to drive.
(1) Communication modules (options -14GC, 14GD, 14GE, and 14GR) are mutually exclusive on Bulletins 2162Q, 2162R, 2163Q, and 2163R.
(2) Not available on DeviceNet Orders. For PowerFlex® 520 Series Drives, this option calls out the 25-COMM-E2P comm card.
(3) Not available on IntelliCENTER MCC with EtherNet/IP™ network orders.
(4) Drive comes with an embedded Ethernet port.
(5) When 14GC, 14GD, 14GE, or 14GER is specified with Human Operator Interface Module (Option 14HBA3 or 14HC2S) speed control on the Human Interface Module is not
functional.
(6) Communication module options are mutually exclusive with one another and will be installed in Port 6.
(7) A maximum of three non-mutually exclusive options can be selected.
(8) A maximum of five non-mutually exclusive options can be selected. For Frame 1 drives, only a maximum of three non-mutually exclusive options can be selected.

Table 223 - Bulletins 2162…2163 VFD HIM Options

Number Program
2162Q 2162W 2162X 2162U 2162V
2163Q 2163W 2163X 2163U(3) 2163V
(3)
2162R
2163R
Human -14HBA0 No HIM (blank plate) Mounted in bezel on the door.      SC
Interfac HIM is removable. NEMA 1, 1G
e Module -14HBA3 LCD display, full only. Cable to drive is included.   
(HIM)(1) numeric keypad
(mutuall
y -14HBA5 LCD display, 
exclusiv programmer only
e)
-14HBA6 LCD display, full  
numeric keypad
-14HBN1 LCD display, Wireless
Interface Module
-14HA0 No HIM (blank plate) Mounted inside unit on drive. (2)  
Available on NEMA Type 1, 1 with (2)
-14HA3 LCD display, full gasket and 12. Includes viewing 
numeric keypad window on door.
-14HA5 LCD display, (2)
programmer only
-14HA6 LCD display, full  
numeric keypad
-14HC2S LCD display, digital Door mounted. HIM is not  
keypad removable. Cable to drive is
included. NEMA Type 12 Only.
-14HC3S LCD display, full 
numeric keypad
-14HC5S LCD display, 
programmer only
-14HC6S LCD display, full  
numeric keypad
-14HN4S LCD display, Wireless
Interface Module door
mounted
(1) A Human Interface Module (HIM) must be selected.

(2) Not available on Bulletin 2162R and 2163R with size code 300.
(3) Frame 1 and 2 in 2.0 space factor units can only have door mounted HIMs -14HBA0 and -14HBA6.

Table 224 - Bulletins 2162…2163 VFD Control Interface Options

Number Program
2162Q 2162R 2162W 2162X 2162U 2162V
2163Q 2163R 2163W 2163X 2163U 2163V
Encoder -14ENC1 Encoder Feedback Module, 12V (10)  (17)  (19) SC
Feedback(1)
-14DENC1(4) Dual Encoder Feedback Module, 12V (17)  (19)
I/O Control -14DA1C 24V DC Control Voltage Interface with Vector (10)
Interface Control
Type(2)
-14DA1D 120V AC Control Voltage Interface with Vector (10)
Control
-14DA1E 24V DC Control Voltage with Sensorless (11)
Vector Control
-14DA1F 120V AC Control Voltage with Sensorless (11)
Vector Control
-14DA2R1(5) Digital and Analog I/O Option Board, 120V AC (17)  (19) (20)
control voltage inputs. Provides six Digital
Inputs, two Digital (Form-C Relay Outputs),
two Analog Inputs, two Analog Outputs.
-14DA2R2(5) Digital and Analog I/O Option Board, 24V DC (17)  (19) (20)
control voltage inputs. Provides six Digital
two Analog Inputs, two Analog Outputs.
-14DA2R3(5) Two Digital and Analog I/O Option Boards,  (19) (20)
120V AC control voltage inputs. Provides six
Digital Inputs, two Digital (Form-C Relay
Outputs), two Analog Inputs, two Analog
Outputs on each board.
-14DA2R4(5) Two Digital and Analog I/O Option Boards, 24V  (19) (20)
DC control voltage inputs. Provides six Digital
two Analog Inputs, two Analog Outputs on
each board.
Enhanced -14C0 Enhanced control for PowerFlex 70 drive units 
Control
Platform -14G0 Enhanced control for PowerFlex 70 drive units 
Type(1)(3) with DriveGuard Safe-off Option
Analog Output -14N2 Provides a DC signal that is proportional to  

Isolation the drive DC output signal. The signal is fully
isolated from the drive output, line power and
ground.
Ungrounded -14PSUG This option disconnects internal drive  (12) (13) (13)  
Power System protective devices which are referenced to
ground. This option is required if the drive is
used on an ungrounded power system or a
power system which is grounded through any
impedance.
Auxiliary -14APS 24V DC auxiliary power supply option module.  (19)
Power Supply Provides power to drive logic circuits when
line power is removed from drive. Requires
customer supplied source of 24V DC power.
Option is installed in the location for Port 8.

Table 224 - Bulletins 2162…2163 VFD Control Interface Options (continued)

Number Program
2162Q 2162R 2162W 2162X 2162U 2162V
2163Q 2163R 2163W 2163X 2163U 2163V
Safety -14SFR1(6) Safe Torque-off Option, with Factory Installed  (17)  (19) (21) SC
Systems(1) MSR138DP safety relay. Relay uses a
removable terminal block and accepts inputs
for one N.C., two N.C., or Light Curtain,
provides two N.O. safety outputs and three
N.O. delayed safety outputs with 0.5…10 s
delay. Relay control power is 115V AC.
-14SFR2(6) Safe Torque-off Option, with Factory Installed  (17)  (19) (21)
MSR138DP safety relay. Relay uses a
removable terminal block and accepts inputs
for one N.C., two N.C., or Light Curtain,
provides two N.O. safety outputs and three
N.O. delayed safety outputs with 0.5…10 s
delay. Relay control power is 24V DC.
-14SRR(6) Safe Torque-off Option, requires customer (17)  (19) (21)
supplied safety relay installed remotely from
the MCC drive unit.
-14SRR2 Integrated Safe Torque- off Module for (19)
PowerFlex 755.
-14S1 (6) (7) Safe-speed Monitor Option (with integral (17) (21)
safety relay)
EMC Filter -14EMC(8) Includes the EMC Filter (Cat. No. 25-RF__-__)  
and EMC Grounding Plate (Cat. No. 25-EMC1-
F_).
Drive Input -14DFCC Provides factory installed drive input fusing. (14) (14)
Fusing(1) Fuses supplied are UL Class CC Time Delay
fuses.
-14DFAJT(9) Provides factory 30 A  
installed drive input
fusing. Fuses 60 A (15) (15)  
supplied are Mersen, 100 A  
AJT UL Class J fuses.
200 A  
400 A  
600 A  
-14DFLPJ(9) Provides factory 30 A  
installed drive input
fusing. Fuses 60 A  
supplied are 100 A  
Bussmann, LPJ UL
Class J fuses. 200 A  
400 A  
600 A  
Thermostat -14FCT(6) Provide thermostat for control of door (16) (16) (16) (16)
mounted cooling fans. Factory set for 35 °C.
Fuse -21 Fuse (10 A) for customer supplied 120V AC   (18) (18)
separate control source. Fuse is used for
factory wired connections to Digital Inputs
only. Any factory wired pilot lights or cooling
fans use the included control power
transformer.
(1) These options are mutually exclusive to one another.
(2) Control type MUST be selected for Bulletin 2162R and 2163R.
(3) Enhanced control option MUST be specified.
(4) Frame 1 drives are limited to two pilot devices and no communication module when this option is selected with Option -14S1 (Safe Speed Monitor). For Frames 2…7, when this
option is selected with Option -14S1 (Safe-Speed Monitor), only one of the following options can be selected with in addition to this option: (1) Communication Module or (2) I/
O Module(s). The Auxiliary Power Supply Option -14APS can also be selected.
(5) Digital/Analog I/O options are mutually exclusive with each other and is installed in Port 4. For Frame 1, options -14DA2R3 and -14DA2R4 consist of two cards and are installed
in Port 4 and Port 5. For Frame 2…7, options -14DA2R3 and -14DA2R4 consist of two cards and are installed in Port 4 and Port 7.
(6) For Bulletin 2162U/V and 2163U/V Frame size 1 drives, Safety Relays, Thermostats, and Reactors are mutually exclusive. For Bulletin 2163U/V Frame size 2 in 2.0SF, Safety
Relays and Thermostats are mutually exclusive and reactors are not allowed.
(7) This option must be selected with Option - 14DENC1 (Dual Encoder Feedback) and (1) -14DA2R2 I/O Module. Frame 1 drives are limited to two pilot devices and no
communication module. For Frame 2…7, only one of the following can be selected in addition: One Communication Module or a second I/O Module (-14DA2R3 or -14DA2R4);
the Auxiliary Power Supply Option - 14APS can also be selected.
(8) Option can not be called out with the Ungrounded Power System option -14PSUG per product specifications.

(9) Optional UL Class J time delay fuses. These fuses provide both branch circuit protection and drive input protection. The drive input fuses are provided in series with the
circuit breaker in
Bulletin 2163U/V units.
(10) Available only for Bulletin 2162R and 2163R units, except units with size code 300.
(11) Available only for Bulletin 2162R and 2163R with size code 300.
(12) For size code 300, Bulletin 2162R and 2163R, option -14PSUG changes delivery program to Engineered. Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation
sales representative for availability.
(13) Option can not be called out with the EMC Filter option -14EMC per product specifications.
(14) Required on 2162W, 2163W, 2162X, and 2163X Drives with output ratings less than 19 A.
(15) Required on 2162W, 2163W, 2162X, and 2163X Drives with output ratings greater than or equal to 19 A.
(16) Only available on units that have fans mounted on the door.
(17) For Bulletin 2162U and 2163U, a maximum of three non-mutually exclusive options can be selected.
(18) This option is not available for frame 1 and 2 in 2.0SF units that have fans mounted on the door.
(19) For Bulletin 2162V and 2163V Frame size 2…7, a maximum of five non-mutually exclusive options can be selected. For Frame 1, a maximum of three non-mutually exclusive
options can be selected. When -14DA2R3 or -14DA2R4 is selected, they are counted as two options.
(20) Required with any Push Button, Control Station Housing, or Selector Switch Options.
(21) Option -14DA2R2 or -14DA2R4 is required with this option.
Space Factor Adders for Line or Load Reactors

Consider a load reactor (connecting a reactor on the load side of the drive) to address one or more of the following issues:
• Multi-motor applications (one drive feeding more than one motor).
• A low voltage insulation class motor applied on a long cable length.
• 575V motor applications (other than short cable length applications).
A load reactor is NOT required for applications where:

• Line voltage is 230V or less.
• A Bulletin 1204 terminator unit is utilized.
• An Allen-Bradley controlled matched solution is being applied (for example, a 1850V CIV motor is used for a cable length of
600 ft. [185 m] or less in a 575V application).
A line reactor (connecting a reactor on the line side of the drive) is considered as a means to address one or more of the following
issues:
• Applications with severe power line transient disturbances degrading the power quality of the incoming power line. For
example, arcing during power line switching, arc welder applications, or switching of a system power factor correction
capacitor bank at the main service, especially if the PFCC bank is switched by a vacuum contactor.
• Applications utilizing improvement of power line harmonic content.
– However, due to the built-in DC link reactor internal to the Allen-Bradley IGBT-based PWM drives, a line reactor has
little effect on the improvement of power line harmonic distortion.
• Applications exposed to excessive high voltage transients due to lightning.
– However, a surge protective device unit for the total MCC is recommended for such applications (for example, catalog
#2100-SPKB-1 or catalog #2100-SPKC-1).

Applications with both line and load reactors are not recommended without first contacting your local Allen-Bradley distributor or
Rockwell Automation sales representative. While this application is not detrimental to the drive itself, it can produce erroneous
drive operation caused by effects of common mode current. These effects can be influenced by drive HP, carrier frequency,
motor load, and output cable length. Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or
Rockwell Automation sales representative when both line and load reactors are deemed necessary for the application.
Additional recommendations are available in the specific IGBT-based PWM inverter user manual. Consult these manuals for
restrictions regarding drive carrier frequency, motor cable length and motor insulation class (inverter class motors). Information
on the use of reactors and the use of Bulletin 1204 terminators can also be found in the user manuals.
Table 225 - Bulletins 2162…2163 VFD Line and Load Reactors
Option Option Number Description PowerFlex 70, 520, and PowerFlex Delivery
700 Series Drives 753 and 755 Program
2162Q 2163Q 2162U 2163U
2162R 2163R 2162V
2162W 2163W 2163V(6) (7)
2162X 2163X
Line or Load -14R_(4) 3% impedance line or load reactor 480V 0.5…1 HP    SC
Reactors(1) (See space factor
adders on page 277) 1.5…2 HP   
3…5 HP   
7.5 HP   
10 HP   
15 HP   
20…25 HP   
30 HP   
40 HP   
50…60 HP   
75 HP   
100 HP   
125 HP   
150 HP(5)   

Table 225 - Bulletins 2162…2163 VFD Line and Load Reactors (continued)
Option Option Number Description PowerFlex 70, 520, and PowerFlex Delivery
700 Series Drives 753 and 755 Program
2162Q 2163Q 2162U 2163U
2162R 2163R 2162V
2162W 2163W 2163V(6) (7)
2162X 2163X
Line or Load -14R_(4) 3% impedance line or load reactor 600V 0.5 HP   PE in
Reactors(1) (See space factor U.S.,SC
adders on page 277) 1.5 HP   in
Canada
3…7.5 HP  
10 HP  
15 HP  
20…25 HP  
30 HP  
40 HP  
50…60 HP  
75 HP  
100 HP  
125 HP  
150 HP  
Load Reactor -14RXL _ _ (4) 3% impedance load reactor for size 480V 150 HP(5)   PE-II
Only(2) (3) code 300, Bulletin 2162R and 2163R 200 HP
drive units.
(1) Line and load reactors are mutually exclusive, as space factor adders can be required see page 277.
(2) Load reactors for Bulletin 2162R and 2163R, size code 300 drive units (150 Hp Heavy Duty at 480V and 200 Hp at 480V) are separate units from the drive units. The load reactors
require an additional section mounted to the right of the section with the drive. The reactor is mounted in a supplementary drive unit in the bottom of the additional section. The
two sections are one shipping split. Not available in back-to-back construction.
(3) Bulletin 2162R and 2163R, size code 300 rated units have approximately 3% of inherent line reactance.
(4) The option numbers listed are not complete:
• Select LX for line reactor or XL for load reactors (for example, 14RLX).
• For Bulletin 2162R and 2163R, size code 300 drive units (150 Hp Heavy Duty at 480V and 200 Hp at 480V), select the drive supplementary unit identification code (01…99) (for
example, 14RLX01). The supplementary unit identification code must begin with '01' and increase sequentially with multiple drive units (02, 03, 04). Each drive unit is to have a
unique supplementary unit identification code that correlates with the same identification code on the supplementary unit.
(5) For 150 Hp, 480 V, Heavy Duty, Bulletin 2162R and 2163R units, refer to footnote (4), (2) and (3).
(6) For Bulletin 2162U/V and 2163U/V Frame size 1 drives, safety relays, thermostats, and reactors are mutually exclusive.
(7) For Bulletin 2162U/V and 2163U/V Frame size 1 drives, the following applies:
• Line or load reactors are allowed for 1…5 Hp (normal duty) and _…3 Hp (heavy duty).
• Line reactors only are available for 7.5 Hp.
• No reactors are permitted for 10 Hp.
Space Factor Adders for Variable Frequency Drives

Table 226 - Space Factor Adders for Bulletins 2162Q and 2163Q Table 227 - Space Factor Adders for Bulletins 2162Q and 2163Q
480V 600V
NEMA Type Rating Code Space Factor Adder NEMA Type Rating Code Space Factor Adder
1, 1G 1P1 0.5 1, 1G 0P9 0.5
2P1 1P7
3P4 2P7
5P0 3P9
8P0 6P1
011 9P0
014 011
(1) (1)
052 041
065 052
12 034 0.5 12 027 0.5
(1)
065 032
(1) See unit pages for space factor adders.

Table 228 - Space Factor Adders for Bulletin 2162U and 2162V Normal Duty
Drive Rating Code 480V NEMA Type Base Unit S.F. Space Factor Adder
Fan Thermo MSR Safety 120V AC 14RLX 14RXL Load 112A 14R__ and
Relay Separat Line Reactor 112A
e Reactor
Control
2P1F1N, 3P4F1N, 1/1G 2.0 None(1) None(1) None(1) None(1) None(1) N/A N/A
5P0F1N, 8P0F1N
011F1N 1/1G 2.0 None(1) None(1) None(1) None(1) N/A N/A N/A
(1) (1) (1)
014F1N 1/1G 2.0 None None None N/A N/A N/A N/A
2P1H, 3P4H, 5P0H, 1/1G 2.5 None None None None None None None
8P0H, 011H
12 2.5 None None None None None None None
014N 1/1G 2.5 None None None None None None 0.5
12 2.5 None None None 0.5 0.5 None 0.5
022N 1/1G 2.5 None None None None None 0.5 1.0
027N, 034N 1/1G 2.5 None None None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
12 3.5 None None None None None N/A N/A
040N 1/1G 3.0 None None None 0.5 0.5 None 0.5
12 3.5 None None None 0.5 0.5 N/A N/A
052N 1/1G 3.0 None None None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
065N 1/1G 3.0 None None None 1.0 1.0 0.5 1.0
(2) (2)
12 4.0 None None None N/A N/A
077N 1/1G 6.0 x 20" W x 15" D None None None None None None None
12 6.0 x 25" W x 15" D None None None None None N/A N/A
186N 1/1G 6.0 x 25" W x 20" D None None None None None 5" W 5" W
12 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(1) Options are mutally exclusive, only one per unit.

(2) Type 12 w/ 14RLX or 14RXL becomes 6.0 space factor x 20" W x 15"D.

Drive Rating Code, 600V NEMA Type Base Unit Space Factor Space Factor Adder
14R_ _ 112A 14R_ _ and 112A
1P7N, 2P7N, 3P9N 1/1G 2.5 None None None
12 2.5 None None None
6P1N 1/1G 2.5 0.5 None 0.5
12 2.5 0.5 None 0.5
9P0N, 011N 1/1G 2.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
12 3 None None None
017N, 022N 1/1G 2.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
12 3.5 None --- ---
027N 1/1G 3 0.5 None 0.5
12 4 None --- ---
032N 1/1G 3 0.5 None 0.5
12 4 None --- ---
041N 1/1G 6.0 S.F. x 20"W. x 15"D None None None
12 6.0 S.F. x 25"W. x 15"D None --- ---
12 6.0 S.F. x 25"W. x 15"D None --- ---
063N, 077N 1/1G 6.0 S.F. x 25"W. x 20"D None None None
12 6.0 S.F. x 25"W. x 20"D None --- ---
12 6.0 S.F. x 30"W. x 20"D None --- ---
12 6.0 S.F. x 35"W. x 20"D None --- ---
12 --- --- --- ---

Table 230 - Space Factor Adders for Bulletin 2162U and 2162V Heavy Duty
Drive Rating NEMA Type Base Unit S.F. Space Factor Adder
Code 480V
Fan Thermo MSR Safety 120V AC 14RLX Line 14RXL 112A 14R__ and
Relay Separate Reactor Load 112A
Control Reactor
3P4F1H, 1/1G 2.0 None(1) None(1) None(1) None(1) None(1) N/A N/A
5P0F1H,
8P0F1H,
011F1H
014F1H 1/1G 2.0 None(1) None(1) None(1) None(1) N/A N/A N/A
2P1H, 1/1G 2.5 None None None None None None None
3P4H,5P0H,
8P0H, 011H 12 2.5 None None None None None None None
022H 1/1G 2.5 None None None None None 0.5 1.0
027H, 034H 1/1G 2.5 None None None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
040H 1/1G 3.0 None None None 0.5 0.5 None 0.5
12 3.5 None None None 0.5 0.5 N/A N/A
052H 1/1G 3.0 None None None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
065H 1/1G 3.0 None None None 1.0 1.0 0.5 1.0
(2) (2)
12 4.0 None None None N/A N/A
077H 1/1G 6.0 x 20" W x 15" D None None None None None None None
186H 1/1G 6.0 x 25" W x 20"D None None None None None 5" W 5" W
12 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(1) Options are mutally exclusive, only one per unit.

(2) Type 12 w/ 14RLX or 14RXL becomes 6.0 space factor x 20" W x 15" D.

Drive Rating Code, 600V NEMA Type Base Unit Space Factor Space Factor Adder
14R_ _ 112A 14R_ _ and 112A
1P7H, 2P7H, 3P9H, 6P1H 1/1G 2.5 None None None
12 2.5 None None None
9P0H, 011H 1/1G 2.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
12 3 None None None
017H, 022H 1/1G 2.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
12 3.5 None --- ---
027H 1/1G 3 0.5 None 0.5
12 4 None --- ---
032H 1/1G 3 0.5 None 0.5
12 4 None --- ---
041H 1/1G 6.0 S.F. x 20"W. x 15"D None None None
12 6.0 S.F. x 25"W. x 15"D None --- ---
12 6.0 S.F. x 25"W. x 15"D None --- ---
063H, 077H 1/1G 6.0 S.F. x 25"W. x 20"D None None None
12 6.0 S.F. x 25"W. x 20"D None --- ---
12 6.0 S.F. x 30"W. x 20"D None --- ---
12 6.0 S.F. x 35"W. x 20"D None --- ---
12 --- --- --- ---

Drive NEMA Base Space Factor Adder
Rating Type Unit S.F.
Code Control Fan MSR 120V AC 14DF___ 14RLX__ 14RXL__ 14DF___ 14DF___ 112A 14DF___ 14R__ 14DF___
480V Station Thermo Safety Separate Fuses Line Load Fuses Fuses and 112A and and
Relay Control Reactor Reactor and and 112A 14R__
14RLX 14RXL and 112A
2P1F1 1/1G 2.0 None None(1) None( None(1) None None(1) None(1) None(1) None(1) N/A N/A N/A N/A
N,3P4 1)
F1N,5
P0F1N
,8P0F1
N
011F1N 1/1G 2.0 None None(1) None( None(1) None None N/A None N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
1)
014F1 1/1G 2.0 None None(1) None( None(1) None N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
1)
N
2P1H, 1/1G 2.5 None None None None None None None None None None None None None
3P4H,
5P0H, 12 2.5 None None None None None None None None None None None None None
8P0H,
011H
014N 1/1G 2.5 None None None None None None None None None None None 0.5 0.5
12 2.5 None None None None None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 None None 0.5 0.5
(2) ( (2) (2)
022N 1/1G 2.0 0.5 None None None None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5
2)
12 3.0 None None None None None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 None None 0.5 0.5
027N, 1/1G 2.5 None None None None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
034N
12 3.5 None None None None None None None None None N/A N/A N/A N/A
040N 1/1G 3.0 None None None None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 None 0.5 0.5 0.5
12 3.5 None None None None None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A
052N 1/1G 3.0 None None None None None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
065N 1/1G 3.0 None None None None 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0
(3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
12 4.0 None None None None N/A N/A N/A N/A
077N 1/1G 6.0 x None None None None 5"W None None 5"W 5"W None 5"W None None
20" W x
15" D
12 6.0 x None None None None None None None None None N/A N/A N/A N/A
25" W x
15" D
096N 1/1G 6.0 x None None None None None None None None None None None None None
25" W x
15" D
25" W x
15" D
25" W x
20" D
25" W x
20" D

Table 232 - Space Factor Adders for Bulletin 2163U and 2163V Normal Duty (continued)
Rating Type Unit S.F.
Code Control Fan MSR 120V AC 14DF___ 14RLX__ 14RXL__ 14DF___ 14DF___ 112A 14DF___ 14R__ 14DF___
480V Station Thermo Safety Separate Fuses Line Load Fuses Fuses and 112A and and
Relay Control Reactor Reactor and and 112A 14R__
25" W x
20" D
30" W x
20" D
186N 1/1G 6.0 x None None None None None None None None None 5"W 5"W 5"W 5"W
25" W x
20" D
35" W x
20" D
30" W x
20" D
12 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(1) Options are mutally exclusive, only one option per unit.
(2) Two or more options add 0.5 SF.
Drive Rating Code, 600V(1) NEMA Type Base Unit Space Factor Adder
Space
Factor 14DF_ _ _ 14R_ _ 14DF_ _ _ 112A 14DF_ _ _ 14R_ _ and 14DF_ _ _
and 14R_ _ and 112A 112A and 14R_ _
and 112A
1P7N, 2P7N, 3P9N 1/1G 2.5 None None None None None None None
6P1N 1/1G 2.5 None 0.5 0.5 None None 0.5 0.5
12 2.5 None 0.5 0.5 None None 0.5 0.5
9P0N, 011N 1/1G 2.5 None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
12 3 None None None None None None None
017N, 022N 1/1G 2.5 None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
12 3.5 None None None --- --- --- ---
027N 1/1G 3 None 0.5 0.5 None None 0.5 0.5
12 4 None None None --- --- --- ---
032N 1/1G 3 None 0.5 0.5 None None 0.5 0.5
12 4 None None None --- --- --- ---
041N 1/1G 6.0 S.F. x None None None None None None None
20"W. x 15"D
12 6.0 S.F. x None None None --- --- --- ---
25"W. x 15"D
25"W. x 15"D
25"W. x 15"D

Table 233 - Space Factor Adders for Bulletin 2163U and 2163V Normal Duty (continued)
Space 14DF_ _ _ 14R_ _ 14DF_ _ _ 112A 14DF_ _ _ 14R_ _ and 14DF_ _ _
Factor
and 14R_ _ and 112A 112A and 14R_ _
and 112A
063N, 077N 1/1G 6.0 S.F. x None None None None None None None
25"W. x 20"D
25"W. x 20"D
25"W. x 20"D
30"W. x 20"D
25"W. x 20"D
35"W. x 20"D
30"W. x 20"D
12 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
(1) Fusing is not optional with 140G Breakers at 600V.

Rating Type Unit
Code S.F. Control Fan MSR 120V AC 14DF___ 14RLX 14RXL 14DF___ 14DF___ 112A 14DF___ 14R__ 14DF___
480V Station Thermo Safety Separate Fuses Line Load Fuses Fuses and 112A and 112A and
Relay Control Reactor Reactor and and 14R__
3P4F1H 1/1G 2.0 None None(1) None( None(1) None(1) None(1) None(1) None(1) None(1) N/A N/A N/A N/A
,5P0F1 1)
H,8P0F
1H,
011F1H
014F1H 1/1G 2.0 None None(1) None( None(1) None(1) None(1) 0.5 None(1) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
1)
2P1H,3 1/1G 2.5 None None None None None None None None None None None None None
P4H,5P
0H,8P0 12 2.5 None None None None None None None None None None None None None
H, 011H
022H 1/1G 2.0 0.5 None None( None(2) None(2) 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5
(2) 2)
12 3.0 None None None None None 0.5 None 0.5 0.5 None None 0.5 0.5
027H, 1/1G 2.5 None None None None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
034H
040H 1/1G 3.0 None None None None None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 None 0.5 0.5 0.5
12 3.5 None None None None None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A
052H 1/1G 3.0 None None None None None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
12 4.0 None None None None None None 0.5 None None N/A N/A N/A N/A
065H 1/1G 3.0 None None None None 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0
(3) (3) (3) (3)
12 4.0 None None None None None N/A N/A N/A N/A
077H 1/1G 6.0 x None None None None 5" W None None 5" W 5" W None 5" W None 5" W
20" W
x 15"
D
25" W
x 15"
D
096H 1/1G 6.0 x None None None None None None 0.5 None None None None None None
25" W
x 15"
D
12 6.0 x None None None None None None 0.5 None None N/A N/A N/A N/A
25" W
x 15"
D
125H 1/1G 6. x None None None None None None 0.5 None None None None None None
25" W
x 20"
D
25" W
x 20"
D

Table 234 - Space Factor Adders for Bulletin 2163U and 2163V Heavy Duty (continued)
Rating Type Unit
Code S.F. Control Fan MSR 120V AC 14DF___ 14RLX 14RXL 14DF___ 14DF___ 112A 14DF___ 14R__ 14DF___
480V Station Thermo Safety Separate Fuses Line Load Fuses Fuses and 112A and 112A and
Relay Control Reactor Reactor and and 14R__
156H 1/1G 6.0 x None None None None None None 1.0 None None None None None None
25" W
x 20"
D
(3)
12 6.0 x None None None None None None None None N/A N/A N/A N/A
30" W
x 20"
D
186H 1/1G 6.0 x None None None None None None None None None 5" W 5" W 5" W 5" W
25" W
x 20"
D
35" W
x 20"
D
248H 1/1G 6.0 x None None None None None None None None None None None None None
30" W
x 20"
D
12 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(1) Options are mutually exclusive, only one option per unit.
(2) Two or more options add 0.5 SF.
Factor
and 14R_ _ and 112A 112A and 14R_ _
and 112A
1P7H, 2P7H, 3P9H, 6P1H 1/1G 2.5 None None None None None None None
9P0H, 011H 1/1G 2.5 None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
12 3 None None None None None None None
017H, 022H 1/1G 2.5 None 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
12 3.5 None None None --- --- --- ---
027H 1/1G 3 None 0.5 0.5 None None 0.5 0.5
12 4 None None None --- --- --- ---
032H 1/1G 3 None 0.5 0.5 None None 0.5 0.5
12 4 None None None --- --- --- ---
041H 1/1G 6.0 S.F. x None None None None None None None
20"W. x 15"D
25"W. x 15"D
25"W. x 15"D
25"W. x 15"D
063H, 077H 1/1G 6.0 S.F. x None None None None None None None
25"W. x 20"D
25"W. x 20"D

Table 235 - Space Factor Adders for Bulletin 2163U and 2163V Heavy Duty (continued)
Factor
and 14R_ _ and 112A 112A and 14R_ _
and 112A
25"W. x 20"D
30"W. x 20"D
25"W. x 20"D
35"W. x 20"D
30"W. x 20"D
12 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
(1) Fusing is not optional with 140G Breakers at 600V.
Table 236 - Space Factor Adders for Bulletin 2162W, 2163W, 2162X and 2163X
Drive Rating NEMA Base Space Factor Adder
Code Type Unit Control 14DF__ Control 14H__ EMC 14R__ Fan MSR 120V AC 112A 112A w/ 112A w/
Space
Factor XFMR Drive Station Door Filter Reactor Thermo Safety Separate EMC or EMC and
Fuses Mounted Kit Relay Control Reactor Reactor
HIM
0P9, 1P4, 1P7, 1/1G 1.0 None None 0.5 None 0.5(1) 0.5(1) None 0.5 None 0.5 0.5 1.0
2P3
3P0, 4P0, 1/1G 1.0 None None 0.5 None 0.5(1) 0.5(1) None 0.5 None 1.0 1.0 1.0
4P2, 6P0
6P6, 010 1/1G 1.0 None None 0.5 None 0.5(1) 0.5(1) None 0.5 None 1.0 1.0 1.5
0P9, 1P4, 1P7, 12 1.5 None None None None 0.5 0.5 --- None None None None None
2P3
3P0, 4P0, 12 2.0 None None None None None None --- None None None None None
4P2, 6P0
6P6, 010 12 2.0 None None None None 0.5 0.5 --- None None None None None
9P9, 012, 013, 1/1G 2.0 None None None None None None None None None 0.5 0.5 1.0
017
(1) (1)
019, 024 1/1G 2.0 None None None None None None None 1.0 1.0 1.0
(1) (1)
022 1/1G 2.0 None None None None None None None 1.5 1.5 2.0
(1) (1)
030 1/1G 2.5 None None None None None None None 1.0 1.0 1.0
(1) (1)
9P9, 012, 013 12 2.5 None None None None --- None None None None None
017 12 2.5 None None None None 0.5 0.5 --- None None None None None
(1) (1)
019, 024 12 3.0 None None None None None None None --- --- ---
022 12 3.5 None None None None None None None None None --- --- ---
030 12 3.5 None None None None None None None None None --- --- ---
(1) Combination of EMC Filter Kit and 14R__ Reactor requires an additional 0.5 SF.

Table 237 - Space Factor Adders for Bulletins 2162R and Table 238 - Space Factor Adders for Bulletins 2162R and
2163R 2163R
480V 600V
NEMA Type Rating Code Space Factor Adder NEMA Type Rating Code Space Factor Adder
1, 1G 027 (1) 0.5 1, 1G 022 (1) 0.5
034 027
040 032
052 041
065 (2) 0.5, 1.0 052 (3)
12 1P1 (1) 0.5 12 1P7 - 3P9 (1)
(1)
2P1 027
3P4 (1) 032
5P0 (1)
034
040
(1) Bulletin 2163R only.
(2) Bulletin 2162R requires 1.0 space factor adder and Bulletin 2163R requires 0.5 space factor adder.
(3) Bulletin 2162R only.

2162 and 2163 Variable Frequency Drive Options
Table 239 - Bulletins 2162…2163 VFD Grounding, Control Wiring, and Miscellaneous Options
Option Option Description PowerFlex 70, Delivery
Number 520, 700, and 750 Program
Series Drives
2162Q 2163Q
2162R 2163R
2162U 2163U
2162V 2163V
2162W 2163W
2162X 2163X
Grounded Unit -79GD Hinge mounted ground strap mounted on hinge of unit door. Unit door grounding strap for   SC
Door(1) IEC requirements.
Unit Load -79L Specify on plug-in units for sections with unplated vertical unit load Unplated copper  
Connector ground bus.
-79LT(4) Specify on plug-in units for sections with tin plated vertical unit load Tin plated cooper  
ground bus.
Unit Ground Stab — Specify on plug-in units for sections with vertical plug-in ground bus. Copper alloy  
Unplated copper unit ground stab can also be used with steel vertical
-79U ground bus. Unplated copper  
(4)
-79UT Tin plated cooper  
Auxiliary -98(5) Normally Open—One N.O. mounted on operating mechanism (operates with movement of  
Contacts external handle only)
-99(5) Normally Closed—One N.C. mounted on operating mechanism (operates with movement of  
external handle only)
-790K(6) One Form C Aux mounted internally in Circuit Breaker 
(6)
-790L Two Form C Aux mounted internally in Circuit Breaker 
-790A(6) One Form C Aux, One Form C Alarm mounted internally in Circuit Breaker 
-790T(6) One Form C Alarm mounted internally in Circuit Breaker 
T-Handle -111 T-Handle latch on unit door. Not available on 2160R units.  
(7)
Arc Resistant -112A Make the unit Device Limited ArcShield compatible.  
Latches (7)
-112B Make the unit 100ms Duration Rated ArcShield compatible.  
SecureConnect™ -113 Adds SecureConnect to the unit.  
(2)
Control Circuit — Type MTW (TEW) 90°C #16 AWG copper wire, VW1 rated  
Wiring(3)
Control Wire -751D Brady Datab wire markers at each end of the control wires.  
Markers
-751HS Heat shrink type wire markers   SC
(+2 days)
-751S Sleeve type wire marker   SC
Device Markers -751M Mylar Device Markers  
Shunt Trip -754 Shunt Trip Relay. Applying potential to the relay trips the breaker. (110…127V AC, 110…125V 
DC)
Undervoltage -780 Undervoltage relay. Loss of potential to the relay trips the breaker. (110…127V AC, 
Release 110…125V DC)

Table 239 - Bulletins 2162…2163 VFD Grounding, Control Wiring, and Miscellaneous Options (continued)
Option Option Description PowerFlex 70, Delivery
Number 520, 700, and 750 Program
Series Drives
2162Q 2163Q
2162R 2163R
2162U 2163U
2162V 2163V
2162W 2163W
2162X 2163X
French Legend -860F Legend plates printed in French are available on all pilot devices. Specify 860F when pilot   SC
Plates device options are selected.
Spanish Legend -860S Legend plates printed in Spanish are available on all pilot devices. Specify 860S when pilot  
Plates device options are selected.
Unit Door — Door Nameplate Screws Plated steel  
Nameplates(1) nameplate
screws. Provided
when cardholder
or nameplates
are not selected.
Card Holder for Unit Doors 1.125'' x 3.625''   SC-II
plastic card
holders with
blank cards
1.125" x 3.625" engraved 3-line nameplate or 4-line nameplate Acrylic plate  
(available in U.S.
only). Nameplate
is white with
black letters or
black with white
letters.
Phenolic plate.  
Nameplate is
white with black
letters or black
with white
letters.
Stainless Steel — Stainless steel nameplate screws for unit nameplates (2 per unit)  
Nameplate
Screws(1)
Export Packing — Container is skid mounted and packaged in clear plastic. Packing is not watertight or   SC (+2
Below Deck waterproof. Extended storage can require space heater and other considerations. For days)
sections, see Table 17 on page 36.
(1) Also available on Bulletin 2160R units.

(2) Available with plug-in units only. Not available with 0.5 S.F. units. Automatic shutters are required.
(3) Options for factory wiring of control circuits. Device and component internal wiring, wiring outside of unit (for example 24V Ethernet wiring and Ethernet cabling), and wiring that
could affect operation or certification (for example, insulation temperature class, EMC shielding requirements, communication requirements, UL, C-UL, CSA, CE) are not included.
(4) Unit Load Ground Connector and Unit Ground Stab plating must match, horizontal and vertical ground bus plating.
(5) The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied internally is two, in any combination. Contacts actuate with movement of unit handle to ON or OFF position only.
Contacts are not designed to actuate as a result of a circuit breaker trip. For such applications, auxiliary contacts -790K (G, H, and J) and -790A (all other frames) mounted internally
must be selected. Auxiliary contacts are supplied unwired.
(6) These are form C contacts. Each form C contact includes one N.O. and one N.C. contact. Internal auxiliary contacts -790K (G, H, and J) and -790A (all other frames) are wired to a 3-
point unmounted terminal block.
(7) Device Limited ArcShield is available for systems between 600…1200 A. 100 ms Duration Rated ArcShield is available for systems between 1200…3000 A (below 1200 A is available on
the ENG program). Device Limited ArcShield is not available for PowerFlex 700 on the standard delivery program.

Chapter 17
Programmable Controller Units
Bulletin 2180L, 2182L, 2183L with Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix Chassis

The Bulletin 2180L, 2182L, and 2183L units include a choice of one 4-slot or one 7-slot Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix chassis.
Unit Features
Without disconnecting means or plug-in stabs:
• 4-slot chassis, 1.0 space factor.
• 7-slot chassis, 2.0 space factor (frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway next to this unit). Bottom
mounted only.
With disconnecting means:

• Fusible disconnect (30 A switch), plug-in stabs, control circuit transformer, 4-slot chassis, 1.5 space factor.
• Fusible disconnect (30 A switch) without plug-in stabs, control circuit transformer, 7-slot chassis, 2.0 space factor (frame
mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway next to this unit). Bottom mounted only.
• Circuit breaker (15 A trip), plug-in stabs, control circuit transformer, 4-slot chassis, 1.5 space factor.
• Circuit breaker (15 A trip) without plug-in stabs, control circuit transformer, 7-slot chassis, 2.0 space factor (frame mounted
unit, section does not have vertical wireway next to this unit). Bottom mounted only.
Unit Options
• Processor cards (all memory upgrade options).
• Communication cards (Ethernet, ControlNet, DeviceNet, Remote I/O DH+).
• Power supply (10.0 A)

Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2180, 2182 and 2183 Programmable Control I/O
Chassis Units
• NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with gasket and Type 12
• Type A Wiring
Table 240 - Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2180, 2182 and 2183 Programmable Control I/O Chassis Units
2180L - A K XWD - - **
2182L - A K B - - **
2183L - A K B - 30THM - **
Bulletin Number Number of I/O Chassis and NEMA Enclosure Type Line Voltage Trip Current and Circuit Options
Slots Breaker Type
Code Type Code NEMA Enclosure Type Code Line Voltage Cod Option
2180L Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 P 220 - 230V e
Programmable Controller (PLC) I/O with gasket A 240V See Options section
Chassis without Disconnecting J NEMA Type 12 beginning on page
Means(1) N 380V 295.
KN 400V
2182L Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix
Programmable Controller (PLC) I/O I 415V
Chassis with Fusible Disconnect(1) B 480V
2183L Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix C 600V
Programmable Controller (PLC) I/O XWD 120V
Chassis with Circuit Breaker(1)
Does not include
(1) 2180LB, 2182LB and 2183LB indicate bottom transformer or power bus
mounting on section. stabs.
Code Number of I/O Chassis and Slots Code Trip Current and Circuit
A (1) 4-slot chassis Breaker Type
B (1) 7-slot chassis (Bulletins 2180L, 2182L, and Bulletin 2183_ Only See Table on page 293
2183L)

Units—2180L, 2182L, 2183L Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix Programmable Controller (PLC)

• Basic configuration does not include processor, input, output, adapter modules, or power supply.
Table 241 - Bulletin 1756 I/O Chassis Units

Bulletin I/O Chassis Space Catalog Number (3) Delivery
Factor Wiring Type A Only - Class I Program
Chassis Chassis Size NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 NEMA Type 12
Quantity w/gasket
2180L (1) 1 4 slot 1.0 2180L-AKXWD 2180L-AJXWD SC
Basic I/O chassis without disconnecting
means or plug-in stabs. Includes viewing 1 7 slot 2.0 (2) 2180LB-BKXWD 2180LB-BJXWD SC-II
window.
2182L (1) 1 4 slot 1.5 2182L-AK__ 2182L-AJ__ SC
Basic I/O chassis with disconnect and
transformer. Includes viewing window. 1 7 slot 2.0 (2) 2182LB-BK__ 2182LB-BJ__ SC-II
2183L (1) 1 4 slot 1.5 2183L-AK_-30__ 2182L-AJ_-30__ SC

Basic I/O chassis with circuit breaker and
transformer. Includes viewing window. 1 7 slot 2.0(2) 2183LB-BK_-30__ 2183LB-BJ_-30__ SC-II
(1) A power supply must be selected for all 2180L, 2182L and 2183L units. Refer to the Options table on page 295.
(2) Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway next to this unit. Must be mounted at bottom of section. Cannot be used in section with 9” vertical wireway.
Cannot mount in a section containing other frame mounted units.
(3) Catalog numbers listed are not complete:
• Select appropriate voltage code from Table 242 to identify the control transformer primary voltage (for example, 2182L-BKB).
• For Bulletin 2183L, also select the suffix letter from Table 243 to identify the circuit breaker type (for example, 2183L-BKB-30TGM).
Table 242 - Primary Voltage for Transformer

Primary Voltage Voltage Code
220/230 P
240 A
380 N
400 KN
415 I
480 B
600 C
Table 243 - Circuit Breaker Options and Adders (for combination short circuit ratings, see page 334) (1)
Circuit Breaker Suffix
Frame Type
G6C3 TGM
H6C3 THM
J15C3 TJU
(1) Refer to the CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Thermal

Magnetic Circuit Breakers, publication 2100-TD032 , for
more information.

Notes:

Chapter 18
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Programmable

Controllers
Table 244 - Communication, Door, Ground Stab, and Contact Options

Option Option Description Bulletin 1756 Delivery
Number ControlLogix Chassis Program
2180L 2182L 2183L
Power Supply (1) -12PA72 Bulletin 1756-PA72, 10.0A power supply for 4- and 7-slot ControlLogix chassis    SC
Grounded Unit -79GD Hinge mounted ground strap mounted on hinge of unit door. (Unit door grounding    SC
Door strap for IEC requirements.)
Unit — Select on plug-in units for sections with vertical plug-in ground Copper alloy   
Ground Stab bus. Unplated copper unit ground stab can also be used with
-79U steel vertical ground bus. Unplated copper   
-79UT(2) Tin plate copper   
Auxiliary -98 (3) Normally Open—One N.O. mounted on operating mechanism Disconnects  SC
Contacts (operates with movement of external handle only)
Circuit Breakers 
-99 (3) Normally Closed—One N.C. mounted on operating mechanism Disconnects 

(operates with movement of external handle only)
Circuit Breakers 
-790K(4) One Form C Aux mounted internally in Circuit Breaker 
-790L(4) Two Form C Aux mounted internally in Circuit Breaker 
-790A(4) One Form C Aux, One Form C Alarm mounted internally in Circuit Breaker 
-790T(4) One Form C Alarm mounted internally in Circuit Breaker 
-790B(4) Two Form C Aux, One Form C Alarm mounted internally in Circuit Breaker 
(1) Power supply options are mutually exclusive. See table on page 343 for supplied control circuit transformer.
(2) Unit Load Ground Connector and Unit Ground Stab plating must match, horizontal and vertical ground bus plating
(3) The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied is two in any combination. Contacts actuate with movement of unit handle to ON or OFF position only. Contacts
are not designed to actuate as a result of a circuit breaker trip. For such applications, auxiliary contacts -790K (G, H, and J) and -790A (all other frames) mounted internally must
be selected. Auxiliary contacts are supplied unwired.
(4) These are form C contacts. Each form C contact includes one N.O. and one N.C. contact. Internal auxiliary contacts -790K (G, H, and J) and -790A (all other frames) are wired to a 3-
point unmounted terminal block.

Table 245 - T-Handle, Wire Marker, and Nameplate Options

Option Option Description Bulletin 1756 Delivery
Number ControlLogix Chassis Program
2180L 2182L 2183L
T-Handle -111 T-Handle latches on unit door    SC
Control Wire -751D Adhesive Brady Datab type markers at each end of control wire.   SC
Markers
-751HS Heat shrink type wire marker   SC
(+2 days)
-751S Sleeve type wire marker   SC
Device Markers -751M Mylar Device Markers   
Unit Door — Door Nameplate Screws Plated steel nameplate screws.    SC
Nameplates Provided when cardholder or
Card Holder for Unit Doors 1.125'' x 3.625'' plastic card holders    SC-II
with blank cards
1.125” x 3.625” engraved 3-line nameplate or Acrylic plate (available in U.S. only).   
4-line nameplate Lettering is white with black letters
or black with white letters.
Phenolic plate. Lettering is white   
with black letters or black with
white letters.
Stainless Steel — Stainless steel nameplate screws for unit nameplate (2 per unit)   
Nameplate
Screws
Export Packing — Container is skid mounted and packaged in clear plastic. Packing is not watertight    SC
Below Deck or waterproof. Take considerations if extended storage is expected. (+2 days)

Chapter 19
Configuration Tables
IMPORTANT For Space Saving Units, please use Table 247.
Table 246 - Control Voltage Type for Bulletins 2102L, 2103L, 2106, 2107, 2112, 2113, 2122, and 2123
Control Voltage Code Control Type
208V 240V 380V 400V 415V 480V 600V
H A — — — B C 120V, 60 Hz, Transformer Control (1)
HD AD — — — BD CD 120V, 60 Hz, Separate Control (2)
— — N — I — — 110V, 50 Hz, Transformer Control (1),(3)
— — NS — IS — — 110V, 50 Hz, Separate Control (2)
— — — KN — — — 115V, 50 Hz, Transformer Control (1),(3)
— — — KNS — — — 115V, 50 Hz, Separate Control (2)
— — NP — — — — 220V, 50 Hz, Transformer Control (1),(3)
— — NP — — — — 220V, 50 Hz, Separate Control (2)
— — — KNP — — — 230V, 50 Hz, Transformer Control (1),(3)
— — — KNP — — — 230V, 50 Hz, Separate Control (2)
— — — — IT — — 240V, 50 Hz, Transformer Control (1),(3)
— — — — IT — — 240V, 50 Hz, Separate Control (2)
— — NLP — — — — 220V, 50 Hz, Line to Neutral Control, (Separate Control) (4),(5)
— — — KNLP — — — 230V, 50 Hz, Line to Neutral Control, (Separate Control) (4),(5)
— — — — ILT — — 240V, 50 Hz, Line to Neutral Control, (Separate Control) (4),(5)
H A — — — B C Common Control (6),(7)
(1) Select a control circuit transformer. See Options section.

(2) Control circuit fusing (option 21) and/or disconnect interlock (option 98) can be required to comply with NEC. See Options section.
(3) Incorporates primary taps for future conversion to new global IEC voltage standards (for example, 400V/115V/230V). Allows conversion without the need to replace transformers or
coils.
(4) Requires horizontal neutral bus and vertical neutral bus in 9” vertical wireway. Refer to Section Modifications to select.
(5) Select control circuit fusing (see option 21 in Options section).
(6) Select control circuit fusing (see option 22 in Options section). Required to comply with NEC.
(7) Common control not available for Bulletins 2112 and 2113 vacuum contactor starter units.

Table 247 - Control Voltage Type for Space Saving NEMA Bulletins 2106, 2107, 2112, and 2113
480V 600V
B C 120V, 60 Hz, Transformer Control (1)
BD CD 120V, 60 Hz, Separate Control (2)
(1) Select a control circuit transformer. See Options section.

(2) Control circuit fusing (option 21) and/or disconnect interlock (option 98) may be required to comply with NEC. See Options section.
Table 248 - Primary Voltage Code for Bulletins 2195, 2196, 2196Z, 2197, and 2197Z
240V 380V 400V 415V 480V 600V
A N KN I B C
Table 249 - Control Voltage Type for Bulletins 2154 and 2155
(1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
220V 230V 240V 380V 400V 415V 480V 600V
P — — N — I — — 110V, 50 Hz Transformer Control
— P — — KN — — — 115V, 50 Hz Transformer Control
— — A — — — B C 120V, 60 Hz Transformer Control
(1) Units at these voltages are not UL listed, C-UL listed, or CSA certified.
Table 250 - Control Voltage Type for Bulletins 2162 and 2163
220/230 P (1)
240 A
380 N (1)
400 KN (1)
415 I (1)
480 B
600 C
Potencia según código

Table 251 - Horsepower Ratings for All Bulletins(1)
Motor Number Motor Number Motor Number Motor Number
Hp Hp Hp Hp
0.125 30 3 38 40 46 250 56
0.25 31 5 39 50 47 300 57
0.33 32 7.5 40 60 48 350 58
0.50 33 10 41 75 49 400 59
0.75 34 15 42 100 50 450 60
1 35 20 43 125 51 500 61
1.5 36 25 44 150 52
2 37 30 45 200 54
(1) Not all HP ratings are available for all configurations. See PowerControl Builder™ tool for valid configuration options.

Table 252 - kW Ratings for Bulletins 2154, 2155, 2162, and 2163 (1)
kW Number kW Number
0.25 32K 37 47K
0.37 33K 45 48K
0.55 34K 55 49K
0.75 35K 75 50K
1.1 36K 90 51K
1.5 37K 110 52K
2.2 38K 132 53K
3.7 39K 150 54K
5.5 40K 160 55K
7.5 41K 185 56K
11 42K 200 57K
15 43K 220 58K
18.5 44K 250 59K
22 45K
30 46K
(1) kW rated units are not UL listed, C-UL listed, or CSA certified.

Table 253 - Fuse Clip Designator Selection and Power Fuse Selection for Bulletins 2106, 2112, and 2122
Fuse Clip Fuse Clip Type To select Fuse Clip Designator, To select Power Fuses,
Rating select code from one of these two columns. select power fuse manufacturer code from these
(Amperes) columns (1) (2).
When NO power fuses are When power fuses are selected, Power Fuse Manufacturer Code (5) Fuse Class
selected, select fuse clip select fuse clip designator from (per set)
designator from this column. this column (1) (2). Typical (T) Accel. Long (L) Accel. (2)
The ’20’ portion of your Fuse Clip Time Time
Designator (for example, 20J) <5s >5s
means that the fuse clip size and
power fuse is selected
automatically based on load
horsepower. (3) (4)
30 CC 24C 20C LT LL CC
30 J 24J 20J GT or BT GL or BL J
R 24R 20R R
H (1) 24 — —
R 25R 20R R
H (1) 25 — —
R 26R 20R R
H (1) 26 — —
R 27R 20R R
H (1) 27 — —
R 28R 20R R
H (1) 28 — —
R 29R 20R R
800 L 24L 20L GT or BT GL or BL L
(1) Power fuse option not available for Class H fuse clips or Space Saving NEMA starter units.
• To select power fuses for Bulletins 2106, 2112, and 2122:
• Then select power fuse manufacturer code and add to catalog string number (for example, 2106B-BABD-31GT-20J). Only use power fuse code when selecting power fuses.
(3) For Bulletins 2100D, 2102L, 2192F, and 2192M, see table on page 301. For Bulletin 2196, see page 303.
(4) Refer to the CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Power Fuses, publication 2100-TD003, for more information.
(5) Select power fuse manufacturer code by indicating choice of power fuse manufacturer—LT or LL = LittelFuse, GT or GL = Mersen, and BT or BL = Bussmann. When selecting
Bussmann or LittelFuse, delivery program changes to PE. The Mersen Class J fuse incorporates blown fuse indication for fuses above 8 A.

Table 254 - Fuse Clip Designator Selection and Power Fuse Selection for Bulletins 2100D, 2102L, 2192F and 2192M (1) (2)
Use this information to select a fuse clip designator. Use this information to select power fuses. (5) (6)
Fuse Clip Rating Fuse Clip Class Fuse Clip Power Fuse Power Fuse Power Fuse Fuse Class
(Amperes) Designator Rating (Amperes) Rating Code Manufacturer (7)
30(3) CC 24C 1 600 L (8) CC
3 601
6 602
10 603
15 604
20 605
25 606
30 607
J 24J 1 600 G or B (8) J
R 24R R
H (5) 24 3 601 —
6 602
10 603
15 604
20 605
25 606
30 607
60(3) J 25J 35 608 J
R 25R R
H (5) 25 40 609 —
45 610
50 611
60 612
100 J 26J 70 613 J
R 26R R
H (5) 26 80 614 —
90 615
100 616
200 J 27J 110 617 J
R 27R R
H (5) 27 125 618 —
150 619
175 620
200 621
400 J 28J 225 622 J
R 28R R
H (5) 28 250 623 —
300 624
350 625
400 626

Table 254 - Fuse Clip Designator Selection and Power Fuse Selection for Bulletins 2100D, 2102L, 2192F and 2192M (1) (2)
(continued)
Use this information to select a fuse clip designator. Use this information to select power fuses. (5) (6)
Fuse Clip Rating Fuse Clip Class Fuse Clip Power Fuse Power Fuse Power Fuse Fuse Class
(Amperes) Designator Rating (Amperes) Rating Code Manufacturer (7)
600 J 29J 450 627 G or B (8) J
R 29R 500 628 R
H (5) 29 600 629 —
(4)
L 23L 601 630 L
800 L 24L 601 630 L
700 631
800 632
1200 L 25L 1000 633 L
1200 634
1600 L 26L 1600 637 L
2000 L 27L 2000 639 L
(1) For Bulletins 2106, 2112, 2122, and 2154, see table on page 300. For Bulletin 2196, see page 303.
(2) Refer to the CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Power Fuses, publication 2100-TD003, for more information.
(3) Not available for Fusible Disconnect Switch Main (2192M).
(4) Available: G = Mersen, 601A only.
(5) Power fuse option is not available for Class H fuse clips.
(6) Available on 480V and 600V applications only. To select power fuses for Bulletins 2100D, 2102L, 2192F, and 2192M, combine power fuse rating code and power fuse
manufacturer code and add to catalog string number (for example, 2102LB-BKBD-24J-607G). Only use power fuse code when selecting power fuses. Dual 2192F units
require two sets of fuses. The fuse size code must correspond to the respective fuse clip designator code; the first fuse size code designates the fuse for the left side of
the dual unit, the second code is for the right side of the dual unit. The fuse manufacturer for both fuses must be the same (for example, 2192F-CAC-2524J-609602G).
(7) L = Littelfuse, G = Mersen, B = Bussmann. The Mersen Class J fuse incorporates blown fuse indication for fuses above 8 A.
(8) When selecting Bussmann or Littelfuse power fuses, delivery program changes to PE. Littelfuse power fuses are available only in Class CC fuses with blown fuse
indicators.
Table 255 - Fuse Clip Designator for Bulletin 2196 and 2196Z (1) (2)
Fuse Clip Size Fuse Clip Class Fuse Clip Designator Fuse Manufacturer Code (4)
(Select G or B)
30 J 24J G=Mersen
B=Bussmann
R 24R
H (3) 24
60 J 25J G=Mersen
B=Bussmann
R 25R
H (3) 25
100 J 26J G=Mersen
B=Bussmann
R 26R
H (3) 26
200 J 27J G=Mersen
B=Bussmann
R 27R
H (3) 27
(1) Only 24J option available for 2196Z units.

(2) See Appendix for short circuit current ratings. For fuse rating based upon kVA of transformer, see publication 2100-TD003. Selecting
Bussmann or Littelfuse power fuse changes delivery program to PE. Power fuses are not available for Class H fuse clip. Power fuses are
available on 480V and 600V only.
(3) Power fuse option not available for Class H fuse clip.
(4) The Mersen Class J fuse incorporates blown fuse indication for fuses above 8 A.

Table 256 - Trip Current for Bulletin 2103L

Contactor Rating (Amps) Trip Current (Amps) Number Contactor Rating (Amps) Trip Current (Amps) Number
30 or 60 15 30 200 or 300 125 41
20 31 150 42
30, 60, or 100 30 32 175 43
60 or 100 40 34 200 44
50 35 300 225 45
60 36 250 46
100, 200, or 300 70 37 (2) 300 48
80 38 (1)
90 39 (2)
100 40
(1) Available only on 100 A contactors.

(2) Available only on 100 A and 200 A contactors.
Table 257 - Trip Current for Bulletin 2197 and 2197Z

Trip Current Number Trip Current Number Trip Current Number
15 30 50 35 125 41
20 31 60 36 150 42
30 32 70 37 200 44
40 34 100 40

Table 258 - Circuit Breaker Type—Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breaker Options for Bulletin 2103L(1) (2)
Rating High Interrupting Capacity Extra High Interrupting Capacity Ultra High Interrupting
(Amperes) 100 kA at 240V 100 kA at 480V Capacity 100 kA at 600V
65 kA at 480V 35 kA at 600V (H…J Frame)
65 kA at 600V (K Frame)
Suffix Default Frame Suffix Optional Frame Suffix Default Frame Suffix Frame
30 (0.5 SF) TGM G6C3 THM H6C3 THX H0C3
30…70 TGM G6C3 THM H6C3 THX H0C3
100 TGM G6C3 THM H6F3 THX H0C3
200 TJM J6F3 -------- TJX J0F3
300 TKM K6F3 -------- TKX K0F3 TKU K15F3
(1) Refer to Appendix for short circuit current rating.

(2) Refer to the CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers, publication 2100-TD032, for more information.
Table 259 - Inverse Time (Thermal Mag or Solid State) Circuit Breakers
Rating High Interrupting Capacity Extra High Interrupting Capacity Ultra High Interrupting Capacity
(Amperes) 100 kA at 240V 100 kA at 480V 100 kA at 600V
100 kA at 480V 35 kA at 600V
Suffix Default Frame Suffix Default Frame Suffix Default Frame
200 VB TJM J6F3 TJX J0F3
400 VC TKM K6H3 TKX K0H3 TKU K15H3
600 VD TMM M6H3 TMX M0H3 ----- ------
Table 260 - Circuit Breaker Type for Bulletins 2107, 2113, and 2123(1)
MCP (Instantaneous) Inverse Time (Thermal Mag or Solid State) Circuit Breakers
NEMA High Interrupting Capacity High Interrupting Capacity Extra High Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 100 kA
Size 100 kA at 240V 100 kA at 240V Interrupting at 600V
100 kA at 480V 65 kA at 480V Capacity 100 kA at
480V
35 kA at 600V
Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame
Default Optional Default Optional Default Default Optional
1 TGA(2) MCP THA(3) (4) MCP TGM G6C3 THM H6C3 THX H0C3 THUL(5) H15H3 TJU(6) J15H3
(4) (5) (6)
2 TGA MCP THA MCP TGM G6C3 THM H6C3 THX H0C3 THUL H15H3 TJU J15H3
3 TGA MCP THA(4) MCP TGM G6C3 THM H6C3 THX H0C3 THUL(5) H15H3 TJU(6) J15H3
(4)
4 TJA MCP ----- ------ TJM J6F3 ----- ------ TJX J0F3 TKU K15H3 ------ ------
5 TKA(5) MCP ----- ------ TKM K6H3 ----- ------ TKX(5) K0H3 TKU K15H3 ------ ------
6 TMA MCP ----- ------ TMM M6H3 ----- ------ TMX M0H3 ----- ------ ------ ------
(1) Refer to CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection, publication 2100-TD032, for more information.
(2) 65 kA for 0…2 HP at 480V or less
(3) 42 kA for 0…3 HP at 600V
(4) 50 kA for 5…100 HP at 600V
(5) 65 kA at 600V.
(6) 100 kA at 600V.

Table 261 - Circuit Breaker Type for Space Saving NEMA Bulletins 2107 and 2113
MCP (Instantaneous) Inverse Time (Thermal Mag or Solid State) Circuit Breakers
NEMA High Interrupting Capacity High Interrupting Capacity Extra High
Size 65 kA at 480V 65 kA at 480V Interrupting Capacity
35 kA at 600V 65 kA at 480V
35 kA at 600V
Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame
Default Optional Default Optional Default
1 TGA MCP THA MCP TGM G6C3 THM H6C3 THX H0C3
2 TGA MCP THA MCP TGM G6C3 THM H6C3 THX H0C3
3 THA MCP ----- ------ THM H6F3 ----- ------ THX H0F3
4 TJA MCP ----- ------ TJM J6F3 ----- ------ TJX J0F3
Table 262 - Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breaker Options for Bulletin 2197
(Amperes) 100 kA at 240V 100 kA at 480V 100 kA at 600V
65 kA at 480V 35 kA at 600V
Suffix Default Frame Suffix Optional Frame Suffix Default Frame Suffix Default Frame
15…70 TGM G6C THM H6C THX H0C TJU J15C
80…125 TGM G6C THM H6F THX H0F TJU J15F
150 TJM J6F ----------- ----------- TJX J0F TJU J15F
200 TJM J6F ----------- ----------- TJX J0F TJU J15F
Table 263 - Circuit Breaker Type for Horsepower and kW Rated Units for Bulletins 2155H and 2155J
100 kA at 240V(1) 100 kA at 480V(1) 100 kA at 600V(1)
65 kA at 480V(1) 35 kA at 600V(1)
Suffix Default Frame Suffix Optional Frame Suffix Default Frame Suffix Default Frame
3…60 TGM G6C3 THM H6C3 THX H0C3 TJU J15F3
85 THM H6F3 ----- ------ THX H0C3 TJU J15F3
108 THM H6F3 ----- ------ THX H0F3 TJU J15F3
135 TJM J6F3 ----- ------ TJX J0F3 TKU K15H3
201 TJM J6F3 ----- ------ TJX J0F3 TKU K15H3
251 TKM K6H3 ----- ------ TKX K0H3 TKU K15H3
361 TKM K6H3 ----- ------ TKX K0H3 ----- ------
480 TMM M6H3 ----- ------ TMX M0H3 ----- ------
(1) For the unit combination Short Circuit Current Ratings and for more information, refer to publication 2100-TD032.

Table 264 - Circuit Breaker Type for Bulletins 2163Q, 2163R, 2163U, 2163V, 2163W, and 2163X(1)
Bulletin Voltage Duty Load High Interrupting Capacity Extra High Interrupting Capacity Ultra High
Rating 100 kA at 240V 100 kA at 480V Interrupting Capacity
65 kA at 480V 35 kA at 600V 100 kA at 600V
Frame/ TGM THM TJM TKM THX TJX TKX TJU TKU
Suffix
(2)
2163Q 380…415 Normal KW 0.37…30 0.37…37 0.37…37
480 Normal Hp 0.5…40 0.5…60 0.5 …60
480 Heavy Hp 0.5…40 0.5…50 0.5…50
600 Normal Hp 1…60
600 Heavy Hp 1…50
2163R 380…415 Normal KW 0.37…30 0.37…37 45…90 0.37…37 45…90
480 Normal Hp 0.5…40 0.5…60 60…150 125…200 0.5…60 60…150 125…200
480 Heavy Hp 0.5…40 0.5…60 60…200 150…200 0.5…60 60…200 150…200
600 Normal Hp 60…150 100…150 1…60 60…150 100…150
600 Heavy Hp 75…200 150 1…60 75…200 150
(3)
2163U 480 Normal Hp 10…50 10…50 60…150 125…200 10…50 60…150 125…200
480 Heavy Hp 1…50 1…50 60…150 125…150 1…50 60…150 125…150
600 Normal Hp 1…50 60…150 125…150
600 Heavy Hp 0.5…50 60…125 125
2163V 480 Normal Hp 10…50 10…50 60…150 125…200 10…50 60…150 125…200
480 Heavy Hp 1…50 1…50 60…150 125…150 1…50 60…150 125…150
600 Normal Hp 1…50 60…150 125…150
600 Heavy Hp 0.5…50 60…125 125
(2)
2163W 480 Normal Hp 0.5…20 0.5…20 0.5…20
600 Normal Hp 0.5…20
2163X 480 Normal Hp 0.5…20 0.5…20 0.5…20
600 Normal Hp 0.5…20
(1) Refer to the CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection Technical Data, publication 2100-TD032, for more information.
(2) Fusing is required, so T_U is not needed.
(3) This drive is not yet rated for 600V usage, therefore, there is no need to use T_U breakers.

Chapter 20
Hardware and Kits
Section Hardware and Kits for Field Installation

Table 265 - Section Hardware and Kits
Description Catalog Delivery
Number Program
Drip Hood Drip hood for NEMA Type 1, 1 w/ gasket and 12. Drip hood 10” wide 2100H-DH10 SC
IMPORTANT: NEMA is an overhang on top of a section. It provides
Types 1, 1 with gasket protection from limited amounts of liquid or dirt 20” wide 2100H-DH20
and 12 with drip hood dripping and/or running down the front of a section.
fulfill NEMA Type 2 Select one drip hood per section. Drip hoods fit 15” and 25” wide 2100H-DH25
requirements 20” deep sections.
30” wide 2100H-DH30
35” wide 2100H-DH35
40” wide 2100H-DH40
Pullbox 12'' high x 20'' wide For 15'' deep sections NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket 2100H-N2A1
NEMA Type 12 2100H-N2J1
For 20'' deep sections NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket 2100H-N2A2
NEMA Type 12 2100H-N2J2
12'' high x 25'' wide For 15'' deep sections NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket 2100H-N2AA1
NEMA Type 12 2100H-N2AJ1
For 20'' deep sections NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket 2100H-N2AA2
NEMA Type 12 2100H-N2AJ2
Top Horizontal For locating units with For use on Series A NEMA Type 1 2100H-NA4A1
Wireway Pan handle interlocks in the through E vertical
topmost space factor of a sections NEMA Type 1 w/gasket and Type 12 2100H-NA4J1
vertical section
For use on Series F NEMA Type 1 2100H-NA4A2
through current series
sections NEMA Type 1 w/gasket and Type 12 2100H-NA4J2
Horizontal Wireway Covers either top or bottom wireway opening at front of For 20'' wide vertical section 2100H-NWW20
Cover vertical section
For 25'' wide vertical section 2100H-NWW25

Table 265 - Section Hardware and Kits (continued)

Number Program
End Closing Plate Covers both top and For 15'' deep sections NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket 2100H-N3A1 SC
bottom horizontal wireway
openings and bus opening NEMA Type 12 2100H-N3J1
on one side of vertical
section only. For use with For 20'' deep sections NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket 2100H-N3A2
sidesheets having internal
c-channel mounting angle. NEMA Type 12 2100H-N3J2
End Closing Plates for Covers both top and For 15'' deep sections NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket 2100H-ECP1A(2)
Right Hand Sections bottom horizontal wireway
with Integral Mounting openings and bus opening NEMA Type 12 2100H-ECP1J(2)
Flanges on one side of vertical
section only. For use with For 20'' deep sections NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket 2100H-ECP2A(2)
sidesheets having internal
c-channel mounting angle. NEMA Type 12 2100H-ECP2J(2)
Bottom Closing Plate For 20'' wide x 15'' deep section NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 w/gasket 2100H-N1A1
MCC (non-gasketed plates)
For 20'' wide x 20'' deep section 2100H-N1A2
For 15'' deep corner section 2100H-N1A1C
For 20'' deep corner 2100H-N1A2C
section
External Mounting Two 1.5'' x 3'' mounting channels for a single section. For 20'' wide vertical section 2100H-NMC1
Channel Kits
IMPORTANT: Adding an external mounting channel adds For 25'' wide vertical section 2100H-NMC2
1.5'' to height of section.
For 30'' wide vertical section 2100H-NMC3
For 15'' deep corner section 2100H-NMC5
For 20'' deep corner section 2100H-NMC6
Unit Operating Handle Permits unit operating handle to be located above the NEC 6' 7'' handle-to-floor height 2100H-NE1
Extender limitation. Complies with NEC Article 404.8(A) and the UL Standard for Safety UL 845.
Space Heater Kit 200 watt, 120 volt strip heater with thermostat set at 25 °C (77 °F) 2100H-NH1
200 watt, 240 volt strip heater with thermostat set at 25 °C (77 °F) 2100H-NH2
(1)
Gasketing Kit Gasketing to cover the section perimeter of two 1.0 space factor doors or one 1.5 through 5.0 2100H-GJ10
space factor doors. For units mounted in series A through D sections.
(1) Cannot be air shipped.

(2) Kits come with three plates: one flat plate and two with formed edges.

Bus Kits, Splices, and Bus Isolation Hardware for Field Installation
Table 266 - Bus Kits, Splices and Bus Isolation Hardware
Number Program
Vertical Wireway Tie For use on vertical sections series C or later, with or without a vertical wireway. Includes five vertical 2100H-WWTB SC
Bar wireway tie bars. Mounts on right-hand sidesheet for sections with vertical wireway. Mounts on
right-hand and/or left-hand sidesheets for sections without vertical wireway.
Wiring Diagram For a central location of all wiring diagrams. Includes wiring diagram clip, clip location identification 2100H-WDH
Holder Kit label for outside of section and mounting instructions.
Touch-Up Paint (1) ANSI 49 medium light gray, 12 oz. spray can (cannot be used for NEMA Type 3R enclosures) 2100H-NP1
Vertical Ground Bus Contains vertical ground bus, hardware, and Zinc plated steel 2100H-GS1
Kit installation instructions
Contains vertical ground bus, six unit plug-in stabs, Unplated copper 2100H-N79U
hardware, and installation instructions
Tin plated copper 2100H-N79UT
Vertical Unit Load Contains vertical ground bus, six unit load connectors, Unplated copper 2100H-N79L
Ground Bus Kit hardware, and installation instructions
Tin plated copper 2100H-N79LT
Unit Load Ground Kit Hardware for connecting unit load ground wires to horizontal ground bus. Kit consists of two, 2100H-UG1
#14 AWG to #4 AWG, lugs and hardware. Horizontal ground bus can accommodate up to six 2100H-
UG1 kits.
Horizontal Power Bus Splice bars, hardware, and installation instructions for For 600 A aluminum, tin plated bus 2100H-NAT06
Splice Kit 3-phase splicing of NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with
gasket and Type 12 sections. One kit required per For 800 A aluminum, tin plated bus 2100H-NAT08
shipping split on front mounted lineups, two for back-
to-back. For 600 A copper, tin plated bus 2100H-NCT06
For 800 A copper, tin plated bus 2100H-NCT08
Splice bars, hardware and installation instructions for For 600 A aluminum, tin plated bus 2100H-ZAT06
3-phase splicing of NEMA Type I, Type I with gasket
and Type 12 sections. One of the sections has For 800 A aluminum, tin plated bus 2100H-ZAT08
horizontal power bus 5” deeper then normal (Bumped-
back Bus) For 600 A copper, tin plated bus 2100H-ZCT06
For 800 A copper, tin plated bus 2100H-ZCT08
Horizontal Ground One splice bar per kit, complete with hardware and For 0.25'' x 1'' unplated copper bus 2100H-NC1
Bus Splice Kit installation instructions. One kit required per shipping
split on front mounted lineups, two for back-to-back. For 0.25'' x 2'' unplated copper bus 2100H-NC2
For 0.25'' x 1'' tin plated copper bus 2100H-NTC1
For 0.25'' x 2'' tin plated copper bus 2100H-NTC2
(1) NO-OX-ID compound for bus bars and plug-in stabs 1-pint can 2100H-N18
NO-OX-ID
1-ounce tube 2100H-N18T

Table 266 - Bus Kits, Splices and Bus Isolation Hardware (continued)
Number Program
Neutral Connection 0.25'' x 2'' x 12'' copper tin plated bus plate with #6-250 Insulated from and mounted on top of 2100H-NPC1 SC
Plate Kit (2) kcmil lug (280 A capacity) horizontal wireway pan.
Insulated from and mounted to unit 2100H-NPC2
support pan for blank unit space. Blank
door not included. Select on page 132.
Insulated from and mounted on bottom 2100H-NPC3
horizontal wireway pan
0.25'' x 2'' x 12'' copper silver plated bus plate with #6- Insulated from and mounted on top of 2100H-NPS1
250 kcmil lug (280 A capacity) horizontal wireway pan
Insulated from and mounted to unit 2100H-NPS2
support pan for blank unit space. Blank
door not included. Select on page 132.
Insulated from and mounted on bottom 2100H-NPS3
horizontal wireway pan
Bus Stab Isolation Kit Protective caps—for unused plug-in stab openings. 36 per package. 2100H-N1
Manual shutters—for isolation of plug-in stab openings. 12 per package. 2100H-SM1
Available for use on vertical sections, series G through current series.
Automatic shutters—for isolation of plug-in stab openings. 12 per package. 2100H-SA1
Available for use on vertical sections, series G through current series.
Unit Isolating Barriers For closing the wire opening between unit and vertical wireway. 6 per package. Series K and later 2100H-N2K
structures.
(1) Cannot be air shipped.

(2) A neutral connection plate can be used only in sections with a vertical wireway. Not for use in sections with full width frame mounted units, including all mains.

Lugs for Field Installation

• Hardware not included.
• One lug per kit.
• For use on:
– Bulletin 2191 Mains and Feeders
– Bulletin 2192 400 A Disconnect with Optional Lug Pad Assembly(1)
– Bulletin 2192 600…1200 A Bolted Pressure Switches
– Bulletin 2193 with Optional Lug Pad Assembly(1)
Table 267 - Lugs

Description Figure # Catalog Number Delivery
Program
Lugs for Incoming Line Mechanical Lugs #6-350 kcmil CU/AL 1 2100H-80350 SC
Provisions (2-hole (for use with 42 kA bus bracing
standard NEMA 1-3/4” only when used with main or #6-350 kcmil (double barrel lug) CU/AL 2 2100H-80350DB
spacing for 1/2” feeder lug compartment, Bulletin For use on 600 A incoming line lug
hardware) 2191M or 2191F) compartments only (1)
#4/0-600 kcmil CU/AL 1 2100H-80600
One Lug per Kit
#4/0-600 kcmil (double barrel lug) CU/AL 2 2100H-80600DB
For use on 600 A incoming line lug
compartments only (1)
350-800 kcmil CU/AL 1 2100H-80800
Crimp Lugs 250 kcmil CU 3 2100H-82250
(Panduit Type LCC)
350 kcmil CU 3 2100H-82350
500 kcmil CU 3 2100H-82500
750 kcmil CU 3 2100H-82750
Crimp Lugs 250 kcmil CU/AL 3 2100H-83250
(Burndy YA-A series)
350 kcmil CU/AL 3 2100H-83350
500 kcmil CU/AL 3 2100H-83500
750 kcmil CU/AL 3 2100H-83750
Incoming Line Lug Insulating barrier for covering 1.0 space factor 2100H-NLB10
Barriers user's terminations in main bus lug
compartments 1.5 space factor 2100H-NLB15
2.0 space factor 2100H-NLB20
(1) NOT for use on incoming neutral bus. Use single conductor lug for incoming neutral bus applications.
(1) The lugs can only be used if the Bulletin 2192 400 A or Bulletin 2193 unit has been ordered with a factory installed lug pad assembly, for example, option code -82B500

Table 268 - Lug Dimensions

Lug Size Number of Cables Dimension ’A’ Refer to
Per Lug Figure
Mechanical Type
#6-350 kcmil 1 2.13” (54 mm) 1
#4/0-600 kcmil 1 2.31” (59 mm) 1
350-800 kcmil 1 2.25” (57 mm) 1
#6-350 kcmil 2 2.13” (54 mm) 2
#4/0-600 kcmil 2 2.13” (54 mm) 2
Figure 1
Crimp Type - CU (Panduit Type LCC)
250 kcmil 1 2.94” (75 mm) 3
350 kcmil 3.38” (86 mm)
500 kcmil 3.78” (96 mm)
750 kcmil 4.63” (118 mm)
Crimp Type - CU/AL (Burndy YA-A Series) Figure 3
250 kcmil 1 2.91” (74 mm) 3
350 kcmil 3.69” (94 mm) Figure 2
500 kcmil 4.44” (113 mm)
Lugs shown are drilled for 2-hole NEMA 1.75” spacing.
750 kcmil 4.94” (125 mm)
Unit Hardware and Kits for Field Installation Accesorios y kits de

instalaciones locales
Table 269 - Unit Hardware and Kits
Number Program
Control Station Housing Available for use on units Blank 2100H-N8 SC
series letter H through current
series. Housings for series A 1 hole—for one Bulletin 800T pilot device 2100H-N9
through G are no longer
available. 2 hole—for two Bulletin 800T pilot devices 2100H-N10
3 hole—for three Bulletin 800T pilot devices 2100H-N11
Control Station Mounting Blank (Bulletin 2103L and 2113 dual only) 2100H-N8D
Plate
1 hole—for one Bulletin 800T pilot device (Bulletin 2103L and 2113 dual only) 2100H-N9D
2 hole—for two Bulletin 800T pilot devices (Bulletin 2103L and 2113 dual only) 2100H-N10D
3 hole—for three Bulletin 800T pilot devices (Bulletin 2103L and 2113 dual only) 2100H-N11D
Door Hardware Kit Includes two door latch Series H or later 1.0 space factor 2100H-NDH2
assemblies and two door hinge
assemblies 0.5 space factor 2100H-NDH3
(1)
Door Hinge Kit Includes two hinges and two Series H or later 0.5 space factor door 2100H-NHP1
hinge pins
Series E or later 1.0 space factor (or larger) door 2100H-NHP2
Cardholder for Unit Doors 1.125'' x 3.625'' plastic card holders with blank cards 6 per package 2100H-CH1

Table 269 - Unit Hardware and Kits (continued)

Number Program
Unit Door Nameplates Engravable acrylic White background Blank (6 per package) 2100H-N3AW SC
(1.125'' x 3.625'') with black lettering
(not available in Canada) With legend 2100H-N3EAW
Black background Blank (6 per package) 2100H-N3AB
with white lettering
With legend 2100H-N3EAB
Engravable phenolic White background Blank (6 per package) 2100H-N3W
(1.125'' x 3.625'') with black lettering
With legend 2100H-N3EW
Red background Blank (6 per package) 2100H-N3R
With legend 2100H-N3ER
Black background Blank (6 per package) 2100H-N3B
With legend 2100H-N3EB
Master Nameplates Engravable phenolic White background With legend 2100H-N3EMW
(2” x 6”) with black lettering
Black background 2100H-N3EMB
Stainless Steel Nameplate Stainless steel nameplate screws for door or master nameplates (12 per package) 2100H-SSNS1
Screws
Unit Support Pan Style 1 for units 1.0 space factor or larger, series A NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 2100H-UAJ1
through D sections w/gasket and Type 12
Style 3 for units 1.0 space factor or larger, series E NEMA Enclosure Type 1 2100H-UA1
through current series (replaces style 2)
NEMA Enclosure Type 1 w/gasket 2100H-UJ1
and Type 12
Style 3 for units 0.5 space factor, with horizontally- NEMA Enclosure Type 1 2100H-USPA1
toggled unit operating handles and space-saving
NEMA starters, series E through current series NEMA Enclosure Type 1 w/gasket 2100H-USPJ1
(replaces style 2) and Type 12
(1) Use the table below for determining the quantity of hinge and hinge pin kits needed.
Table 270 - Quantity of Kits

Space Factor Quantity of Kits Needed
0.5 1
1.0 1
1.5 1
2.0 1
2.5 2
3.0 2
3.5 2
4.0 2
4.5 2
6.0 3

Unit Hardware and Kits for Field Installation, continued

Table 271 - Unit Hardware and Kits
Number Program
Plug-In Unit Permits installation of 0.5 space factor and NEMA Space Saving starter plug-in units into 0.5 space 2100H-R1 SC
Retrofit Kit existing series E through J CENTERLINE 2100 vertical section. Includes hinges, grounding factor
wire and extended unit door latches.
Greater than 2100H-R2
0.5 space
factor
Unit Insert Includes 0.5 space factor For expanding all 1.0 SF units and Series T and later 1.5 SF units(2) 2100H-NXT05B1
Extension Kit door and unit extension,
20 pull-apart terminals For expanding Series R and earlier 1.5 SF units and all 2.0 SF through 3.5 SF 2100H-
and hardware to increase units(2) NXT05B2
usable mounting space
of plug-in units
Unit Door Unit door is grounded by a hinge mounted ground wire. Mounts on bottom hinge of unit door. 2100H-GD1
Grounding Kit
Extended Reset Mounts externally to For small 0.38'' reset button screw head. Includes five reset button heads. 2100H-NRB1
Button Kit existing door overload
reset button. Allows For large 0.50'' reset button screw head. Includes five reset button heads. 2100H-NRB2
reset of overload relays
without use of tools
Pull-Apart Power terminal block 60 A, 3-pole block, accepts #4-#14 AWG wire. Not for use on 0.5 space factor 1492-ED103
Terminal Bocks units.
(1)
Control terminal block 25 A, 5-pole block, accepts #12-#20 AWG wire. Not for use on 0.5 space factor 1492-EC85
units.
Line Terminal Transparent For 30 A, 60 A, 100 A fusible disconnect. 10 per package. 2100H-NLT26
Shield polycarbonate
wraparound line terminal For 200 A fusible disconnect. Series A-M. 5 per package. 2100H-NLT27
shield permits visual
monitoring of conductors For 200 A fusible disconnect. Series N and later. 5 per package. 2100H-NLT28
and power terminations.
Replaces standard line For 400 A fusible disconnect. Series N and later. 5 per package. 2100H-NLT29
terminal shield. Not
available on 0.5 space
factor units.
External Permits mounting a For units with 30 A, 60 A, 100 A, or 200 A fusible disconnects. Units Series None required
Auxiliary maximum of two Bulletin A…N
Contact 1495-N8 (normally open)
Adapter Kits or 1495-N9 (normally For units with 400 A fusible disconnects. Unit Series 1495-N16
FOR FUSIBLE closed) auxiliary contacts A…C
DISCONNECT: on the unit operating
Not for use on mechanism, external to Unit Series 595-N1 (3)
0.5 space the disconnect. D…M
factor or dual- Unit Series None required
mounted units.
Auxiliaries are N
actuated by the For units with 600 A or 800 A fusible disconnects. Unit Series 1495-N13
unit operating C…L
handle.
Permits mounting a For units with 30 A, 60 A, 100 A, 200 A or 400 A fusible Unit Series 2100H-N21
maximum of two Bulletin disconnects. Q and later
2100H-N19 (normally
open) or 2100H-N20
(normally closed)
auxiliary contacts on the
unit operating
mechanism, external to
the disconnect.
The table is continued on the next page.


Number Program
External One Normally Open Must be used with external auxiliary adapter kit Unit Series Q 2100H-N19 SC
Auxiliary or later
Contact One Normally Closed 2100H-N20
FOR BOLTED Mounts one form C auxiliary contact on the operating mechanism, external to the bolted Unit Series Q 2100H-N26A
PRESSURE pressure switch and later
SWITCHES: For
2192F and Mounts two form C auxiliary contacts on the operating mechanism, external to the bolted 2100H-N26B
2192M 600A, pressure switch
800A and 1200A
units.
(1) Plug-in units have provision for a maximum of four pull-apart terminal blocks (any combination of 3-pole or 5-pole blocks). Not available on 0.5 space factor units.
(2) 1.5 space factor Bulletin 2193F with 225 A frame breakers, use kit 2100H-NXT05B2.
(3) Kit permits mounting of two Bulletin 595-A (normally open) or 595-B (normally closed) auxiliary contacts only. Not compatible with Bulletin 1495-NB or 1495-NP auxiliary contact
kits.
Table 272 - External Auxiliary Contact Kits

Number Program
External FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Mounts one form C auxiliary contact on the operating Unit Series 2100H-N18A SC
Auxiliary For 0.5 space factor units. mechanism, external to the breaker. Allen-Bradley G, H, J, K, M, P…Y
Contact Kits Auxiliaries are actuated by N, and R Frame.
the unit operating handle
only and will not reflect a Mounts two form C auxiliary contacts on the operating 2100H-N18B
circuit breaker trip mechanism, external to the breaker. Allen-Bradley G, H, J, K, M,
N, and R Frame.
FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Mounts one form C auxiliary contact on the operating Unit Series 2100H-N25A
For dual 2103, 2113, and 2193F mechanism, external to the breaker. Allen-Bradley G, H, J, K, M, Q…Y
units N, and R Frame.
Mounts two form C auxiliary contacts on the operating 2100H-N25B
mechanism, external to the breaker. Allen-Bradley G, H, J, K, M,
N, and R Frame.
External Permits mounting a For units with dual circuit breakers only. Allen-Bradley G, H, J, Unit Series 2100H-N16 SC
Auxiliary maximum of two Bulletin K, M, N, and R Frame. K…N
Contact 1495-N8 (normally open) or
Adapter Kits 1495-N9 (normally closed) For units with single circuit breakers only. Allen-Bradley G, H, 2100H-N17
FOR auxiliary contacts on the unit J, K, M, N, and R Frame.
CIRCUIT operating mechanism,
BREAKERS: external to the circuit For units with 250 A J-Frame and 400A K-Frame. Unit Series 1495-N16
Not for use breaker C…G
on 0.5 space For units with Cutler-Hammer . Unit Series 1495-N13
factor units.
Auxiliaries C…N
are actuated For units with Cutler-Hammer 800 A M-Frame. Unit Series
by the unit C…N
operating
handle only Allen Bradley G-R Frame MCPs. Unit Series
and will not N
reflect a
circuit Permits mounting a For units with single circuit breakers only. Allen-Bradley Units Series 2100H-N22
breaker trip. maximum of two normally Frames G-K Q…Y
open (2100H-N19) or normally
closed (2100H-N20) auxiliary For units with Allen-Bradley Frames M-R. Unit Series 2100H-N23
contacts on the unit Q…Y
operating mechanism,
external to the circuit
breaker

Table 273 - Inverse Time Branch Breakers

Description 1-Pole 120/240V AC, 2-Pole 120/240V AC, 3-Pole 120/240V AC, Delivery
10 kA rms 10 kA rms 10 kA rms Program
symmetrical symmetrical symmetrical
interrupting interrupting interrupting
capacity capacity capacity
Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Bolt-on Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Branch 15 A 2100-B1015 2100-B2015 2100-B3015 SC
Breakers for Lighting Panels (2193LE) (1)
20 A 2100-B1020 2100-B2020 2100-B3020
30 A 2100-B1030 2100-B2030 2100-B3030
15 A w/ground fault 2100-B1015G — —
20 A w/ground fault 2100-B1020G — —
50 A — 2100-B2050 2100-B3050
100 A — 2100-B2100 2100-B3100
Filler plates 2100-FILLER — —
(10 per package)
1-Pole 277V AC, 2-Pole 480Y/277V 3-Pole 480Y/277V
14 kA rms AC, 14 kA rms AC, 14 kA rms
symmetrical symmetrical symmetrical
interrupting interrupting interrupting
capacity capacity capacity
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Branch Breakers 15 A 2100-GHB1015 2100-GHB2015 2100-GHB3015 PE
for Panel Board Plug-In Unit (2193PP) (2)
20 A 2100-GHB1020 2100-GHB2020 2100-GHB3020
25 A 2100-GHB1025 2100-GHB2025 2100-GHB3025
30 A 2100-GHB1030 2100-GHB2030 2100-GHB3030
35 A 2100-GHB1035 2100-GHB2035 2100-GHB3035
40 A 2100-GHB1040 2100-GHB2040 2100-GHB3040
50 A 2100-GHB1050 2100-GHB2050 2100-GHB3050
60 A 2100-GHB1060 2100-GHB2060 2100-GHB3060
70 A 2100-GHB1070 2100-GHB2070 2100-GHB3070
80 A 2100-GHB1080 2100-GHB2080 2100-GHB3080
90 A 2100-GHB1090 2100-GHB2090 2100-GHB3090
100 A 2100-GHB1100 2100-GHB2100 2100-GHB3100
Filler plates 2100-FILLER — — SC
(10 per package)
(1) Bolt-on branch breaker frame type for lighting panel boards is BAB.
(2) Bolt-on branch breaker frame type for plug-in panel board unit is GHB.


Description Frame Size Style Catalog Number Delivery
Program
140G Handle Repair Kit - includes handle, G Right 2100H-HOAGR SC
mounting base, bail, and hardware
Left 2100H-HOAGL SC
Horizontal 2100H-HOAGH SC
H Right 2100H-HOAHR SC
Left 2100H-HOAHL SC
Horizontal 2100H-HOAHH SC
J Right 2100H-HOAJR SC
Horizontal 2100H-HOAJH SC
K Right 2100H-HOAKR SC
M 2193 Mains and 2100H-HOAM2 SC
Feeders
Frame Mount 2100H-HOAMF SC
N Right 2100H-HOANR SC

Network Hardware and Kits for Field Installation

Table 275 - Network Hardware and Kits
Number Program
(2)
DeviceNet® DeviceNet scanner module for Bulletins 2180E, 2182E, and 2183E For Bulletin 1771 I/O 1771-SDN (2)
Scanner Modules chassis
(2)
DeviceNet scanner module for Bulletins 2180J, 2182J, and 2183J For SLC 500 chassis 1747-SDN
(2)
DeviceNet scanner module for Bulletins 2180L, 2182L, and 2183L For Bulletin 1756 1756-DNB
chassis
MCC DeviceNet Includes the necessary DeviceNet connectors and resistors to terminate the DeviceNet cable system in 2100H-DNTR1 SC
Terminating a motor control center. IMPORTANT: if terminating resistors are not used, the DeviceNet cable system
Resistor Kit will not operate correctly. This kit is shipped with each DeviceNet motor control center.
(2)
DeviceNet Two 120 ohm, 5% terminating a DeviceNet trunk cable. 1485A-C2
Terminating IMPORTANT: if terminating resistors are not used, the DeviceNet cable system will not operate
Resistors correctly.
Double DeviceNet Allows two DeviceNet cables to be independently connected to a single DeviceNet port in the MCC 1485P-P1J5-UU5 (2)
Connector vertical wireway.
DeviceNet For covering unused DeviceNet connectors in the vertical wireway of a DeviceNet MCC. 6 per package. 2100H-DNCC1 SC
Connection Cover
Kit
DeviceNet Unit Cable used for connecting DeviceNet MCC units to the DeviceNet ports in 18 in. (45.7 cm) 2100H-DNUC18
Cable vertical wireway. Includes cable and one connector on each end of the cable.
36 in. (91.4 cm) 2100H-DNUC36
60 in. (152.4 cm) 2100H-DNUC60
Round DeviceNet 8 A round DeviceNet cable with one connector on each end for connecting a 10 ft. (305 cm) 2100H-ICPC120
Cable with laptop computer to a DeviceNet port in an IntelliCENTER or DeviceNet MCC
Connectors
(2)
DeviceNet Trunk 8 A flat DeviceNet cable used for trunk lines 246 ft. (75 m) 1485C-P1E75
Line Cable (1)
8A Round 8 A round DeviceNet cable used for drop lines 164 ft. (50 m) 2100H-DNRC1 SC
DeviceNet Cable (1) (2)
8 A round DeviceNet cable uses for extending the trunk line beyond the MCC. 246 ft. (75 m) 1485C-P1BS75
Class I, shielded cable
DeviceNet Field Includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that aid in starting up DeviceNet systems, 2100H-DFSK2 SC
Support Kit commissioning DeviceNet nodes, testing DeviceNet devices and training on DeviceNet. See the Field
Support Kit for CENTERLINE MCCs with IntelliCENTER Technology, publication MCC-TD001, for complete
information.
Ethernet Patch Teal 600V PLTC, used for internal MCC connections. Can be used for external MCC Connections. Replace 1585J-M8HBJM-* (2)
Cord ‘*’ with length desired. Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales
representative to ensure valid catalog string or for cables with angled connectors.
(2)
Stratix Switch Stratix switch used in standard design for all IntelliCENTER MCC with 6-Port 1783-BMS6TL
EtherNet/IP™ network orders. Other versions are available. Contact your local
Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative for 10-Port 1783-BMS10CL
details.
(1) Refer to the DeviceNet Media Design and Installation Guide, publication DNET-UM072, for application information.
(2) Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative for ordering information.

Appendix A
Appendix
Approximate Dimensions
For additional details, see Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference,
publication 2100-TD018.
All 6.0 space factor units are frame mounted and do not have a vertical wireway.
Fron Fron
Bottom Bottom
View View
Rear
Rear

Appendix A CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers
Table 276 - Section Dimensions

Dimension 15'' Deep 20'' Deep
20” Wide 25” Wide 30” Wide 35” Wide 20” Wide 25” Wide 30” Wide 35” Wide
inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm)
A 9.13 (232) 9.13 (232) 9.13 (232) 9.13 (232) 14.13 (359) 14.13 (359) 14.13 (359) 14.13 (359)
B 11.56 (294) 11.56 (294) 11.56 (294) 11.56 (294) 16.56 (421) 16.56 (421) 16.56 (421) 16.56 (421)
C 15.00 (381) 15.00 (381) 15.00 (381) 15.00 (381) 20.00 (508) 20.00 (508) 20.00 (508) 20.00 (508)
D 20.00 (508) 25.00 (635) 30.00 (762) 35.00 (889) 20.00 (508) 25.00 (635) 30.00 (762) 35.00 (889)
E 10.00 (254) 12.50 (318) 15.00 (381) 17.50 (445) 10.00 (254) 12.50 (318) 15.00 (381) 17.50 (445)
IMPORTANT Optional external mounting channels add 1.5” to height. See page 308 for mounting channels.

CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Appendix A
25” Section 10” Section
"A"
(L1)
"A"
(L2)
"A"
(L3)
1.12
7.50 [191]
[28]
1.25
10.00 [254]
[32]
B
A
Fron POWER
WIRES
Bottom
Rear
Table 277 - 25” Wide Section with 9” Wireway (90” High) Table 278 - 10” Incoming Line Section
Dimensions Section Dimensions Section
Depth Depth
15” Deep 20” Deep 15” Deep 20” Deep
inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm)
A 9.13 (232) 14.13 (359) A 12.75 (324) 17.75 (451)
B 11.56 (294) 16.56 (421) B 14.75 (375) 19.75 (502)
C 15.00 (381) 20.00 (508)
IMPORTANT Optional external mounting channels add 1.5” to height. Refer to page 308 for mounting channels.

NEMA Type 3R and Type 4 Section (90” high) Corner Section (90” high)
92.50"
(2350 m)
Top View
Front
Table 279 - NEMA Type 3R and Type 4 Section (90” high) Table 280 - Corner Section (90” high)
Floor Plan Interior Section Width Dimension Section Depth
Dimensions
20” 25” 30” 15” Deep 20” Deep
inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm)
A 25.00 (635) 30.00 (762) 35.00 (889) A 25.13 (638) 30.13 (765)
B 13.75 (349) 16.25 (413) 18.75 (476) B 12.63 (321) 15.13 (384)
C 11.25 (286) 13.75 (349) 16.25 (413) C 16.81 (427) 21.81 (554)
D 8.87 (225) 11.37 (289) 13.87 (352) NOTE: Optional external mounting channels add 1.5” to height. Refer
to page 308 for mounting channels.
NOTE: Optional non-removable lifting angle add 3.63” to height.

NOTE: Cross-
hatched areas (3) are
not available when
horizontal power bus
or disconnecting
means are specified.
Front
Bottom
View
Rear

Dimension Section Dimension Section Width
Depth
15” Deep 20” Deep 20” 25” 30” 35” 40”
inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm)
(1)
A 9.13 (232) 14.13 (359) A 17.25 (438) 22.25 (565) 27.25 (692) 32.25 (819) 37.25 (946)
B 11.00 (294) 16.56 (421) B 16.50 (419) 21.50 (546) 26.50 (673) 31.50 (800) 36.50 (927)
C 15.00 (381) 20.00 (508) C 5.25 (133) 7.75 (197) 10.25 (260) 12.75 (324) 15.25 (387)
(1) When horizontal bus or a disconnecting means (switch or circuit breaker) is specified, the dimension of width in the center of the column is 5" less than A.
IMPORTANT Optional external mounting channels add 1.5” to height. Refer to page 308 for mounting channels.

71" high column with neutral bus shown in both upper and lower positions
20" 20"
(508 mm) (508 mm)
2.50" 2.50"
A (64 mm) (64 mm)
70.48" 70.48"
(1790.19 mm) (1790.19 mm)
71" high section

(1803.4 mm)

Dimensions Section Depth
15” Deep 20” Deep
inch (mm) inch (mm)
A 15.00 (380) 20.00 (508)
B 14.75 (374) 19.75 (500)
C 5.12 (130) 10.12 (256)
D 4 (101) 8 (203)
E — — 4.40 (112)
IMPORTANT See page 319 for details of cabinet bottom.

Table 283 - Bus Bar Dimensions

Amp Material Thickness Width
600 Copper/Tin 0.125 3 in.
Copper/Silver 0.125
Aluminum/Tin 0.125 4 in.
Copper/Silver 0.125
Aluminum/Tin 0.1875
Copper/Silver 0.250
Copper/Silver 0.250
0.375
Copper/Silver 0.250 4 in.
0.375
2500/3000 Copper/Tin 0.375 4 in.
Copper/Silver 0.375
1600 Copper/Tin 0.500” 4 in.
Copper/Silver 0.500”
2000 Copper/Tin 0.625” 4 in.
Copper/Silver 0.625”

Motor Control Center Construction

Table 284 - Structural Specifications
Caract. Constructivas CCM
Major Structural Components Nominal Thickness Approximate

Gauge (AWG)
inches mm
Side Plates 0.075 1.905 14
Reinforcing ’C’ Channel 0.09 2.286 13
Backplate 20” Wide 0.06 1.524 16
Backplate 25” Wide 0.075 1.905 14
Backplate 30” - 40” Wide 0.105 2.667 12
Bottom Mounting Angle 0.134 3.404 10
Right-Hand Unit Support 0.075 1.905 14
Covers and Panels
Top Plate (all widths) 0.075 1.905 14
Bottom Plate 0.075 1.905 14
External End Plate 0.075 1.905 14
Horizontal Wireway Cover 0.060 1.524 16
Wireway Baffle 0.075 1.905 14
Top Horizontal Wireway Pan 0.060 1.524 16
Doors
Unit Door (1.0…5.0 Space Factor) 0.075 1.905 14
Unit Door (6.0 Space Factor) 0.105 2.667 12
Vertical Wireway Door 0.060 1.524 16
Other Steel
Pull Box Parts 0.075 1.905 14
Unit Wrap Around 0.075 1.905 14
Unit Support Pan 0.075 1.905 14
Approximate Weights of CENTERLINE Motor Control Center Sections

Table 285 - Section Weights (approximate)
MCC Section Dimensions NEMA 1 or 12 NEMA 3R or 4
Lbs. (kg) Lbs. (kg)
per section (1) per section (1)
15”/20” D, 20” W 750 (340) 950 (431)
15”/20” D, 25” W 750 (340) 1000 (454)
15”/20” D, 30” W 800 (363) 1050 (477)
15”/20” D, 35” W 800 (363) N/A
(1) Weights are based on worst case approximations.

MCC Finish
Table 286 - NEMA Type Finishes
NEMA Type Finish
1, 1G, 12 ANSI 49, Medium Light Grey
3R High Gloss White (inside only)
Cross Reference Chart - NEMA/UL to IEC

Table 287 - NEMA/UL/IEC Enclosure Cross-Reference (approximate)
NEMA Compliance to IP Protection Rating(1)
Type
10 20 21 22 23 30 31 32 33 40 41 42 43 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67
1     
2      
3                         
3R        
3S                         
4                           
4X                           
6                            
12                          
13                          
(1) IEC 529 has no equivalent to NEMA enclosure Types 7, 8, 9, 10, or 11.
Table 288 - Degree of Protection Against Foreign Body Entrance

First Protection Description Second Protection Description
Digit Digit
Number Number
0 No protection against entrance of solid foreign bodies 0 No protection
1 Protection against entrance of large (>50 mm) solid foreign 1 Protection against drops of condensed vertically dripping water
bodies; accidental contact with a hand
2 Protection against entrance of medium (>12 mm) solid foreign 2 Protection against drops of liquid falling at any angle up to 15
bodies; finger-proof degrees from vertical
3 Protection against entrance of small (2.5 mm thick) solid foreign 3 Protection against sprayed water at any angle up to 60 degrees
bodies; tools from vertical
4 Protection against entrance of small (>1 mm thick) solid foreign 4 Protection against splashing; liquid splashed from any direction
bodies; fine tools and wire shall have no harmful effect
5 Protection against the entrance of dust in an amount sufficient 5 Protection against water projected by a nozzle from any
to interfere with satisfactory operation of the enclosed direction
equipment.
6 Complete protection against entrance of dust 6 Protection against conditions on ship decks
7 Protection against immersion in water
8 Protection against indefinite immersion in water

Full-load Currents - Horsepower Rated Motors

The full-load currents that are listed in Table 289 are average values for horsepower rated motors of several manufacturers at the
more common rated voltages and speeds. Use these average values, along with the similar values listed in the NEC/UL/C-UL, as a
guide for selecting suitable components for the motor branch circuit. The rated full load current, which is shown on the motor
nameplate, can vary considerably from the listed value, depending on the specific motor design.
IMPORTANT Use the motor nameplate full-load current to determine the rating of the devices used for motor running overcurrent
protection.
Table 289 - Full-load Currents - Horsepower Rated Motors

HP RPM Full-load Current HP RPM Full-load Current
208V 240V 480V 600V 208V 240V 480V 600V
0.25 3600 1.20 1.04 0.52 0.42 40 3600 111 96.0 48.0 38.4
1800 1.39 1.20 0.60 0.48 1800 117 102 50.8 40.6
1200 1.62 1.40 0.70 0.56 1200 119 103 51.7 41.4
0.33 3600 1.48 1.28 0.64 0.51 50 3600 141 122 61.2 49.0
1800 1.69 1.46 0.73 0.58 1800 144 125 62.3 49.8
1200 1.89 1.64 0.82 0.66 1200 147 127 63.4 50.7
0.50 3600 2.08 1.80 0.90 0.72 60 3600 165 143 71.6 57.3
1800 2.54 2.20 1.10 0.88 1800 172 149 74.3 59.4
1200 2.89 2.50 1.25 1.00 1200 173 150 74.9 59.9
0.75 3600 2.89 2.50 1.25 1.00 75 3600 204 177 88.5 70.8
1800 3.47 3.00 1.50 1.20 1800 211 183 91.4 73.1
1200 3.81 3.30 1.65 1.32 1200 215 186 93.1 74.5
1 3600 3.51 3.04 1.52 1.22 100 3600 267 231 116 92.6
1800 4.25 3.68 1.84 1.47 1800 276 239 119 95.5
1200 4.60 3.98 1.99 1.59 1200 281 243 122 97.2
1.5 3600 5.04 4.36 2.18 1.74 125 3600 333 288 144 115
1800 5.80 5.02 2.51 2.01 1800 340 294 147 118
1200 6.49 5.62 2.81 2.25 1200 347 300 150 120
2 3600 6.51 5.64 2.82 2.26 150 3600 397 344 172 138
1800 7.18 6.22 3.11 2.49 1800 404 350 175 140
1200 8.20 7.10 3.55 2.84 1200 414 358 179 143
3 3600 9.24 8.00 4.00 3.20 200 3600 524 454 227 182
1800 10.4 9.04 4.52 3.62 1800 531 460 230 184
1200 11.6 10.1 5.04 4.03 1200 538 466 233 186
5 3600 15.7 13.6 6.80 5.44 250 3600 642 556 278 222
1800 15.9 13.8 6.88 5.50 1800 658 570 285 228
1200 18.6 16.1 8.07 6.46 1200 682 590 295 236
7.5 3600 22.1 19.1 9.57 7.66 300 3600 774 670 335 268
1800 25.0 21.7 10.8 8.66 1800 790 684 342 274
1200 26.6 23.1 11.5 9.22 1200 804 696 348 278
10 3600 29.7 25.7 12.9 10.3 350 3600 — 748 374 299
1800 31.5 27.3 13.7 10.9 1800 — 762 381 305
1200 32.9 28.4 14.2 11.4 1200 — 774 387 310
15 3600 43.0 37.2 18.6 14.9 400 3600 — 874 437 350
1800 46.7 40.4 20.2 16.2 1800 — 892 446 357
1200 49.1 42.5 21.3 17.0 1200 — 902 451 361
20 3600 59.2 51.3 25.6 20.5 450 3600 — 972 486 389
1800 59.6 51.6 25.8 20.6 1800 — 992 496 397
1200 61.7 53.4 26.7 21.4 1200 — 1004 502 402
25 3600 70.9 61.4 30.7 24.6 500 3600 — 1074 537 430
1800 74.7 64.7 32.3 25.9 1800 — 1096 548 438
1200 76.0 65.8 32.9 26.3 1200 — 1108 554 443
30 3600 85.7 74.2 37.1 29.7
1800 88.2 76.4 38.2 30.5
1200 91.6 79.3 39.7 31.7

Full-load Currents - kW Rated Motors

The full-load currents that are listed in Table 290 are average values for kW rated motors of several manufacturers at the more
common rated voltages and speeds. Use these average values as a guide for selecting suitable components for the motor branch
circuit. The rated full load current, which is shown on the motor nameplate, can vary considerably from the listed value, depending
on the specific motor design.
IMPORTANT Use the motor nameplate full-load current to determine the rating of the devices used for motor running overcurrent
protection.
Table 290 - Full-load Currents- kW Rated Motors

kW Full-load Current (Amperes)
Average Values for 4-Pole (1500 rpm) Motors
220V 230V (1) 380V 400V (1) 415V
0.25 1.40 1.34 0.88 0.83 0.80
0.37 2.10 2.00 1.20 1.18 1.16
0.55 2.75 2.60 1.50 1.47 1.45
0.75 3.50 3.30 2.10 2.00 1.90
1.1 4.40 4.20 2.60 2.50 2.40
1.5 6.00 5.70 3.50 3.30 3.20
2.2 8.70 8.30 5.00 4.80 4.60
3.7 14 13.4 8.20 7.80 7.50
5.5 20 19.1 11.5 10.9 10.5
7.5 27 25.8 15.5 14.8 14.2
11 39 37.3 22 21.1 20.5
15 52 50 30 29 28
18.5 64 61 37 36 35
22 75 72 44 42 40
30 103 99 60 57 55
37 126 121 72.5 69 66
45 147 141 85 82 80
55 182 174 105 100 96
75 239 229 138 136 135
90 295 282 170 167 165
110 356 341 205 202 200
132 425 407 245 236 230
150 484 463 280 269 260
160 520 497 300 286 275
185 580 555 340 324 312
200 640 612 370 353 340
220 710 679 408 395 385
250 — — 475 461 450
(1) These values are calculated.

Como identifica los
CB electronico o
termomagnetico
Inverse Time Thermal Magnetic Trip or Electronic Trip Circuit Breaker Short
Circuit Current Ratings
Table 291 - Inverse Time Thermal Magnetic Trip or Electronic Trip Circuit Breaker Short Circuit Current Ratings
Circuit Breaker Frame Circuit Breaker Trip Type Short Circuit Current Ratings (rms symmetrical Amperes)
Code Breaker
Suffix 208V, 230V, 240V 380…415V, 480V 600V(1)
G6C3 G-Frame (125 A) TGM Inverse Time (Thermal 100 kA 65 kA —

Magnetic)
H6C3 H-Frame (125 A) THM Inverse Time (Thermal 100 kA 65 kA —
up to 70 A Magnetic)
H6F3 H-Frame (125 A) THM Inverse Time (Thermal 100 kA 65 kA —
above 70 A Magnetic)
H6H3 H-Frame (125 A) THML Inverse Time (Electronic) 100 kA 65 kA —
H0C3 H-Frame (125 A) THX Inverse Time (Thermal — 100 kA —
up to 70 A Magnetic)
H0F3 H-Frame (125 A) THX Inverse Time (Thermal — 100 kA 35 kA
H0H3 H-Frame (125 A) THXL Inverse Time (Electronic) — 100 kA 35 kA
H15H3 H-Frame (125 A) THUL Inverse Time (Electronic) — — 42 kA
J6F3 J-Frame (250 A) TJM Inverse Time (Thermal 100 kA 65 kA —
Magnetic)
J15C3 J-Frame TJU Inverse Time (Thermal — — 100 kA
(160 A) up to 70 A Magnetic)
J15F3 J-Frame (160 A) TJU Inverse Time (Thermal — — 100 kA
J0F3 J-Frame (250 A) TJX Inverse Time (Thermal — 100 kA 35 kA
Magnetic)
K6H3 K-Frame (400 A) TKM Inverse Time (Electronic) 100 kA 65 kA —
K15H3 K-Frame (400 A) TKU Inverse Time (Electronic) — — 100 kA
K0H3 K-Frame (400 A) TKX Inverse Time (Electronic) — 100 kA 65 kA
K15H3 K-Frame (400 A) TKU Inverse Time (Electronic) — — 100 kA
M6H3 M-Frame (800 A) TMM Inverse Time (Electronic) 100 kA 65 kA —
M0H3 M-Frame (800 A) TMX Inverse Time (Electronic) — 100 kA 42 kA
N6H3 N-Frame TNM Inverse Time (Electronic) 100 kA 65 kA —
(1200 A)
N0H3 N-Frame TNX Inverse Time (Electronic) — 100 kA 65 kA
(1200 A)
R15I3 R-Frame TRUG Inverse Time (Electronic) 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA
(3000 A)
(1) For Bulletin 2107, 2113, and 2123 short circuit current rating is 65 kA at 600 V.

3-Pole Inverse Time Circuit Breaker Characteristics for Bulletin 2193F and 2193M
Units
Table 292 - 3-Pole Inverse Time Circuit Breaker Characteristics for Bulletin 2193F and 2193M Units
Rating CB Frame Thermal Mag Trip Unit Electronic Trip Units (with interchangeable rating plugs)(2)
(Amperes)
Interchangeable Non-interchangeable LSI LSIG
125 G — STD — —
125 H STD 50…125 A STD up to 40 A Optional 25 A, 60 A, 100 A, 125 A Optional 25 A, 60 A, 100 A, 125 A(3)
250 J STD 80…250 A STD up to 70 A Optional 40 A, 60 A, 100 A, 150 A, Optional 40 A, 60 A, 100 A, 150 A,
250 A 250 A(3)
400 K STD — STD Optional(3)
800(1) M STD — STD Optional
1200 N STD — STD Optional
3000 R STD — — STD
(1) Sealed to be suitable for reverse-fed applications. Trip units are not interchangeable. Rating plugs are interchangeable.
Trip units are provided with test points for functional field testing with a portable electronic test set. These trip units incorporate a powered thermal memory that recalls near trip
conditions and automatically imposes a shorter time delay, thereby preventing system damage from cumulative overheating. These units also incorporate an unpowered thermal
memory feature that remembers a trip has occurred and will protect against repeated overload conditions if the CB is re-closed before a sufficient cool down period has elapsed.
(2) Definitions are as follows:
• LSI: optional trip unit that provides additional flat response short time delay adjustments with an instantaneous setting.
• LSIG: optional LSI unit with ground fault protection and adjustable pickup current and time delay.
(3) This unit is engineered.

UL/C-UL/CSA Short Circuit Ratings for Combination Fusible Disconnect Units

Table 293 - UL/C-UL/CSA Short Circuit Ratings for Combination Fusible Disconnect Units
Fuse Class Device/Bulletin Size/Rating Short Circuit Current Ratings
(Amperes rms Symmetrical)
UL/C-UL/CSA
(except where noted)
600V or less
CC 2102L 30 A 100 kA
2106, 2112, 2122 #1 100 kA
2106, 2112 Space Saving NEMA #1 100 kA
H 2102L 30…100 A 5 kA
2102L 200…300 A 10 kA
2106, 2112, 2122 #1…3 5 kA
2106, 2112, 2122 #4…5 10 kA
2112 #6 10 kA
2112 Vacuum Contactor Starters 200 A, 400 A, 600 A 10 kA
2196 10 kA
J, R 2102L 30…100 A 100 kA
2102L 200…300 A 100 kA
2106, 2112, 2122 #1…3 100 kA
2106, 2112, 2122 #4…5 100 kA
2106, 2112 Space Saving NEMA #1 100 kA
2112 #6 100 kA
2112 Vacuum Contactor Starters 200 A, 400 A, 600 A 100 kA
2196 100 kA
L 2112 #6 100 kA

UL/C-UL/CSA Short Circuit Ratings for Combination Soft Starter Units (SMCs)
Table 294 - Combination Fusible Disconnect Soft Starter Units for Bulletin 2154H and 2154J
Bulletin Number SMC Device Rating Fuse Class Short Circuit Current Ratings (Amperes rms Symmetrical)
240V 480V 600V
2154H 3…85 A J 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA
108…135 A 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA
2154J 5…85 A 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA
108 …201 A 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA
251…361A 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA
480 A L 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA
Table 295 - Combination Circuit Breaker Soft Starter Units for Bulletin 2155H and 2155J
Bulletin SMC Device FRAME SCCR
Number Rating
208V, 230V, 380…415V 600V
240V 480V
2155H w/ 3…43 A G6C (TGM) H6C (THM) 100 kA 65 kA N/A
Required 13HIC
H0C (THX) 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA
60 A and 85 A G6C (TGM) H6F (THM) 100 kA 65 kA N/A
H0F (THX) 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA
108 A and 135 A J6F (TJM) 100 kA 65 kA N/A
J0F (TJX) 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA
2155J w/ 5…85 A G6C (TGM) H6C (THM) 100 kA 65 kA N/A
Required 13HIC
H0C (THX) 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA
108 A and 135 A J6F (TJM) 100 kA 65 kA N/A
J0F (TJX) 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA
201 A J6F (TJM) 100 kA 65 kA N/A
J0F (TJX) 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA
251 A K6H (TKM) 65 kA 65 kA N/A
K0H (TKX) 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA
317…480 A M6H (TMM) 65 kA 65 kA N/A
M0H (TMX) 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA

UL/C-UL/CSA Short Circuit Ratings for Combination Variable Frequency AC

Motor Drive Units
Table 296 - AC Drive Combination Fusible Disconnect Units for Bulletins 2162Q, 2162R, 2162U, 2162V, 2162W, and 2162X
Fuse Class Bulletin Horsepower Short Circuit Current Rating
Number (amperes rms symmetrical)
480V 600V
CC, J 2162W, 2162X All ratings 100 kA 100 kA
J 2162Q, 2162R All ratings 100 kA 100 kA
J 2162U, 2162V All ratings 100 kA 100 kA
Table 297 - AC Drive Combination Circuit Breaker Units for Bulletins 2163Q, 2163R, 2163U, 2163V, 2163W, and 2163X
Bulletin Number Frame (catalog Drive Input With Drive Horsepower Short Circuit Current Ratings
code suffix) Fuses? Input Fuse (amperes rms symmetrical)
Class
480V 600V
2163Q T_M Yes J All Ratings 100 kA 100 kA
2163R T_M Yes J All Ratings 100 kA 100 kA
2163U, V T_M Yes J All Ratings 100 kA 100 kA
2163U, V T_X Yes J All Ratings 100 kA 100 kA
2163U, V T_M No — All Ratings 65 kA N/A
2163U, V T_X No — All Ratings 100 kA N/A
2163W, X T_M Yes CC 0.5…10 HP 100 kA 100 kA
2163W, X T_M Yes J 15…20 HP 100 kA 100 kA
2163W, X T_X Yes CC 15…20 HP 100 kA 100 kA
2163W, X T_X Yes J 0.5…10 HP 100 kA 100 kA
UL/C-UL/CSA Short Circuit Ratings for Programmable Controllers

The following tables show short circuit capabilities for combination units that are UL listed and CSA certified.
Table 298 - UL/C-UL/CSA Short Circuit Ratings for Programmable Controllers

Fuse Class Bulletin Short Circuit Current Ratings
Number (amperes rms symmetrical)
240V 380…415V 480V 600V
CC 2182L 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA
Table 299 - Short Circuit Current Ratings

Circuit Breaker Bulletin Short Circuit Current Ratings (amperes rms symmetrical)
Frame Number
240V 380…480V 600V
G6C3 (TGM) 2183L 100 kA 65 kA —
H0C3 (THX) 2183L — 100 kA 35 kA
J15C3 (TJU) 2183L — — 100 kA

Conversión KW a HP
kW to Catalog HP Code Conversion for

Bulletins 2106, 2107, 2112, 2113, 2122, and 2123
Table 300 - kW to Catalog HP Code Conversion for Bulletins 2106, 2107, 2112, 2113, 2122, and 2123
kW (1) Metric Required Required kW (1) Metric Required Required
HP NEMA HP Catalog HP HP NEMA HP Catalog HP
Rating Code Rating Code
0.06 0.08 0.125 30 22 30 30 45
0.09 0.12 0.125 30 25 34 40 46
0.12 0.16 0.25 31 30 40 40 46
0.18 0.24 0.25 31 32 43 50 47
0.25 0.34 0.33 32 37 50 50 47
0.37 0.5 0.5 33 40 54 60 48
0.55 0.75 0.75 34 45 60 60 48
0.75 1 1 35 50 68 75 49
1.1 1.5 1.5 36 55 75 75 49
1.5 2 2 37 63 85 100 50
1.8 2.4 3 38 75 100 100 50
2.2 3 3 38 80 110 125 51
3 4 5 39 90 125 125 51
3.7 5 5 39 100 136 150 52
4 5.5 7.5 40 110 150 150 52
5.5 7.5 7.5 40 125 169 200 54
6.3 8.5 10 41 132 180 200 54
7.5 10 10 41 150 205 250 56
10 13.5 15 42 160 220 250 56
11 15 15 42 185 250 250 56
13 18 20 43 200 270 300 57
15 20 20 43 220 300 300 57
17 23 25 44 250 340 350 58
18.5 25 25 44 315 430 400 59
20 27 30 45
(1) For ratings other than those listed, use the next highest rating shown.

Recommended Capacitor Sizes 480V and 600V

Table 301 lists suggested capacitor ratings for T-frame NEMA Design B induction motors when the capacitor and motor are
switched as a unit. It is based on normal starting current and torque.
Table 302 lists suggested capacitor ratings for U-frame NEMA Design B induction motors when the capacitor and motor are
switched as a unit. It is based on normal starting current and torque.
Table 301 - Recommended Capacitor Sizes T-frame NEMA Table 302 - Recommended Capacitor Sizes U-frame NEMA
Design B Induction Motors, 480V and 600V Design B Induction Motors, 480V and 600V
Horsepower 3600 RPM 1800 RPM 1200 RPM 900 RPM Horsepower 3600 RPM 1800 RPM 1200 RPM 900 RPM
5 2 kVAR 2.5 kVAR 3 kVAR 4 kVAR 5 2 kVAR 2 kVAR 2 kVAR 3 kVAR
7.5 2.5 kVAR 3 kVAR 4 kVAR 5 kVAR 7.5 2.5 kVAR 2.5 kVAR 3 kVAR 4 kVAR
10 4 kVAR 4 kVAR 5 kVAR 6 kVAR 10 3 kVAR 3 kVAR 3 kVAR 5 kVAR
15 5 kVAR 5 kVAR 6 kVAR 7.5 kVAR 15 4 kVAR 4 kVAR 5 kVAR 6 kVAR
20 6 kVAR 6 kVAR 7.5 kVAR 9 kVAR 20 5 kVAR 5 kVAR 6 kVAR 7.5 kVAR
25 7.5 kVAR 7.5 kVAR 8 kVAR 10 kVAR 25 6 kVAR 6 kVAR 7.5 kVAR 9 kVAR
40 12.5 kVAR 15 kVAR 15 kVAR 17.5 kVAR 40 9 kVAR 9 kVAR 10 kVAR 12.5 kVAR
50 15 kVAR 17.5 kVAR 20 kVAR 22.5 kVAR 50 12.5 kVAR 10 kVAR 12.5 kVAR 15 kVAR
60 17.5 kVAR 20 kVAR 22.5 kVAR 25 kVAR 60 15 kVAR 15 kVAR 15 kVAR 17.5 kVAR
75 20 kVAR 25 kVAR 25 kVAR 30 kVAR 75 17.5 kVAR 17.5 kVAR 17.5 kVAR 20 kVAR
100 22.5 kVAR 30 kVAR 30 kVAR 35 kVAR 100 22.5 kVAR 20 kVAR 25 kVAR 27.5 kVAR
125 25 kVAR 35 kVAR 35 kVAR 40 kVAR 125 27.5 kVAR 25 kVAR 30 kVAR 30 kVAR
150 30 kVAR 40 kVAR 40 kVAR 50 kVAR 150 30 kVAR 30 kVAR 35 kVAR 37.5 kVAR
200 35 kVAR 50 kVAR 50 kVAR 70 kVAR 200 40 kVAR 37.5 kVAR 40 kVAR 50 kVAR

Horsepower Ratings for Bulletin 2192F, Fusible Disconnect Feeder Switch (FDS)
Units
Table 303 - Horsepower Ratings for Bulletin 2192F, Fusible Disconnect Feeder Switch (FDS) Units
Switch Ratings (Amperes) Horsepower at Rated Motor Voltage
200V 230V 380-415V 460V 575V
30 0.125…7.5 0.125…7.5 0.125…15 0.125…15 0.125…20
60 10…15 10…15 20…30 20…30 25…40
100 20…25 20…30 40…50 40…50 50
200 30…50 40…60 60…100 60…125 60…150
400 60…100 75…125 125…250 150…250 175…350
600 125…150 150…200 300…350 300…400 400
Conductor Size Conversion Chart—

Metric Conductor Size to American Wire Gauge Conductor Size
Table 304 - Conductor Size Conversion Chart — Metric Conductor Size to American Wire Gauge Conductor Size
Metric Conductor Size American Wire Gauge Size (1) Metric Conductor Size American Wire Gauge Size (1)
(actual size in mm2) (actual size in mm2)
1.0 mm2 #18 (0.823) 50 mm2 #1/0 (53.49)
2 2
1.5 mm #16 (1.31) 70 mm #2/0 (67.43)
2.5 mm2 #14 (2.68) 95 mm2 #3/0 (85.01)
2 2
4 mm #12 (3.31) 95 mm #4/0 (2) (107.20)
6 mm2 #10 (5.26) 120 mm2 250 kcmil (127.0)
2 2
10 mm #8 (8.37) 150 mm 300 kcmil (152.0)
16 mm2 #6 (13.30) 185 mm2 350 kcmil (177.0)
2 2
25 mm #4 (21.13) 185 mm 400 kcmil (2) (203.0)
25 mm2 #3 (2) (26.67) 240 mm2 500 kcmil (253.0)
2 2
35 mm #2 (33.62) 300 mm 600 kcmil (304.0)
35 mm2 #1 (2) (44.21) 400 mm2 750 kcmil (350.0)
(1) Reference IEC Standard 60947-1, table I.

(2) This American wire gauge conductor size is the closest equivalent to the metric conductor size.

Metric Conversion Table

Table 305 - Metric Conversion Table
English Metric English Metric English Metric English Metric
Measurement Equivalent Measurement Equivalent Measurement Equivalent Measurement Equivalent
(inches) (millimeter) (inches) (millimeter) (inches) (millimeter) (inches) (millimeter)
0.016 0.40 0.313 7.94 1 25.40 20 508.00
0.031 0.79 0.375 9.53 2 50.80 30 762.00
0.063 1.59 0.438 11.11 3 76.20 40 1016.00
0.094 2.38 0.500 12.70 4 101.60 50 1270.00
0.125 3.18 0.563 14.29 5 127.00 60 1524.00
0.156 3.97 0.625 15.88 6 152.40 70 1778.00
0.188 4.76 0.688 17.46 7 177.80 80 2032.00
0.218 5.56 0.750 19.05 8 203.20 90 2286.00
0.250 6.35 0.875 22.23 9 228.60 100 2540.00
0.281 7.14 0.938 23.81 10 254.00 200 5080.00
1 inch = 2.54 centimeters

1 foot = 12 inches
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters
Fans and Ventilation in Bulletins 2154H, 2154J, 2155H, and 2155J

Table 306 - Fans and Ventilation in Bulletins 2154H, 2154J, 2155H and 2155J
Bulletin System Voltage NEMA Rating Code Venting Door Mounted
Enclosure Exhaust Fans
Type
Bulletins All 1, 1G A, B, D, E, F, G No No
2154H and (3…37 Ampere)
2155H
All 1, 1G H, J, K, L, M Yes Yes
(43…135 Ampere)
All 12 A, B, D, E, F, G, H, J, K No No
(3…85 Ampere)
All 12 L, M Yes Yes (filtered and gasketed)
(108… 135 Ampere)
Bulletins All 1, 1G F005 to F135 Yes Yes
2154J and (5…135 Ampere)
2155J
All 1, 1G F201 to F480 No No
(201…480 Ampere)
All 12 F005 to F135 Yes Yes (filtered and gasketed)
(5…135 Ampere)
All 12 F201 to F480 No No
(201…480 Ampere)

Fans and Ventilation in Bulletins 2162Q, 2162R, 2163Q, 2163R, 2162U, 2163U,
2162V, and 2163V
Table 307 - Fans and Ventilation in Bulletins 2162Q, 2162R, 2163Q, 2163R, 2162U, 2163U, 2162V, and 2163V
Bulletin System NEMA Rating Code Venting Internal Door Mounted -112B Venting/Door
Voltage Enclosure Circulating Fans Exhaust Fans Mounted Exhaust
Type Fans
2162Q and 380… 1, 1G 1P3 - 5P0 Yes None Yes N/A
2163Q 415V
8P7 - 072 Yes None Yes N/A
12 1P3 - 022 None Yes None N/A
030 Yes (filtered and None Yes (filtered and N/A
gasketed) gasketed)
037 - 072 Yes (filtered and Yes Yes (filtered and N/A
gasketed) gasketed)
480V 1, 1G 1P1 - 3P4 Yes None None None(3)
5P0 Yes None Yes (1) None(3)
8P0 - 022 Yes None Yes None(3)
027-065 Yes None Yes N/A
12 1P1 - 2P1 None None None None
3P4 - 022 None Yes None None
027 Yes (filtered and None Yes (filtered and N/A
gasketed) gasketed)
gasketed) gasketed)
600V 1, 1G 0P9 - 2P7 Yes None None N/A
(1)
12 0P9 - 1P7 None None None N/A
2P7 - 017 None Yes None N/A
022 - 052 Yes (filtered and None Yes (filtered and N/A
gasketed) gasketed)

Table 307 - Fans and Ventilation in Bulletins 2162Q, 2162R, 2163Q, 2163R, 2162U, 2163U, 2162V, and 2163V (continued)
Type Fans
2162R and 380…415V 1, 1G 1P3 - 5P0 Yes None None N/A
2163R
037 - 056 Yes None Yes N/A
gasketed) gasketed)
gasketed) gasketed)
480V 1, 1G 1P1 - 5P0 Yes None None N/A
040 (without None Yes None N/A
reactor)
040 (with reactor) Yes (filtered and Yes Yes (filtered and N/A
gasketed) gasketed)
gasketed) gasketed)
gasketed) gasketed)
2162R and 600 1, 1G 1P7 - 3P9 Yes None None N/A
2163R
(continued) 6P1 - 144 Yes None Yes N/A
032 (without None Yes None N/A
reactor)
032 (with reactor) Yes (filtered and Yes Yes (filtered and N/A
gasketed) gasketed)
gasketed) gasketed)

Table 307 - Fans and Ventilation in Bulletins 2162Q, 2162R, 2163Q, 2163R, 2162U, 2163U, 2162V, and 2163V (continued)
Type Fans
2162U and 480V 1, 1G 2P1F1 - 5P0F1 Yes None Yes(2) N/A
2163U (2)
2162V and 8P0F1 - 014F1 Yes None Yes N/A
2163V
2P1 - 5P0 None None None None
8P0 - 022 Yes None Yes None(3)
077 - 248
12 2P1 - 022 None Yes None None
gasketed) gasketed)
248 Not Available
600V 1, 1G 1P7 - 6P1 None None None N/A
022 - 052
063 - 144
12 1P7 - 6P1 None None None N/A
9P0 - 011 None Yes None N/A
gasketed) gasketed)
144 Not Available
(1) If -14RLX or -14RXL is specified for the 3.9 A at 600V or 5.0 A at 480V unit, the unit door will be supplied with input and exhaust venting.
(2) Door mounted exhaust box fans.
(3) For 100 ms Duration Rated ArcShield (option -112B), NEMA 1/1G units use the NEMA 12 design to eliminate external door fans and venting.

Fans and Ventilation

Table 308 - Fans and Ventilation in Bulletins 2162W, 2162X, 2163W, and 2163X
Bulletin System Voltage NEMA Current Rating Venting Internal Door Mounted -112B Venting/
Enclosure Type (Amperes) Circulating Fans Exhaust Fans Door Mounted
Exhaust Fans
Bulletins 2162W and 480 1, 1G 1.4…17 Yes None Yes None(2)
2163W
24…30 Yes None Yes N/A
(1)
12 1.4…2.3 None None None None
4.0…17 None Yes None None
24…30 Yes Yes Yes N/A
600 1, 1G 0.9…22 Yes None Yes N/A
(1)
12 0.9...1.7 None None None N/A
3.0…12 None Yes None N/A
19…22 Yes Yes Yes N/A
Bulletins 2162X and 480 1, 1G 1.4…17 Yes None Yes None(2)
2163X
24 Yes None Yes N/A
(1)
12 1.4…2.3 None None None None
4.0…17 None Yes None None
24 Yes Yes Yes N/A
600 1, 1G 0.9…19 Yes None Yes N/A
(1)
12 0.9...1.7 None None None N/A
3.0…12 None Yes None N/A
19 Yes Yes Yes N/A
(1) When line or load reactors are specified, an internal circulating fan is added.
(2) For 100ms Duration Rated ArcShield (option -112B), NEMA 1/1G units will use the NEMA 12 design to eliminate external door fans and venting.

Control Circuit Transformer Rating Chart for Bulletins 2182E, 2182L, 2183E and
2183L
Table 309 - Control Circuit Transformer Rating Chart for Bulletins 2182E, 2182L, 2183E and 2183L
Rack Size Space Factor Power Supply Type
None, 12P4S1, 12P4S2, 12P2 12P7 12P4R3 or 12P4R4
12P4R2 or 12PA72
(1) 4-slot 1.5 250VA — — —
2.0 250VA — — —
3.0 250VA 250VA — —
(1) 7-slot 2.0 250VA — — —
(1) 8-slot 2.5 250VA — — —
3.0 250VA 250VA — —
(1) 8-slot 6.0, 25” W (1) 250VA (1) 250VA (1) 500VA —
(2) 8-slot 6.0, 25” W (2) 250VA (2) 250VA (2) 500VA —
(1) 16-slot 6.0, 35” W 250VA 250VA 500VA 500VA
(2) 16-slot 6.0, 35” W (2) 250VA (2) 250VA (2) 500VA (2) 500VA
(1) 16-slot 6.0, 40” W 250VA — 500VA 500VA
(2) 16-slot 6.0, 40” W 500VA — 1 kVA 1 kVA
Cable Sizes
Table 310 - Cable Sizes for Contactor and Starter Units
Unit Type NEMA Size Space Factor Wiring Type Cables per Phase Cable/Wire Size Range
2112, 2113 1 0.5 All 1 #14 AWG…#6 AWG
1, 2 1.0, 1.5 B 1 #14 AWG…#4 AWG
A or option -106 1 #14 AWG…#6 AWG
3 All B 1 #14 AWG…2/0 AWG
4 All All 1 #6 AWG…4/0 AWG
5 All All 1 #4 AWG…500 kcmil
6 All All 2 1/0 AWG…500 kcmil
200A Vacuum All All 1 #6 AWG…250 kcmil
400A Vacuum 3.5, 4.0, 4.5 All 1 #4 AWG…500 kcmil
6.0 All 2 #6 AWG…300 kcmil
600A Vacuum All All 2 #2 AWG…600 kcmil
2106, 2107 1, 2 All B 1 #14 AWG…#4 AWG

Table 310 - Cable Sizes for Contactor and Starter Units (continued)
Unit Type NEMA Size Space Factor Wiring Type Cables per Phase Cable/Wire Size Range
2106, 2107, 2112, 2113 1, 2 All All 1 #14 AWG…#6 AWG
Space Saving Starters
3 All All 1 #12 AWG…#1 AWG
2122, 2123 1, 2 All B 1 #14 AWG…#4 AWG
Table 311 - Cable Sizes for Lighting Contactor Units

Unit Type Rating (Amps) Space Factor Wiring Type Cables per Phase Cable/Wire Size Range
2102L, 2103L 30 0.5 All 1 #14 AWG…#4 AWG
1.0, 1.5 B 1 #14 AWG…#4 AWG
A, option -106, or 1 #14 AWG…#8 AWG
dual unit
60 All All 1 #14 AWG…#4 AWG
100 All B 1 #14 AWG…2/0 AWG
A or option -106 1 #8 AWG…1/0 AWG
Table 312 - Cable Sizes for Soft Starter (SMC) Units

Unit Type SMC Rating (Amps) Space Factor Cables per Phase Cable/Wire Size Range
2154H 3…19 A 0.5 1 #14 AWG…#6 AWG
2154H/2155H 3…37 A 1.0, 1.5 1 #14 AWG…#4 AWG
43…85 A All 1 #14 AWG…2/0 AWG
108…135 A All 1 #6 AWG…250 kcmil
2154J/2155J 5…60 A All 1 #14 AWG…#4 AWG
85 A All 1 #14 AWG…2/0 AWG
108…135 A All 1 #6 AWG…250 kcmil
201…251 A All 2 #6 AWG…250 kcmil
317…480 A All 2 #4 AWG…500 kcmil

Table 313 - Cable Sizes for Variable Frequency Drive Units

Unit Type Drive Size Code Reactor Option Power Cables Power Cable/Wire Ground ‘PE’ Cables Ground ‘PE’ Wire Range
per Phase Size Range QTY
2162U, 2163U, 2P1 - 8P0 None, Line 1 #14 AWG…#4 AWG 1 #14 AWG…#4 AWG
2162V, 2163V 480V
Units Load 1 #20 AWG…#12 AWG 1 #20 AWG…#12 AWG
011 - 052 All 1 #14 AWG…#4 AWG 1 #14 AWG…#4 AWG
065 - 096 All 1 #14 AWG…2/0 AWG 1 #14 AWG…2/0 AWG
125 - 186 All 1 #6 AWG…350 kcmil 1 #6 AWG…250 kcmil
248 All 1 #6 AWG…500 kcmil 1 #6 AWG…500 kcmil
2162U, 2163U, 1P7 - 032 All 1 #14 AWG…#4 AWG 1 #14 AWG…#4 AWG
2162V, 2163V 600V
Units 041 - 099 All 1 #14 AWG…2/0 AWG 1 #14 AWG…2/0 AWG
125 - 144 All 1 #6 AWG…350 kcmil 1 #6 AWG…250 kcmil
2162Q, 2163Q 0P9 - 015 All 1 #20 AWG…#12 AWG 1 #20 AWG…#12 AWG
065 - 072 All 1 #14 AWG…2/0 AWG 1 #14 AWG…2/0 AWG
2162W, 2163W, 0P9 - 017 All 1 #20 AWG…#12 AWG 1 #20 AWG…#12 AWG
2162X, 2163X
Table 314 - Cable Sizes for Full Section Blank Mounting Plates and Empty Unit Inserts
Unit Type CB Frame Rating CB Trip Rating (Amps) Cables per Phase Cable/Wire Size Range
2100M G, H All 1 #14 AWG…1/0 AWG
J All 1 #10 AWG…250 kcmil
(1)
2100-G G, H All 1 #14 AWG…1/0 AWG
J All 1 #10 AWG…250 kcmil
K 300 A 1 250 kcmil…500 kcmil
400 A 2 2/0 AWG…250 kcmil
(1) For units without horizontal bus (-120 option), power connections pertain to both line and load side of disconnect.

Table 315 - Cable Sizes for Full Section Blank Mounting Plates and Empty Unit Inserts
Unit Type Fuse Clip Rating Cables per Phase Cable/Wire Size Range
2100D 24, 24R, 24J 1 #14 AWG…#8 AWG
24C 1 #18 AWG…#10 AWG
25, 25R, 25J 1 #14 AWG…#4 AWG
26, 26R, 26J 1 #8 AWG…1/0 AWG
27, 27R, 27J 1 #6 AWG…4/0 AWG
(1)
2100-F 24, 24R, 24J 1 #14 AWG - #8 AWG
25, 25R, 25J 1 #14 AWG - #4 AWG
26, 26R, 26J 1 #8 AWG - 1/0 AWG
2100-F(2) 24, 24R, 24J 1 #14 AWG - #2 AWG (CU)
#12 AWG - #2 AWG (AL)
25, 25R, 25J 1 #14 AWG - #2 AWG (CU)
#12 AWG - #2 AWG (AL)
26, 26R, 26J 1 #14 AWG - 1/0 AWG (CU)
#12 AWG - 1/0 AWG (AL)
2100-F (3) 27, 27R, 27J 1 #6 AWG - 4/0 AWG
28, 28R, 28J 2 1/0 AWG - 250 kcmil
(1) Load side of disconnect.

(2) Line Side of disconnect for units without horizontal bus (-120).
(3) For units without horizontal bus (-120 option), power connections pertain to both line and load side of disconnect.

Power System Configuration Application Information

CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers are suitable for use on 3-phase, 3-wire or 4-wire, Wye connected power systems, rated
600V or less, 50 or 60 Hz, that have a solidly grounded neutral. CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers can also be used on the
following power system configurations, however, some units and options are available:
• 3-phase, 3-wire, Wye systems rated 600Y/347V or less, with impedance grounded neutral
• 3-phase, 3-wire, ungrounded Delta systems, rated 600V or less
For 3-phase, 3-wire, ‘corner’ grounded, Delta systems, 3-phase, 4-wire, center-tap-grounded, ‘high-leg’, Delta systems rated 240V,
and any other power systems not listed above, the MCC is processed on the Engineered delivery program to help ensure proper
product configuration.
TIP For more information regarding MCC selection criteria related to power system configurations, see the Power System
Considerations for Selection of CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers, publication 2100-AT003.
Horizontal Neutral Bus and Neutral Bus Options

Neutral bus and options are only available for 3-phase, 4-wire WYE connected power systems with the neutral solidly grounded.
Neutral bus options cannot be selected for any ungrounded system or for any system that is impedance grounded.
If a 4-wire system is selected, a determination needs to be made regarding neutral loads
No Neutral Loads or Neutral Loads Less Than 280 Amp

Option 88NPC is available for 2191M rated 300 A, 2192M rated 400 A or less, and 2193M with 400 A frame or less.
For 2191M rated 600 A or larger, 2192M rated 600 A or larger, and 2193M with 600 A frame or larger, horizontal neutral bus and
incoming option -88HN or -88FN must be selected.
IMPORTANT If complete horizontal neutral is not required, horizontal neutral bus is allowed to be specified for only the section containing
the Bulletin 2191M, 2192M, or 2193M main unit and up to three additional adjacent sections. However, the sections with the
neutral bus need to be in their own shipping splits. If neutral loads are present, then access to the horizontal neutral bus for
neutral load cables is required. At least one neutral connection plate in the horizontal wireway or one vertical neutral in a 9"
vertical wireway is required.
Neutral Loads Greater Than 280 Amp

For 4-wire system with neutral loads greater than 280 A, horizontal neutral bus and incoming option -88HN or -88FN must be
selected. In addition, at least one neutral connection plate in the horizontal wireway or one vertical neutral in a 9" vertical wireway is
required.
IMPORTANT If any single neutral load is greater than 280 A, the MCC needs to be processed on the Engineered delivery program to provide
an appropriate neutral connection point for the neutral load cable.

Any Units with Fusible Disconnect Switches

No restrictions for Wye connected systems or ungrounded Delta systems.
Any Units with Circuit Breaker Disconnects

No restrictions for Wye connected systems or ungrounded Delta systems.
Bulletin 2190 Units with Metering

Analog metering units are available for:
• 3-phase, 3-wire solidly grounded Wye
• 3-phase, 3-wire ungrounded, closed-Delta
• 3-phase, 3-wire impedance grounded Wye
Digital metering units are available for:

Metering for other systems is available on the Engineered delivery program.

Index
Numerics Bulletin
2100D Empty Unit Insert with
100% Rating of Main Disconnect Switch or Disconnect Switch 133
Circuit Breaker 159 2100M Empty Unit Insert with Circuit
2163U Combination PowerFlex 753 Breaker 133
Variable Frequency AC Drive 2100N Empty Unit Insert without power
stabs 133
(VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker, 2102L, Full Voltage Lighting Contactor
480V AC and 600V AC 236 Unit with Fusible Disconnect
71" High Section 30 Switch (FVLC) 52
8A Round DeviceNet Cable 318 2103L, Full Voltage Lighting Contactor
Unit with Circuit Breaker
(FVLC) 53
2106, Full Voltage Reversing Starter
A Unit with Fusible Disconnect
ABS 12 Switch (FVR) 55
Additional Unit Space on Contactors and 2106, Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage
Reversing Starter Unit with
Starters, Metering, Mains and Fused Disconnect Switch
Feeders, Lighting and Power (FVR) 58
Panels, and Transformer Units 2107, Full Voltage Reversing Starter
150 Unit with Circuit Breaker
(FVR) 56
Appendix 319 2107, Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage
ArcShield 43 Reversing Starter Unit with
Automatic Shutters 36 Circuit Breaker (FVR) 58
Auxiliary Contacts on Combination Soft 2112, Full Voltage Non-Reversing
Starter Controller Units 189 Starter Units with Fusible
Disconnect Switch (FVNR) 60
Auxiliary Contacts on Contactors and 2112, Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage
Starters, Metering, Mains and Non-Reversing Starter Unit
Feeders, Lighting and Power with Fused Disconnect
Panels, and Transformer Units Switch (FVNR) 65
2113, Full Voltage Non-Reversing
156, 157, 168 Starter Unit with Circuit
Auxiliary Contacts on Marshalling Panels Breaker (FVNR) 62
and Programmable Controllers 2113, Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage
295 Non-Reversing Starter Unit
with Circuit Breaker (FVNR)
65
B
Back-to-Back Section 30
Blank Unit Door 132
Bolt-on Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic)
Branch Breakers for Lighting
Panels 316
Bottom Closing Plate 31, 308

Index
Disconnect, 480V and 600V

2122E, 2-peed 2-Winding Starter Unit AC 258
with Fusible Disconnect 2162X Combination PowerFlex 523
Switch (TS2W) 67 Variable Frequency AC Drive
2122F, 2-speed 1-winding Starter Unit (VFD) Units with Fusible
with Fusible Disconnect Disconnect, 480V and 600V
Switch (TS1W) 68 AC 264
2123E, 2-speed 2-winding Starter Unit 2163Q, Combination PowerFlex 70
with Circuit Breaker (TS2W) Variable Frequency AC Drive
69 (VFD) Units with Fusible
2123F, 2-speed 1-winding Starter Unit Disconnect, 380-415V 200
with Circuit Breaker (TS1W) 2163Q, Combination PowerFlex 70
70 Variable Frequency AC Drive
2154H, Combination Soft Starter Motor (VFD) Units with Fusible
Controller with Fusible Disconnect, 480V 201, 202
Disconnect Switch (SMC-3) 2163Q, Combination PowerFlex 70
173 Variable Frequency AC Drive
2154J, Combination Soft Starter Motor (VFD) Units with Fusible
Controller with Fusible Disconnect, 600V 203, 205
Disconnect Switch (SMC 2163R, Combination PowerFlex 700
Flex) 178 Variable Frequency AC Drive
2155H, Combination Soft Starter Motor (VFD) Units with Circuit
Controller with Circuit Breaker, 380-415V AC 218
Breaker (SMC-3) 174 2163R, Combination PowerFlex 700
2155J, Combination Soft Starter Motor Variable Frequency AC Drive
Controller with Circuit (VFD) Units with Circuit
Breaker (SMC Flex) 180 Breaker, 480V AC 220, 222
2162Q, Combination PowerFlex 70 2163R, Combination PowerFlex 700
Variable Frequency AC Drive Variable Frequency AC Drive
(VFD) Units with Fusible (VFD) Units with Fusible
Disconnect, 380-415V 193 Disconnect, 600V AC 224,
2162Q, Combination PowerFlex 70 226
Variable Frequency AC Drive 2163U Combination PowerFlex 753
(VFD) Units with Fusible Variable Frequency AC Drive
Disconnect, 380-480V 195 (VFD) Units with Circuit
2162Q, Combination PowerFlex 70 Breaker, 480V AC and 600V
Variable Frequency AC Drive AC 239
(VFD) Units with Fusible 2163V Combination PowerFlex 755
Disconnect, 480V 196 Variable Frequency AC Drive
2162Q, Combination PowerFlex 70 (VFD) Units with Circuit
Variable Frequency AC Drive Breaker, 480V AC and 600V
(VFD) Units with Fusible AC 250, 253
Disconnect, 600V 197, 198 2163W Combination PowerFlex 525
2162R, Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive
Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit
(VFD) Units with Fusible Breaker, 480V and 600V AC
Disconnect, 380-415V AC 208 260
2162R, Combination PowerFlex 700 2163X Combination PowerFlex 523
Variable Frequency AC Drive Variable Frequency AC Drive
(VFD) Units with Fusible (VFD) Units with Circuit
Disconnect, 380-480VAC 216 Breaker, 480V and 600V AC
2162R, Combination PowerFlex 700 266
Variable Frequency AC Drive 2180L, 2182L, and 2183L, Bulletin 1756
(VFD) Units with Fusible ControlLogix Programmable
Disconnect, 480V AC 210, Controller (PLC) 293
212 2190, Metering Compartments (METER)
2162R, Combination PowerFlex 700 71, 74
Variable Frequency AC Drive 2191M and 2191F, Lug Compartments—
(VFD) Units with Fusible Provisions for Basic
Disconnect, 600V AC 214 Sections/Incoming Lines
2162U Combination PowerFlex 753 (MLUG) and Outgoing
Variable Frequency AC Drive Feeders (FLUG) 78
(VFD) Units with Fusible 2191M, Lug Compartments/Incoming
Disconnect, 480V AC and Line—Dimensions 84, 86
600V AC 230, 233 2192F, Fusible Disconnect Switch—
2162V Combination PowerFlex 755 Feeders (FDS) 88
Variable Frequency AC Drive 2192M, Fusible Disconnect Switch—
(VFD) Units with Fusible Mains (MFDS) 90
Disconnect, 480V AC and 2193F, 3-Pole Feeder Circuit Breaker
600V AC 244, 247 (FCB) 93, 96
2162W Combination PowerFlex 525 2193LE, Frame-Mounted Lighting Panel
Variable Frequency AC Drive for Bolt-on Branch Circuit
(VFD) Units with Fusible Breakers (LPAN) 104
2193M, 3-Pole Main Circuit Breaker

Index
(MCB) 98, 100 Control Circuit Transformer on Contactors

2193PP, Plug-in Panel Board with Main and Starters, Metering, Mains
Circuit Breaker (PPAN) 107 and Feeders, Lighting and Power
2195, Control and Lighting Transformer
Unit without Disconnecting Panels, and Transformer Units
Means (XFMR) 110, 112 144, 165
2196, Control and Lighting Transformer Control Circuit Transformer Rating Chart
Unit with Fusible Disconnect 343
Switch (XFMR) 114, 115, 117,
119 Control Circuit Wiring on Combination Soft
2197, Control and Lighting Transformer Starter Controller Units 190
Unit with Circuit Breaker Control Circuit Wiring on Contactors and
(XFMR) 120, 122, 124, 126 Starters, Metering, Mains and
Bus Bracing 34 Feeders, Lighting and Power
Bus Stab Isolation Kit 310 Panels, and Transformer Units
159
Control Station Housing 312
C Control Station Housing on Combination
Capacitor Sizes 336 Soft Starter Controller Units 183
Cardholder for Unit Doors 312 Control Station Housing on Contactors and
Circuit Breaker Characteristics for Bulletin Starters, Metering, Mains and
2193F and 2193M Units 331 Feeders, Lighting and Power
Circuit Breaker on Contactors and Panels, and Transformer Units
Starters, Metering, Mains and 141
Feeders, Lighting and Power Control Station Mounting Plate 312
Panels, and Transformer Units Control Terminal Block on Contactors and
159 Starters, Metering, Mains and
Circuit Breaker Short Circuit Current Feeders, Lighting and Power
Ratings 330 Panels, and Transformer Units
Circuit Breaker Suffix Letter Designation 158
27 Control Voltage Type
Circuit Breaker Type for Bulletins 2102, 2103, 2106, 2107, 2112,
for Bulletin 2163 306 2113, 2122, and 2123 297, 298
for Bulletins 2107, 2113, and 2123 304 for Bulletins 2154 and 2155 298
for Horsepower and kW Rated Units for for Bulletins 2162 and 2163 298
Bulletins 2155 305 Control Wire Markers on Combination Soft
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic or Starter Controller Units 190
Solid State) Circuit Breaker
Options for Bulletin 2103L Control Wire Markers on Contactors and
304 Starters, Metering, Mains and
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Feeders, Lighting and Power
Circuit Breaker Options for Panels, and Transformer Units
Bulletin 2197 305 159, 296
Communication Module on Combination
ControlNet to DeviceNet Linking Device
Soft Starter Controller Units 186
137
Conductor Size Conversion Chart 337
Corner Section 30
Contactors and Starters
CSA Marking 12
Catalog Number Explanations 51, 72,
77, 87, 92, 103, 106, 109, 129, C-UL Marking 12
172, 177 Current Sensors on Contactors and
Control Circuit Fuse on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power
Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units
Panels, and Transformer Units 158
151 Current Transducers on Contactors and
Control Circuit Lugs on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power
Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units
Panels, and Transformer Units 158
159
Control Circuit Ring Lugs on Combination
Soft Starter Controller Units 190 D
Control Circuit Spade Lugs on Combination Delivery Programs 14
Soft Starter Controller Units 190 device-limited arc fault containment 43

Index
DeviceNet External DeviceNet Connector with

Miscellaneous Units 136 120VAC Receptacle on
DeviceNet Communication Module on Contactors and Starters,
Combination Soft Starter Metering, Mains and Feeders,
Controller Units 186 Lighting and Power Panels, and
DeviceNet Connection Cover Kit 318 Transformer Units 160
DeviceNet Field Support Kit 318 External Mounting Channel Kits 308
DeviceNet Scanner Modules 318
DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary on
Combination Soft Starter F
Controller Units 186 Fan(s) and Ventilation
DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary on Contactors in Bulletins 2154H, 2154J, 2155H, and
and Starters, Metering, Mains 2155J 338
and Feeders, Lighting and Power in Bulletins 2162Q, 2162R, 2163Q, and
Panels, and Transformer Units 2163R 339
Fans and Ventilation
150
in Bulletins 2162T and 2163T 342
DeviceNet Terminating Resistors 318 in Bulletins 2162W and 2163W 342
DeviceNet Trunk Line Cable 318 Field-Mounted Equipment Units 133
DeviceNet Unit Cable 318 Filters for Door Vents on Contactors and
Dimensions 319 Starters, Metering, Mains and
Documentation 17 Feeders, Lighting and Power
Door Hardware Kit 312 Panels, and Transformer Units
Door Hinge Kit 312 150
Door, Blank 132 French Legend Plates on Combination Soft
Drip Hood 31, 307 Starter Controller Units 190
French Legend Plates on Contactors and
Starters, Metering, Mains and
E Feeders, Lighting and Power
Elapsed Time Meter on Contactors and Panels, and Transformer Units
Starters, Metering, Mains and 160
Feeders, Lighting and Power Full Load Currents 328, 329
Panels, and Transformer Units Fuse Clip Designator Selection and Power
152 Fuse Selection
electrically isolated 45 for Bulletins 2100D, 2102L, 2192F, and
Embedded System 37 2192M 301
Empty Unit Insert 133 for Bulletins 2106, 2112, and 2122 300
Empty Unit Insert with Disconnecting
Means 133 G
End Closing Plate 308
Ethernet to DeviceNet Linking Device 137 Gasketing Kit 308
Export Packing Below Deck on Ground Detection Lights on Contactors
Combination Soft Starter and Starters, Metering, Mains
Controller Units 190 and Feeders, Lighting and Power
Export Packing Below Deck on Contactors Panels, and Transformer Units
and Starters, Metering, Mains 152
and Feeders, Lighting and Power Ground Fault Protection on Contactors and
Panels, and Transformer Units Starters, Metering, Mains and
161 Feeders, Lighting and Power
Export Packing Below Deck on Marshalling Panels, and Transformer Units
Panels and Programmable 152
Controllers 296 Ground Lug, Outgoing 36
Extended Reset Button Kit 314 Grounded Unit Door on Combination Soft
External Auxiliary Contact 315 Starter Controller Units 188
External Auxiliary Contact Adapter Kits Grounded Unit Door on Contactors and
314, 315 Starters, Metering, Mains and
External Auxiliary Contact Kits 315 Feeders, Lighting and Power
External DeviceNet Connector Unit 137 Panels, and Transformer Units
152
Grounded Unit Door on Marshalling Panels
and Programmable Controllers
295

Index
H I
Hardware and Kits IEC 60439 12
8A Round DeviceNet Cable 318 in Bulletins 2162X and 2163X 342
Bolt-on Inverse Time (Thermal Incoming Line Lug Barriers 311
Magnetic) Branch Breakers Incoming Lug Compartments 78
for Lighting Panels 316
Bottom Closing Plate 308 Incoming Neutral Bus on Contactors and
Bus Stab Isolation Kit 310 Starters, Metering, Mains and
Cardholder for Unit Doors 312 Feeders, Lighting and Power
Control Station Housing 312 Panels, and Transformer Units
Control Station Mounting Plate 312
DeviceNet Connection Cover Kit 318 153
DeviceNet Field Support Kit 318 Incoming Neutral Connection Plate on
DeviceNet Scanner Modules 318 Contactors and Starters,
DeviceNet Terminating Resistors 318 Metering, Mains and Feeders,
DeviceNet Trunk Line Cable 318 Lighting and Power Panels, and
DeviceNet Unit Cable 318
Door Hardware Kit 312 Transformer Units 154
Door Hinge Kit 312 IntelliCENTER software 39, 41
Drip Hood 307 IntelliCENTER Technology
End Closing Plate 308 Motor Control Center 37
Extended Reset Button Kit 314 Software 41
External Auxiliary Contact 315 IntelliCENTER technology 16, 37
External Auxiliary Contact Adapter Kits
314, 315 Intelligent Motor Control 38
External Auxiliary Contact Kits 315 Interposing Relay on Contactors and
External Mounting Channel Kits 308 Starters, Metering, Mains and
Gasketing Kit 308 Feeders, Lighting and Power
Horizontal Ground Bus Splice Kit 309 Panels, and Transformer Units
Horizontal Power Bus Splice Kit 309
Horizontal Wireway Cover 307 154
Incoming Line Lug Barriers 311 Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Branch
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Breakers for Panel Board Plug-In
Branch Breakers for Panel Unit 316
Board Plug-In Unit 316
Line Terminal Shield 314 ISO 9001 Certification 12
Lugs for Incoming Line Provisions 311 Isolation Contactor on Combination Soft
MCC DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Starter Controller Units 187
Kit 318
Neutral Connection Plate Kit 310
NO-OX-ID 309 K
Plug-In Unit Retrofit Kit 314
Pull-Apart Terminal Bocks 314 Key-interlock Mounting Provision on
Pullbox 307 Contactors and Starters,
Round DeviceNet Cable with Metering, Mains and Feeders,
Connectors 318
Space Heater Kit 308 Lighting and Power Panels, and
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws 313 Transformer Units 158
Top Horizontal Wireway Pan 307 kW Ratings for Bulletins 2154, 2155, 2162,
Touch-Up Paint 309 and 2163 299
Unit Door Grounding Kit 314
Unit Door Nameplates 313 kW to Catalog Hp Code Conversion 335
Unit Insert Extension Kit 314
Unit Isolating Barriers 310
Unit Operating Handle Extender 308 L
Unit Support Pan 313
Vertical Ground Bus Kit 309 Line Reactor Space Factor Adders 275, 277,
Vertical Unit Load Ground Bus Kit 309 289
Vertical Wireway Tie Bar 309 Line Terminal Shield 314
Wiring Diagram Holder Kit 309 Lug Compartments 79, 82, 104, 112
Heater Element Selection Tables 328 Lugs for Incoming Line Provisions 311
Horizontal Ground Bus 34
Horizontal Ground Bus Splice Kit 309
Horizontal Power Bus Splice Kit 309 M
Horizontal Wireway Cover 307
Manual Shutters 36
Horsepower Ratings 337
Master Nameplates 313
Horsepower Ratings for All Bulletins 298
MCC DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Kit
Human Interface Module (HIM) on
318
Combination Soft Starter
Meter Types 73, 74
Controller Units 186
Metric Conversion Table 338

Index
Miscellaneous DeviceNet Units 136 Options for Contactors and Starters,

Miscellaneous Units 129, 140 Metering, Mains and Feeders,
Motor Applications 16 Lighting and Power Panels, and
Transformer Units
100% Rating of Main Disconnect Switch
N or Circuit Breaker 159
Additional Unit Space 150
Nameplate Data 23 Auxiliary Contacts 156, 157
NEMA Control Circuit Fuse 151
Class 12 Control Circuit Lugs 159
Defined 12 Control Circuit Transformer 144
Enclosure Type Descriptions 13 Control Circuit Wiring 159
Type 1 13 Control Station Housing 141
Type 1 with gasket 13 Control Terminal Block 158
Type 12 14 Control Wire Markers 159, 296
Type 3R 13 Current Sensors 158
Type 4 14 Current Transducers 158
NEMA/IEC Enclosure Comparison 13 DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary 150
Network Elapsed Time Meter 152
Hardware and Kits 318 Export Packing Below Deck 161
Network built into MCC Sections 37 External DeviceNet Connector with
120VAC Receptacle 160
Neutral Bus 32 Filters for Door Vents 150
Neutral Connection Plate 33 French Legend Plates 160
Neutral Connection Plate Kit 310 Ground Detection Lights 152
Neutral Connection Plate Unit 140 Ground Fault Protection 152
Grounded Unit Door 152
NO-OX-ID 309 Incoming Neutral Bus 153
Incoming Neutral Connection Plate 154
Interposing Relay 154
O Key-interlock Mounting Provision 158
O/L Contact on Left Side of Circuit 150
O/L Contact on Left Side of Circuit on Omission of Circuit Breaker 159
Contactors and Starters, Omission of Power Terminal Blocks 158
Metering, Mains and Feeders, Omit Wiring 151
Lighting and Power Panels, and Push Buttons 141
Transformer Units 150 Push Buttons and Selector Switch 141
Selector Switch 141
Options for Combination Soft Starter Shunt Trip 159
Controller Units Spanish Legend Plates 160
Add Isolation Contactor 187 Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws 161
arc resistant latches 190 Surge Suppressor 150
Auxiliary Contacts 189 T-Handle 158
Communication Module 186 Thermistor Protection Relay 152
Control Circuit Ring Lugs 190 Unit Ammeter 152
Control Circuit Spade Lugs 190 Unit Door Nameplates 161
Control Circuit Wiring 190 Unit Ground Stab 152
Control Station Housing 183 Unit Load Connector 152
Control Wire Markers 190 Unwired Control Relay 155
DeviceNet Communication Module 186 Unwired Pull-Apart Terminal Blocks 160
DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary 186 Unwired Timer Auxiliary 152
Export Packing Below Deck 190 Options for Marshalling Panels and
French Legend Plates 190 Programmable Controllers
Ground Fault Current Transformer 186 Auxiliary Contacts 295
Grounded Unit Door 188 Export Packing Below Deck 296
High Interrupting Capacity Fuses 186 Grounded Unit Door 295
Human Interface Module (HIM) 186 Power Supply 295
Omit Wiring 188 Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws 296
Pilot Lights 184 T-Handle 296
Protective Modules 185 Unit Door Nameplates 296
Push Buttons 183 Unit Ground Stab 295
Selector Switch 183
Shunt Trip 190
Spanish Legend Plates 190
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws 190
Surge Suppressor 188
T-Handle 190
Unit Door Nameplates 190
Unit Ground Stab 188
Unit Load Connector 188
Unwired Control Relay 188

Index
Options for Space Saving NEMA Starter Push Buttons on Contactors and Starters,
Units Metering, Mains and Feeders,
Additional Unit Space 167 Lighting and Power Panels, and
Auxiliary Contacts 168 Transformer Units 141
Control Circuit Fuse 167
Control Circuit Transformer 165
Control Wire Markers 168
DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary 165 R
E1 Plus Electronic Overload Relay 165 Round DeviceNet Cable with Connectors
Elapsed Time Meter 167 318
Export Packing Below Deck 168
French Legend Plates 168
Grounded Unit Door 167
Omit Wiring 167 S
Pilot Lights 164 Section Modification
Push Buttons 164
Push Buttons and Selector Switch 164 SC-II and PE-II 30, 34, 35, 36
Selector Switch 164 Section Nameplate Data 23
Spanish Legend Plates 168 SecureConnect technology 45, 49
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws 168 Seismic Applications 15
Surge Suppressor 167 Selector Switch on Combination Soft
T-Handles 168
Unit Door Nameplate 168 Starter Controller Units 183
Unit Ground Stab 167 Selector Switch on Contactors and
Unit Load Connector 167 Starters, Metering, Mains and
Unwired Control Relay 167 Feeders, Lighting and Power
Outgoing Lug Compartments 78 Panels, and Transformer Units
141
Serial Number Information 20
P series letter changes 24
Parts Illustrations Series Letter Information 20
Typical 15" Deep Section Construction Service Conditions 11
29
Pilot Lights on Combination Soft Starter Short Circuit Current Ratings for
Controller Units 184 Combination Fusible Disconnect
Pilot Lights on Contactors and Starters, Units 332
Metering, Mains and Feeders, Short Circuit Current Ratings for
Lighting and Power Panels, and Combination Soft Starter
Transformer Units 164 Controller Units (SMCs) 333
Plug-In Unit Retrofit Kit 314 Short Circuit Current Ratings for
Power Supply on Marshalling Panels and Combination Variable
Programmable Controllers 295 Frequency AC Motor Drive Units
Power System 346 334
Power Terminal Blocks on Contactors and Short Circuit Current Ratings for
Starters, Metering, Mains and Programmable Controllers 334
Feeders, Lighting and Power Shunt Trip on Combination Soft Starter
Panels, and Transformer Units Controller Units 190
158 Shunt Trip on Contactors and Starters,
Primary Voltage Code for Bulletins 2195, Metering, Mains and Feeders,
2196, and 2197 298 Lighting and Power Panels, and
Protective Caps 36 Transformer Units 159
Protective Modules on Combination Soft Shutters 36
Starter Controller Units 185 Soft Starter Controller (SMC) Units 171
Publication Overview 9 Software, IntelliCENTER 41
Pull-Apart Terminal Bocks 314 Space Heater Factory Installed in MCC 36
Pullbox 307 Space Heater Kit 308
Push Buttons and Selector Switch on Space Saving NEMA Bulletin 2106 and 2107,
Contactors and Starters, Full Voltage Reversing Starters
Metering, Mains and Feeders, (FVR) 57
Lighting and Power Panels, and Space Saving NEMA Bulletin 2112 and 2113,
Transformer Units 141 Full Voltage Non-Reversing
Push Buttons on Combination Soft Starter Starters (FVNR) 64
Controller Units 183 Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws 313

Index
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws on Unit Door Nameplates on Contactors and

Combination Soft Starter Starters, Metering, Mains and
Controller Units 190 Feeders, Lighting and Power
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws on Panels, and Transformer Units
Contactors and Starters, 161
Metering, Mains and Feeders, Unit Door Nameplates on Marshalling
Lighting and Power Panels, and Panels and Programmable
Transformer Units 161 Controllers 296
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws on Unit Ground Stab on Combination Soft
Marshalling Panels and Starter Controller Units 188
Programmable Controllers 296 Unit Ground Stab on Contactors and
Storage Conditions 11 Starters, Metering, Mains and
Suffix Letter Designation Feeders, Lighting and Power
Circuit Breaker 27 Panels, and Transformer Units
Surge Protective Device Unit 140 152
Surge Suppressor on Combination Soft Unit Ground Stab on Marshalling Panels
Starter Controller Units 188 and Programmable Controllers
Surge Suppressor on Contactors and 295
Starters, Metering, Mains and Unit Insert Extension Kit 314
Feeders, Lighting and Power Unit Insert, Empty 133
Panels, and Transformer Units Unit Isolating Barriers 36, 310
150 unit label 23
Unit Load Connector on Combination Soft
Starter Controller Units 188
T Unit Load Connector on Contactors and
T-Handle 36 Starters, Metering, Mains and
T-Handle on Combination Soft Starter Feeders, Lighting and Power
Controller Units 190 Panels, and Transformer Units
T-Handle on Contactors and Starters, 152
Metering, Mains and Feeders, Unit Operating Handle Extender 308
Lighting and Power Panels, and Unit Support Pan 313
Transformer Units 158 Units and Sections
T-Handle on Marshalling Panels and Series Lettering 26
Programmable Controllers 296 Unwired Control Relay on Combination
Thermistor Protection Relay on Soft Starter Controller Units 188
Contactors and Starters, Unwired Control Relay on Contactors and
Metering, Mains and Feeders, Starters, Metering, Mains and
Lighting and Power Panels, and Feeders, Lighting and Power
Transformer Units 152 Panels, and Transformer Units
time duration arc fault containment 43 155
Top Horizontal Wireway Pan 307 Unwired Pull-Apart Terminal Blocks on
Touch-Up Paint 309 Contactors and Starters,
Trip Current for Bulletin 2103L 303 Metering, Mains and Feeders,
Type 2 Protection 16 Lighting and Power Panels, and
Transformer Units 160
Unwired Timer Auxiliary on Contactors and
U Starters, Metering, Mains and
UL/cUL/CSA Marking 12 Feeders, Lighting and Power
Unit Ammeter on Contactors and Starters, Panels, and Transformer Units
Metering, Mains and Feeders, 152
Lighting and Power Panels, and
Unit Door Grounding Kit 314 V
Unit Door Nameplates 313 Vertical Ground Bus 34
Unit Door Nameplates on Combination Soft Vertical Ground Bus Kit 309
Starter Controller Units 190 Vertical Sections 29
Vertical Unit Load Ground Bus 34
Vertical Unit Load Ground Bus Kit 309
Vertical Wireway Tie Bar 309

Index
W
Weights of CENTERLINE Motor Control
Center Sections 326, 327
Wire Markers, Control 159, 296
Wiring Class 12
Wiring Diagram Holder Kit 309
Wiring on Combination Soft Starter
Controller Units 188
Wiring on Contactors and Starters,
Metering, Mains and Feeders,
Lighting and Power Panels, and
Wiring Type 13

Index
Notes:

Rockwell Automation Support
Use these resources to access support information.
Technical Support Center Find help with how-to videos, FAQs, chat, user forums, and product notification updates. rok.auto/support
Knowledgebase Access Knowledgebase articles rok.auto/knowledgebase
Local Technical Support Phone Numbers Locate the telephone number for your country. rok.auto/phonesupport
Literature Library Find installation instructions, manuals, brochures, and technical data publications. rok.auto/literature
Product Compatibility and Download Center Get help determining how products interact, check features and capabilities, and find
rok.auto/pcdc
(PCDC) associated firmware.
Documentation Feedback
Your comments help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve our content, complete the
form at rok.auto/docfeedback.
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
At the end of life, this equipment should be collected separately

from any unsorted municipal waste.
Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at rok.auto/pec.
Accu-Stop, Allen-Bradley, ArcShield, CENTERLINE, ControlLogix, E1 Plus, E300, expanding human possibility, IntelliCENTER, PowerControl Builder, PowerFlex, PowerMonitor,, Rockwell
Automation, Rockwell Software, RSNetworx, RSView, SecureConnect, SMC-3, SMC Flex, and Stratix are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
ControlNet, DeviceNet, and EtherNet/IP are trademarks of ODVA, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş. Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenkÖy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400 EEE YÖnetmeliğine Uygundur
Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020

Supersedes Publication 2100-CA004D-EN-P - October 2018 Copyright © 2020 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.

CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers: Program Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers: Program Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers: Program Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CENTERLINE 2100 Motor

You can view or download publications at rok.auto/literature.

Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020 2

Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020 3

4 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020

Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020 5

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020

UL/C-UL/CSA Short Circuit Ratings for Combination Soft

Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020 7

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020

What is New in this Publication

Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020 9

Other Resource Publications for CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers

Contact your Allen-Bradley distributor, Rockwell Automation sales representative, or

CENTERLINE 2100 MCC Applications

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020

Service and Storage Conditions

Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020 11

ISO 9001 Certification

American Bureau of Shipping (ABS)

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020

NEMA/IEC Enclosure Comparison

Table 2 - Degree of Protection Comparison

NEMA Enclosure Type Descriptions

Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020 13

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020

Delivery Program Indications

Table 3 - Delivery Program

Compliance Documents Compliance Level

Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020 15

Intelligent Motor Control Products

See NEC Article 725 for more detailed information.

Standard Efficiency, High Efficiency, and Special Motor Applications

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020

For assembled motor control centers, the following documentation is supplied:

Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020 17

Documentation is supplied on a per order basis.

Order and Documentation Cycle

Figure 1 - Order and Documentation Cycle

Table 4 - Documentation Available

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020

CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs Support

CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs with IntelliCENTER Technology Support

Select Option 3, then enter code 903 IntelliCENTER Technology support.

General Terms and Conditions of Sale

Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020 19

Serial Number and Series Letter Information

Table 5 - Serial Number and Series Letter

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020

Table 5 - Serial Number and Series Letter (continued)

(1) Change in Factory Order Number and Serial Number.

Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020 21

Series Identification for Sections

Table 6 - Series Identification for Sections

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020

Section Nameplate Data

Unit Label Data

Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-CA004E-EN-P - January 2020 23

Series Identification for Units